MACHINE DESIGN AND SHOP A. less side rake C.

each slide valve is

PRACTICE PART 1-18 B. more side rake controlled by its own
C. more top rake piston rod
D. no side rake D. one slide valve operates
1. Chuck used on turret lathe is the other slide valve
A. collet chuck 7. On xx heavy pipe the extra
B. four jaw self centering metal is added in the 13. The jerky operation of a
chuck A. outside reciprocating pump may be
C. Magnetic Chuck B. Inside caused by
D. Three Jaw independent C. half on the inside, half on A. small leaks in the suction
chuck the outside line
D. three quarters on the B. suction valve only
2. Angle plate is used for outside one quarter on partially open
A. cutting gears in a shaper the inside C. dirty suction valve
B. cutting gears in a milling D. any of these
C. cutting tapers in a lathe 8. A sine bar can not be used
D. fixing job cut angles is without a/an 14. A machine tool used to
grinder A. angle gage produce a variety of surface
B. micrometer of surfaces by using a circular
3. For machining the flange of C. slip gage type cutter with multiple
go elbow on a lathe, which of D. vernier caliper teeth called
the following device is used? A. broaching machine
A. Angle plate 9. Valve seats are usually B. grinding
B. Catch Plate A. screwed in C. lathe machine
C. Face Plate B. dropped in D. milling machine
D. Lathe plate C. pressure in
D. A or C 15. It is used in the production of
4. The operation of finishing a the flat surface on pieces two
drilled hole to the correct size 10. When grinding in valves the large or too heavy to hold in a
is known as disc is secured to the stem by: shaper
A. counting boring A. inserting a cotter pin A. Grinder
B. counter sinking B. placing emery cloth B. Planer
C. Reaming between stem and disc C. Shaper
D. spot facing C. welding D. Shaver
D. A or B
5. Carbon steel drill should be 16. Group of thin steel strips used
operated at 11. A fresh-water tank is located for measuring clearances.
A. speed greater than that at the top. What will the A. Tachometer
when using a high speed pressure on it outlet in the B. Micrometer
drill engine room 50° below the C. Feeler gage
B. speed less than that tank? D. Caliper
when using a high speed A. 20 pai
drill B. 21.7 psi 17. Kind of chuck, which should
C. the different speed as C. 23 psi not be used where accuracy
that when using high D. 25 psi desired called
speed drill A. collet chuck
D. the same speed as that 12. In a duplex reciprocating B. four jaw shuck
when using a high speed pump: C. magnetic chuck
drill A. the slide valve for the D. universal chuck
one cylinder is controlled
6. When cutting material in a in the piston of the other 18. The process used to retard
lathe the harder the material cylinder compression trust on iron
being cut the tool bit should B. both slide valves operate pipe and fitting is called:
have simultaneously A. trimming
 B. soldering D. any of these 31. A machine tool which is very
C. Galvanizing similar to a shaper except the
D. Sulphurizing 24. Before installing a new flange ram reciprocals vertically
gasket be sure that the rather that horizontally
19. The system used for breaking A. flange faces are painted A. Lathe
scale from the evaporator B. isolating valves are open B. Grinder
coils while the evaporator is C. flange faces are C. Planer
in operation is called: absolutely clean D. Slotter
A. recirculating D. Old gasket is in place
B. blowing-down 32. The operation of machining
C. cracking-off 25. What is a standard wire gage the end of a work piece to
D. dumping A. #10 larger make a square with the axis.
B. #25 is smaller than #20 A. Buffing
20. The coils in the evaporator C. # 1 is smaller than #2 B. Honing
are attached to the headers D. # 30 is larger than #25 C. Lapping
by: D. Squaring
A. pipe nipples 26. Which of the following tools
B. union-type fitting would be most useful when 33. The operation of enlarging a
C. welding taking leads on bearings hole by means of an
D. bolted flanges A. Dividers adjustable cutting tool with
B. B.outside calipers only one cutting edge:
21. When distilling salt water the C. Micrometer A. Boring
cooling- water discharge from D. center gage B. Broaching
the distiller is fed back to the C. Drilling
evaporator as feedwater: 27. The wrench size for a nut is: D. Milling
A. to cut down on the A. 1-1/4
amount of cooling water B. 1-1/2 34. It is used to true and align
needed C. ¾ machine tools fixtures and
B. to prevent n excess D. D.10/24 works is at and inspect size
amount of cooling water trueness of finished work and
from being discharge to 28. Which of the following would to compare measurements
the bilges cause hot bearings? either heights or depths or
C. to supply hot water to A. Improper oil many other measurements.
the evaporator for more B. Dirt in oil A. Dial Gage
economical operation C. Improper alignment B. Dial Indicator
D. none of these D. All of these C. Tachometer
D. Speedometer
22. An “offset” in pipe fitting 29. Melting point of Babbit is
refers to approximately 35. A tool used for measuring
A. a cut-off running at right A. 1000 deg F diameters
angles to the original B. 650 deg. F A. Caliper
piping C. 750 deg. F B. Manometer
B. two pipes running D. 500 deg. F C. Tachometer
parallel to each other D. Pyrometer
C. a bend in the pipe 30. What is pouring Babbit in:
D. two sizes of pipe in the A. can be poured in several 36. A process of forming metals
same run pourings by the use of dies after the
B. Must be poured all at one metal is forced to its plastic
23. if a piston-type flush valve is time range.
not operating properly, the C. Can be done at intervals A. Casting
most likely cause would be: D. must be done in cool B. Forging
A. a plugged by-pass hole place C. Rolling
B. a cracked diaphragm D. Turning
C. a stuck pilot valve
37. Which of the following does A. Dividing head 49. Test sometimes referred to as
not have to be lubricated B. Indexing upsetting test called
when drilling? C. Slotter A. Bend
A. Steel D. Universal chuck B. Crush
B. Brass C. Flange
C. Monel 45. Recommended best cutting D. Flaring
D. Tool Steel angle of drill for work on steel
or cast iron is____degrees 50. Valve stem packing is
38. The tool to use when cutting A. 48 measured from thin
a hole in the side of a round B. 50 A. O.D of the valve stem to
piece of metal is called a: C. 59 the bottom of the
A. Vine D. 63 packing gland
B. Jaw holder B. Top of the packing gland
C. “V” bloc 46. What is the common shop to the bottom of the
D. Chuck practice to prevent soldering gland
from running away from C. O.D of the valve stem to
39. When measuring a drill for surface to be joined? the ID of the packing box
size measure across the A. Surround the work with D. I.D of the valve stem to
A. Margin clay the to the bottom of the
B. Flutes B. Introduce around the gland
C. shank work rolled wet cloth
D. Point C. Put asbestos sheeting 51. Tool used to cut threads on
around the work pipe is called
40. N.C: stands for D. All of these A. pipe tool
A. neutral cut B. pipe stock
B. national coarse 47. A machinery operation where C. pipe vise
C. National cut by done with the work D. pipe cutter
D. Not center accurately fastened has a
reciprocating motion and the 52. The pipe fitting which has two
41. NF stands for: tool head is stationary is opening and provides a turn
A. A .national file called: of go deg. is called
B. national fine A. Planning A. an elbow
C. Neutral file B. reaming B. a toe
D. Not found C. Shaping C. a coupling
D. Turning D. a union
42. The tool used in precision
work to smooth or enlarge 48. What is the difference 53. A plug cock offers:
holes is called a between the shaper and a A. more resistance to flow
A. round out planer? than a globe valve
B. drift pin A. The shaper can perform B. the same resistance to
C. Reamer slotting operation while flow as a globe valve
D. Protractor the planer cannot C. less resistance to flow
B. The shaper handles large than a globe valve
43. Which of the following chisels pieces while the planer D. the same resistance to
would be used for cutting oil handles only small pieces flow as a angle valve
grooves? C. The tool of the shaper
A. Diamond-point chisel moves while the planer 54. The most common flux to use
B. Cold chisel is stationary when soldering brass, copper
C. Round-nose chisel D. The tool of the shaper or tin is
D. Hot chisel moves in reciprocating A. hallow
motion while the tool in B. Rosin
44. A mechanism, which usually the planer moves in C. borax
does the indexing in a rotary motion D. salt ammonia
machine tool is called
55. One turn of the screw on a A. chuck taper A. Square
micrometer moves the B. Morse taper B. American national
spindle C. tapered key C. Double Flute
A. .25 D. tong D. 60 deg. Sharp V
B. .205
C. .0205 62. Before drilling a hole in a 69. When turning a piece of
D. .2005 piece of metal. It should be round metal in a lathe, the
A. mark with chalk front clearance should be
56. The process used to retard B. center-punch smaller for:
corrosion on iron pipe is C. scribed A. large-diameter cutting
called D. protracted B. small-diameter cutting
A. soldering C. cutting angles
B. annealing 63. A tap or die marked 4-20 D. none of these
C. tempering indicates
D. Galvanizing A. ¼ radius-20 cm. long 70. When cutting material in a
B. ¼ radian-20 threads per lathe, the harder the material
57. Which of the following tools in. being cut, the tool bit should
does not belong to the C. ¼ diameter-20 threads have
group? per in. A. more side rake
A. Divides D. ¼ turn-20 times B. less side rake
B. Double VEE block C. more top rake
C. Caliper 64. After a piece of piece of pipe D. no side rake
D. Trammel has been cut the hole is
cleaned out with a 71. Knurling is done to
58. In machine shop had forging A. piper reamer A. smooth material
operation of lengthening a B. pipe cleaner B. polish material
piece of stock while reducing C. pipe taper C. roughen material
the cross-sectional area of D. hole cleaner D. sharpen material
work is called:
A. bloating 65. The tool used for cutting pipe 72. Removing the sharp edges
B. draining threads is called a from a piece of stock is
C. spreading A. pipe cutter referred to as
D. Upsetting B. pipe stock and die A. knurling
C. pipe threader B. Chamfering
59. Which of the following D. pipe ratcher cutter C. planning
services is not considered to D. turning
be a work of a machinist? 66. The tool used when working
A. grinding with larger sizes of pipe is 73. Carbon steel drills should be
B. Honing called a operated at:
C. Overhauling A. chain pipe wrench A. speeds greater than that
D. Reboring B. chain tongs when using a high-speed
C. chain holder drill
60. Common defects D. A or B B. speeds less than that
encountered in the foundry when using a high- speed
shop steel casting operation 67. The tool used when preparing drill
and also in welding practices to put fittings on copper C. the same speed as that
A. Blow/ pin holes tubing is called a when using a high-speed
B. Cold shot A. tube spreader drill
C. Cracks B. flaring tool D. none of these
D. Parting line C. tube retarder
D. tube countersink 74. When extreme outer corners
61. Lathe operator to remove the of the cutting edges of a drill
taper shank from the taper 68. Which of the following is not was away too rapidly. It is an
hole drift. It is also called a standard thread form? indication of
 A. not enough speed straight or tapered holes B. 50 deg.
B. too much rake angle already drilled or bored C. 59 deg.
C. too high speed A. Peering D. 65 deg.
D. B or C B. Reamer
C. Swaging 87. Which of the following gives
75. It is an operation of stretching D. Tapping greater hardness, cutting
or spreading over the metal toughness and dine grain
by means of the plane of the 81. If the angle on a drill is less structure?
hammer than 59 deg: A. Chromium
A. Bending A. the drill will make a large B. Nickel
B. Peening hole C. Tungsten
C. Swaging B. the drill will make a D. Vanadium
D. Upsetting smaller hole
C. the hole will take longer 88. It is a process to impact
76. The good quality of a to drill and more power is maximum hardness to the
measuring tool required to drive the drill steel part
A. should be easy to handle D. the drill will not center A. Annealing
B. should be easy to read properly B. Hardening
C. should be wear C. Normalizing
resistance 82. Soda added to water is used D. Tempering
D. All of these for cooling instead of plain
water because: 89. The size by which it is referred
77. The flatness of surface can be A. it reduces the amount of to as a matter of convenience
checked heat generated called:
A. by using straight edge B. it improves the finish A. actual size
B. by using surface plate C. it overcome rusting B. basic size
C. by using dial test D. all of these C. effective size
indicator D. nominal size
D. all of these 83. If a drill speed is too great, it
will 90. The relation between two
78. A holding device which is A. cut faster mating parts with reference
used to hold or grip work B. lose its temper to ease the assembly is called
piece. While filling chipping C. cut slower A. allowance
or any other bench work or D. not cut B. clearance
while machining or drilling C. Tolerance
them 84. The lip clearance of a drill D. Fits
A. Clamp should be approximately
B. grid A. 20 deg. - 25 deg. 91. It is an operation of finishing
C. pressed B. 5 deg. -10 deg. cylindrical surfaces to a fine
D. Vise C. 12 deg. - 15 deg. degree of accuracy buy
D. 15 deg. - 20 deg. means of abrasive sticks
79. A multi pointed hand A. Honing
anything tool used to 85. If the cutting edges of a drill B. Lapping
removed material from are cut at different angles: C. Planing
metallic and non- metallic A. the drill will not cut D. Shaping
work pieces to match with B. the hole will be larger
drawing. Shape and size. than the drill 92. It is device, which hold the job
A. Cold Chisel C. the hole will be smaller in position and guide the
B. File than the drill cutting tool.
C. Hacksaw D. none of these A. clamp
D. Hammer B. grip
86. The correct cutting angle on a C. Jig
80. A side-cutting tool used for drill for ordinary work is D. vise
accurately finishing the A. 45 deg.
93. In referring to threads, C. 1/16” larger in diameter 102. The cutting angle on a drill
“pitch” is per inch diameter of for drilling mild steel should
A. the distance of the full cylinder be:
length of the thread D. .005” larger in diameter A. 39 deg.
B. the distance from a point per inch diameter of B. 49 deg
on one thread to a cylinder C. 59 deg
corresponding point on D. 69 deg
the next thread 97. The gap clearance for new
measured parallel to the piston rings for steam pumps 103. A device used to fix two or
axis should be approximately more parts
C. the distance from the top A. .003” for each inch A. clamp
of one thread to the diameter of cylinder B. Fastener
bottom of the next B. .001” for each inch C. Fixtures
thread diameter of cylinder D. Jigs
D. the distance from the C. .010” for each inch
bottom of a head on a diameter of cylinder 104. A machine element inserted
bolt to the first thread D. .050” for each inch parallel to the axis of a shaft
diameter of cylinder A. cutter
94. A tool bit for cutting an B. fastener
American National thread 98. What does 3/8-16 mean to C. Key
should be ground with a you? D. Reamer
A. 45 deg. angle A. 16 pieces, 3/8” long
B. 90 deg. angle B. gear with 16 teeth and 105. A machine element inserted
C. 60 deg. angle a 3/8” arbor hole at right angle to the axis of
D. 30 deg. Angle C. 3/8’ square, 16” long shaft is known as
D. 3/8” diameter 16 A. clamp
95. An approximate safe rule for threads per inch B. Cutter
cutting new piston rings for C. Fastener
steam pumps is to make the 99. When using a drill press the D. Key
ring. work should Be held with
A. .002” between piston A. the hand 106. The process of extracting iron
and cylindrical for each B. A gloved hand in a blast furnace is called
inch diameter of piston C. A vise or clamp A. casting
B. .001” between piston D. Pliers B. manufacturing
and cylinder for each C. Smelting
inch diameter 100. Tapered shanks are used on D. Sintering
C. .010 between piston large drill presses so that:
and cylinder for each A. The drill can be 107. Which of the following is a
inch diameter of piston centered more easily product of blast furnace?
D. .0001” between piston B. The drill can be easily A. cast iron
and cylinder for each forced out of the sleeve B. gray iron
inch diameter of piston with a drift C. pig iron
C. The shank will not turn D. wrought iron
96. An approximate safe rule for when cutting
cutting new piston rings for D. The shank can be 108. A product of paddling
steam pumps is to make the reground when worn furnace which contains less
ring than 0.104 carbon, is called
A. 1/32” larger in diameter 101. Which of the following is not A. Cast iron
per inch diameter of a common drill shank? B. gray cast iron
cylinder A. straight C. Pig iron
B. 1/16” larger in diameter B. taper D. Wrought iron
than that of the cylinder C. Fluted
D. Bit 109. Which of the following is a
property of wrought iron?
 A. Brittle A. drilling a center in an D. prick punch
B. can not be forged odd-shaped piece of
C. Can be easily cast into metal 121. Reason why cast iron
different shapes B. drilling and selected for the manufacture
D. Ductile countersinking with of surface of surface plate
one tool A. It is cheaper
110. A piece of stock 8” long is 4” C. centering with one tool B. it is easy for machinery
diameter on one end and 1” and drilling with C. It has less wear and tear
diameter on the other end. another D. All of these
The taper per foot is: D. dritting a center in a
A. 4” piece of stock in a drill 122. The common measuring
B. 4-1/2” press tools are
C. 4-1/4” A. micrometer
D. 4-1/16” 116. The type and number of B. steel rule
111. A piece of stock 8” long is 3” bearings to be used for C. Vernier caliper
diameter at the end and 1-5 spindles of machine tool D. all of these
diameter at the other end. depend on
The taper per inch is A. type of spindle 123. Which of the following is not
A. ½” B. type of machine tool a kind of mandrel?
B. ¼” C. load on the ring A. Contraction
C. 3/16” D. Load on the bearing B. Expanded
D. 5/16” C. Extended
117. Which of the following has its D. Taper
112. A piece of stock 6” Long is 2” angle 30 and is used for
diameter at one end and is dotting after marking the 124. An act of cutting out a piece
cut with a taper of “ to the lines on general works? of metal at a desired shape
foot. The diameter of the A. center punch and size is known as
smaller end will be: B. dot punch A. Blanking
A. 1- ½’ C. hollow punch B. Broaching
B. 1- ¾’ D. Prick punch C. Dinking
C. 1- ¼’ D. Slitting
D. 2” 118. Which of the following has its
angle 60 and is used for 125. Safety features that must be
113. If a piston ring is to be made dotting after marking the placed and maintained at
1/64” Larger in diameter per lines on general works? machine black smith welding
inch diameter of the cylinder A. center punch and foundry shops called
which it is to fit, the required B. dot punch A. safety goggles
diameter for a piston ring to C. hollow punch B. safety notices
fit an 8” cylinder will be: D. prick punch C. safety notices in
A. 8- ¼ “ markers/boards
B. 8-1/8” 119. Which of the following has its D. Walkway shops
C. 8-3/16” angle go and is used to give
D. 8-5/32” deep marks for the location of 126. In cutting tool the cutting end
drill? can also be generally called
114. When cutting. A drill will A. center punch A. back rake
“squeal” due to: B. dot punch B. end cutting edge
A. drill being ground C. hollow punch C. Nose
improperly D. prick punch D. Side rake
B. drill being too hot
C. Insufficient lubrication 120. It is used on soft metals and 127. A machine shop equipment
D. Any of these non- metals for making holes that can flatter horizontally,
A. center punch vertically or angular plane
115. “Center drilling” is the B. dot punch called
operation of: C. hollow punch A. drill machine
 B. power saw D. Insulated C. semi-manual lathe
C. shaper machine D. Turret lathe
D. welding machine 134. To check the speed of a
motor or other rotary 141. Device used to measure
128. Which of the following is an machine, one would accurately speed called
unsafe condition in operating A. speed indicator A. dial gage
a lathe machine? B. micrometer B. dial indicator
A. operating with safety C. Tachometer C. speedometer
gloves D. A or C D. Tachometer
B. wearing a canvass
apron 135. It is the best instrument for 142. A pipe wrench (Stilleon) is
C. wearing denim measuring a thousandth of an designed for use on
pants/safety shoes inch A. hexagonal objects
D. Wearing safety A. Caliper B. round objects
goggles/hearing aid B. Micrometer C. square objects
C. Pyrometer D. flat objects
129. The instrument used to D. Tachometer
remove old packing from 143. Pipe is measured by:
packing glands and stuffing 136. What tool will be used in A. Inside diameter
boxes are called: making wood pattern in the B. outside diameter
A. Packing tools foundry shop? C. Thickness of wall
B. Packing bits A. Sand saw D. Wire gage
C. gland box cleaners B. Drill machine
D. Packing screws C. Hammer 144. Tubing is measured by
D. Saw and chisel A. inside diameter
130. When working on bearing B. outside diameter
and checking for high spots, it 137. Machine tool used for laying C. Thickness of wall
is customary to apply: straight lines on metal D. Wire gage
A. white lead surfaces made of sharp tool
B. red lead steel is called 145. “Water Hammer” is caused by
C. Dykem blue A. divider A. hitting water pipe with
D. Prussian blue B. hermaphrodite caliper hammer
C. Plain scriber B. too much water in pipe
131. If you wanted to check the D. Hammer system
face of a pump slide valve or C. water in steam line
other flat-face valve you 138. A lathe machine threading D. steam in water line
would check for trueness on a mechanism is called
A. flat board A. Anvil 146. Insulation is used on piping to
B. surface plate B. changed stud gear A. held in heat
C. piece of glass C. Reverse gear and lever B. held in cold
D. bearing plate D. Spindle gear C. cut down heat losses
D. steam in water line
132. To keep a metal clean while 139. Which of the following is not
soldering. One would use a used to resemble the shape 147. It is a machine used for the
A. flax of tool bit? testing of very thin steal or
B. torch A. center cut surface layers
C. Flux B. round nose A. Charpy test
D. Insulated C. Square nose B. Description test
D. Thread cutting C. Izod test
133. Before splicing electric wires, D. Rockwell test
they should be: 140. A lathe with multiple cutting
A. Tinned stations called 148. It is a test for pipe used for
B. cleaned and tinned A. engine lathe calling in sizes 2 inches
C. Soldered B. manual lathe A. Bend
 B. Crush C. taper, plug and bottom 162. Trimming is a process
C. Flange D. short, medium and long associated with
D. Flaring A. electroplating
156. Which of the following taps B. Forging
149. Milling machine accessories should be used to start a C. machining of metals
are used to hold milling cutter thread? D. Press work
in the milling machine called A. plug
A. milling machine arbors B. short 163. A twist drill is specified by
B. milling machine size C. bottom A. Its diameter and lip
C. spindle-nose tooling D. Taper angle
D. Vertical milling B. It shank and diameter
attachment 157. When preparing to tap a hole, C. Shank material and
the size of the drill will be diameter
150. An important accessories of A. equal to the size of the D. Shank material and
milling machine: tap flute size
A. Cutters B. larger than the size of
B. milling machine vise the tap 164. The usual value of helix angle
C. ram C. smaller than the size of of a drill
D. Vertical milling the tap A. 30°
attachment D. none of these B. 60°
C. 110°
151. The machine, which can 158. Pipe taps are: D. 120°
flatter surface on horizontal A. the same size from end
vertical or angular plane to end 165. The helix angle on a high-
A. drilling machine B. not fluted speed steel twist drill for
B. lathe machine C. Tapered drilling cast iron if of the order
C. power saw D. not hardened of
D. shaper machine A. 12-22
159. When preparing to tap a hole B. 24-32
152. Which of the following is not for a pipe fitting the size of C. 35-40
part on a Lathe machine? the drill will be D. 40-45
A. carriage A. larger than the tap size
B. Fan B. equal to the size of the 166. Wiping is the process of
C. headstock tap A. applying flux during
D. tail stock C. smaller than the tap welding process
size B. cleaning the welded
153. Which tools does not belong D. none of these surface after the
to the group? welding operation is
A. adjustable wrench 160. A machine tool used to out over
B. feeler gage metal parts a lift, medium and C. connecting load pipes
C. torque wrench large section using a by soldering alloy
D. vice grip reciprocating hacksaw blade. D. low temperature
A. planer welding
154. The tool used to cut threads B. power saw
in a hole is called a C. shaper 167. Which of the following is not
A. top D. tool grinder a cut of file?
B. Tap A. smooth
C. bit 161. A cold chisel is made of B. second cut
D. reamer A. Cast iron C. half-round
B. German silver D. bastard
155. Hand taps are provided in C. High carbon steel
sets of three called: D. High speed steel 168. The tool used for cleaning
A. taper, plug and end files is called a
B. short, taper and bottom A. file cleaner
 B. file card C. more heat cutting tool to obtain a very
C. file oilstone D. A and C smooth finish
D. scraper A. Broaching machine
175. Lead is used in solder because B. Milling Machine
169. Which of the following is the A. It has a high melting C. Planer
smallest size drill? point. D. Tool Grinder
A. # 80 B. It has a low melting
B. # 60 point 182. A machine too used
C. # 1 C. it is cheap principally to machine flat or
D. # 0 D. B and C plane surfaces with a single
pointed tool
170. Which of the following is the 176. The name of the taper shank A. Drill
largest size drill? used on drills is B. Planer
A. A A. Miller C. Power Saw
B. X B. Morse D. Shaper
C. Z C. Starret
D. XX D. Stanley 183. A tool with hardened steel
point used for scribing or
171. The size of drill is stamped on 177. The higher the melting point laying of distances
the of the solder, the: A. Divider
A. point A. weaker the solder joint B. Hermaphrodite
B. Shank B. softer the solder joint C. Plain scriber
C. margin C. Stronger the solder D. Trammel
D. Flute joint
D. Harder the solder joint 184. The cylinder of piston type
172. Which of the following safety steam engine are counter-
precautions should be 178. Which of the following is not bored to:
followed when pouring part of the headstock? A. give a larger head
Babbitt? A. Anvil clearance
A. operator must wear B. Back pressure B. prevent piston rings
goggles C. Motor from wearing a groove
B. the surface to be D. Spindle in the cylinder at the
babbitted must be free end of the stroke
of moisture 179. A machining operation C. give a larger volumetric
C. the surface to be whereby the tool reciprocates clearance
babbitted must be and the feed is stationary. D. Prevent piston rings
clean A. Planing from slipping on the
D. all of these B. Reaming piston
C. Shaping
173. Which of the following safety D. Turning 185. When installing packing in a
precaution should be packing box
followed when renewing a 180. The kind of center, which is A. leave one old turn at
flange gasket? being attached and meshed the bottom of the
A. drain the line to the tailstock spindle, which packing box
thoroughly is also static while the work is B. remove one turn and
B. isolate the section to be rotating is know as install one new tum of
worked on A. dead center packing
C. tie down isolation B. Focal center C. leave sufficient end
valves C. Live center clearance on each turn
D. all of these D. Work center to allow for expansion
D. place and cuts directly
174. Brazing requires: 181. A machine tool in which an in line with each other
A. hard solder abrasive wheel is used as a
B. soft solder
186. An instrument consisting of a C. machining 198. A hacksaw blade with 32 TPI
wet-and dry-bulb D. shrinkage is suited for cutting.
thermometer (used in air A. small tubing
conditioning) is called a 193. Feeler gage are used for B. conduct
A. hygrometer measuring the C. sheet metal under 18
B. pyrometer A. clearance between gage
C. psychrometer mating parts D. any of these
D. A or C B. pitch of screw threads
C. radius of curvature 199. For filing lead or Babbitt, use
187. Shoot motal of # 18 gage is D. thickness of plates a
heavier than A. vixen file
A. 12 gage 194. The hacksaw blade should be B. mill file
B. 14 gage placed in the frame with: C. sheet metal under 18
C. 22 gage A. the teeth pointing gage
D. 16 gage forward D. any of these
B. the teeth pointing
188. Shims are used to: backward 200. It moves on the lathe bed
A. separate fresh- and C. one end looser than the with cutting tool according to
salt-water lines other end the rotation of lead screw or
B. Replace fuses D. the teeth facing in any by hand traversing wheel
C. adjust cylinder liners direction A. apron
D. adjust bearing B. compound rest
clearances 195. When cutting a long thin C. mandrel
piece of metal: D. Saddle
189. Quick return motion is used A. turn the blade upside
in a down the frame 201. It acts the carriage or
A. drilling machine B. turn the blade at right compound rest through the
B. Grinder angles to the frame mechanism lifted inside the
C. Lathe C. use a blade with fewer apron
D. Shaper teeth per inch A. Apron
D. set the blade in the B. compound rest
190. The operation of enlarging a frame with the teeth C. mandrel
hole is called facing you D. saddle
A. Boring 202. It gives the cutting tool
B. counter sinking 196. A hacksaw blade with 18 longitudinal feed, cross feed
C. drilling teeth per inch is best suited or carriers
D. reaming for cutting A. Angular feed
A. solid stock B. Apron
191. In up cut milling the work B. cast iron C. Compound rest
piece is fed C. aluminum D. Saddle
A. against the rotating D. any of these
cutter 203. The center, which is fitted in
B. at an angle of 60 to the 197. A coolant is usually used head stock spindle, called
cutter when cutting material in a A. above center
C. at right angle to the power hacksaw to B. Below center
cutter A. absorb the heat of C. Dead center
D. in the direction of the friction D. Live center
cutter B. prevent the blade from
overheating 204. A center which is fitted in tail
192. Rapping allowance is C. prevent the blade from stock spindle called
provided on a patter to take losing its temper A. above center
care of D. all of these B. below center
A. distortion C. dead center
B. easy withdrawal D. Live center
 perpendicular to the 218. When the dial on the cross-
205. Which of the following gives longitudinal axis feed is turned.010” you
shearing action? A. end relief angle remove from diameter of the
A. front clearance B. side cutting edge angle stock being cut
B. side clearance C. Side rake angle A. .010
C. slide rake D. Side relief edge angle B. .020
D. Top rake C. .005
213. It is used for holding straight D. .015
206. Which of the ff. information is shank drills in the spindle to
necessary when ordering a the machine when drilling 219. The flexible type hacksaw
file? A. chuck key blade is best suited for work
A. size (length) B. drill chuck on
B. shape C. floating holder A. channel iron
C. type of teeth D. magic chuck B. tubing
D. all of these C. aluminum
214. A reamer is used to correct D. any of these
207. Never use a file: the
A. that is dirty A. finish and depth of a 220. A flexible back hacksaw blade
B. without a handle drilled hole is one that has:
C. without oiling B. finish and position of a A. only the teeth
D. with a tang drilled hole hardened
C. size and position of a B. flexible ends
208. The best file to use when drilled hole C. a movable back
finishing sharp comers or D. size and roundness of a D. only the back hardened
slots and grooves is the drilled hole
A. mill file 221. A hacksaw blade with 24 TPI
B. square 215. Twist drills are usually is best suitable for cutting:
C. knife file considered suitable A. tubing
D. jewelers file machining holes having a B. sheet metal over 18 gage
length less than C. brass and copper
209. On a lathe the dead center is A. two times their diameter D. any of these
used after B. five times their diameter
A. boring C. ten times their diameter 222. An all hard hacksaw blade is
B. center-drilling D. twenty times their one that
C. drilling diameter A. has a hard back and
D. reaming flexible teeth
216. In quick return mechanism of B. has a flexible back and
210. Eleven-sixteenths of an inch shaping machine the ram hard teeth
expressed as a decimal is: stroke length is proportional C. has the entire blade
A. .6785 to hardened
B. .7685 A. Crank length D. Will only fit a solid
C. .6875 B. ram length frame hacksaw
D. .6578 C. Slotter arm length
D. Stroke 223. A hacksaw blade can be
211. The markings on a placed in a frame in:
micrometer barrel are: 217. Type and number of bearings A. two positions
A. .025” apart to be used for spindles of B. four positions
B. .250” apart machine tool depend on C. one position
C. .0025” apart A. type of spindle D. three position
D. 2.5” apart B. type of machine tool
C. load on spindle 224. what should be the top rake
212. It measures the slope of the D. load on the bearing angle to cut brass?
top surface of the tool to the A. 0
side in a direction B. 15
 C. 30 231. Before applying layout blue 237. It is a hole revolving cutter or
D. 45 on a plece of metal, it must grinding wheel for mounting
be: it on an arbor
225. It is a long, tapered punch A. roughened A. Arbor hole
used for loosening straight B. heated B. Hole saw
pins, taper pins, rivets and C. Cleaned C. Star drill
other small parts being D. Cold D. Star saw
disassembled
A. center punch 232. A drill bit has: 238. A machine used for forcing an
B. drift punch A. 4 flutes arbor or a mandrel into
C. drive-pin punch B. 3 flutes drilled or bored parts
D. hand punch C. 2 flutes preparatory to turning or
D. C.No flutes grinding
226. A tool used for turning nuts or A. Arbor press
bolts 233. The alignment of coupling B. Arc press
A. c-clamps faces can be checked by: C. Automatic press
B. long nose A. using an inside D. Bladder press
C. plier micrometer
D. Wrench B. inserting a thermocouple 239. A machine in which materials
C. Inserting a feeler gage are pulverized between the
227. Used to permit lever shift for between the coupling two toothed metal disk
vertical travel of rail faces at various points rotating in opposite
A. ball crank around the directions
B. clamp plates circumference A. attrition mill
C. plumb bob D. Rotating and measuring B. ball mill
D. plunger knob to nearest permanent C. beater mill
fitting D. Tumbling mill
228. It is mounted on the top of
the column and is guided in 234. A piece of cast iron held 240. A press in which mechanical
perfect alignment by the against an emery wheel will feeding of the work is
machined dovetailed surface give off: synchronized with the press
A. Arbor A. dull yellow sparks action
B. over arm B. bright shiny sparks A. automatic press
C. saddle C. red sparks B. dial press
D. spindle D. no sparks C. manual press
D. Punch press
229. Name of mechanism, which a 235. When cutting material in a
welding operator holds lathe, the softer the material 241. A supporting member that
during gas welding and at the being cut, the tool bit should carriers a wheet and either
end of which the gases are have: rotates with the wheel to
burred to perform the various A. more top rake transmit mechanical power to
gas welding operation. B. less top rake or from it, or allows the wheel
A. hose C. double top rake to rotate freely on it called
B. gage D. any of these A. Axle
C. switch B. bushing
D. Torch 236. After grinding a tool bit, the C. coupling
cutting edge should be: D. shaft
230. A scriber is made from A. case-hardened
A. carbon steel B. rubbed with emery cloth 242. Straight muriatic acid is often
B. cold-rolled steel C. stoned with an oilstone used as a flux on:
C. tool steel D. rubbed with crocus cloth A. galvanized iron
D. hot-rolled steel B. cast sheet
C. sheet steel
D. any of these
243. Special solders used for 249. After grinding a tool bit the 255. Sometimes used for soldering
aluminum usually require: cutting edge should be bright tin
A. more heat A. case hardened A. rosin
B. less heat B. rubbed with emery B. sal ammoniac
C. the same heat as cloth C. tallow
copper wire C. rubbed with crocus D. tinning
D. the same heat as sheet cloth
metal D. stoned with an oilstone 256. A very effective flux for
soldering galvanized iron and
244. Copper is annealed by 250. When cutting material in a zinc
heating to a cherry red color lathe, the softer the material A. cut acid
and: being cut, the tool bit should B. muriatic acid
A. dousing in cold water have C. soldering pastes
B. cooling slowly in air A. more top rake D. zinc chloride
C. dousing in oil B. double top rake
D. dousing in hot water C. less top rake 257. The process of checking the
D. any of these surface of a piece by rolling
245. A piece of mild steel held depressions into the surface
against an emery wheel will 251. A piece of cast iron held A. honing
give off: against an emery wheel will B. Knurling
A. bright shiny sparks give off C. reaming
B. light straw colored sparks A. bright shiny sparks D. snagging
C. no sparks B. dull yellow sparks
D. green sparks C. no sparks 258. The process of cutting
D. red sparks internal threads by means of
246. A gear wheel making 156 rpm a cutting tool.
has 56 teeth. It drives another 252. Which of the following is not A. chamfering
gear at 91 rpm. The number a common term relating to B. honing
of teeth on the second gear is the classification of fits C. reaming
A. 65 A. Bound D. Tapping
B. 90 B. medium force fit
C. 50 C. snug 259. The surface below the
D. 96 D. tunking cutting edge
A. face
247. Tool steel can be hardened 253. An oversize hole is produced B. Flank
by: by a drill if C. nose
A. heating red hot and A. cutting speed is too D. side relief
plunging into water high
B. heating red hot and B. feed is too high 260. Which one is the hardest
cooling in a blast of dry C. insufficient coolant is material?
air C. used A. brass
C. heating red hot and D. lips of drill are of B. bronze
plunging into linseed or unequal length C. diamond
cottonseed oil D. steel
D. any of the above, 254. The studs used as a coolant in
depending on type and general machine shop consist 261. The movement of belt upon
use of the face of rim or outer of the
A. a chemical solution driver and driven pulleys
248. A scriber is made from B. an emulsion of oil and within the area of arc of
A. carbon steel water contact is called
B. cold-rolled steel C. a solution of detergent A. Creep
C. tool steel and water B. Crowning
D. hot-rolled steel D. a straight mineral C. dressing
 D. slip D. All surfaces should be 273. It cannot be forged because
dipped in acid first it will break if heated and
262. It is a device, which hold the beaten by hammer
job firmly 268. A surface should be prepared A. Carbon steel
A. clamp for soldering by B. Cast iron
B. Fixture A. filing the surfaces C. High speed steel
C. Grip B. scraping the surfaces D. Tool steel
D. Jig C. acid-cleaning the
surfaces 274. Shaper tools are made of
263. It is the outer surface of face D. any of these what type of material?
or rim of the pulley is made in A. Babbitt
convex form to keep the belt 269. The hand tool used for cutting B. Brass
in center when it is in motion threads on round stock is the C. Bronze
A. creep A. stock and die D. High speed steel
B. Crowning B. die wrench
C. Dressing C. stock 275. It is the operation of beveling
D. Slip D. Stock cutter the mouth of a hole.
A. Counter boring
264. It is used to transmit motion 270. A tapered piece of stock is 2” B. Counter broaching
at high speed without long, 1- 1/8” diameter at one C. Counter sinking
producing noise. end and ½ diameter at the D. Spot facing
A. bevel gear other end. The taper per foot
B. helical gears is 276. The size of abrasive grains
C. hypoid gears A. 2” produced by crushing process
D. worm gears B. 2-1/2” is called
C. 2-1/4” A. Grade
265. It is used to transmit motion D. 2-1/16” B. Grid
at high speed with heavy load C. Grit
without producing noise 271. Sweating is the process of: D. None of these
A. bevel gear A. soldering two different
B. herringbone gear kinds of metal together 277. It is the combination of iron,
C. spur gear B. separating two pieces carbon and other alloying
D. worm gears of metal that have been elements.
soldered together A. Alloy steel
266. It connect the shafts with C. tinning two surfaces, B. Brass
soft materials such as rubber applying, flux between C. Carbon steel
leather and canvass them, holding the two D. Cast iron
A. flexible coupling together and heating
B. Oldham coupling D. None of these 278. It is the process to divide the
C. rigid coupling periphery of the job in
D. universal coupling 272. If muriatic acid is used as a degrees:
flux, the soldered area must A. Angular indexing
267. One of the most important be cleaned thoroughly B. Differential indexing
factors that is often afterwards to prevent C. Direct indexing
overlooked when soldering is A. anyone touching it D. Plain indexing
the fact that from getting burned
A. the surface to be B. remaining acid from 279. It consists of surface
soldered must be clean eating the metal irregularities. Which result
B. the two metals to be C. the acid from from the various
soldered must not be evaporating the solder manufacturing process.
the same disintegrating A. Flaws
C. the two metals to be D. none of these B. Lay
soldered must be the C. Roughness
same D. Walveness
 C. has no teeth B. Barth key
280. A piece of tool steel held D. is opposite the handle C. Woodruff key
against an emery wheel will D. Gib head key
give off: 285. The best method of avoiding
A. White sparks with stars accident is by observing 292. Change in metal structure by
on the ends related to job machine and which the surface structure
B. Yellow sparks work piece. recover from its unstable
C. No sparks A. Cleanliness condition
D. Green sparks B. Emery A. Annealing
C. Opponent B. normalizing
281. Grinding wheels have a range D. Safety precautions C. Aging
of soft to hard abrasive D. Temporing
materials depending on the 286. The size of try square is
use Most manufacturers measured from the inner 293. A tapered square key is
latter their wheels from A to edge of stock to the end of its known as
Z. The hardest is marked: A. Base A. Gib head
A. E B. Blade B. Woodruff
B. A C. Body C. Kennedy
C. Z D. Edge D. Barth
D. El
287. Angle of center punch is 294. The process of welding two
282. The main difference between A. 30 dissimilar metals is known as
a planer and shaper is that: B. 45 A. Friction welding.
A. The planer has an offset C. 60 B. Flash welding
table and the shaper D. 90 C. Oxyacetylene welding
has a horizontal table. D. Cold welding
B. The shaper has a rotting 288. Staggering of hacksaw blade
table and the planer teeth on both sides 295. A nonmetal considered as
has a horizontal table alternatively is called undesirable impurity in steel
C. The table of planer has A. Arrangement of teeth is
a reciprocating motion B. Positioning to teeth A. lead
past the tool head C. Setting of teeth B. Sulfur
white the table of the D. None of these C. Phosphorous
shaper is stationary and D. Cyanide
the tool head has a 289. It is the distance measured
reciprocating motion parallel to the axis from a 296. An alloying element which
D. Ones Is larger than the point on a screw thread to the improves the tensile strength
other corresponding point on the of steel and make it harder
next thread. A. Vanadium
283. One of the factors involved in A. Chord B. Carbon
the choice of a grinding wheel B. Lead C. Cobalt
is: C. Linear D. Chromium
A. The kind of material to D. Pitch
be ground 297. An alloying element which
B. The amount of stock to 290. Solder is an alloy of reduces deformation of
be removed A. Lead and antimony configuration and sulfuric
C. The kind of finish B. Lead and tin brittleness
required C. Lead and tungsten A. molybdenum
D. All of these D. Lead and zinc B. Manganese
C. nickel
284. The “tang” of a file is the part 291. It’s a square key with the D. chromium
that: bottom two corners are
A. Does the cutting beveled.
B. Fits into the handle A. Saddle key
298. What is the lip clearance B. Copper gasket on each A. Down time
angle of twist drill for side of the wheel B. Handling time
generated work? C. Only the steel washers C. Machining time
A. 3-6° provided with the D. Set up time
B. 8-10° machine
C. 12-15° D. None of these 310. What is the necessity of
D. 18-22° giving tolerance?
304. The tool used to check A. It saves the labor
299. It is a milling method in external pipe threads is called charges
which parts are placed in a a B. Its saves the material
row parallel to the axis of the A. plug gage from wastage
cutting tool end are milled B. thread gage C. It saves the time
simultaneously. C. pitch gage D. All of these
A. Abreast milling D. ring gage
B. Angular milling 311. It is done then and there by
C. Helical milling 305. The tool used to check adjusting or repairing the
D. Straddle milling internal pipe threads is called faults come in notice during
a work.
300. A core drill with hardened A. plug gage A. Corrective
steel shot pellets that revolve B. thread gage maintenance
under the rim of the rotating C. pitch gage B. Predictive maintenance
tube, employed in rotary D. ring gage C. Preventive
drilling in very hard ground. maintenance
A. Adamantive drill 306. The tool used to cut gears is D. Routine maintenance
B. Automatic drill called a
C. Double core barrel drill A. gear cutter 312. Which statement does NOT
D. Flat drill B. gear hob belong to the function of
C. gear center bearings?
301. A grinding mill of large D. gear threader A. To give free rotation to
diameter with either lumps of the shaft
ore pebbles or steel balls as 307. If use a dry grinding wheel for B. To guide the shaft
crushing bodies the dry lead sharpening tool bits dip the C. To support the shaft
is air swept remove mesh end of the bit in water D. To transmit power
material. frequently to prevent-
A. Aerial speed A. burning your fingers 313. A “pillar” file has:
B. Aero fall mill B. annealing the cutting A. One safe edge
C. Aero motor edge of the bit B. Three safe edges
D. Ball mill C. hardening of the tip C. Two safe edges
D. the tip from D. A or C
302. A tool-steel cutter used fro- crystallizing
finishing surfaces of angles 314. In general, files are divided
greater than or less than 90’ 308. CNC in machine shop means into two classes called.
with its axis of rotation called: A. Communication A. Single-cut and double-
A. Angle cutter Network Control cut
B. Asphalt cutter B. Computer Network B. Fine and coarse
C. Circular cutter Center C. Rough and smooth
D. Helical cutter C. Computer Number D. Heel and sizes
Control
303. When installing a new D. Computer Numerical 315. The length of a file is
grinding wheel. Always use: Control measured from:
A. Blotting paper gaskets A. End to end
on each side of the 309. It is the time lost due to B. Point to heel
wheel breakdowns, waiting for C. Point to end
tools, minor accidents etc D. Heel to end
 C. Roller bearing C. Bushing
316. A “pillar” file is used for D. Wood bearing D. Fluting
A. Filling slots
B. Filling keyways 322. It is generally used on high 328. A device for holding grinding
C. Filling against a speed with heavy load wheels of special shape or the
shoulder because it has line contact working piece – being
D. Any of these A. Ball bearing grounded
B. Metal bearing A. Chuck
317. A flexible hacksaw blade has C. Plastic bearing B. Fixtures
a tendency to: D. Roller bearing C. Head stock
A. Snap easily D. Jigs
B. Buckle or run out of line 323. It is a process of enlarging
when too much and smoothening the 329. Grinding the grooves of a
pressure is applied punched hole by means of twist drill or tap.
C. Cut too fast tapered drifts of various sizes A. Flaring
D. Cut on a slant and shape B. Fluting
A. Drawing out C. Honing
318. Soldering is the process of B. Drifting D. Lapping
A. Holding two metals C. Jumping
together by heating D. Upsetting 330. The dulling of the cutting
B. Joining two metals by particles of a grinding wheel
third soft metal that is 324. It is a set of gears fitted in resulting in a decreased rate
applied in a molten different position on a plate of cutting is called
state which are controlled by a A. fluting
C. Holding two different lever B. Glazing
kinds of metals A. Differential gear C. grinding
together by heating B. Gear train D. lapping
D. Joining two metals C. Stud gear
together by heating D. Tumbler gear 331. The process of lengthening a
piece of stock while the cross-
319. When soldering, flux is used 325. An instrument for sectional area is being
to determining the relative reduced
A. Keep the solder from hardness of material by a A. Drawing
running off the metal drop and rebound method. B. Honing
B. Keep the metal from A. Brinell hardness tester C. Tapping
getting too hot B. Rockwell hardness D. Upsetting
C. Keep the tip of the tester
soldering iron clean C. Scleroscope 332. The major factors, which
D. Remove and prevent D. Universal testing determined the rpm on
oxidation of the metals machine milling cutter are the material
being cut and
320. What is used to connect the 326. An instrument for measuring A. depth of the cutter
shaft whose axes are the degree of surface B. diameter of cutter
intersecting? roughness in micro inches. C. number of teeth in
A. Flexible coupling A. Caliper cutter
B. Oldham coupling B. Micrometer D. time allowed to
C. Rigid coupling C. Profilometer complete the job
D. Universal coupling D. Sclerescope
333. Electron beam machining
321. It is generally used on high 327. These spindle of the grinding process is quite suitable for a
speed with light load because machine on which the wheel material having
it has point contact is mounted. A. high melting point and
A. Ball bearing A. Arbor high thermal
B. Metal bearing B. Bearing conductivity
 B. high melting point and C. 5:2 place, types are horizontal
low thermal D. 6:8 and vertical?
conductivity A. Boring mill
C. low melting point and 339. Solder will not unite with B. Burrstone mill
low thermal metal surface that has C. Cage mill
conductivity A. grease on it D. Chile mill
D. low melting point and B. dirt on it
high thermal C. dirt on it 347. A small portable hand drill
conductivity D. any of these customarily used by hand
setters to drill the holes in
334. Grinding is what type of 340. Prepared soldered paste flux breast called
operation? is most popular but if you did A. spiral drill
A. Metal finishing not have any, you should use: B. diamond drill
operation A. hydrochloric acid C. churn drill
B. Metal fusing operation B. sulphuric acid D. breast drill
C. Metal powdering C. nitric acid
operation D. any of these 348. A job, which is fixed away
D. Metal surfacing from the table can be
operation 341. Another name for machined by
hydrochloric acid is A. running head
335. Grinding is done wherever A. sulphuric acid B. moving head
A. a large amount of B. muriatic acid C. static head
material is to be C. nitric acid D. traveling head
removed D. acetic acid
B. a small amount of 349. Shaper tools are made of
material is to be 342. Hard solder is made of A. cast iron
removed A. copper and zinc B. high speed steel
C. high accuracy is B. tin and zinc C. mild steel
required C. tin and copper D. wrought iron
D. other machining D. tin and lead
operations can not be 350. Refers to the unit can be
carried out 343. Soft solder is made of moved longitudinally along
A. copper and zinc the swivel table and is
336. Laser beam machining B. tin and lead clamped in position by two
process is used to machine C. tin and copper bolts one on either side of the
A. heavier materials D. tin and zinc base
B. lighter materials A. Cross stock
C. thicker materials 344. Soft solder melts at B. Foot stock
D. thinner materials approximately C. Head stock
A. 250 deg. D. Tail Stock
337. A hard grade-grinding wheel B. 350 deg.
is suitable for grinding C. 450 deg. 351. When using a drill press, the
A. both hard and soft D. 550 deg. work should be held with
materials A. the hand
B. hard materials 345. The flux usually used for hard B. a pair of pliers
C. smooth materials solder is C. a vise or clamp
D. Soft materials A. rosin D. gloves on
B. Borax
338. The usual ratio of forward C. barium 352. When drilling a hole in a
and return stroke, in quick D. alum piece of work held in a lathe
mechanism of shaping chuck, and would use the:
machine is 346. Which of the following is a A. compound rest
A. 3:1 boring machine tool used B. cross-feed
B. 3:2 particularly for large work C. tailstock and drill chuck
 D. headstock 366. How is the height of a bench
360. A kind of chuck, which has vice adjusted?
353. Copper is annealed by reversible jaws, which could A. By using a wooden
heating to a cherry red color be adjusted separately plate form
and A. Combination chuck B. By using a wooden
A. dousing in cold water B. Independent chuck packing piece under
B. cooling slowly in air C. Magnetic chuck the vice base
C. dousing with oil D. Universal chuck C. By using a vico
D. dousing in hot water adjusting fixture
361. A method whereby a gear is D. All of these
354. The purpose of “annealing” run with another gear that
is to make a metal: has abrasive surface material 367. Why hacksaw blade teeth get
A. harder A. Hobbing dullness?
B. medium-hard B. honing A. Coarse pitched blade is
C. Softer C. Lapping used on hard metal
D. shiny D. Milling B. Pressure is not released
in return stroke
355. The purpose of tempering” is 362. Is the process of cold works C. To much speed and
to make a metal where a limited amount of pressure
A. Harder material, resulted to a higher D. Any of these
B. softer strength and it leaves a
C. less brittle surface under compressive 368. Files are classified according
D. more brittle stress to
A. surface finishing A. grade and cut
356. The minimum diameter of a B. smoothing B. shape
piece of round stock C. surfacing C. size and length
necessary to make a square D. surface rolling D. all of these
key 2 on a side is
A. 1.5” 363. is largely used for low 369. How are rivets made?
B. 1.06” strength application such as A. Cold pressing
C. 1.0” elevator ropes not used for B. Drawing
D. .75” hoisting and for stationary C. Hot rolling
guy ropes D. Rolling
357. A fine grained, salty silica A. steel rope
rock used for sharpening B. cast steel rope 370. What support the top rake?
edge tools C. nylon rope A. Front clearance
A. Oilstone D. iron wire rope B. Side clearance
B. Peeblestone C. Side rake
C. Surface grinder 364. Nitriding process of surface D. Top rake
D. Rocky oil treatment for steel tools is
used for tools taking 371. Which of the following
358. A hand tool used to measure A. heavy cuts reduces the rubbing action?
tension on bolts B. light cuts A. Front clearance
A. Hammer C. medium cuts B. Side clearance
B. Plier D. straight cuts C. Side rake
C. Screw driver D. Top rake
D. Torque range 365. They are mixtures of lard,
cottonseed or rapeseed oils 372. Which of the following is
359. A hand tool used to measure and mineral oils are called used for all general purposes?
engine crank web deflection A. Cooling oils A. Forging
A. compound gage B. Cutting oils B. Production slotter
B. dial gage C. Heating oils C. Puncher slotter
C. distortion gage D. Emulsions D. Tool room slotter
D. feeler gage
373. It is an operation of milling 379. A brazed joint is B. Gang milling
the complex surfaces with the A. stronger than a C. Side milling
help of a group of cutters soldered joint D. Straddle milling
mounted on the same arbor B. weaker than a soldered
A. Climb milling joint
B. Down milling C. The same strength as a 385. A correct cutting angle on a
C. Gang milling soldered joint drill for ordinary work is:
D. Straddle milling D. Three times as strong A. 45°
as a soldered joint B. 59°
374. It is an operation to divide C. 64°
the periphery of the job into 380. If the lips of a drill are of D. 70°
number of equal parts different lengths:
A. Dividing head A. the drill will not cut 386. When using a drill press, the
B. Indexing B. the hole will be larger work should be hold with
C. Protractor than the drill A. glove hand
D. Slotting C. the hole will be smaller B. the hand
than the drill C. a vise and a clamp
375. The angle formed between D. some of these D. pliers
the face of a tool and the
work surface or the tangent 381. One horsepower is equal to: 387. A machining operation
to the work piece at the point A. The amount of work a whereby the tool reciprocates
of contact with the tool called can produce in one and the feed is stationary
A. clearance angle hour A. reaming
B. cutting angle B. 33,000 foot-pounds of B. shaping
C. rake angle work per minute C. planning
D. Wedge angle C. 33,000 foot-pounds of D. turning
work per hour
376. A tool which when pressed 388. A machining operation
into a finished hole in a piece whereby the tool rotates and
of work, provides center on the feed is stationary.
which the piece may be A. shaping
turned or otherwise D. the power delivered to
B. milling
machined called a shaft in one hour
C. turning
A. butt D. reaming
B. mash 382. A plug gage is used to
C. Mandrel measure
389. A machine used in shaping
D. Wobble A. Cylindrical bores
metal by means of abrasive
B. Screw threads
wheel or removal of metals
377. Which of the following types C. Spherical holes
with abrasive.
of valves is used in the bilge D. Taper bores
A. shaper
manifold? B. planer
A. swing chuck 383. Which of the following is the
C. grinder
B. non-return cutting speed of brass?
D. power saw
C. angle A. 30m/min
D. globe B. 40m/min
390. To prevent leakage in
C. 50m/min
dynamic spals, it is
378. Which of the following D. 80m/min
recommended to used
groups of pipe sizes is A. gaskets
correct? 384. It is an operation of milling
B. seats
A. ¼ , ½ , ¾ , 7/8, 1 two opposite sides of work
C. packings
B. ¼ , 3/8, ½ , 5/8, ¾ , 1 piece at a time by using two
D. felts
C. ¼ , 3/8 , ½ , ¾ , 1 side milling cutters on the
D. ¼ , ½ , 5/8, ¾ , 1 same arbor.
391. The process of checking or
A. Face milling
producing checkers on the
 surface of the piece by rolling D. tubular the allowance is negative and
checkered depressions in the is termed as
surface. 398. Cutting lubricants used in a. negative fits
A. Indexing drilling. Reaming and lapping b. negative allowance
B. soldering of cast iron parts c. interference of metals
C. knurling A. soda water d. negative allowance
D. quenching B. kerosene
C. soluble oil 5. A kind of thread that is
392. Tooth width measured along D. dry generally used
the chord at the pitch circle. a. UNF
A. chord space 399. The angle developed b. UNEF
B. chordal thickness between tooth profile and c. UNC
C. chord clearance radial line at its pitch point is d. 8-Thread series
D. chord length referred as
A. approach angle 6. A machine tool used
393. It is recommended for high B. pressure angle principally to machine flat or
speed application that the C. recess angle plane surfaces with a single
maximum number of teeth in D. base helix angle point cutting tool
small sprocket should be: a. shaper
A. 10 to 20 400. The purpose of annealing is b. planer
B. 16 to 32 to make a metal c. milling
C. 14 to 28 A. harder d. lathe
D. 18 to 24 B. medium hard
C. softer 7. The ratio of relative
394. Cast iron flywheels are D. shiny viscosities colliding bodies
commonly designated with a after impact to their velocity
factor of safety of before impact
A. 8 to 10 a. coefficient of friction
B. 10 to 13 b. coefficient of velocity
C. 5 to 6 c. coefficient of
D. 18 to 20 1. AISI numbering for silicon restitution
395. An agency handling steel. d. coefficient of
assistance to all foundry, a. 85XX fluctuation
machine shop and b. 92XX
metallurgical plant operation. c. 93XX 8. In machine shop forging
A. DOST d. 87XX operation of lengthening a
B. boi piece of stock while reducing
C. MIRDC 2. Specific weight of steel in the cross sectional area of
D. UNICEF lbs/inches? work is called
a. 0.832 a. reducing
396. A metal characteristic that b. 0.328 b. upsetting
absorbs extreme deformation c. 0.283 c. upgrading
without rupture is called d. 0.823 d. desizing
A. hardness
B. ductility 3. Ratio of coil to wire diameter 9. It is the radial distance
C. plasticity a measure of coil curvature. between the top of the tooth
D. toughness a. spring rate and the bottoms of the
b. spring index mating. Tooth space.
397. The size of all the pipes from c. Wahl’s factor a. clearance
1/16 inches to 12 inches is d. spring scale b. tolerance
defined by size. c. lead
A. design 4. When hole is smaller than the d. crest
B. external diameter shaft, it will take pressure to
C. inside diameter pull the parts together. And
10. An arc of the pitch circle 16. A machine tool used to a. Groove
through which a tooth travels produce a variety of surfaces b. Lap
from its contact to a mating by using a circular type cutter c. Тар
tooth at the pitch point to the with multiple teeth d. Flute
point where contact ceases a. Lathe machine
a. arc of action b. Milling machine 22. The operation of making a
b. arc of recess c. Broaching machine cone- shaped enlargement of
c. arc of approach d. grinding machine the end of a hole, as for a
d. backlash recess for a flat head screw
17. A cutting tool used to finish a. Countersinking
11. The distance a helical gear internal and external surfaces b. Knurling
would thread along its axis by the use of a cutter called a c. Squaring
one revolution of it were free broach, which has a series of d. Performing
to move axially cutting edges of teeth
a. crest a. lathe machine 23. It is an operation of sizing
b. lead b. broaching machine and finishing a hole by means
c. module c. planer of a cutting tool having
d. clearance d. shaper several cutting edges
a. Notching
12. Ability of a material to absorb 18. A kind of chuck, which should b. Piercing
energy when deformed not be used where accuracy is c. Turning
elastically and return to it required called d. Reaming
when unloaded is: a. collet chuck
a. toughness b. magnetic chuck 24. The hop term used to include
b. creep c. Four jaw chuck the marking or inscribing of
c. resilience d. Universal chuck center points circle area of
d. plasticity straight lines upon metal
19. A tool when pressed into a surface either curve or flat for
13. A weld made to hold the parts finished hole in a piece of the guidance of the worker
of a weldment in proper work provides center on called:
alignment until final welds which the place may be a. Shaping
are made turned otherwise machined b. Hobbing
a. Fusion weld called c. Laying out
b. Tack weld a. mesh d. Shaping
c. Electric weld b. butt
d. oxy-acetylene weld c. Mandrel 25. It is used to true and align
d. Wobble machine tools fixtures and
14. It is a machine used for 20. A machine tool which is very works to test and inspect size
testing of very thin steel or similar to a shaper except that trueness of finished work and
surface layers the ram reciprocates compare measurements
a. Charpy test vertically rather than either heights or depths or
b. Izod test horizontally. many other measurements
c. Description test a. lathe a. dial gage
d. Rockwell test b. grinder b. dial indicator
c. planer c. tachometer
15. A machine tool in which an d. slotter d. Speedometer
abrasive wheel is used as a
cutting tool to obtain a very 21. A cylindrical bar of steel with 26. The process of forming
smooth finish. threads formed around it and metals by the use of dies after
a. Broaching machine grooves or flutes running the metal is heated to its
b. Planer lengthwise in it, intersecting plastic range
c. Tool grinder with threads to form cutting a. Rolling
d. Lathe machine edges. It is used to cut b. Forging
internal threads. c. Turning
 d. Casting a. Feed the casting at a
rate consistent with the 38. In up cut milling, the work
27. A machine tool used to cut rate of solidification piece is fed
metals a lift. Medium and b. Act as a reservoir for a. Against the milling cutter
large section using a molten metal b. At an angle of 60% at the
reciprocating hacksaw blade c. Help feed the casting center
a. Tool grinder until oil solidification c. at the right angle of the
b. Shaper takes place cutter
c. Planer d. Feed molten metal d. the direction of the
d. Power saw from pouring basin to cutter
gas
28. The usual value of helix angle 39. Sprue is passage provide for
of a drill is 32. The mould for casting ferrous the
a. 30° materials a. Out flow
b. 60° a. Copper b. In flow
c. 110° b. High carbon steel c. Smooth flow
d. 120° c. Low carbon steel d. Solidification of molten
d. Medium carbon steel material
29. Wiping is the process of
a. applying flux during 33. A plug gage is used to 40. Feed in the lathe machine is
welding process measure expressed
b. cleaning the welded a. cylindrical bores a. mm
surface after the welding b. screw thread b. mm per degree
operation is over c. spherical holes c. mm per revolution
c. connecting load pipes by d. Taper bores d. rpm
soldering alloy
d. Low temperature 34. When large number of 41. Rapping allowance is
welding components are turned and provided on a pattern take
parted off a bar the chuck care of
30. In Carthias process generally used is the a. Shrinkage
a. molten metal is fed into a. Collet chuck b. Machining
the cavity in metallic b. Four jaw chuck c. Distortion
mould by gravity c. Magnetic chuck d. easy withdrawal
b. metal is poured into die d. two jaw chuck
cavity and after a 42. Chuck use in turret lathe is
predetermined time the 35. Which of the following is the a. Collet chuck
mould is inverted to cutting speed of brass? b. four jaw self centering
permit a part of main a. 30 m/min chuck
steel in molten state to b. 40 m/min c. Magnetic chuck
flow out of cavity ccavity c. 50 m/min d. three jaw chuck
is filled with a d. 60 m/min
precalculated 43. Cape in foundry practice
c. quantity of metal and a 36. Quick return mechanism is refers to
core or plunger is used in a a. Bottom half of molding
inserted to force the a. Drilling machine box
metal into cavity b. Grinder b. Coating on the mold face
d. Metal is forced into c. Lathe c. Middle portion of the
mould under high d. Shaper mold
pressure d. Top half molding box
37. Mandrel used to hold
a. Cutting tool 44. A vent wire is use in
b. Drill bits a. foundry
c. Face plate b. Hot forging
31. What is the purpose of riser? d. Hollow work pieces c. Cold forging
 d. Fitting b. Speed less than that d. using an inside
when using a high micrometer
45. Angle plate is used for speed drill
a. cutting tapers in a lathe c. The same speed as that 58. A drill bit has
b. Cutting gears in a shaper using a high speed steel a. 1 flute
c. Cutting gears in a milling d. None of these b. 2 flutes
d. fixing job out angle in a c. 3 flutes
grinder 52. Knurling is done to____. d. 4 flutes
a. boring
46. Permeability, in relation to b. chamfering 59. When using a drill press, the
molding sands, is high for c. Planning work should be held with
a. Coarse grain d. Turning a. A pair of pulley
b. Fine grains 53. When material in a lathe, the b. A vise or clamp
c. Medium grains harder the material being cut, c. gloves on
d. Round grains the tool bit should have d. The hand
a. Less side rake
47. The purpose of tumbler b. more side rake 60. When a lathe is put into back
gears in lathe is to c. More top rake gear it will go
a. cut gears d. no side rake a. at a slower speed
b. cut thread backwards
c. Give desired direction 54. After grinding the tool bit the b. At the same speed
of the movement to the cutting edge should be backward
lathe carriage a. Case hardened c. Faster
d. reduce spindle speed b. rubbed with emery cloth d. Slower
c. Rubbed with crocus cloth
48. A sine bar cannot be used d. stoned with oil stone 61. On a lathe, the dead center is
without a/an used after
a. angle gage 55. When cutting material in a a. Boring
b. micrometer lathe the softer the material b. center-drilling
c. Stip gage being cut, the tool bit should c. Drilling
d. Vernier caliper have d. Reaming
a. More top rake
49. The operation of finishing b. Double top rake 62. The best file to use when
drilled hole to the correct size c. Less top rake finishing sharp corner or a
is known as d. Any of these lots of grooves is the
a. Counter boring a. Jewelry file
b. Counter sinking 56. A piece of cast iron hold b. Knife file
c. reaming against an emery wheel will c. mill file
d. spot facing give off d. Square file
a. Bright shiny sparks
50. When the outer corners of b. Dull yellow sparks 63. Never use a file
the cutting edges of a drill c. Red sparks a. That is dirty
wear away to rapidly. It is an d. No sparks b. With a tang
indication of? c. Without a handie
a. Not enough speed 57. The alignment of coupling d. Without oiling
b. too much rake angle faces can checked by
c. Too much high speed a. Inserting a feeler gage 64. Which of the following
d. B or C between coupling faces information is necessary
at various points around when ordering a file
51. Carbon steel should be the circumference a. Size
operated at b. Inserting thermometer b. Shape
a. speed greater than that c. Rotating and measuring c. type of teeth
when using a high to nearest permanent d. All of these
speed drill fitting
65. When filling a piece of metal c. Sheet metal under 18 77. All hard hacksaw blade is best
in a lathe if short quick gage suited for work on
strokes are used the finished d. any of those a. Brass
piece will probably b. Cast iron
a. Be out of round 72. A coolant is used when c. Tool steel
b. Be perfect cutting a material in a power d. any of these
c. Have small flat areas on hacksaw to
the surface a. Absorb heat of friction 78. A hacksaw blade with 14 TPI
d. A and C b. Prevent the blade from is best suited for cutting
overheating a. Cold rolled steel
66. The best procedure when c. Prevent the blade from b. Hot rolled steel
filling a piece of metal in a loose temper c. Structural steel
lathe is to take….. d. all of these d. Any of these
a. long fast stroke
b. Long slow stroke 73. A hacksaw blade with 10 79. Files are divided into two
c. Short even stroke teeth per inch is best suited general classes, namely
d. short fast stroke for cutting a. flat shapes and round
a. Aluminum shapes
67. Small piece of metal clogged b. Cast iron b. large and small
between the teeth on a file c. Solid iron c. Rough and smooth
are called d. any of these d. single-cut and double-
a. Bumps cut
b. Clogs 74. When cutting a long thin
c. Flats piece of metal 80. A hacksaw blade can be
d. Pins a. set the blade in the placed in a frame in
frame with the teeth a. One position
68. Finishing off a piece of metal facing toward you b. Two positions
with a real smooth finish can b. turn the blade at right c. Three positions
be done by angles to the frame d. Four positions
a. Draw-filling c. Turn the blade upside
b. flat-filing down in the frame 81. A hard hacksaw blade is one
c. Milling-filing d. Use a blade with fewer that
d. slide-filing teeth per inch a. Has a hard back and
flexible teeth
69. For finishing a piece of work 75. The hacksaw blade should be b. Has a flexible back and
to size the file to use is the placed in the frame with hared teeth
a. crossing file a. One end looser than c. Has the entire blade
b. double-cut fine-tooth the other end hardened
file b. The teeth facing in any d. Will only fit a solid
c. mill file direction frame hacksaw
d. single-cut fine-tooth c. The teeth pointing
file backward 82. Hacksaw blade with 24 TPI is
d. The teeth facing best suited for cutting
70. For filling lead or babbit, use a forward a. Brass and copper
a. lead float file b. Sheet metal over 18
b. Mile file 76. A hacksaw blade with 34 gages
c. Vixen file teeth per inch should be used c. Tubing
d. A and C for cutting d. Any of these
a. Brass
71. A hacksaw blade with 32 TPI b. Cast iron 83. Hacksaw blades are made of
is best suited for cutting c. Heavy a. high speed
a. Small tubing d. Thin wall tubing b. tool steel
b. Conduit c. Tungsten alloy steel
d. Any of these
 marking or checking the 97. Which of the following file is
84. A flexible hacksaw blade is angles: not hardened
one that has a. 90° only a. Tang
a. A movable blade b. 45° only b. Heel
b. Flexible ends c. 90° and 45° c. Body
c. Only the back hardened d. any angle between 0- d. Point
d. only the teeth 180°
hardened 98. In case of a flat scraper, the
92. Angle plate is made of depth of the cut is verified by:
85. When lathe tool bit burns, it a. Closed grain cast iron a. Changing the convexity
means that the b. Cast steel of the cutting angle
a. Speed is too low c. Tool steel b. changing its inclination
b. Speed is too fast d. High speed steel c. Changing its weight
c. material is too hard d. None of the above
d. material cannot be 93. The eye hole of a hammer
done head is made in oval shape 99. Generally spiral fluted reamer
and taper towards centre has spirals of
86. The lathe compound is used because a. Left hand
for a. It is easy for production b. Right hand
a. Angle cutting b. It is specially designed c. Straight
b. grooving by experts d. None of these
c. Facing c. It accommodates the
d. Any of these handle and a wedge for 100. In which screw thread the
preventing it from side-width of flat = width
87. A universal chuck cannot be flying off space = 0.5p
used to cut d. None of these a. Knuckle
a. An accentric b. Buttress
b. A round stock 94. The jaws of a leg vice are c. Square
c. A cam opened d. Acme
d. A and C a. parallel to each other
b. in ‘V form 101. A stud is which
88. The jaw of a standard vise is c. A and B both a. have threads on one
a. hard d. neither A nor B end
b. Semi-hard b. require a nut
c. Semi-soft 95. For general work the cutting c. Inserted in a plane hole
d. Soft angle of a cold flat chisel is d. None of these
ground at an angle of
89. When facing off a piece of a. 80° 102. ‘18-8’ stainless steel means:
material in the lathe chuck b. 70° a. 18% Tungsten and 8%
the bit must be set c. 60° Chromium
a. Above center d. 35° b. 18% Chromium and 8%
b. At the center Nickel
c. Below the center 96. A new hacksaw blade should c. 18% Nickel and 8%
d. off center not be used in old cut Chromium
because: d. 18% Chromium and 8%
90. The out break of fire can be a. the blade is very costly Cobalt
avoided by preventing: b. The blade have very
a. Fuel sharp teeth 103. Which is the lightest metal
b. Heat c. The space is not a. lead
c. Oxygen sufficient to play the b. G.I. Sheet
d. Any one of these new blade in the old cut c. Aluminum
d. None of these d. Cast iron
91. The square head of a
combination set is used for 104. Hardened steel parts have:
 a. fine grains 111. ‘Go’ limit is: 118. While soldering the flux is
b. coarse grains a. upper limit of shaft used because:
c. Medium grains b. lower limit of shaft a. it assists for quick
d. None of these c. A and B both melting and increasing
d. Neither A and B the fluidity of solder
105. Concentricity of a outside b. it saves the part from
diameter can be checked by: 112. Lapping is done: oxidation
a. vemier caliper a. to finish the job to a c. It takes the molten
b. outside micrometer fine degree of accuracy metal on all surfaces
c. dial test indicator b. to get high quality of d. All of these
d. Tube micrometer surface teeth
c. To control the size 119. A usual ratio of soluble oil and
106. Which micrometer has no d. All of these water used in coolant is:
anvil: a. 1:10
a. Outside micrometer 113. In which method a bore is b. 10:1
b. Depth micrometer finished to a very closed c. 1:20
c. Screw thread tolerance: d. 20:1
micrometer a. lapping
d. Digit micrometer b. honning 120. If rpm = 200, feed per
c. Grinding revolution = 0.05mm, then
107. Which micrometer is d. Turning feed per minute will be:
available with extension rods: a. 100 mm
a. outside micrometer 114. Jig bushings are generally b. 10 mm
b. inside micrometer made of c. 4 mm
c. Screw thread a. mild steel d. 1 mm
micrometer b. cast iron
d. combi micrometer c. Tool steel 121. For a given rpm. If the
d. Brass diameter if a twist drill
108. Which gauge is used to check increases, then the cutting
the internal threads 115. Fixture clamps are generally speed will:
a. Plug gauge made of a. increase
b. ring gauge a. High carbon steel b. Decrease
c. thread plug gauge b. Case hardened mild c. Same
d. Thread ring gauge steel d. none of these
c. High speed steel
109. In case of a limit plug gauge d. Alloy steel 122. An advance motion along the
which size will not enter into longitudinal axis of a twist
the hole 116. Successful designing of jigs drill is called
a. ‘Go’ size and fixtures depend upon: a. Speed
b. ‘Not Go’ size a. Clamping arrangement b. Feed
c. A and B both b. Tool guiding elements c. Cutting speed
d. none of these c. Manufacturing d. None of these
conditions
110. Limit gauge is made to d. All of these 123. In internal cylindrical
the____sizes of the work to grinding the grinding wheel
be measured: 117. When an external gear is and the work rotate in
a. actual and nominal meshed with an internal gear, a. Same direction
b. Nominal and upper the gears will rotate in: b. Opposite direction
limit a. Same direction c. Neither A and B
c. Nominal and lower b. Opposite direction d. A and B both
limit c. Will not rotate
d. Minimum and d. None of these 124. For grinding materials having
maximum low tensile strength which
abrasive is used:
 a. Silicon carbide c. 0.01 mm d. Form
b. Aluminum carbide d. 0.001 mm
c. Emery 139. Shaper tool bit should not
d. Corrundum 132. For the accurate extend in tool holder beyond:
measurement of bores, the a. 5 mm
125. The size of a grinding wheel best instrument is: b. 15 mm
is taken from: a. vernier caliper c. 25 mm
a. Diameter of wheel b. dial test indicator d. 50 mm
b. Bore size c. Plug gauge
c. Width of face d. Inside micrometer 140. The standard ratio of cutting
d. all of these to return stroke in shaper is:
133. In standard dividing head the a. 3:1
126. Which center is used for ratio between worm wheel b. 1:3
supporting open end of pipes, and the worm c. 2:3
shells etc. while turning or a. 40:1 d. 3:2
thread cutting in a lathe: b. 20:1
a. ball centre c. 1:40 141. A tipped tool is more useful
b. Half centre d. 10:1 than H.S..S tool because:
c. Pipe centre a. it can resists more heat
d. Female centre 134. Under sine principle the b. It can keep the cutting
length of sine bar takes the point sharp
127. When outside diameter of a place of c. cutting speed can be
job is turned in relation to the a. Opposite side increased
internal hole, the job should b. adjacent side d. all of these
be held c. Hypotenuse
a. In three jaw chuck d. Height 142. The feed in shaper takes
b. on lathe mandrel place at
c. On face plate 135. In a hydraulic driven shaper a. the beginning of return
d. Between centres the metal is removed at stroke
a. higher speed b. the beginning of cutting
128. The included angle of a dead b. Lower speed stroke
centre is c. Average speed c. the middle of return
a. 30° d. None of these stroke
b. 45° d. the end of return
c. 60° 136. In a shaper the cutting speed stroke
d. 90° (metric) is expressed in:
a. meter per minute 143. Which of the following quick
129. The angle of BA screw thread b. meter per second return mechanism is most
is: c. meter per hour widely used in most of the
a. 60° d. none of these slotters:
b. 55° a. whitworth mechanism
c. 45° 137. In a shaper the feed (metric) b. stotter disc mechanism
d. 47.5° is usually expressed in: c. hydraulic mechanism
a. mm/stroke d. slotter link and gear
130. Main alloying element in b. mm/revolution mechanism
H.S.S. is: c. meter/minute
a. Chromium d. none of these 144. In a slotter the cutting speed
b. vanadium depends upon:
c. Tungsten 138. For cutting gear teeth in a a. Materials to be used
d. Nickel shaper, the _____ tool is b. Materials of the slotter
used: tool
131. The value of one micron is: a. gooseneck c. Finish required
a. 1:00 mm b. “V shaped d. All of these
b. 0.10 mm c. Round nose
145. The clamping block to be 152. In a straddle milling Determine the number of
used in a slotter to support operation how many cutters crank rotation and mark the
the end of the strap is made are used to mill the work a. full rotation
of: a. one b. 5 full rotation, 2 holes
a. H.S.S. b. two on the 36 hole circle
b. High carbon steel c. three or more c. 4 full rotation, 12 holes
c. Lead d. any one of these on the 27 hole circle
d. Wood d. 2 full rotation, 16 holes
153. For gear cutting which cutter on the 47 hole circle
146. Divided table planer has is used
a. One table a. End mill cutter 159. Where the relieved cutters
b. Two tables b. Plain milling cutter are reground:
c. One housing c. Form relieve cutter a. On the circumstances
d. Two housing d. All of these b. Relieved cutters are not
reground
147. The straddle milling is done 154. The approximate hardness of c. On the flank
by means of two HSS end mill cutter is: d. On the side faces
a. Side milling cutters a. 45 HRC
b. Plain milling cutters b. 52 HRC 160. What happens if the job is
c. Face milling cutters c. 62 HRC loosely fitted between
d. Form cutters d. 72 HRC centres in cylindrical
grindings
148. The formula to find out the 155. The over arm of a milling a. The job will be out of
number of turn of the crank machine is used to support round
for simple indexing is a. spindle b. The job will be
a. T = 20/N b. arbor oversized
b. T = N/20 c. column c. The job will be thrown
c. T = 40/N d. Table out.
d. T = N/40 d. The job will not rotate
156. 572. Which of the following
149. In a standard worm dividing conditions may cause error 161. Which of the following is
head the ration between the during knurling used to clean the gauge
worm wheel and the worm is: a. To much longitudinal blocks before and after use:
a. 10:1 feed a. Brush
b. 20:1 b. Clamped length of tool b. Cotton waste
c. 30:1 too short c. Chamois leather or
d. 40:1 c. Surface speed too low linen cloth
d. unnecessary support d. None of these
150. In a standard dividing head 3 with tail stock centre
holes in 27 holes circles will 162. One of the cause of grinding
be: 157. Mark the cutter which works wheel glazing is
a. 6° simultaneously with up cut a. Grain size is too fine
b. 4° and down cut process b. Wheel is hard
c. 2° a. Side milling cutter c. Wheel speed is too fast
d. 1° b. Semi-circular milling d. A and B both
cutter
151. Planer type milling machine c. Shell and mill 163. The grade of grinding wheel
is built up for work of: d. Plain milling cutter depends uроп:
a. light duty a. grain size
b. heavy duty 158. A polygon with 9 flats is to be b. structure
c. medium duty milled using the indexing c. Kind of abrasive
d. None of these head. The indexing head d. Hardness of bond
transmission ratio is 40: 1.
164. Which kind of bond is c. Equalize the weight in d. Any of these
commonly used: every portion of the
a. vitrified wheel 177. For gear cutting which cutter
b. rubber d. None of these is used.
c. shellac a. And mill cutter
d. Silicon 171. Grinding fluids are used to: b. Plain milling cutter
a. reduce the friction c. Form relief cutter
165. A grinding wheel has got the between the wheel d. all of these
marking ‘C’ is made with the face and the job
abrasive: b. cool and lubricate the 178. In a slotter the table gets…
a. Aluminum oxide wheel and workpiece different feeds
b. Silicon carbide c. prevent loading of a. One
c. Combination of A and B wheel b. two
d. Corrundum d. All of these c. Three
d. None of these
166. As per Indian standard, the 172. Taps are resharpened by
grain size 46 comes under the grindings: 179. If the clearance of a cutting
group: a. Flutes edge is 5 degree, the lip
a. Coarse grain b. Threads (wedge) angle in 75 degree
b. medium grain c. Diameter the rake angle will be
c. Fine grain d. Relief a. 80 degree
d. Very fine grain b. 70 degree
173. In vertical milling machine c. 10 degree
167. As per Indian standard M the spindle is attached d. None of these
grade wheel comes under the ______ to the work table
group: a. Horizontal 180. The approximate hardness of
a. Soft b. Vertical HSS and mill cutter is,
b. Medium c. Angular a. 45 HRC
c. Hard d. None of these b. 52 HRC
d. None of these c. 62 HRC
174. Planer type milling machine d. 72 HRC
168. The symbol conventionally is built up for ______work of:
used for resinoid bond is: a. light duty 181. The over arm of a milling
a. ‘V’ b. heavy duty machine is used to support
b. ‘R’ c. medium duty a. Spindle
c. ‘B’ d. none of the above b. Arbor
d. ‘E’ c. Column
175. Amount of automatic feed in d. Table
169. A grinding wheel is marked shaper is increased by taking
as 51A 45L 5V 23, out of these the crank pin: 182. Where does the speed
5 means: a. At the centre of crank motion takes place in slotting
a. kind of abrasive disc machine?
b. Kind of bond b. Towards the centre of a. During the cutting
c. Structure crank disc motion
d. Grain size c. away from the centre of b. After each forward
crank disc stroke
170. Balancing of grinding wheel d. None of these c. At the end of return
is done to: motion
a. make the outside 176. In a straddle milling d. After each double
diameter concentric operation how many cutters stroke
with the bore are used to mill the work
b. make the sides of a. One 183. Which of the following
wheel parallel b. Two conditions may cause error
c. Three or more during knurling?
 a. too much longitudinal a. plain cylindrical 195. As per indian standard “M”
feed grinding machine grade wheel comes under the
b. clamped length of tool b. universal cylindrical group:
too short grinding machine a. Soft
c. Surface speed too low c. Internal grinding b. Medium
d. unnecessary support machine c. Hard
with tool stock center d. centerless grinding d. None of these
machine
184. Mark the milling method 196. The symbol resinoid bond is
during which the formation of 189. Which of the following is a. “V
chatter marks is very likely. used in cleaning the gage b. “R”
a. During down cut milling blocks before and after use? c. “B”
with a straight tooth a. Grain size is too fine d. “E”
cutter b. Wheel is hard
b. During up cut milling c. Wheel speed is too fast 197. The grinding wheel is marked
with a straight tooth d. A and b both as 51A 46L 5V 23, out of these
cutter 5 means:
c. During face milling with 190. The grade of grinding wheel a. Kind of abrasive
a straight tooth cutter depends upon b. Kind of bond
d. While using spiral tooth a. Grain size c. Structure
cutter b. Structure d. Grain size
c. Kind of abrasive
185. Mark the cutter which works d. Hardness on bond 198. Balancing of grinding wheel
simultaneously with the up is done to:
cut and down cut process: 191. Which kind of bond is a. make the outside
a. side milling cutter commonly used? diameter concentric
b. semi circular milling a. vitrified with the bore
cutter b. rubber b. make the sides of
c. Shell end mill c. shellac wheel parallel
d. Plain milling cutter d. silicon c. Equalize the weight in
every portion the
186. Where the relieve cutter are 192. Which bond is suitable in wet wheel
reground? grinding? d. None of these
a. on the circumstances a. rubber
b. relieve cutters are not b. silicate 199. The common measuring
reground c. Shellac tools are
c. On the flank d. None of these a. Steel rule
d. on the side faces b. Vernier caliper
193. A grinding wheel which has c. Micrometer
187. What happens if the job is got the marking “C” is made d. All of these
loosely fitted between with the abrasive?
centers in cylindrical a. Aluminum oxide 200. It is an operation in
grindings? b. Silicon carbide stretching or spreading over
a. The job will be out on c. Combination of a and b the metal by means of the
round d. Corrundum plane of the hammer
b. The job will be oversize a. Peening
c. The job will be thrown 194. As per india standard the b. Swaging
out grain size 46 comes under the c. Bending
d. the job will not rotate group d. Upsetting
a. Coarse grain
188. The internal and external b. Medium grain 201. The good quality of a
taper on cylindrical jobs are c. Fine grain measuring tool.
ground in: d. Very fine grain a. Should be easy to
handle
 b. Should be easy to read b. Cutter toughness and fine grain
c. Should be wear c. Key structure?
resistance d. Clamp a. chromium
d. All of these b. nickel
208. The process of extracting iron c. Tungsten
202. A notching device, which is in a blast is called d. Vanadium
used to hold or grip work a. Sintering
place, while filing. Chipping or b. Smelting 215. It is the process for making
any other bench work or c. Casting the outer surface harden of
while machining or drilling d. Manufacturing the steel part.
them. a. Frame hardening
a. Vise 209. Which of the following is a b. Hardening
b. clamp product of a blast furnace? c. Case hardening
c. Grip a. wrought iron d. Carburizing
d. Pressed b. cast iron
c. Pig iron 216. It is a case hardening process
203. A multi pointed hand d. Gray iron by which the carbon content
anything tool used to remove of the steel near the surface
material from metallic and 210. A type of iron which contains of a part is increased
non-metallic work places to 3 to 305% carbon either in a. Nitriding
match with drawing, shape combined form or in true b. Tempering
and size. state. c. Carburizing
a. Cold chisel a. wrought iron d. Flame hardening
b. file b. cast iron
c. Hacksaw c. Pig iron 217. It is a case hardening process
d. None of these d. Gray iron in which work piece is heated
in a steam of ammonia at 500
204. A side cutting tool used for 211. Which of the following to 550 °C.
accurately finishing the furnace used for manufacture a. Carburizing
straight or tapered holes of cast iron? b. Nitriding
already drilled or bored a. Cupola furnace c. Tempering
a. Reamer b. Crucible furnace d. Normalizing
b. Swaging c. Electric furnace
c. Peening d. all of these 218. The size by which it is
d. Tapping referred to as a matter of
212. A product of paddling convenience called
205. A devise used to fix two or furnace, which contains less a. Basic size
more parts than 0.10% carbon, is called b. Actual size
a. Jigs a. wrought iron c. Nominal size
b. Fixtures b. cast iron d. Effective size
c. Fastener c. Pig iron
d. Clamps d. gray iron 219. It is a device which hold the
job in position and guide the
206. A machine element inserted 213. Which of the following is a cutting tool
parallel to the axis of the shaft property of wrought iron? a. Clamp
a. Fastener a. Ductile b. Jig
b. Cutter b. Brittle c. Vise
c. Key c. Cannot be forged d. Grip
d. None of these d. Can be easily cast into
different shapes 220. It is a device which hold the
207. A machine element inserted job firmly.
at the right angle to the axis 214. Which of the following gives a. Clamp
of the shaft is known as greater hardness, cutting b. Grip
a. Fastener c. Fixture
 d. Jig a. Ball bearing c. compound
b. Roller bearing d. Mandrel
221. It is the outer surface of face c. Metal bearing
of rim of the pulley and made d. Wood bearing 234. It gives the cutting tool
in convex form to keep the longitudinal feed, cross feed
belt in center when it is in 228. It is generally used on high or angular feed
a. Crowning speed with heavy load a. Compound rest
b. dressing because it has line contact b. Apron
c. Creep a. Plastic bearing c. Saddle
d. Slip b. Metal bearing d. Carriers
c. Roller bearing
222. It is used to transmit motion d. Ball bearing 235. A holding device used to hold
at high speed without the job property when
producing noise. 229. It is a process by which the turning the outer surface
a. Bevel gears length of a work place is through the finished hole
b. Hypoid gears increased by reducing its called
c. Helical gears cross sectional area a. Clamp
d. Worm gears a. Drawing out b. Jig
b. drifting c. Fixture
223. It is used t transmit motion at c. Jumping d. Mandrel
high speed with heavy load d. Upsetting
without producing noise 236. Which of the following gives
a. worm gear 230. It is process by which the shearing action?
b. Herring bone gear length of a work piece is a. Slide rake
c. Bevel gear reduced b. Top rake
d. Spur gear a. Upsetting c. Side clearance
b. Drawing out d. Front clearance
224. It is used to connect and c. drifting
disconnect the driving and d. jumping 237. What supports top rake?
driven units. a. front clearance
a. Brake 231. It is a set of gears fitted in b. side clearance
b. Spring different positions on a plain, c. Side rake
c. Clutch which are controlled by a d. Front clearance
d. Coupling lever
a. gear train 238. Which of the following
225. It connect the shafts with b. Stud gear reduces the rubbing action?
soft material such as rubber c. Tumbler gear a. Front clearance
leather and canvass d. Differential gear b. Side clearance:
a. Universal coupling c. Slide rake
b. Flexible coupling 232. It moves on the lathe bed d. Top rake
c. rigid coupling with cutting tool according to
d. Oldhm coupling the rotation of lead screw or 239. Which of the following is
by the hand traversing wheel used for all general purposes?
226. What is used to connect the a. Apron a. Production process
shafts whose axes are b. Compound rest b. Puncher slotter
intersecting? c. Saddle c. Tool room slotter
a. Rigid coupling d. Mandrel d. None of these
b. Oldham coupling
c. Flexible coupling 233. It acts the carriage or 240. It is an operation of milling
d. Universal coupling compound rest through the the complex surfaces with the
mechanism lifted inside the help of a group cutters
227. It is generally used on high a. Saddle mounted on the same arbor
speed with light load because b. Apron
it has point contact.
 a. Gang milling 246. The best method of avoiding 253. It is the machine used for
b. straddle milling accident is by observing shaping of metal or plastic by
c. Climb milling related to job machine and pushing or pulling a broaching
d. Down milling work place: across a surface or through an
a. Emery centering hole in a work piece
241. It is an operation of milling b. Opponent a. Planning
two opposite sides of work c. Safety precaution b. shaping
place at a time by using two d. Cleanliness c. broaching
side milling cutters on the d. Milling
same arbors 247. Mallets are made of
a. gang milling a. Hardwood 254. It is a milling method in
b. straddle milling b. Soft wood which parts placed in a row
c. Side milling c. Steel parallel to the axis of the
d. Face milling d. Cast iron cutting tool end are milled
simultaneously.
242. It is an attachment to the 248. Staggering of hacksaw blade a. Abreast milling
milling machine which helps teeth on both sides b. angular milling
to divide the job periphery alternately is called c. helical milling
into a number of equal a. Positioning the teeth d. None of these
divisors. b. Arrangement of tooth
a. Index c. Setting of teeth 255. A core drill with hardened
b. Dividing head d. None of these steel shot pallets that revolve
c. Slotting under the rim of the rotating
d. Universal spiral 249. The size of a file is measured tube, employed in rotary
from to heel of the file. drilling in every hard ground
243. It is an operation to divide a. Edge a. Automatic drill
the periphery of the job into b. Base b. Double core barrel drill
the number of equal parts c. Point c. Fat drill
accurately. d. Body d. Adamantine drill
a. Dividing head
b. Indexing 250. It is the distance measure to 256. The part of the machine for
c. Slotting the axis from a point on a wood planning that carries
d. None of these screw thread to the the cutter.
corresponding point on the a. Adz stock
244. The angle formed between next thread. b. adz block
the face of the tool and work a. lead c. Head stock
surface or the tangent to the b. pitch d. Head block
work place at the point of c. Linear
contact with the tool called d. Chord 257. It is a hole revolving cutter or
a. Clearance angle grinder wheel for mounting it
b. cutting angle 251. Solder is an alloy of on an arbor
c. rake angle a. lead and zinc a. Hole saw
d. Wedge angle b. lead and tin b. Arbor hote
c. lead and tungsten c. Star drill
245. The size of the tri square is d. Lead and antimony d. Punp hole
measured from the inner
edge of stock to the end of its 252. It is a machine tool used for 258. A machine used for forcing
______. cutting flat surfaces by an arbor or a mandrel into
a. Base reciprocating a single point drilled or bored parts
b. Blade tool across the work piece. preparatory to turning or
c. Edge a. Planer grinding
d. Body b. Shearing machine a. Automatic press
c. Shaper b. Bladder press
d. Slab cutter c. Arc press
 d. Arbor press 265. The spindle of the grinding a. Tallow
machine on which the wheel b. Sal ammonia
259. A machine in which material is mounted c. Tinning
pulverized between two a. Bushing d. Rosin
toothed metal disks rotating b. arbor
in opposite directions c. Bearing 272. A very effective flux for
a. Attrition mill d. Fluting soldering galvanized iron or
b. Tumbling mill zinc
c. Ball mill 266. A device for holding grinding a. Soldering paste
d. Beater mill wheels of special shape of the b. Muriatic acid
working piece being c. Zinc chloride
260. A press in which mechanical grounded d. Cut acid
feeding of the work is a. head stock
synchronized with the press b. fixtures 273. The groove providing for the
action c. Jigs cutting faces of the thread or
a. dial press d. Chucks teeth, chip passage and
b. punch press lubrication.
c. Automatic press 267. Grinding grooves of a twist a. heel
d. Manual press drill or tap. b. land
a. fluting c. Flute
261. A file whose edges are b. flaring d. Thread relief
parallel is known as c. lapping
a. Crochet file d. Honing 274. The surface below the
b. Cross cut file cutting edge
c. Equaling file 268. The culling of the cutting a. face
d. Blunt file particles of a grinding wheel b. flank
resulting in a decreased rule c. Nose:
262. Which of the following is a of cutting is called d. side relief
boring machine tool used a. grinding
particularly for large work b. glazing 275. Which is the hardest
piece, types are horizontal c. Fluting material?
and vertical d. Lapping a. steel
a. Boring mill b. diamond
b. burrstone mill 269. The process of increasing the c. bronze
c. cage mill cross- sectional area of a d. Brass
d. Chile mill given portion or possibly of
the whole piece. 276. It measures the slope of top
263. A tap with a chamfer 1-1 ½ a. forging surface of the tool to the side
threads in length b. upsetting in a direction perpendicular
a. Center tap c. spreading to the longitudinal axis
b. Bottom tap d. Drawing a. Side rake angle
c. Taper tap b. side cutting edge angle
d. Plug tap 270. The process of lengthening a c. side relief edge angle
piece of stock while the cross- d. end relief angle
264. A small portable hand drill sectional area is being
customarily used by hand reduced 277. A type of bonding material
setters to drill hole in breast a. Tapping which is made of clay and
called b. Honing water
a. Diamond drill c. Drawing a. Resinoid bond
b. Spiral drill d. Upsetting b. Vitrified bond
c. Chum drill c. shellac bond
d. Breast drill 271. Sometimes used for d. Rubber bond
soldering bright tin
278. It is used for holding straight c. an emulsion of oil and b. Crank length
shank drills in the spindle of water c. Ram length
the machine when drilling d. a chemical solution d. None of these
a. drill chuck
b. chuck key 284. Grinding is 290. The type and number of
c. Floating holder a. metal fusing operation bearings to be used for
d. Magic chuck b. metal powdering spindles of machine tool
operation depend on the
279. Back rake for HSS single point c. metal finishing a. Type of spindle
cutting tool machine free operation b. Type of machine tool
cutting brass is d. None of the above c. Load on bearing
a. 0 deg d. None of these
b. 5 deg
c. 10 deg 285. Grinding is done wherever 291. Nitriding process of surface
d. 15 deg a. other machining treatment for steel tools is
operation cannot be used for taking
280. A reamer is used to correct carried out a. light cuts
the b. a large amount of b. heavy cuts
a. Size and roundness of a material is to be c. medium cuts
drilled hote removed d. none of these
b. finish and position of a c. high accuracy is
drilled hole required 292. A very low cutting speeds the
c. Size and position of a d. None of these tool wear is due to
drilled hole a. plowing action
d. Finish and depth of a b. transfer
drilled hole 286. Laser beam machining c. material
process is used to machine d. Temperature
281. A oversize hole is produced a. Thicker materials
by a drill if b. Thinner materials 293. Are mixture of hard cotton
a. lips of drill are of c. Heavier materials seed or rape-seed oils and
unequal length d. Stronger materials mineral oils
b. speed too high a. Cutting oils
c. Insufficient coolant 287. Twists drills are made usually b. Cooling oils
used considered suitable c. Heating oils
d. cutting speed is too machining holes having a d. Emulsion
high length less than
a. Two times the diameter 294. What is the material for
282. The major factors which b. Five times the diameter hacksaw blade?
determine the rpm of milling c. Ten times the diameter a. High carbon steel
cutter are the materials being d. Twenty times the b. High speed steel
cut and the_____ diameter c. Low tungsten steel
a. number of teeth in d. Any of these
cutter 288. A high grade grinding wheel
b. diameter of cutter is suitable for grinding. 295. How is rivets is made?
c. time allowed to a. hard materials a. Cold pressing
complete the job b. soft materials b. Rolling
d. Depth of cutter c. both materials c. Drawing
d. none of these d. None of these
283. The studs used as a coolant
machine shop consists of 289. In quick return mechanism of 296. It is used to measure gap
a. solution of detergent shaping machine, the ram between two mating parts to
and water stroke length is proportional set the job and machine in
b. a straight mineral oil to alignment and to measure
a. Slotter arm length
 clearance of piston and 302. Shaper tools are made of a. Center less grinding
cylinders in automobiles what type of material? b. Plunge – cut grinding
a. Compound Gauge a. Brass c. Through feed grinding
b. Feeler Gauge b. Bronze d. None of these
c. Inspection Gauge c. High speed steel
d. Workshop Gauge d. Babbit 310. It is the angle between the
side cutting edge and
297. The movement of belt upon 303. An operation of enlarging longitudinal axis of the tool
the face of rim or outer the previous drilled hole a. Side cutting edge angle
surface of the driver and the a. Drilling b. End cutting angle
driven pulleys within the area b. Boring c. Side relief angle
of arc of contact c. eaming d. End relief angle
a. Compound Gauge d. Broaching
b. Feeler gauge 311. It is a surface finishing
c. Inspection Gauge 304. An operation to make smaller process and is used to
d. Workshop gauge hole in exact center for lathe produced a lustrous surface
center of attractive appearance
298. The movement of belt upon a. Broaching a. Polishing
the face of rim or outer b. Reaming b. Buffing
surface of the driver and the c. Counter boring c. Lapping
driven pulleys within the area d. Center bearing d. Glazing
of arc of contact.
a. slip 305. The size of abrasive grains 312. A____is formed when a shaft
b. Creep produced by crushing process rotates in a bush, lines of the
c. Interference is called. bore of a housing.
d. Crowning a. Grade a. Ball bearing
b. Grit b. Roller bearing
299. It is the process by which the c. Grill c. Plain bearing
length of a work piece d. None of these d. Needle bearing
reduced.
a. Drawing 306. 722. It is also known as slab 313. CNC in machine shop means
b. Drifting peripheral milling a. Computer number
c. Jumping a. Form milling control
d. Upsetting b. Climb milling b. Computer numerical
c. Convex milling control
300. It cannot be forged because d. Plain milling c. Computer network
it will break if heated and center
beaten by hammer 307. In____the tool is released in d. Communication
a. High speed steel return stroke. network control
b. Tool steel a. Shaper
c. Carbon steel b. Planer 314. It is the time lost due to break
d. Cast iron c. Slotter downs. Waiting for tools,
d. Reamer minor accident, etc.
301. It is a process of enlarging a. Set up time
and smoothing the punched 308. It is the process of driving b. Handling time
hole by means of tapered the periphery of the job in c. Machining time
drifts of various sizes and degrees d. Down time
shapes. a. Direct indexing
a. Drifting b. Plain indexing 315. Refers to the process of
b. Drawing c. Differential indexing separating or removing the
c. Jumping d. Angular Indexing burning of combustible
d. Upsetting material from the
309. It is a method of grinding neighborhood of the fire.
cylindrical surfaces. a. Starvation
 b. Blanketing pins rivets and other small 328. Used to permit lever shift for
c. Cooling parts being disassembled. vertical travel rail.
d. None of these a. Drive-pin punch a. Ball crank
b. Hand punch b. Clamp plates
316. What is necessary to provide c. Drift punch c. Plunger knob
tolerance? d. Center punch d. None of these
a. It serves the labor
charges 322. A tool used for turning nuts 329. It is mounted in the top of
b. It saves the material or bolts column and is guided in
from wastage a. Pliers perfect alignment by the
c. It saves the time b. Wrench machined dovetailed surface
d. All of these c. Long nose a. Over arm
d. C-clamp b. Spindle
317. It is done then and there by c. Arbor
adjusting or repairing the 323. A is used to test accuracy of d. Saddle
fouls come in notice during holes
the work a. Snap gage 330. Refers to circular milling
a. Preventive b. Ring gage attachment that is bolted to
maintenance c. Plug gage the top of the table of a plain
b. Predictive maintenance d. Depth gage or universal milling machine
c. Routine maintenance a. Blotting attachment
d. Corrective 324. A consist of a hardened and Rotary attachment
maintenance ground steel bar in which two b. Milling attachment
hardened and ground of the c. Spiral attachment
318. A___is used between the same diameter are set d. None of these
cutting tool and work place to a. Caliper
minimize the friction heat. b. Gage block 331. Name of mechanism, which a
a. Lubricant c. Sine bar welding operator holds
b. Coolant d. Micrometer during gas welding and at the
c. Water end of which the gages are
d. Alcohol 325. _____ are hardened devices burrex to perform the various
with a taper shank on one gas welding operation
319. Which of the following is NOT end and a 60 degrees point at a. Hose
a function of bearings? the other end. b. Torch
a. To support the shaft a. Tailstock centre c. Gage
b. To guide the shaft b. Lathe centers d. Switch
c. To give free rotation to c. Live center
the shaft d. Dead center 332. A fine grained salty silica rock
d. To transmit power used for sharpening edged
326. It is large casting located on tools
320. It is a process of cleaning the the left end of the bed. a. Oilstone
face of grinding wheel by a. Tail stock b. Surface grinder
means of a dresser for b. Head stock c. Rocky oil
removing the glazing and c. Carriage d. None of these
loading of wheel and improve d. Chuck
the cutting action of a wheel 333. A hand tool used to measure
a. Dressing 327. A ______ is a thread that has engine crank web deflection
b. Polishing a lead equal to pitch a. Feeler gage
c. Truing a. Right hand thread b. Compound gage
d. Lapping b. Left hand thread c. Distortion gage
c. Single thread d. Dial gage
321. It is a long tapered punch d. Multiple head
used for loosening straight
334. It is used to true and align 341. Machining properties of steel a. Vanadium
machine tools, fixtures and can be improved by adding. b. Chromium
works. a. Chromium nickel c. Titanium
a. Dial indicator b. Silicon aluminum, d. Molybdenum
b. Radial indicator titanium
c. Dial gage c. Sulfur, lead phosphorus 348. It is a process of shearing in
d. Feeler gage d. Vanadium, aluminum which sheet or plate is cut out
to a definite outline in a press
335. Is used for cutting long places 342. A ductile fracture is a. Blanking
of metals. characterized by b. Embossing
a. Planer c. Clamping
b. Shaper a. Appreciable plastic d. Trimming
c. Power saw deformation prior to
d. Broaching machine propagation of crack 349. It is the characteristic of
b. Fragmentation in more exhibiting different
336. It is used for external, than two pieces properties when tested in
internal and relieving of mill c. Negligible deformation different directions
cutters and taps d. Rapid rate for crack a. Allotropy
a. Milling attachment propagation b. Anisotropy
b. Thread attachment c. Isentropic
c. Taper attachment 343. Tool can be hardened by d. Isotropic
d. Relieving attachment a. Heating red hot and
plunging into water 350. It is one which specimen
337. Stretching or spreading of b. Heating red hot and supported at both ends as a
metal by hammering cooling in blast of dry simple beam is broken by the
a. Peening c. Heating red hot and impact strength
b. Flaring plunging into linseed or a. Charpy test
c. Upsetting cotton lead oil b. Izod test
d. Bending d. Any of the above, c. Rockwell test
depending on type d. Universal test
338. The is the most common of
the standard tapers 344. The purpose of annealing is 351. Which of the following
a. Brown to make the metal metals has the highest
b. Janno a. Harder specific heat capacity of
c. Sharpe b. Medium hard 100°C
d. Morse c. Softer a. Aluminum
d. Shiny b. Bismuth
339. The ability of metal to stretch c. Copper
bend or twist without 345. The purpose of tempering is d. Iron
breaking or cracking is called. to make metal
a. Elasticity a. Softer 352. Which of the following types
b. Ductility b. Harder of packing would be used in
c. Brittleness c. Less brittle steam joints?
d. Plasticity d. More brittle a. Asbestos
b. Neoprene
340. A fine grained salty silica rock 346. A scriber is made of c. Metallic
used for sharpening edge a. Carbon tool steel d. A or C
tools b. Cold-rolled steel
a. Eutectoid c. Hot-rolled steel 353. The process applied to iron
b. Austenite d. Tool steel pipe which retards corrosion,
c. Oilstone is called
d. Pearlite 347. It is used in steels as an a. Galvanizing
alloying element to combine b. Annealing
hardness obtained
 c. Soldering b. Bumps a. Set the blade in the
d. Tinning c. Clogs frame with teeth facing
d. Flats toward
354. A scriber is made from what b. Turn blade at right
metal.. 361. Finishing off a piece of metal angle to the frame
a. Carbon steel with a real smooth finish can c. Turn the blade upside
b. Cold rolled steel be done by down
c. Tool steel a. Draw filling d. None of those
d. Hot rolled steel b. Flat filling
c. Milling filling 368. The hacksaw blade should
355. The best file to use when d. Side filling place in the frame with
finishing sharp comers or a. One end looser than
slots and grooves 362. For finishing a piece of work the other end
a. Jewelers file to size the file to use is the b. The teeth facing in any
b. Knife file a. Crossing file position
c. Mill file b. Double cut fine file c. The teeth pointing
d. Square file c. Mill file backward
d. Single cut fine file d. The teeth pointing
356. Never use file forward
a. That is dirty 363. For filling lead or babbit, use
b. With a tang a 369. A hacksaw blade with 34 TPI
c. Without a handle a. Lead float file should be use for cutting
d. Without oiling b. Mile file a. Brass
c. Vixen file b. Cast iron
357. Which of the following d. A or C c. Thin wall tubing
information is necessary in d. Heavy
ordering a file 364. Hacksaw blade with 32 TPI is
a. Size best suited for cutting 370. All hard hacksaw blade is
b. Shape a. Small tubing best suited for
c. Type of teeth b. Conduit a. Brass
d. All of these c. Sheet metal under 18 b. Cast iron
gage c. Tool steel
358. When filling a piece of metal d. All of these d. Any of these
in a lathe if short quick
strokes are used the finished 365. A coolant is usually used 371. A hacksaw blade with 14 TPI
piece will probably when cutting material in is best suited for
a. Be out of round power hacksaw to a. Cold rolled steel
b. Be perfect a. Absorb heat friction b. Hot rolled steel
c. Have small flat areas on b. Prevent the blade from c. Structural steel
the surfaces overheating d. Any of these
d. A and C c. Prevent the blade from
loose its temper 372. Files are divided into two
359. The best procedure when d. All of these general classes, namely
filling a plece of metal in lathe a. Flat shapes and round
is to take 366. A hacksaw blade with 18TPI shapes
a. Long fast stroke is best suited for cutting b. Large and small
b. Long slow stroke a. Aluminum c. Rough and smooth
c. Short even stroke b. Cast iron d. Single cut and double
d. Short fast stroke c. Solid iron cut
d. Any of these
360. Small pieces of metal clogged 373. A hacksaw blade can be place
between the teeth on a file 367. When cutting a long thin in a frame in
are called piece of metal a. Three position
a. Pins b. Two position
 c. One position d. Any of these 387. A flexible hacksaw blade has
d. Four position a tendency to _____
381. The jaw of standard vise is a. Snap easy
374. A hard hacksaw blade is one a. Hard b. Buckle or run out of
that b. Soft fine when too much
a. Has a hard back and c. Semihard pressure is supplied
flexible teeth d. Semisoft c. Cut too fast
b. Has a flexible back and d. Cut on a slant
hard teeth 382. When facing off a piece of
c. Has the entire teeth material in lathe chuck the bit 388. A pillar file is used for _____
hardened must be set. a. Filling against a
d. Will fit a solid frame a. Above center shoulder
b. At the center b. Filling keyways
375. Hacksaw blade with 24 TPI is c. Below the center c. Filling slots
best suited for cutting d. Off center d. Any of these
a. Brass and copper
b. Sheet metal over 18 383. Before applying layout on a 389. The length of file is used for
gage piece, it must be _____
c. Tubing a. Cleaned a. End to end
d. Any of these b. Cold b. Heel to end
c. Hot c. Point to end
376. Hacksaw blade are made of d. Roughened d. Point to heel
a. High speed steel
b. Tool steel 384. Tool steel can be hardened 390. A pillar file has
c. Tungsten alloy steel by a. One safe edge
d. Any of these a. Heating red hot and b. Three safe edges
plunging into water c. Two safe edges
377. A flexible hacksaw blade is b. Heating red hot and d. A and C
one that has cooling in blast of dry
a. A movable back air 391. The “tang” is a part of file
b. Flexible ends c. Heating red hot and that
c. Only the back hardened plunging line seed or a. Does the cutting
d. Only the teeth cotton seed oil b. Fits into the handle
hardened d. Any of the above, c. Has no teeth
depending on the type d. Is opposite the handle
378. The flexible type hacksaw and use
blade is best suited for 392. One of the factors involved in
a. Aluminum 385. A piece of mild steel held the choice of a grinding wheel
b. Channel against an emery wheel will is
c. Tubing give off a. The kind of material to
d. Any of these a. Bright shiny spark be ground
b. Yellow sparks b. The amount of stock to
379. When lathe tool bit burns, it c. Light straw-colored be removed
means that sparks c. The kind of finish
a. Speed is too low d. No sparks required
b. Speed is too fast d. All of these
c. Material is too hard 386. Another name of
d. Material cannot bend hydrochloric acid is 393. The main difference between
a. Acetic acid a planer and a shaper is that
380. The lathe compound is used b. Muriatic acid a. The planer has offset
for c. Nitric acid table and the shaper
a. Angle cutting d. Sulfuric acid has a horizontal table
b. Grooving b. The shaper has a
c. Facing rotating table and
 planer has a horizontal a. 25° 405. The correct cutting angle on
table b. 69° a drill for ordinary work is
c. The table of planer has c. 59° a. 45
a reciprocating motion d. 79° b. 59
past the tool head c. 65
while the table of the 400. Which of the following is not d. 50
shaper is stationary and a common drill shank?
the tool head has a. Bit 406. If the cutting edges of the
reciprocating motion b. Fluted drill are cut of different
d. One is larger than the c. Straight angles_____
other d. Taper a. The drill will not cut
b. The hole will be larger
394. A piece of tool steel is held 401. Tapered shanks are used on a than the drill
against an emery wheel will large drill press so that c. The hole will be smaller
give off_____ a. The drill can be than the drill
a. White sparks with stars centered more easily d. None of these
on the end b. The drill can be easily
b. Yellow sparks forced out of the sleeve 407. If the drill speed is too great,
c. Dull sparks with a drift it will
d. Green sparks c. The shank can be a. Cut faster
reground when worn b. Loose its temper
395. If you use dry a dry grinding d. The shank will not turn c. Cut slower
wheel for sharpening tool bits when cutting d. Not cut
dip the end of he bit in water
frequently to prevent _____ 402. A tool bit for cutting 408. Soda added to water is used
a. Annealing the cutting American National Thread for cooling instead of plain
edge of the bit should be ground with a ____ water because
b. Burning your fingers a. 30 deg. angle a. It reduces the heat
c. Hardening of the tip b. 45 deg. angle generated
d. The tip from crystalling c. 60 deg. angle b. It improves the finish
d. 56 deg. Angle c. It overcomes rusting
396. The tool used to check d. All of these
internal pipe threads is called 403. Center drilling is the
a. Ring gage operation of 409. If the angle of the drill is less
b. Plug gage a. Drilling a center in an than 59 deg
c. Center gage odd-shaped of d of a. The drill will make
d. Thread gage metal larger hole
b. Drilling and b. The drill will make
397. The tool used to check countersinking with smaller hole
external pipe threads is called one tool c. The hole will take
a. Ring gage c. Centering with one tool longer to drill and more
b. Plug gage and drilling with one power is required to
c. Pitch gage another drive the drill
d. Center gage d. Drilling a center in a d. The drill will not center
piece of stock in a drill properly
398. The operation of truing a press
grinding wheel is known as 410. The name of shank use to
a. Dressing 404. When cutting a drill it will drill is
b. Centering squeal due to______ a. Stanley
c. Rounding a. Drill being ground b. Starret
d. Sizing property c. Miller
b. Drill being too hot d. Morse
399. The cutting angle on a drill c. Insuficient lubrication
for mild steel should be d. Any of these
411. The tool used to cut thread cutting tool to machine free 424. Electron beam machining
on pipe is called cutting brass is process is quite suitable for
a. Pipe tool a. 0 deg material having
b. Pipe vise b. 5 deg a. High melting point and
c. Pipe stock c. 30 deg high thermal
d. Pipe thread d. 10 deg conductivity
b. High melting point and
412. The instrument used to 419. A reamer is used to correct low thermal
reshaped a grinding wheel the conductivity
that is grounded or cut of a. Size and roundness of a c. Low melting point
rounds is called drilled hole d. Low thermal
a. Wheel cutter b. Size and position of conductivity
b. Wheel aligner drilled hole
c. Wheel emery c. Finish and position of 425. Grinding is what type of
d. Wheel Dresser drilled hole operation?
d. Depth of drilled hole a. Metal finish operation
413. The instrument used to b. Metal fusing operation
removed old packing glands 420. Which of the following is not c. Metal powdering
and stuffing boxes a common term relating to operation
a. Packing tools the classification of fits? d. None of these
b. Packing bills a. Tunking
c. Gland box clearance b. Snug 426. Grinding is done wherever
d. Packing stuff c. Bound a. Other machining
d. Medium force fit operations
414. Before drilling a hole in a pipe b. A large amount of
of metal it should be 421. An oversized hole is materials to be
a. Center punched produced by a drill removed
b. Marked with chalk a. Lips of a drill are of c. High accuracy is
c. Protracted unequal length required
d. Scribed b. Feed is too high d. Any of these
c. Insufficient coolant is
415. When measuring a drill for used 427. Laser beam machining
size, measure across the d. None of these process is used to
a. Shank machine___
b. Flute 422. The studs are used as coolant a. Thicker material
c. Lip in general machine shop b. Thinner material
d. Margin consists of c. Heavy materials
a. Solution of detergent d. Light materials
416. The size of drill is stamped on and water
a. Flute b. An emulsion of oil and 428. Twist drills are usually
b. Shank water considered suitable for
c. Margin c. Chemical solution machining holes having a
d. Point d. A straight mineral oil length less than
a. Two times its diameter
417. The tool used for cleaning 423. Two major factors which b. Five times its diameter
files is called determined the rpm of c. Four times its diameter
a. File cleaner milling cutter are the material d. Eight times its diameter
b. File card being cut and _____
c. File oilstone a. Number of teeth in 429. A hard grade grinding wheel
d. Scraper cutter is suitable for
b. Time allowed to finish a. Hard materials
418. Back rake angle for high the job b. Soft material
speed steel single point c. Diameter less grinder c. Semi hard materials
d. Depth d. Heavy load materials
430. In quick return mechanism of a. The blade is very costly a. Fine grains
shaping machine, the ram b. The space is not b. Coarse grains
stroke length is proportional sufficient to play the c. No grains
to new blade in the old cut d. Medium grains
a. Crank length c. The blade have very
b. Cam length sharp teeth 444. Concentricity of an outside
c. Ram length d. None of these diameter can be checked by
d. None of these a. Vernier caliper
437. Which part of the file is not b. Outside micrometer
431. The usual ratio of forward hardened c. Dial test indicator
and return stroke I quick a. Tang d. Tube micrometer
return mechanism of shaping b. Heel
machine is c. Point 445. Which gauge is used to check
a. 2:1 d. Handle internal threads
b. 4:3 a. Ring gauge
c. 3:2 438. Generally spiral fluted b. Plug gauge
d. 5:2 reamer has spirals of c. Thread plug gauge
a. Right hand d. None of these
432. The type and number of b. Left hand
bearing to be used for c. Straight 446. In case of limit of plug gauge,
spindles of machine depends d. Any of these which size will not enter into
on the hole
a. Type of spindle 439. In which screw thread the a. “GO” size
b. Type of cutter side – width of space-0.5p b. “Not GO” size
c. Load on bearing a. Knuckle c. “A and B both
d. None of these b. Buttress d. None of these
c. Square
433. The square head of d. Circle 447. Limit gauge is made to the
combination set is used for ____ sizes of the work to be
marking or checking the 440. A stud is which measured
engine is a. Have threads on one a. Actual and nominal
a. 90 deg only end b. Nominal and upper
b. 45 degree b. Require a nut limit
c. 90 and 45 degree c. Inserted in a plane hole c. Maximum and
d. Any angle between 0- d. None of these minimum
180 d. Nominal and upper
441. “18-8” stainless steel means limit
434. For general work, the cutting a. 18% tungsten and 8%
angle of a cold fist chisel is chromium 448. “GO” size limits is
ground at angle of b. 18% nickel and 8% a. Upper limit of shaft
a. 50 deg chromium b. Lower limit of hole
b. 60 deg c. 18% chromium and 8% c. Both A and B
c. 80 deg nickel d. Neither A or B
d. 70 deg d. 18% cobalt and 8%
cadmium 449. Lapping is done
435. Angle plate is made of a. To finish the job in fine
a. Closed grain cast iron 442. Which is the lightest metal degree
b. Cast steel a. Lead b. To control the size
c. High speed steel b. G.l. steel c. To get high quality
d. Tool steel c. Aluminum surface
d. Cast iron d. All of these
436. A new hack saw blade should
be used to old cut because 443. Hardened steel parts have
450. In which method a bore is 457. Which center is used for 464. Amount of automatic load in
finished to a very closed supporting open end of pipes: shaper is increased by taking
tolerance shells, etc., while turning or the crank pin
a. Lapping thread cutting a. At center of crank disc
b. Rapping a. Ball center b. Away from the center
c. Honing b. Pipe center c. Towards the center
d. Grinding c. Half center d. At the center
d. Dead center
451. Jig bushing are generally 465. In a shaper, the feed (metric)
made of 458. Included angle of dead is usually expressed as
a. Tool steel center is a. Mm/stoke
b. Carbon steel a. 60 deg b. m/stoke
c. Cast iron b. 45 deg c. Mm/revolution
d. High speed steel c. 65 deg d. None of these
d. 90 deg
452. Fixture clamps are generally 466. For cutting gear teeth in
made of 459. Angle of B.A screw thread is shaper, the _____tool is used.
a. Tool steel a. 90 a. “V” block
b. Case hardened mild b. 47.5 b. Form tool
steel c. 60 c. Gooseneck
c. High speed steel d. 45 d. Round nose
d. Carbon steel
460. Main alloying element of HSS 467. The standard ratio of cutting
453. When an external gear is is tool in return stroke in shape
meshed with the internal a. Chromium is
gear the gears will rotate in b. Cast iron a. 3:1
a. Same direction c. Tungsten b. 1:3
b. Opposite direction d. Carbon steel c. 3:2
c. Will not rotate d. 4:2
d. None of these 461. For accurate measurement
of bores, the best instrument 468. The feed in the shaper takes
454. Usual ratio of soluble oil and is place at
water used in coolant is a. Vernier caliper a. The beginning of return
a. 20:1 b. Plug gage stroke
b. 1:20 c. Dial indicator b. The middle of return
c. 10:1 d. Inside micrometer stoke
d. 1:10 c. The end of return
462. In hydraulic driven shaper, stroke
455. In internal cylindrical the metal is removed at d. At the cutting stroke
grinding the grinding wheel a. Lower speed
and work rotate in b. Higher speed 469. Which of the following quick
a. Same direction c. Average speed return mechanism is most
b. Opposite direction d. None of these widely used in most slotters
c. Neither A or B a. Slotter link and gear
d. Both A and B 463. In shaper machine, the mechanism
cutting speed (metric) is b. Whitworth mechanism
456. For grinding materials having expressed as c. Slotter disc mechanism
low tensile strength which a. m/s d. Hydraulic mechanism
abrasive is used b. m/min
a. Silicon carbide c. m/hr 470. If the clearance angle is more
b. Aluminum oxide d. Any of these than the required on slotter
c. Emery tool, then support cutting
d. Corrunduin tool will be
a. Great
 b. Less c. Parting line 484. The minimum recommended
c. Medium d. Blow/pin holes worm pitch diameter is ¼ in
d. None of these and the maximum is ____ in
478. In greater quantity, this a. 1 ¾ in
471. The clamping block is used to element is harmful to the b. 2 ¾ in
support the end of the strap is molten ferrous metal. c. 3 in
made of a. silicon d. 2 in
a. Wood b. aluminum
b. Steel c. Oxides 485. Some experiments made at
c. HSS d. Sulfur Cornell University showed
d. Cast iron that experience mechanic
479. To prevent engine vibration could break a ____ bolt due
472. Divide table planer has: to affect the surrounding to nut tightening
a. One table area. It is a standard practice a. 3/8 inch.
b. Two tables to isolate the engine and its b. 5/8 inch
c. One housing foundation by at least c. ½ inch
d. Two housing _____mm. d. 7/16 inch
a. 20
473. A planer which has a cutting b. 30
tool in or both stroke in is c. 25
a. Open side planer d. 36
b. Double housing planer
c. Universal planer 480. The brittleness in steel at
d. Pit planer elevated temperature is:
a. Hard drawn
474. The straddle milling is done b. Red shortness
by means of two c. Cold lap
a. Side milling cutters d. Residual stresses
b. Plain milling cutters
c. Face milling cutters 481. The only accredited National
d. Form cutters Organization for Mechanical
Engineers.
475. The formula to find out the a. PME
number of turn of the crank b. NME
for simple indexing is: c. POME
a. T = 20/N d. PSME
b. T = N/40
c. T = 40/N 482. Which of the following
d. T = N/20 product of combustion that
has a property of resilience?
476. The arc of action to circular a. Rubber
pitch or length of action to b. Grease
base pitch. c. Graphite power
a. approach ratio d. Graphite electrode
b. contact ratio
c. arc of action 483. One of the following
d. arc of approach materials is not mentioned
for wire rope pulley/sheave
477. Common defects applications
encountered in the foundry a. plastic
shop steel casting operating b. Iron
and also in welding practices c. Paper
a. cracks d. Copper alloy
b. Cold shot
 MACHINE DESIGN
PRIME ELEMENTS QUIZ ASSIGNMENT 21

1. A white metal, almost as bright as silver and is malleable and ductile and can be
welded. A. Nickel B. Aluminu C. White Iron D. Lead

2. It is a silvery dull, soft metal and the second lightest of all metals used in the industry.
A. Nickel B. Aluminum C. White Iron D. Lead

3. The least among iron ores for it contains many impurities, poor in iron contact and
commonly used in England. A. Hematite B. Magnetite C. Limanite D. Siderite

4. Which of the following is not considered to be precious metal? A. Silver B. Gold C.

Platinum D. Steel

5. It is an alloy of copper and zinc. It is approximately 1/3 zinc and 2/3 copper. A. Brass
B. Bronze C. Muntz metal D. silver

6. It is a copper-tin alloy and is named either bell metal or brown metal. A. Brass B.
Bronze C. Muntz metal D. silver

7. It is a furnace that converts pig iron into steel by oxidizing out the surplus carbon and
using oxygen by throwing raw iron into the furnace. A. Open-heart furnace B. Electric
furnace C. Cupola D. Bessemer

8. The most commonly-used series in the bulk production of bolts, screws, nuts and
other general applications in the coarse-thread series. A. UNC B. UNF C. White iron D.
Lead

9. What is the actual torque ratio of gear set divided by its gear ratio? A. approach ratio
B. clearance C. contact ratio D. efficiency

1 0
10. Which of the following has low coefficient of expansion, corrosion resistant, weak in
strength, and used for non-ferrous applications as alloying elements? A. Aluminum B.
Aluminum oxide C. Copper oxide D. Copper

11. Which of the following material(s) is recommended for large sprocket of large speed
ratio and having firm engagement? A. nickel-chromium steel B. copper C. cast iron D.
aluminum

12. In which of the following carrying capacity where roller bearing is utilized better than
ball bearing? A. heavy load B. low load C. high temperature load D. reversing load

13. Which of the following materials having thermal expansion of about 10 times higher
than those of materials and has more heat generated during machining? A. Aluminum
B. Asbestos C. Plastic D. PVC

14. To avoid scoring in the bearing surface and the shaft on to contamination/
absorption of the time dirt in the bearing during operation/ lubrication the bearing
material to apply should have good ____________properties A. anti-scoring B.
corrosion resistance C. embeddability D. Conformability

15. What do impact test measure? A. Compactness B. Ductility C. Plasticity D.

Toughness

16. Which of the following types of gear transmit power at a certain angle? A. Bevel B.
Helix C. Herringbone D. Spur

17. Which of the following gasket material is not use for high temperature? A. Asbestos
B. Plastic nylon C. Rubberized D. Wool

18. How do you call a plane perpendicular to the gear axis? A. Normal plane B. Pitch
plane C. Plane of rotation D. Radius of gyration

1 0
19. Which of the following is the specification of molybdenum alloy? A. SAE 3XXX
B.SAE 4XXX C. SAE 5XXX D. SAE 6XXX

20. Which of the following is abundant for ferrous metals? A. Sulfur B. Phosphorous C.
Manganese D. Carbon

21. What machine is used to flatten surface on a vertical, horizontal or even angular
plane? A. Shaper machine B. power saw C. boring machine D. drilling machine

22. All of these are classifications of iron ore; except what? A. magnetite C. siderite B.
hematite D. sulfurite

23. It refers to the internal resistance of a material to being deformed and is measured
in terms of the applied load. A. stress C. ductility B. strain D. malleability

24. The property of a material which resists forces acting to pull the material apart. A
.tensile strength C. bending strength B. compressive strength D. torsional strength

25. The property of a material to resist loads that are applied A. magnetite C. siderite B.
hematite D. sulfurite

26. The property of a material to resist various kinds of rapidly alternating stresses. A.
fatigue strength B.bending strength C. compressive strength D. impact strength

27. The ability of a material to resist loads that are applied suddenly and often at high
velocity. A. fatigue strength B. bending strength C. compressive strength D. impact
strength

28. The ability of a material to stretch, ben, or twist w/out breaking or cracking.
A.Ductility B. Malleability C. Hardness D. Compressibility

1 0
29. Which of the ff. is considered to be the father of all machine tools? A. Lathe Machine
B.Boring Machine C. Drilling Machine D. Milling Machine

30. It is ability of a material to resist the loads that are applied suddenly and often at
high velocity. A. Fatigue strength B. Impact strength C.Hardness D.Shock strength

31. A steel of carbon range of 0.05to 0.03 percent is considered as what type of steel?
A. Low carbon steel B. High carbon steel C. Medium carbon steel D. Very high carbon
steel

32. A steel of carbon range of 0.30 to 0.45 percent a considered as what type of steel?
A. Low carbon steel B. High carbon steel C. Medium carbon steel D. Alloyed Steel

33. A steel of carbon range of 0.45 to 0.75 percent a considered as what type of steel?
A. Low carbon steel B. High carbon steel C. Medium carbon steel D. Alloyed Steel

34. A steel of carbon range of 0.45 to 0.75 percent a considered as what type of steel?
A. Low carbon steel B. High carbon steel C. Medium carbon steel D. Very high carbon
steel

35. Which of the ff. alloying elements of steel will tend to increase its strength w/out
decreasing its toughness or ductility and w/ its large quantities the steel become tough
but develop high resistance to corrosion and shock? A. chromium B. manganese C.
molybdenum D. nickel

36. Which of the ff. alloying elements of steel will produce the greatest hardening effect
like carbon and at the same time reduces the enlargement of its grain structure. A.
chromium B. manganese C. molybdenum D. nickel

37. Which of the ff. alloying elements of steel will produce fine grain structure and
promotes greater toughness and ductility? A. chromium B. manganese C. molybdenum
D. nickel

1 0
38. Which of the ff. alloying elements of steel w/c makes it extremely hard and
resistance to _w/out making it brittle? A. chromium B. manganese C. molybdenum D.
nickel

39. It is the elements used mostly in steels designed for metal cutting tools. The steels
added by this element are tough, hard and very resistant to wear. A. chromium B.
tungsten C. molybdenum D. nickel

40. It is the element whose chief function is to strengthen the ferrite. It is used w/
tungsten to develop red hardness or the ability to remain hard when red hot. A
.chromium B. cobalt C. molybdenum D. nickel

41. It also known as the strain drawing. It is the process whereby certain degree of
hardness is sacrificed in order to reduce brittleness and increase the toughness of steel
tool. A. Tempering B. Normalizing C. Annealing D. Quenching

42. It is the heat treatment of steel that produces extremely hard surface. The process
consists of exposing the steel to hot ammonia gas for some hours. A. Nitriding B.
Cyaniding C. Carburizing D. Ammonia bath

43. How do you call the metals that contain large amount of carbon content? A. ferrous
metal B. non ferrous metal C. base metal D. precious metal

44. All these are the basic kinds of cast iron , Except: A. gray iron B. malleable iron C.
white iron D. red iron

45. Which of the ff. are the basic kinds of cast iron is harder and more difficult to
machine because it contains carbon in carbide state? A. gray iron B. malleable iron C.
white iron D. wrought iron

46. How do you call metals that have no carbon content? A. ferrous metal B. malleable
iron C. non ferrous metal D. white iron

1 0
47. Which of the ff. is the type of cast iron that can stand more shock and blow than
regular cast iron? A. nodular iron B. malleable iron C. wrought iron D. gray iron

48. It is a metal of almost pure iron, ductile and very tough. It can be hammered and
shaped at high temperature. It has a fibrous structure because the presence of slag. A.
nodular iron B. malleable iron C. wrought iron D. gray iron

49. A type of ferrous metal w/c is formed by remelting pig iron and scrap iron in a cupola
furnace. It is brittle and usually gray in color, and commonly used in making casting. A.
cast iron B. malleable iron C. wrought iron D. gray iron

50. A classification of iron ore w/c contains 70% iron when pure and 50% iron when
mined. A. Hematite B. Magnetite C. Limanite D. Siderite

1 0
 A. drilling machine
B. boring machine
ELEMENTS 01 C. milling machine
1. Heating above the transformation D. broaching machine
range, usually 1300oF to 1350oF, and 7. A machine tool use to form metal
cooling slowly to soften the metal parts by removing metal from a work
and increase in machining piece
A. annealing By the use of a revolving cutter with
B. hardening many teeth each tooths having a
C. normalizing cutting edge which removes its
D. tempering share of the stock.
2. Heating above the transformation A. drilling machine
temperature and quenching usually B. boring machine
in oil, for the purpose of increasing C. milling machine
the hardness D. broaching machine
A. annealing 8. A machine tool used to sharpen or
B. hardening shape tools by using an abrasive
C. normalizing wheel.
PRIME ELEMENTS D. tempering
3. Reheating to temperature below the
A. tool grinder
B. shaper
MACHINE DESIGN transformation range, followed by
any desired rate of cooling to attain
C. planer
D. power saw
II the desired properties of the metal.
A. annealing
9. A machine tool used to enlarge a
hole by means of an adjustable
B. hardening cutting tool with only one cutting
C. normalizing edge.
D. stress relieving A. drilling machine
4. Heating to subcritical temperature, B. boring machine
about 1100oF to 1300oF and holding C. milling machine
at that temperature for a suitable D. broaching machine
time for the purpose of reducing 10. A machine tool used to cut metal by
internal residual stresses. parts of light, medium, and large
A. annealing sections using a reciprocating
B. hardening hacksaw blade.
C. normalizing A. tool grinder
D. stress relieving B. shaper
5. Heating some 100oF above the C. planer
transformation range with D. power saw
subsequent cooling to below that 11. A machine tool used to machine flat
range in still air at room temperature or plane surfaces with a single point
to produce uniform structure of the cutting tool.
metal. A. tool grinder
A. annealing B. shaper
B. hardening C. planer
C. normalizing D. power saw
D. tempering 12. A machine tool used for production
6. A machine tool used for producing or flat surfaces on pieces too large
holes in metal by the use of cutting or too heavy to hold in a shaper.
tool called drill. A. tool grinder
1
 B. shaper A. milling machine B. plasticity
C. planer B. broaching machine C. malleability
D. power saw C. lathe machine D. elasticity
13. A machine tool used to finish D. boring machine 26. The shop term used to include the
internal or external surfaces such as 20. A metal turning machine in which marking of inscribing of center
holes or keyways by the use of a the work while revolving on a points, circle, arcs, or straight line
cutter called broach, which has a horizontal axis is acted upon by a upon metal surfaces, either curved
series of cutting edges or teeth. cutting tool which is made to move or flat, for the guidance of the
A. drilling machine slowly (feed) in a direction more or worker
B. boring machine less parallel to the axis of the work A. shaping
C. milling machine (longitudinal feed) B. hobbing
D. broaching machine A. milling machine C. laying out
14. An alloy of copper and tin B. broaching machine D. shaping
A. brass C. lathe machine 27. An operation of sizing and finishing a
B. bronze D. boring machine hole by means of a cutting tool
C. iron 21. A machine tool used in the having several cutting edges
D. tin production of flat surfaces on pieces A. notching
15. An alloy of copper and zinc too large or too heavy or perhaps B. piercing
A. brass too awkward to hold in a shaper C. turning
B. bronze A. shaper D. reaming
C. iron B. planer 28. The operation of making a cone
D. tin C. tool grinder shaped enlargement of the end of a
16. The process of forming metal parts D. power saw hole, as for a recess for a flat head
by the use of dies after the metal is 22. It consist of shaping a piece by screw
heated to its plastic range bringing it into contact with a A. countersinking
A. rolling rotating abrasive wheel B. knurling
B. forging A. drilling C. squaring
C. turning B. boring D. perforating
D. casting C. grinding 29. The operation of enlarging a hole by
17. The process of forming a metal parts D. broaching means of an adjustable cutting tool
by the use of a powerful pressure 23. A tool used in measuring diameters with only one cutting edge
from a hammer or press to obtain A. caliper A. drilling
the desired shape after the metal B. nanometer B. broaching
has been heated to its plastic range C. tachometer C. grinding
A. rolling D. pyrometer D. boring
B. forging 24. Used to true align machine tools, 30. An imaginary circle passing through
C. turning fixtures, and works, to test and the points at which the teeth of the
D. casting inspect trueness of finished work, meshing gears contact each other
18. A manganese steel containing and too compare measurement A. pitch circle
approximately 0.20% carbon either heights or depths or many B. addendum circle
A. SAE 1320 other measurement C. deddendum circle
B. SAE 1230 A. dial gauge D. base circle
C. SAE 2340 B. dial indicator 31. A type of bolt for use in bolting
D. SAE 4230 C. tachometer wooden parts together or wood to
19. A machine tool in which metal D. speedometer metal,. It has a portion of shank just
removed by means of a revolving 25. The ability of the metal to be underneath a round head, which is
cutter with many teeth, each tooth deformed considerably without designed to keep the bolt from
having a cutting edge which remove rupture turning in the wood when the nut t
its share of the shock A. ductility tightened
2
 A. u-bolt 38. A kind of gear to transmit motion B. backslash
B. carriage bolt from one shaft to another shaft at C. flank
C. eye bolt an angle to the first D. width
D. stud bolt A. bevel gear 45. A mechanism which usually do the
32. The number of teeth per inch of B. worm gear indexing in a machine tool
pitch diameter and which gives C. helical gear A. slotter
some indications of the gear teeth D. spiral gear B. chuck
A. module 39. The uniform heating of steel above C. dividing head
B. pitch circle the usual hardening temperatures, D. indexer
C. diametral pitch followed by cooling freely in air 46. A material that can wear away a
D. circular pitch A. annealing substance softer than itself
33. The distance from the center of one B. normalizing A. phenol
tooth of a gear the center of the C. hardening B. abrasive
next consecutive tooth measured of D. tempering C. tungsten
the pitch 40. The operation of cooling a heated D. chromium
A. circular pitch piece of work rapidly by dipping it in 47. A cylindrical bar of steel with threads
B. module water, brine or oil formed around it and grooves or
C. diametral pitch A. quenching flutes running lengthwise in it,
D. pitch circle B. tempering intersecting with the threads to form
34. The portion of the gear tooth that C. normalizing cutting edges. It is used to cut
projects above or outside the pitch D. annealing internal threads
circle 41. A method in softening a piece of A. groove
A. top relief metal that is too hard to machine B. lap
B. deddendum and is done by heating steel slowly C. tap
C. addendum above the usual hardening D. flute
D. tooth space temperature keeping it at the heat 48. A set of gages consisting of thin
35. The portion of the gear tooth space for ½ to 2 hours then cooling slowly, strips of metal of various thickness
that is cut below the pitch circle and preferably in a furnace mounted in a steel case or holder
is equal to the addendum plus the A. broaching and is widely used for measuring
clearance B. quenching and checking clearances
A. top root C. normalizing A. feeler gage
B. deddendum D. annealing B. depth gage
C. addendum 42. The total permissible variation in C. line center gage
D. top land the size of a dimension the D. lay-out gage
36. When meshed with a gear it is used difference between the limits of size 49. A machine tool which is very similar
to change rotary motion to A. allowance to a shaper except that the ram
reciprocating motion B. tolerance reciprocates vertically rather than
A. gear shaft C. variance horizontally
B. gear tooth D. interference A. Lathe
C. gear rack 43. The operation of machining the end B. Grinder
D. gear motor of a work piece to make the end C. Planer
37. A kind of gears for heavy duty square with the axis D. Slotter
works where a large ratio of speed is A. squaring 50. A machine tool principally to
required and are extensively used in B. buffing machine flat or plane surfaces with
speed reducers C. lapping single-point cutting tool
A. bevel gear D. honing A. Grinder
B. worm gear 44. The clearance between the tooth B. Shaper
C. helical gear profiles of a gear tooth C. Planer
D. spiral gear A. toothspace D. Turret machine
3
51. A kind of bolts which has no head 57. A gripping device with two or more C. Soldering
an instead has threads on both ends adjustable jaws radially D. Brazing
A. Stud bolts A. Chuck 64. Fusion process of metal by means is
B. Acme threaded bolts B. Carriage heated into a state of fusion
C. Square threaded bolts C. Tailstock permitting it to flow together into a
D. Hex bolts D. Fan solid joint
52. A kind of chuck which has a 58. Steel Balls for ball bearings are A. Electric arc welding
reversible jaws which could be manufactured by B. Gas welding
adjusted separately A. Turning C. Spot welding
A. Collet chuck B. Rolling 65. Joining metal by means of high
B. Independent chuck C. Casting current at low voltage. During the
C. Four jaw chuck D. Cold heading passage of current, pressure by the
53. A tool which when pressed into 59. Addendum of a cycloidal gear tooth electrodes produces a forge weld
finished hole in a piece of work, A. Cycloid A. Spot welding
provides centers on which the piece B. Epicycloids B. Resistance welding
may be turned or otherwise C. Straight rack C. Steam welding
machined D. Involutes D. Gas welding
A. Mash 60. In a lathe, it comprises the main 66. A device for accurately measuring
B. Butt spindle, the necessary mechanism diameters
C. Mandrel for obtaining the various spindle A. Radiometer
D. Wobble speed and also certain gears which B. Profilometer
54. A kind of chuck which should not are used to operate the quick C. Spectrometer
used where extreme accuracy is change gear mechanism D. Micrometer
required A. Headstock 67. A group of thin steel strips for
A. Collet chuck B. Carriage measuring clearances
B. Magnetic chuck C. Tailstock A. Distortion gage
C. Four jaw chuck D. Fan B. Feeler gage
D. Universal chuck 61. The process of heating a piece of C. Line center gage
55. The process of checking or steel to a temperature within or D. Deflection gage
producing checkers on the surface of above critical range and cooling 68. A hand tool used to measure engine
a piece by rolling checkered rapidly crank web deflection
depression into the surface A. Normalizing A. Distortion gage
A. Knurling B. Hardening B. Feeler gage
B. Hemming C. Annealing C. Line center gage
C. Breading D. Tempering D. Deflection gage
D. Embossing 62. Welding operation in which a non- 69. A hand tool used to measure tension
56. Its fits the main spindle of a lathe ferrous filler metal melts at a on bolts
and is so called because its acts as a temperature below that of the metal A. Indexer
bearing surface on which the work joined but is heated above 450oC B. Torque wrench
rest. It revolves with the work. When A. Gas welding C. Torsionmeter
compared with the hardness of the B. Spot welding D. Tensionmeter
dead center in the tailstock, is C. Brazing 70. The permissible variation in the size
usually soft, and is so made since it D. Steam welding of a dimension the difference
does not work 63. Uniting two pieces of metal by between the limits of size
A. Ram center means of a different metal which A. Allowance
B. Spindle center applied between the two in molten B. Variance
C. Live center state C. Clearance
D. Bearing center A. Casting D. Tolerance
B. Welding
4
71. A gear with teeth on the outer C. Drilling machine 86. A stainless steel is obtained
cylindrical surface D. Milling machine principally by the use of the
A. Outer gear 79. It is used principally to machine flat following alloying element
B. External gear or plane surfaces with single point A. Chromium
C. Spiral gear tool B. Tungsten
D. Helical gear A. Drill C. Carbon
72. The diameter of a circle coinciding B. Shaper D. Phenol
with the top of the teeth of an C. Planer 87. One of the following is not a
internal gear D. Grinder common term relating to the
A. Pitch diameter 80. Cutting a hole by means of rotating classification of fits
B. Root diameter tool or the work may revolve and to A. Tunking
C. Internal diameter the tool remain fixed as in the lathe B. Snug
D. Central diameter A. Piecing C. Medium force fit
73. A circle coinciding with a tangent B. Notching D. Bound
to the bottom of the tooth space C. Boring 88. Hearing bone Gears are gears which
A. Root circle D. Perforating A. Do not operate on parallel shaft
B. Pitch circle 81. One of the following is not a tap B. Have a line contact between
C. Addendum circle used for cutting threads in holes teeth
D. Deddendum circle A. Tapping tap C. Consist of two left handed helical
74. The total depth of a tooth space, B. Plug tap gears
equal to addendum plus deddendum C. Taper tap D. Tend to produce thrust on the
A. Full depth D. Bottoming tap shafts
B. Working depth 82. An index or dividing head 89. Internal stresses existing in a welded
C. Whole depth A. A part of drill press connection
D. Deddendum B. Used to rotate work A. Are not relieved when the
75. The depth of tooth space below the C. Not used to cut helixes weld is peened
pitch circle D. Always manually operated B. Are not relieved by heat
A. Deddendum 83. Galvanized iron is a term referring to treatment
B. Working depth iron coated with C. May be relieved when the weld
C. Full depth A. Tin is peened
D. Tooth depth B. Zinc D. Are relieved by x-ray analysis
76. The ________ of gear to each mm C. Magnesium 90. In general the design stress and
pitch diameter D. Aluminum factor of safety are related as follows
A. Diametral pitch 84. The moment of inertia of a rectangle A. Design stress=ultimate stress
B. Module whose base is “b” and height “h” times factor of safety
C. Circular pitch about its base is B. Design stress=ultimate
D. English module A. bh3/12 stress divided by factor of
77. A machine tool in which abrasive B. bh/46 safety
wheel is used as cutting tool obtain C. bh3/3 C. Design stress=design stress
a very smooth finish D. bh2/4 divided by factor of safety
A. Drill 85. In usual spur gearing D. Design stress= factor of safety
B. Grinder A. The pitch circle and the base divided by design stress
C. Planer are the same 91. A group of thin steel strips for
D. Shaper B. Working depth includes the measuring clearance
78. It is used to produce a variety of clearance A. Depth cut
surfaces by using a circular type C. Tooth outline are usually B. Feeler gage
cutter with multiple teeth involute curves C. Lay-out gage
A. Grinding machine D. Tooth outline are always D. Clearance gage
B. Shaper cycloidal curves
5
92. A hand tool used to measure tension C. Quenching A. 6mm
on bolts D. Normalizing B. 8mm
A. Indexer 100. A machine tool used to C. 4mm
B. Torsion meter machine flat surfaces D. 10mm
C. Torque wrench A. Shaper 7. The common deoxidizer and
D. Tension meter B. Planer cleanser of steel, forming oxides and
93. A material that can wear away a C. Grinder sulfates that are carried off in the
substance softer than itself D. Lathe slag.
A. Abrasive ELEMENTS 02 A. Manganese
B. Corrosive 1. A machine tool in which an abrasive B. Carbon
C. Tungsten wheel is used a cutting to obtain a C. Tungsten
D. Alloy very smooth finish. D. Sulfur
94. The material used in high speed A. planer 8. A highly transparent and exceeding
processes B. shaper hard crystalline stone of almost pure
A. High speed steel C. power saw carbon.
B. Chromium D. grinder A. Gold
C. Cast iron 2. It is used to produce a variety of B. Diamond
D. Carbon steel surfaces by using a circular type C. Bronze
95. An alloy of copper and zinc cutter with a multiple teeth. D. Crystalline
A. Chromium A. milling machine 9. A fine grained, salty silica rock used
B. Bronze B. broaching machine for sharpening edge tools.
C. Brass C. beading machine A. Eutectoid
D. Aluminum D. hemming machine B. Austenite
96. An alloy of copper, tin, and small 3. A heavy rotating body which serves C. Oilstone
amount of phosphorous as reservoir for absorbing and D. Pearlite
A. Chromium redisturbing kinetic energy. 10. An amorphous solid made by using
B. Bronze A. Shaft silica with a basic oxide.
C. Brass B. Governor A. Pearlite
D. Aluminum C. Flywheel B. Rock
97. The process of working metals by D. Puncher C. Silicon
the application of sudden blows or 4. A kind of gear used for heavy duty D. Glass
by steady pressure works where a large ratio of speed is 11. A soft yellow metal, known since
A. Welding required and is extensively used in ancient times a precious metal
B. Extrusion speed reducers. which values are based.
C. Forging A. Helical gear A. Solidus
D. Swaging B. Worm gear B. Bronze
98. A welding operation in which a non- C. Bevel gear C. Gold
ferrous filler metal melts at a D. Spiral gear D. Austenite
temperature below that of the metal 5. A kind of gear used to transmit 12. The operation of cooling a heated
joined but is heated above 450oC motion from one shaft to another piece of work rapidly by dropping it
A. Brazing shaft at angle to the first. in water, brine or oil.
B. Spot welding A. Helical gear A. Normalizing
C. Gas welding B. Worm gear B. Quenching
D. Projection welding C. Bevel gear C. Annealing
99. The operation of cooling a heated D. Spiral gear D. Squeezing
piece of work rapidly by dipping it in 6. The minimum thickness to steel 13. A device used to prevent leakage of
water, brine, or oil members exposed to weather and media.
A. Tempering accessible for painting is: A. Seal
B. Annealing B. Packing
6
 C. Teflon trace of any permanent set 27. A kind of gear used to transmit
D. Graphite remaining upon a complete motion from one shaft to another
14. A welding operation in which a non- withdrawal of the stress. shaft at an angle to the first.
ferrous filler metal melts at a A. Ultimate limit A. Spiral gear
temperature below that of the metal B. Proportional limit B. Worm gear
joined but is heated above 450oC. C. Endurance limit C. Helical gear
A. Arc welding D. Elastic limit D. Bevel gear
B. Brazing 21. The total permissible variation in the 28. Which of the following is not a
C. Spot welding size of a dimension; the difference classification of iron ore?
D. Butt welding between the limits of the size. A. Hematite
15. The process of working metals by A. Deformation B. Magnetite
the application of sudden blows r by B. Variance C. Sulfurite
a steady pressure. C. Tolerance D. Siderite
A. Trimming D. Allowance 29. Which of the following metals will
B. Welding 22. Fluid film desired between two respond to heat treatment?
C. Forging surfaces having relative sliding A. Cast iron
D. Lancing motion. B. Medium carbon steel
16. The process of producing a variety of A. Lube oil C. Wrought iron
surface by using a circular type B. Lubrication D. Low carbon steel
cutter with multiple teeth. C. Graphite 30. Which of the following is a non-
A. Piercing D. Grease magnetic?
B. Cutting 23. Flexible materials used to seal A. Cast iron
C. Embossing pressurized fluids, normally under B. Alloy steel
D. Milling dynamic conditions. C. Cast steel
17. The softening of meals by heat A. Packing D. Manganese steel
treatment and most commonly B. Teflon 31. The ability of metal to withstand
consists of heating the metals up to C. Seals without breaking down is:
near molten state cooling them very D. Safety shield A. Stress
slowly. 24. A total resistance that a material B. Strength
A. Quenching offers to an applied load. C. Strain
B. Tempering A. Flexure D. Elasticity
C. Annealing B. Stress 32. A machining operation whereby the
D. Forming C. Elasticity tool reciprocates and the feed is
18. The maximum stress induced in a D. Rigidly stationary is called:
material when subjected to 25. A property of material which relates A. Shaping
alternating or repeated loading the lateral strains to the longitudinal B. Reaming
without causing failure. strain. C. Planning
A. Elastic limit A. Rigidity D. Turning
B. Proportional limit B. Elasticity 33. Any material that retards the flow of
C. Rupture strength C. Poisson’s ratio electricity used to prevent passage
D. Endurance limit D. Deflection or escape of electric current from
19. The total deformation measured in 26. A kind of gear used for heavy duty conductors.
the direction of the line of stress. works where a large ratio of speed is A. Insulators
A. Axial deformation required and is extensively used in B. Bricks
B. Elongation speed reducers.] C. Ceramics
C. Strain A. Spiral gear D. Refractories
D. Unit stress B. Bevel gear 34. A metallic element and the only
20. The maximum stress to which a C. Worm gear metal that is liquid at ordinary
material can be subjected without a D. Helical gear temperature.
7
 A. Austenite C. Sulfurite 48. The operation of cooling heated
B. Mercury D. Siderite piece of work rapid by dropping it in
C. Manganese 42. Of the following metals, which will water, brine or oil.
D. Martensite respond to heat treatment? A. Quenching
35. An alloy of cooper and zinc. A. Cast iron B. Tempering
A. Aluminum B. Wrought iron C. Annealing
B. Bronze C. Medium iron D. Normalizing
C. Brass D. Low carbon iron 49. A machine tool in which an abrasive
D. Nickel 43. Materials, usually ceramics, wheel is used as a cutting tool to
36. Usually a copper- tin alloy is: employed where resistance to very obtain a very degree of accuracy
A. Aluminum high temperature is required, as for and a smooth finish on metal parts,
B. Nickel furnace lining and metal melting including soft and hardened steel.
C. Brass pots. A. Grinding machine
D. Bronze A. Refractories B. Broaching machine
37. A tool with hardened points used for B. Gaskets C. Milling machine
scribing circles or laying of C. Insulators D. Boring machine
distances. D. Safety shield 50. A machine tool used principally to
A. Trammel 44. The softening of metals by heat machine flat or place surfaces with a
B. Caliper treatment and most commonly single point cutting tool.
C. Divider consists of heating the metals up to A. Shaper
D. Micrometer near molten state and then cooling B. Planer
38. Name of mechanism which a them very slowly. C. Grinder
welding operator holds during gas A. Annealing D. Broaching machine
welding and at the end of which the B. Hardening 51. A tool used for measuring diameters.
gases are burned to perform the C. Normalizing A. Micrometer
various gas welding operations. D. Tempering B. Tachometer
A. Mash 45. The process of producing of variety C. Pyrometer
B. Core of surfaces by using a circular type D. Caliper
C. Wobble cutter with multiple teeth. 52. The total permissible variation in the
D. Torch A. Milling size of a dimension; the difference
39. The maximum stress to which a B. Drilling between the limits of the size.
material may be subjected before C. Broaching A. Tolerance
failure occurs. D. Boring B. Fits
A. Rupture stress 46. The process of working metals by C. Allowance
B. Yield stress the application of sudden blows or D. Clearance
C. Ultimate stress by steady pressure. 53. The maximum stress to which a
D. Allowable stress A. Rolling material can be subjected without a
40. The maximum stress induced in a B. Forging trace of any permanent set
material when subjected to alternate C. Castling remaining upon a complete
or repeated loading without causing D. Turning withdrawal of the stress.
failure. 47. A welding operation in which a non- A. Ultimate stress
A. Yield point ferrous filler metal melts at a B. Rupture stress
B. Ultimate point temperature below that of the metal C. Elastic limit
C. Endurance point joined but is heated 450oC. D. Proportional limit
D. Proportional point A. Spot welding 54. Fluid film desired between two
41. Which of the following is not a B. Gas welding surfaces having relative sliding
classification of iron ore? C. Brazing motion.
A. Hematite D. Arc welding A. Lubrication
B. Magnetic B. Seal
8
 C. Packing D. Reaming 69. The motor power in kW of a punch
D. Safety shield 62. A machining operation whereby the press, 50.8 mm hole diameter, 25.4
55. A total deformation measured in the tool reciprocates and the feed is mm thickness, for soft steel is:
direction of the line of stress. stationary. A. 15kW
A. Stress A. Reaming B. 21 kW
B. Strain B. Planning C. 7.5 kW
C. Endurance limit C. Shaping D. 30 kW
D. Poisson’s ratio D. Turning 70. The range of motor power in kW of a
56. A kind of gear for heavy duty works 63. Which of the following metals is easy cylindrical grinding machine 600 x
where a large ratio of speed is to chisel? 50 mm wheel size, 2,400 to 4, 200
required and is extensively used in A. Alloy steel mm center distance is:
speed reducers. B. Stainless steel A. 11 to 15 kW
A. Worm gear C. Manganese steel B. 16 to 21 kW
B. Spiral gear D. Cast iron steel C. 7.5 kW
C. Helical gear 64. Ferrous metals contain relatively D. 22 to 30 kW
D. Bevel gear large amount of: 71. The motor power in kW of a forming
57. A kind of gear used to transmit A. Carbon r bending machine 1600 mm width,
motion from one shaft to another B. Manganese 508 mm head movement is:
shaft at an angle to the first. C. Phosphorous A. 7.5 kW
A. Worm gear D. Sulfur B. 11 kW
B. Spiral gear 65. Which of the following is not a C. 15 kW
C. Helical gear strength property of metals? D. 22 kW
D. Bevel gear A. Tensile strength 72. The range of motor power in kW of
58. The area of a machine shop where B. Rocking strength an Engine lathe machine, average
metal is being melted to form a new C. Fatigue strength service 1000 mm to 13000 mm
shape is: D. Torsional strength swing.
A. Welding area 66. Which of the following is not a kind A. 11 to 15 kW
B. Mass production area of mandrel? B. 7.5 to 10 kW
C. Foundry area A. Expansion mandrel C. 16 to 21 kW
D. Tool and die B. Contraction mandrel D. 22 to 30 kW
59. A machine used in shaping metal by C. Taper mandrel 73. A machine which can flatten
means of abrasive wheel or removal D. Gang mandrel surfaces on a horizontal, vertical or
metals with an abrasive is called: 67. Which of the following is not a part angular plane.
A. Planer of lathe machine? A. Shaper
B. Power saw A. Tailstock B. Planer
C. Shaper B. Headstock C. Power saw
D. Grinding machine C. Carriage D. Tool grinder
60. The ability of materials or metal to D. Fan 74. The ability of metal to withstand
resist being crushed is: 68. The range of motors power in kW of forces thus following a number of
A. Compressive strength a universal milling machine, max twists.
B. Fatigue strength feed movement 1270 mm A. Shear strength
C. Torsional strength lengthwise, 355 mm lateral, and 508 B. Bearing strength
D. Bending strength mm vertical is: C. Endurance limit
61. A machining operation whereby the A. 11 to 15 kW D. Deformation
tool rotates while the feed is B. 16 to 21 kW 75. A property of material which relates
stationary. C. 7.5 to 10 kW the lateral strain to the longitudinal
A. Shaping D. 22 to 30 kW strain.
B. Milling A. Stress
C. Turning B. Modulus of elasticity
9
 C. Poisson’s ratio alternating repeated loading without C. shaver
D. Deformation causing failure. D. sensor
76. A total resistance that a material A. ultimate strength 91. Ratio of pitch diameter to the
offers to an applied load. B. yield strength number of teeth.
A. Friction force C. endurance strength A. diametrical pitch
B. Stress D. rupture strength B. module
C. Rigidity 84. Fluid film desired between two C. contact ratio
D. Compressive force surfaces having relatively sliding D. helical overlap
77. A total deformation measured in the motion. 92. A circle the radius of which is equal
direction of the line of stress. A. lube oil to the distance from the gear axis to
A. Strain B. graphite the pitch point.
B. Elasticity C. packing A. pitch circle
C. Elongation D. lubrication B. root circle
D. Contraction 85. The ability of material to withstand C. base circle
78. An alloy of copper and zinc. loads without breaking down D. outside circle
A. Aluminum A. Strength 93. A circle coinciding with a tangent to
B. Brass B. Elasticity the bottom of the tooth spaces.
C. Bronze C. Rigidity A. pitch circle
D. Chromium 86. Materials usually ceramics, B. root circle
79. A metallic element of copper-tin employed where resistance to very C. base circle
alloy. high temperature is required as D. outside circle
A. Aluminum furnace lining and metal melting 94. The method of cold working by
B. Brass pots. compression.
C. Bronze A. Insulators A. Broaching
D. Chromium B. Gaskets B. Lapping
80. A metallic element and only metal C. Packing C. Piercing
that is liquid at ordinary D. Refractories D. Reaming
temperature. 87. An allying element used principally 95. A machine tool used finish internal
A. Aluminum to produce stainless steel. and external surfaces by the use of
B. Mercury A. aluminum cutter called a broach, which has a
C. Zirconium B. brass series of cutting edges or teeth.
D. Zinc C. bronze A. lathe machine
81. Any material that retard the flow of D. chromium B. broaching machine
electricity, used to prevent passage 88. A coating material used to produce C. planer
or escape of electric current from galvanized iron. D. shaper
conductors. A. Zirconium 96. A cutting tool which is made to move
A. Refractory B. Zinc slowly while acting on the work
B. Ceramics C. Aluminum which is revolving on a horizontal
C. Coating materials D. Chromium axis.
D. Insulation 89. A group of thin steel strips used for A. lathe machine
82. The maximum stress to which a measuring clearance. B. broaching machine
material may be subjected before A. feeler gage C. planer
failure occurs. B. tachometer D. shaper
A. rupture strength C. micrometer 97. A machine tool used to produce a
B. ultimate strength D. caliper variety of surfaces by using circular
C. yield strength 90. A hand tool used to measure tension type cutter with multiple teeth.
D. proportional limit in bolts. A. lathe machine
83. The maximum stress induced in a A. torque wrench B. milling machine
material when subjected to B. tachometer C. broaching machine
10
 D. grinding machine B. Turning A. Planer machine
98. Used in the production of flat C. Forging B. Power saw
surfaces on pieces too large or too D. Rolling C. Shaper machine
heavy to hold in a shaper. 5. The operation of cooling a heated D. Grinding machine
A. Planer piece of work rapidly by dipping it 12. Which of the following is not a part
B. Shaper water, brine or oil of lathe machine?
C. Grinder A. Quenching A. Tailstock
D. Shaver B. Annealing B. Fan
99. Used to machine flat or curved C. Tempering C. Carriage
surfaces with a tool which moves in D. Normalizing D. headstock
a reciprocating motion. 6. The softening of metals by heat 13. Which of the following is easy to
A. planer treatment and most commonly chisel?
B. shaper consists of heating the metal up to A. Cast iron
C. grinder near molten state and then cooling it B. Alloy steel
D. lathe very slowly. C. Cast steel
100. Which of the following A. Annealing D. Manganese steel
materials that can wear away a B. Indexing 14. A machining operation whereby the
substance softer than itself C. Knurling tool reciprocates and the feed is
A. Abrasive D. Soldering stationary is called:
B. Tungsten 7. A fluid film desired between surfaces A. Shaping
C. Carbon relative sliding motion. B. Reaming
D. corrosive A. Lube oil C. Planning
ELEMENTS 03 B. Lubrication D. Turning
1. A tool with hardened steel points C. Grease 15. Which of the following is not a kind
used for scribing or lying of D. Graphite of mandrel?
distances. 8. A kind of gear used to transmit A. Expansion mandrel
A. Plain scriber motion from one shaft to another B. Taper mandrel
B. divider shaft at an angle to the first. C. Contraction mandrel
C. a trammel A. Worm gear D. Foundry mandrel
D. hermaphrodite B. Bevel gear 16. The area of the machine shop where
2. A machine tool used principally to C. Helical gear the metal is being melted to form a
machine flat or plane surfaces with a D. Spur gear new shape.
single pointed tool. 9. The principal material used in high A. Welding area
A. Shaper production metal working tools. B. Mass production area
B. Planer A. Hyper- Eutectoid C. Foundry area
C. Drill B. High speed steel D. Tool and die area
D. Power saw C. Lead 17. Which of the following is not used to
3. A machine tool in which an abrasive D. High speed carbon temper steel?
wheel is used as cutting tool to 10. A heavy rotating body which serves A. Brine salt bath
obtained a very smooth finish. as a reservoir for absorbing and B. Oil bath
A. Broaching machine redistributing kinetic energy. C. Water bath
B. Planer A. Flywheel D. Steam bath
C. Tool grinder B. governor 18. Which of the following is not a kind
D. Milling machine C. shaft of cast iron?
4. The process of working metals by D. puncher A. Malleable iron
the application of sudden blows or 11. A machine used in shaping metal by B. Head iron
by steady pressure. means of an abrasive wheel or the C. Gray iron
A. Casting removal of metals with an abrasive D. White iron
is called:
11
19. The kind of center which is being B. Fusion A. Strain
attached and meshed to the C. Boiling B. Elasticity
tailstock spindle which is also static D. Superheating C. Stress
while the work is rotating: 27. Special metal formed when to or D. Resilience
A. Dead center more metals are melted together. 34. The deformation that results from a
B. Live center A. Monel stress and is expressed in terms of
C. Focal center B. Alloy the amount of deformation per inch.
D. Work center C. Solder A. Elongation
20. Which of the following is not part of D. Hastalloy B. Strain
the headstock? 28. The ability of a moving body to C. Poisson’ s ratio
A. Spindle perform work. D. Elasticity
B. Anvil A. Internal energy 35. The ability of the material to return
C. Back gear B. Potential energy to its original shape after being
D. Motor C. Kinetic energy elongated or distorted when the
21. Which process does not belong to D. Flow work forces are released.
the group? 29. Hardening the surface of iron- based A. Elasticity
A. Vise grip alloys by heating them below the B. Brittleness
B. Adjustable wrench melting point in contact with a C. Plasticity
C. Torque wrench carbonaceous substance. D. Creep
D. Feeler gage A. Carburizing 36. The last point at which a material
22. Which does not belong to the group? B. Normalizing may be stretched and still return to
A. Resistance welding C. Mar tempering its unreformed condition upon
B. Soldering D. Hardening release of the stress.
C. Hardening 30. Any materials that retard the flow A. Rupture limit
D. Brazing electricity used to prevent or B. Elastic limit
23. Substances having sufficient carbon escaped of electric current from C. Proportional limit
and /or hydrogen for chemical conductors. D. Ultimate limit
oxidation to produce exothermally, A. Bricks 37. The ratio of stress to strain within
worthwhile quantities of heat. B. Insulators the elastic limit.
A. Lubrication C. Refractories A. Creep
B. Graphite D. Ceramics B. Modulus of rigidity
C. Grease 31. Material, usually ceramics, employed C. Modulus of elasticity
D. Fuels where resistance to very high D. Poisson’s ratio
24. A device that measures atmospheric temperature is required, as for 38. The ability of a metal to withstand
pressure. furnace linings and metal melting forces that causes a member to
A. Piezometer pots. twist.
B. Hydrometer A. Bricks A. Shear strength
C. Barometer B. Insulators B. Tensile strength
D. Odometer C. Refractories C. Bearing strength
25. The mass of the body per unit of D. ceramics D. Torsional strength
volume. 32. A device used to prevent leakage of 39. The ability of a material to resist
A. Volume flow rate media. being crushed.
B. Density A. Packing A. Tensile strength
C. Weight B. Safety shield B. Shearing strength
D. Mass C. Gasket C. Compressive strength
26. Subjecting a substance to a high D. Seals D. Torsion
temperature below the fusion point, 33. The internal resistance a material 40. The ability of metal to stretch, bend
usually to make it friable. offers to being deformed and is or twist without breaking or
A. Calcinations measured in terms of applied load. cracking.
12
 A. Elasticity A. Light blue D. Depends on heat treatment
B. Ductility B. Brown 56. In order to realize the advantage of
C. Brittleness C. White fluid friction, it is essential to have:
D. plasticity D. Light orange A. No oil film
41. The property of a material which 49. For high speed application the B. Converging oil film
resist forces action to pull the minimum number of teeth in small C. Diverging oil film
material apart. sprocket should be: D. Parallel oil film in bearing
A. Shear strength A. 18 to 24 57. Zero axial thrust is experienced in:
B. Tensile strength B. 26 to 30 A. Herringbone gears
C. Compressive strength C. 14 to 18 B. Helical gears
D. Bearing strength D. 24 to 28 C. Bevel gears
42. The property of steel which resist 50. The good deoxidizer in steel melting D. Worm gears
indention or penetration. is: 58. The maximum size of the fillet weld
A. Hardness A. Manganese that can be made in single pass is:
B. Elasticity B. Aluminum A. 3mm.
C. Ductility C. Silicon B. 6mm.
D. None of these D. All of these C. 7mm.
43. In the color coding of pipe, the color 51. In majority of machine members, the D. 4mm.
for a pipeline of air is: dumping capacity of the material 59. Muntz metal contains:
A. Light blue should be: A. Copper-aluminum
B. Light orange A. Zero B. Copper-tin
C. White B. High C. Copper- nickel
D. Green C. Low D. Copper-zinc
44. In the color coding of pipe, the color D. Anything 60. Steel balls for bearings are
for a pipeline of water is: 52. For moderate speed for mating manufactured by:
A. Light blue gears, the ideal ratio of contact is: A. Cold- heading
B. Green A. 1.35- 1.55 B. Casting
C. Brown B. 1.0- 1.3 C. Rolling
D. Silver grey C. 1.25- 1.45 D. turning
45. In the color coding of pipe, the color D. 1.25- 4.0 61. In general, alloys with high nickel
for a pipeline of steam is: 53. The diameter of the screw thread is content retain toughness to quite
A. Light orange same as: low temperature up to:
B. White A. Pitch diameter A. -250 SF
C. Silver grey B. Minor diameter B. -360 SF
D. Light blue C. Major diameter C. -320 F
46. The color for a pipeline of electricity D. Base diameter D. -240°F
in the color coding of pipe is: 54. For high corrosion resistant stainless 62. Manganese steel standard
A. Light orange steel, what maximum chromium designation is SAE___.
B. White content is required? A. 8XXX
C. Silver grey A. 8.0% B. 10XX
D. Light blue B. 4.5% C. 12XX
47. In the color coding of pipe, the color C. 1.5% D. 13XX
for a pipeline of communication is: D. 8.5% 63. A Babbitt is:
A. Light blue 55. At quite low temperatures (say- 75 A. A cutectic of iron and iron
B. White deg. C) the notched bar impact phosphide
C. Brown value of steel. B. A gadget for measuring
D. Light orange A. Increases significantly volume
48. The color pipeline of fuel oil in the B. Decreases significantly
color coding of pipe is: C. Remain unchanged
13
 C. A measure of magnetic 71. Spiral gears are suitable for B. Key
induction produces in a transmitting: C. Bolts
material A. Any power D. Shaft
D. Antimony bearing lead or B. Small power 80. A flange coupling is:
tin alloy C. Huge power A. Used for collinear shafts
64. The minimum thickness of steel D. Pulsating power B. Used for non- collinear
members exposed to weather and 72. The type of cam used for low and shafts
accessible for painting is: moderate speed engines is C. Rigid coupling
A. 4mm. generally: D. Flexible
B. 6mm. A. Flat 81. Universal coupling is:
C. 8mm. B. Involute A. Used for collinear shafts
D. 10mm. C. Tangent B. Used for non- collinear
65. In standard coarse thread bolt, the D. Harmonic shafts
stress concentration is maximum at: 73. Gears for wrist watches are C. Type of flange coupling
A. All over the surface generally manufactured by: D. Rigid coupling
B. Top surface A. Molding 82. In powder metallurgy the process of
C. Root B. Stamping heating the cold pressed metal
D. Flank C. Galvanizing powder is called:
66. Which of the following ropes are D. Honing A. deposition
more flexible? 74. The rated life of a bearing changes: B. granulation
A. 6 to 19 A. Inversely as cube of load C. sintering
B. 6 to 7 B. Directly as load D. precipitation
C. 8 by 19 C. Inversely as square of load 83. Which one is different from the
D. 6 by 37 D. Inversely as load remaining?
67. Tools usually used in wood pattern 75. The best material for brake drum is: A. nitriding
making in foundry shop. A. Cast iron B. cyaniding
A. Band saw B. Steel C. electroplating
B. Saws and chisels C. Aluminum D. flame hardening
C. Knives and drills D. Wrought iron 84. Splines are used when:
D. Grinder 76. An elastic body whose primary A. The power transmitted is low
68. Type of bolt commonly used in the function is to deflect under load. B. The power to be transmitted
construction that is threaded in both A. Spring is high
ends. B. Brake C. Axial relative motion
A. Hex bolt C. Stopper between shafts and hub
B. Stud bolt D. Clutch is necessary
C. Square threaded bolts 77. Belt slip may take place because of: D. Flame hardening
D. Eye bolt A. Loose load 85. Delta iron occurs at temperature of:
69. Cast iron flywheels are commonly B. Heavy belt A. Room temperature
designed with factor of safety of: C. Driving pulley too small B. Above melting point
A. 9 to 12 D. All of the above C. Between 1400˚C and
B. 8 to 11 78. Rankine formula is valid up to 1539˚C
C. 10 to 13 slender ratio of: D. Between 1000˚C and
D. 7 to 10 A. 60 1400˚C
70. Which of the type of chain is used in B. 80 86. The most important element that
motorcycle? C. 120 controls the physical properties of
A. Silent D. 150 steel is:
B. Pintle 79. In flange coupling the weakest A. Carbon
C. Brush roller element should be: B. Silicon
D. Long A. Flange C. Manganese
14
 D. Tungsten B. Brass 3. What is the range of the tensile
87. The process commonly used for C. Bronze strength of common varieties of cast
thermo-plastic material is: D. Cast iron iron?
A. Die casting 96. Projection welding is: a. 40-60 Mpa
B. Injection molding A. Continuous spot welding b. 150-180 Mpa
C. Shell molding process c. 840-500 Mpa
D. Cold forming B. Used to make mesh d. 1500-1650 Mpa
88. Select the one that has highest C. Multi- spot welding 4. Fatigue failure occurs when a part is
specific gravity: process subjected to:
A. Aluminum D. Used to form a. Compressive stress
B. Lead 97. Least shrinkage allowance is b. tensile stress
C. Brass provided in the case of which of the c. torsional stress
D. High carbon steel following: d. fluctuating stress
89. Age- hardening is related with: A. Cast iron 5. Paramagnetic alpha iron changes to
A. Cast iron B. Aluminum gamma iron at what temperature?
B. Stainless steel C. White cast iron a. 440°C
C. Duralumin D. Brass b. 910°C
D. German silver 98. Dilatometer is used to find out which c. 70°C
90. Foundry crucible is made of: property of molding sand. d. 1639°C
A. German silver A. permeability 6. The diameter of the washer is
B. Lead B. hot strength generally:
C. Mild steel C. fineness a. Equal to the diameter of the bolt
D. Graphite D. moisture content b. Slightly more than the
91. Trimming process is a process 99. Hastalloy contains: diameter of the bolt
associated with: A. Copper c. Slightly less than the diameter of
A. Forging B. Nickel and copper the bolt
B. Machining of metals C. Copper and aluminum d. Of any size that suits the
C. Electroplating D. Nickel and molybdenum application
D. Press work 100. The maximum harden ability of any 7. The compression members tend to
92. A plug gauge is used to measure: steel depends on: buckle in the direction of:
A. Taper bores A. The carbon content a. Axis of load
B. Cylindrical bores B. The chemical composition b. Minimum cross-section
C. Spherical holes C. The grain size c. least radius of gyration
D. Screw threads D. The alloying elements present d. perpendicular to the axis of load
93. In arc welding operations the current Elements 04 8. A kinematic chain needs a minimum:
value is decided by: 1. The hardness of steel increases if it a. 2 links and 2 turning pairs
A. Length of welded portion contains: b. 3 links and turning pairs
B. Voltage across the arc a. Martensite c. 4 links and 4 turning pairs
C. Size of the electrode b. Pearlite d. 3 links and 2 turning pairs
D. Thickness of plate c. Austenite 9. Which of the following pairs is
94. The phenomenon of weld decay d. All of the above formed if shaft is revolving in a
takes place in: 2. How do you call steel with 0.8% bearing?
A. Cast iron carbon and 100% pearlite? a. Lower pair
B. Brass a. Austenite b. turning pair
C. Bronze b. Solidus c. sliding pair
D. Stainless steel c. hyper-eutectoid d. cylindrical pair
95. Choose the one that will have d. eutectoid 10. How many links are there in a
highest cutting speed. pantograph?
A. Aluminum a. 3
15
 b. 4 b. No lubricant d. To connect shaft so that the
c. 5 c. grease as lubricant driven shaft will rotate with
d. 6 d. water as lubricant the driving shaft and to
11. A pantograph is a mechanism 18. Which of the following could be the disconnect them at all
having: effect of cold working? 24. The height of tooth above the pitch
a. Lower pairs a. Increases the fatigue circle or the radial distance between
b. rolling pairs strength pitch circle and top land of the tooth.
c. spherical pairs b. Decreases the fatigue strength a. Addendum
d. higher pairs c. Has no influence on fatigue b. Deddendum
12. Which of the following describes the strength c. top root
“slip” in belt drive? d. None of these d. top land
a. Loss in power 19. In testing a material for endurance 25. How do you call the distance of the
b. Difference between the angular strength, it is subjected to: tooth which is equal to the sum of
velocities of two pulley a. Completely reversed load the addendum and deddendum?
c. Difference between linear speed b. Static load a. Full depth
of the rim c. impact load b. working depth
d. Difference between the d. dynamic load c. whole depth
linear speed of the rim of 20. Coaxing is the procedure of d. pitch
pulley and the on it increasing: 26. Which of the following stresses that
13. Which of the following is the a. Metal strength is independent of loads?
orientation of the axes of the two b. Metal hardness by surface a. Shear stress
shafts in cross helical worm? treatment b. residual stress
a. Parallel c. Metal resistance to corrosion by c. design stress
b. Non-parallel coating d. yield stress
c. Intersecting d. Fatigue limit by 27. Which of the following is not used to
d. non-parallel and non- overstressing the metal by resemble the shape of tool bit?
intersecting successively increasing a. Thread cutting
14. In case of gears the addendum is loadings b. center cutting
given by: 21. Up to what percent thickness of c. square nose
a. One module plate, edge preparation for welding d. round nose
b. 2.16 x module is not needed? 28. What is the recommended best
c. 1.57 x module a. 2 mm cutting angle of drill for work on
d. 1.25 / module b. 4 mm steel or cast iron?
15. How do you call a cam where in the c. 8 mm a. 39 degrees
follower reciprocates or oscillates in d. 12 mm b. 49 degrees
a plane parallel to its axis? 22. Arc blow takes place in: c. 59 degrees
a. Circular cam a. Gas welding d. 29 degrees
b. reciprocating cam b. Arc welding when straight 29. Copper and most of its alloys can be
c. cylindrical cam polarity is used hardened by which of the following?
d. oscillating cam c. Arc welding when reversed a. Cold working
16. How are gears for watches generally polarity is used b. Soaking
manufactured? d. Welding stainless steel c. Patenting
a. Die casting 23. What is the function clutch in the d. case hardening
b. Machining on hobber machine tool? 30. Types of V-belts to use in a driving
c. power metallurgy process a. Alignment of drive pulley with speed of 360 rpm and
d. stamping b. Lowering of drive transmitting 5 Hp.
17. Rope brake dynamometer uses c. To insure that two shafts line up a. Type A belts
what? at high speed b. type B belts
a. Oil as lubricant c. type C belts
16
 d. type D belts 38. If the first digit in AISI and SAE c. an irregular curve
31. Which of the following is not an designations is one (1), then, it d. a sudden break
angle measuring device? indicates what? 45. In case of a knuckle joint, the pin is
a. Bevel protector a. Carbon steel most likely to fail in:
b. Sine bar b. Nickel steel a. Shear
c. combination square c. molybdenum steel b. Tension
d. angle iron d. chromium steels c. Compression
32. The mould for casting ferrous 39. Which of the following where the d. double shear
materials in continuous casting gear tooth vernier is used to 46. A single ply leather belt running at a
process is made of what material? measure? belt velocity of 300 ft/min is likely to
a. Copper a. Module transmit per inch of width:
b. Medium carbon steel b. Gear tooth profile a. 2.5 Hp
c. high carbon steel c. gear tooth thickness of gear b. 3.0 Hp
d. low carbon steel tooth c. 4.0 Hp
33. Clutch slippage while clutch is d. pitch line thickness of gear tooth d. 5.0 Hp
engaged is especially noticeable: 40. A cold chisel is made of what? 47. At what temperature range where
a. During idling a. Mild steel ferromagnetic alpha iron exists?
b. A low speed b. German silver a. Below 723°C
c. during acceleration c. high carbon steel b. 700-910°C
d. during braking d. cast iron c. 1000-1440°C
34. In general, to engage securely and 41. It is the ability of a material to d. above 1539°C
prevent dragging, what is the absorb energy when deformed 48. How do you call a body having
clearance between release bearing elastically and return it when identical properties all over?
and release collar in the clutch? unloaded. a. Heterogeneous
a. 2-3 mm A. Creep b. Homogeneous
b. 4-5 mm B. fatigue strength c. Elastic
c. 6-7 mm C. resilience d. Ductile
d. 8-9 mm D. toughness 49. How is the material described if it
35. Piston compression rings are made 42. Which of the following cams where recovers its original dimensions
of what material? the follower reciprocates or when the load is removed?
a. Steel oscillates in a plane parallel to the a. Elastic
b. Bronze axis of rotation? b. Plastic
c. Aluminum a. Cam curves c. Brittle
d. cast iron b. radial cam d. Malleable
36. What is the usual value of helix c. cylindrical cam 50. What is the percentage of carbon in
angle of a drill? d. tangential cam Eutectoid steel?
a. 120 degrees 43. Which of the following cams where a. .02%
b. 110 degrees the follower reciprocates or b. 0.30%
c. 60 degrees oscillates in a plane perpendicular c. 0.63%
d. 30 degrees its axis of rotation? d. 0.80%
37. What is meant by drossing? a. Tangential cam 51. The presence of sulphur in pig iron
a. A method of cleaning the casting b. cam curves makes:
b. An inspection method for casting c. radial cam a. The casting unsound
c. A method of deoxidation of d. cylindrical cam b. It brittle
molten metal 44. During tensile test, which of the c. it hard
d. The formation of oxides on following stress-strain curve(s) fits d. it is easy machinable
the molten metal surface for a glass rod? 52. What is the effect of alloying zinc to
a. A straight line copper?
b. A parabola a. Increases hardness
17
 b. Impart free-machining a. 0 c. strength of the column
c. Improve hardness and strength b. 5 d. All of the above
d. Increases strength and c. 7 66. At what temperature those Gamma
ductility (if added up to 10- d. 9 irons exist?
30%) 60. Which of the following will best a. Between 910°C and 1400°C
53. The imperfection in the crystal describe sunken key? b. Between 1400°C and 1539°C
structure of metal is: a. The keyway is helical along shaft c. Near melting point
a. Impurity b. The keyway is cut in shaft only d. Room temperature
b. fracture slip c. The keyway is cut in hub only 67. The behavior of metals where in
c. slip d. The key is cut in both shaft strength of a material is increased
d. dislocation and hub and the ductility is decreased on
54. When is the pressure release in 61. Which of the following where turn heating at a relatively low
resistance welding? buckle has? temperature after cold working is
a. After the weld cools a. Left hand threads on one called:
b. During heating period end and right hand threads a. Clustering
c. After completion of current on other end b. Twinning
d. Just at the time of passing the b. Right hand threads on both ends c. screw dislocation
current c. Left hand threads on both ends d. strain aging
55. If t is the thickness of sheet to be d. No threads 68. Which of the following statement(s)
spot welded, then electrode tip 62. Which of the following is the best is correct in “carbon steel castings”?
diameter is equal to _____. process for butt welding of two a. the percentage of carbon is
a. t2 plates each of which is 25 mm thick? less than 1.7%
b. 2 sq rt. of t a. Electro slag welding b. the percentage of carbon is
c. sq. rt. of t b. Gas welding between 1.7% to 2%
d. 1.5 sq. rt. of 1 c. submerge arc welding c. the percentage for alloying
56. A twist drill specified by which of the d. steam welding elements is controlled
following? 63. Which of the following statement(s) d. none of the above
a. Its shank and diameter is correct for an oil less bearing: 69. Aluminum alloys for pressure die
b. Shank, material and flute size a. The oil film is maintained by casting:
c. its diameter and lip angle supplying oil under pressure a. Must not be free from hot
d. shank, material and b. The oil film pressure is produced shortness
diameter only by rotation of the journal b. Must have iron as one of the
57. Which of the following is used to c. Do not need external supply constitutions
measure the clearance between the of lubricant c. Must not posses
value and tappet of an automobile d. Grease is needed to be applied considerable fluidity
engine? after some intervals d. Must be light
a. Shape gauge 64. The working load P for a chain for 70. Which of the following is the
b. slip gauge crane applications is expressed in maximum in 18-4-1 high speed
c. feeler gauge terms of diameter of link “d” in cm steel?
d. vernier scale as follows. a. Tungsten
58. Speedometer drive is generally a. P=1.5d2 b. Chromium
taken from: b. P=25d2 c. Argon
a. Gear box c. P=50d2 d. iron
b. fan belt d. P=500d2 71. Super conductors:
c. flywheel 65. The column splice is used for a. Exist at temperature below
d. front wheel increasing: 10K
59. What is the usual percentage of cut a. Cross-sectional area of the b. Are the dense metals without
on the return stroke of hacksaw column voids
blade? b. Length of the column c. Are non-metallic substances
18
 d. Are the purest forms of metals d. rammer 87. Which of the following metals is non-
72. When large number of components 79. Which of the following does not have magnetic?
ate turned and parted off from a bar, to be lubricated when drilling? a. Cast iron
the chuck generally used is: A. Brass b. alloy steel
a. Two jaw chuck B. Steel c. cast steel
b. Four jaw chuck C. Monel d. manganese steel
c. collet chuck D. mild steel 88. A machining operation whereby the
d. magnetic chuck 80. The tool used in precision work to tool reciprocated and the feed is
73. Cutting speed for some materials smooth or enlarge holes is called a: stationary.
are as under which one of the a. Round out a. Planning
following could be cutting speed for b. drift pin b. Shaping
brass? c. reamer c. Turning
a. 30 m/min d. protractor d. reaming
b. 40 m/min 81. When measuring a drill for size, 89. Which of the following is not a tap
c. 80 m/min measure across the: used for cutting threads in holes?
d. 50 m/min a. Margins a. Tapping tap
74. If V is the volume of metal in casting b. Flutes b. plug tap
and A is its surface area, then the c. Shank c. tapper tap
time of solidification will be d. point d. bottoming tap
proportional to: 82. How do you call the tool used for 90. Herring bone gears are gears which:
a. V2 , 1/A cleaning files? a. Do not operate on parallel shafts
b. 1/V2 , A2 a. File cleaner b. Have a line contact between
c. V , 1/A2 b. file card the teeth
d. V2 , 1/A2 c. file oilstone c. Consists of two left handed
75. The draft allowance on metallic d. scraper helical gears
pattern as compared to wooden 83. The melting point of Babbitt is d. Tend to produce thrust on the
ones is: approximately: shafts
a. More a. 1000°F 91. Which of the following statements is
b. Same b. 650°F true for the internal stresses existing
c. Less c. 750°F in a welded connection?
d. more or less depending on size d. 500°F a. Internal stresses are not relieved
76. Arc metal patterns are used for: 84. How is tubing measured? by heat treatment
a. Precision castings a. Inside diameter b. Internal stresses are not
b. Small castings b. outside diameter relieved when weld is
c. Large castings c. thickness of wall peened
d. Large scale production of d. wire gage c. Internal stresses may be relieved
castings 85. Which of the following metals will when weld is peened
77. What tool is used in foundry for respond to heat treatment? d. Internal stresses are relieved by
repairing the mould? a. Cast iron x-ray analysis
a. Swab b. wrought iron 92. Stainless steel is obtained principally
b. Gagger c. medium carbon steel by the use of which of the alloying
c. Bellows d. low carbon steel elements?
d. rammer 86. the ability of metal to withstand a. Chromium
78. What tool is used in foundry for loads without breaking down is: b. Nickel
smoothening and cleaning out a. stress c. Carbon
depression in the mould? b. strength d. tungsten
a. Swab c. strain 93. Galvanized iron is a term referring to
b. Gagger d. elasticity iron coated with:
c. Bellows a. Tin
19
 b. Zinc 99. How do you call the ratio of the b. Spindle
c. Magnesium volumetric strain? c. Motor
d. aluminum a. Modulus in shear d. Back pressure
94. Which of the following is not a b. Stress to strain ratio 7. Which of the following is not used to
common term relating to the c. volumetric ratio temper steel?
classification of fits? d. bulk modulus a. Oil bath
a. Tunking 100. Hearing bone gears are gears which: b. Brine/salt bath
b. Snug a. Do not operate parallel shafts c. Steam bath
c. medium force fit b. Have a line contact between d. Water bath
d. bound the teeth 8. Which of the following is not a kind
95. In usual spur gearing, which of the c. Tend to produce and thrust on of cast iron?
following statement(s) is correct? the shafts a. Gray iron
a. Pitch circles and base circles are d. Consists of two left handed b. White iron
the same helical gears c. Malleable iron
b. Working depth includes the ELEMENTS 05 d. Lead iron
clearance 1. The ability of metals to stand loads 9. A machinery operation whereby the
c. Tooth outline are usually without breaking down: tool rotates while the feed is
involute curves a. Strain stationary.
d. Tooth outline are usually b. Stress a. Shaping
cycloidal curves c. Elasticity b. Milling
96. In general, the design stress and d. Strength c. Turning
factor of a\safety are related as 2. Which of the following is not a d. Reaming
follows: classification of iron ore: 10. What process does not belong to the
a. Design stress=ultimate stress a. Siderite group?
times factor of safety b. Hermatite a. Brazing
b. Design stress= ultimate c. Sulfurite b. Soldering
stress divided by factor of d. Magnetite c. Hardening
safety 3. Ferrous metals contains a relative d. Resistance welding
c. Factor of safety= design stress large amount of: 11. Which tool does not belong to the
divided by ultimate stress a. Manganese group?
d. Ultimate stress=factor of safety b. Carbon a. Vice grip
divided by design stress c. Sulfur b. Feeler gage
97. In usual spur gearing, the: d. Phosphorous c. Torque wrench
a. Pitch circle and base circle are 4. Which of the following metal is easy d. Adjustable wrench
the same to chisel? 12. Which of the following metals is non
b. Working depth includes a. Alloy steel – magnetic?
clearance b. Manganese steel a. Manganese steel
c. Tooth outline are always c. Stainless steel b. Cast steel
cycloidal curves d. Cast iron c. Alloy steel
d. Tooth outline are usually 5. The ability of material or metal to d. Cast iron
involute curves resist being crushed is: 13. One important skill that operators of
98. Which of the following is the not the a. Fatigue strength machine tools must have is an
other name of circumferential stress b. Bending strength understanding of measurement
for thin walled cylinders. c. Torsional strength which demands:
a. Hoop stress d. Compressive strength a. Speed
b. girth stress 6. Which of the following is not part of b. Precision
c. tangential stress the headstock? c. Sociability
d. longitudinal stress a. Anvil d. Neatness

20
 d. 1.25 / module b. 4 mm steel or cast iron?
15. How do you call a cam where in the c. 8 mm a. 39 degrees
follower reciprocates or oscillates in d. 12 mm b. 49 degrees
a plane parallel to its axis? 22. Arc blow takes place in: c. 59 degrees
a. Circular cam a. Gas welding d. 29 degrees
b. reciprocating cam b. Arc welding when straight 29. Copper and most of its alloys can be
c. cylindrical cam polarity is used hardened by which of the following?
d. oscillating cam c. Arc welding when reversed a. Cold working
16. How are gears for watches generally polarity is used b. Soaking
manufactured? d. Welding stainless steel c. Patenting
a. Die casting 23. What is the function clutch in the d. case hardening
b. Machining on hobber machine tool? 30. Types of V-belts to use in a driving
c. power metallurgy process a. Alignment of drive pulley with speed of 360 rpm and
d. stamping b. Lowering of drive transmitting 5 Hp.
17. Rope brake dynamometer uses c. To insure that two shafts line up a. Type A belts
what? at high speed b. type B belts
a. Oil as lubricant c. type C belts
16

d. type D belts 38. If the first digit in AISI and SAE c. an irregular curve
31. Which of the following is not an designations is one (1), then, it d. a sudden break
angle measuring device? indicates what? 45. In case of a knuckle joint, the pin is
a. Bevel protector a. Carbon steel most likely to fail in:
b. Sine bar b. Nickel steel a. Shear
c. combination square c. molybdenum steel b. Tension
d. angle iron d. chromium steels c. Compression
32. The mould for casting ferrous 39. Which of the following where the d. double shear
materials in continuous casting gear tooth vernier is used to 46. A single ply leather belt running at a
process is made of what material? measure? belt velocity of 300 ft/min is likely to
a. Copper a. Module transmit per inch of width:
b. Medium carbon steel b. Gear tooth profile a. 2.5 Hp
c. high carbon steel c. gear tooth thickness of gear b. 3.0 Hp
d. low carbon steel tooth c. 4.0 Hp
33. Clutch slippage while clutch is d. pitch line thickness of gear tooth d. 5.0 Hp
 engaged is especially noticeable: 40. A cold chisel is made of what? 47. At what temperature range where
a. During idling a. Mild steel ferromagnetic alpha iron exists?
b. A low speed b. German silver a. Below 723°C
c. during acceleration c. high carbon steel b. 700-910°C
d. during braking d. cast iron c. 1000-1440°C
34. In general, to engage securely and 41. It is the ability of a material to d. above 1539°C
prevent dragging, what is the absorb energy when deformed 48. How do you call a body having
clearance between release bearing elastically and return it when identical properties all over?
and release collar in the clutch? unloaded. a. Heterogeneous
a. 2-3 mm A. Creep b. Homogeneous
b. 4-5 mm B. fatigue strength c. Elastic
c. 6-7 mm C. resilience d. Ductile
d. 8-9 mm D. toughness 49. How is the material described if it
35. Piston compression rings are made 42. Which of the following cams where recovers its original dimensions
of what material? the follower reciprocates or when the load is removed?
a. Steel oscillates in a plane parallel to the a. Elastic
b. Bronze axis of rotation? b. Plastic
c. Aluminum a. Cam curves c. Brittle
d. cast iron b. radial cam d. Malleable
36. What is the usual value of helix c. cylindrical cam 50. What is the percentage of carbon in
angle of a drill? d. tangential cam Eutectoid steel?
a. 120 degrees 43. Which of the following cams where a. .02%
b. 110 degrees the follower reciprocates or b. 0.30%
c. 60 degrees oscillates in a plane perpendicular c. 0.63%
d. 30 degrees its axis of rotation? d. 0.80%
37. What is meant by drossing? a. Tangential cam 51. The presence of sulphur in pig iron
a. A method of cleaning the casting b. cam curves makes:
b. An inspection method for casting c. radial cam a. The casting unsound
c. A method of deoxidation of d. cylindrical cam b. It brittle
molten metal 44. During tensile test, which of the c. it hard
d. The formation of oxides on following stress-strain curve(s) fits d. it is easy machinable
the molten metal surface for a glass rod? 52. What is the effect of alloying zinc to
a. A straight line copper?
b. A parabola a. Increases hardness
17
 b. Impart free-machining a. 0 c. strength of the column
c. Improve hardness and strength b. 5 d. All of the above
d. Increases strength and c. 7 66. At what temperature those Gamma
ductility (if added up to 10- d. 9 irons exist?
30%) 60. Which of the following will best a. Between 910°C and 1400°C
53. The imperfection in the crystal describe sunken key? b. Between 1400°C and 1539°C
structure of metal is: a. The keyway is helical along shaft c. Near melting point
a. Impurity b. The keyway is cut in shaft only d. Room temperature
b. fracture slip c. The keyway is cut in hub only 67. The behavior of metals where in
c. slip d. The key is cut in both shaft strength of a material is increased
d. dislocation and hub and the ductility is decreased on
54. When is the pressure release in 61. Which of the following where turn heating at a relatively low
resistance welding? buckle has? temperature after cold working is
a. After the weld cools a. Left hand threads on one called:
b. During heating period end and right hand threads a. Clustering
c. After completion of current on other end b. Twinning
d. Just at the time of passing the b. Right hand threads on both ends c. screw dislocation
current c. Left hand threads on both ends d. strain aging
55. If t is the thickness of sheet to be d. No threads 68. Which of the following statement(s)
spot welded, then electrode tip 62. Which of the following is the best is correct in “carbon steel castings”?
diameter is equal to _____. process for butt welding of two a. the percentage of carbon is
a. t2 plates each of which is 25 mm thick? less than 1.7%
b. 2 sq rt. of t a. Electro slag welding b. the percentage of carbon is
c. sq. rt. of t b. Gas welding between 1.7% to 2%
d. 1.5 sq. rt. of 1 c. submerge arc welding c. the percentage for alloying
56. A twist drill specified by which of the d. steam welding elements is controlled
following? 63. Which of the following statement(s) d. none of the above
a. Its shank and diameter is correct for an oil less bearing: 69. Aluminum alloys for pressure die
b. Shank, material and flute size a. The oil film is maintained by casting:
c. its diameter and lip angle supplying oil under pressure a. Must not be free from hot
d. shank, material and b. The oil film pressure is produced shortness
diameter only by rotation of the journal b. Must have iron as one of the
57. Which of the following is used to c. Do not need external supply constitutions
measure the clearance between the of lubricant c. Must not posses
value and tappet of an automobile d. Grease is needed to be applied considerable fluidity
engine? after some intervals d. Must be light
a. Shape gauge 64. The working load P for a chain for 70. Which of the following is the
b. slip gauge crane applications is expressed in maximum in 18-4-1 high speed
c. feeler gauge terms of diameter of link “d” in cm steel?
d. vernier scale as follows. a. Tungsten
58. Speedometer drive is generally a. P=1.5d2 b. Chromium
taken from: b. P=25d2 c. Argon
a. Gear box c. P=50d2 d. iron
b. fan belt d. P=500d2 71. Super conductors:
c. flywheel 65. The column splice is used for a. Exist at temperature below
d. front wheel increasing: 10K
59. What is the usual percentage of cut a. Cross-sectional area of the b. Are the dense metals without
on the return stroke of hacksaw column voids
blade? b. Length of the column c. Are non-metallic substances
18
 d. Are the purest forms of metals d. rammer 87. Which of the following metals is non-
72. When large number of components 79. Which of the following does not have magnetic?
ate turned and parted off from a bar, to be lubricated when drilling? a. Cast iron
the chuck generally used is: A. Brass b. alloy steel
a. Two jaw chuck B. Steel c. cast steel
b. Four jaw chuck C. Monel d. manganese steel
c. collet chuck D. mild steel 88. A machining operation whereby the
d. magnetic chuck 80. The tool used in precision work to tool reciprocated and the feed is
73. Cutting speed for some materials smooth or enlarge holes is called a: stationary.
are as under which one of the a. Round out a. Planning
following could be cutting speed for b. drift pin b. Shaping
brass? c. reamer c. Turning
a. 30 m/min d. protractor d. reaming
b. 40 m/min 81. When measuring a drill for size, 89. Which of the following is not a tap
c. 80 m/min measure across the: used for cutting threads in holes?
d. 50 m/min a. Margins a. Tapping tap
74. If V is the volume of metal in casting b. Flutes b. plug tap
and A is its surface area, then the c. Shank c. tapper tap
time of solidification will be d. point d. bottoming tap
proportional to: 82. How do you call the tool used for 90. Herring bone gears are gears which:
a. V2 , 1/A cleaning files? a. Do not operate on parallel shafts
b. 1/V2 , A2 a. File cleaner b. Have a line contact between
c. V , 1/A2 b. file card the teeth
d. V2 , 1/A2 c. file oilstone c. Consists of two left handed
75. The draft allowance on metallic d. scraper helical gears
pattern as compared to wooden 83. The melting point of Babbitt is d. Tend to produce thrust on the
ones is: approximately: shafts
a. More a. 1000°F 91. Which of the following statements is
b. Same b. 650°F true for the internal stresses existing
c. Less c. 750°F in a welded connection?
d. more or less depending on size d. 500°F a. Internal stresses are not relieved
76. Arc metal patterns are used for: 84. How is tubing measured? by heat treatment
a. Precision castings a. Inside diameter b. Internal stresses are not
b. Small castings b. outside diameter relieved when weld is
c. Large castings c. thickness of wall peened
d. Large scale production of d. wire gage c. Internal stresses may be relieved
castings 85. Which of the following metals will when weld is peened
77. What tool is used in foundry for respond to heat treatment? d. Internal stresses are relieved by
repairing the mould? a. Cast iron x-ray analysis
 a. Swab b. wrought iron 92. Stainless steel is obtained principally
b. Gagger c. medium carbon steel by the use of which of the alloying
c. Bellows d. low carbon steel elements?
d. rammer 86. the ability of metal to withstand a. Chromium
78. What tool is used in foundry for loads without breaking down is: b. Nickel
smoothening and cleaning out a. stress c. Carbon
depression in the mould? b. strength d. tungsten
a. Swab c. strain 93. Galvanized iron is a term referring to
b. Gagger d. elasticity iron coated with:
c. Bellows a. Tin
19

b. Zinc 99. How do you call the ratio of the b. Spindle

c. Magnesium volumetric strain? c. Motor
d. aluminum a. Modulus in shear d. Back pressure
94. Which of the following is not a b. Stress to strain ratio 7. Which of the following is not used to
common term relating to the c. volumetric ratio temper steel?
classification of fits? d. bulk modulus a. Oil bath
a. Tunking 100. Hearing bone gears are gears which: b. Brine/salt bath
b. Snug a. Do not operate parallel shafts c. Steam bath
c. medium force fit b. Have a line contact between d. Water bath
d. bound the teeth 8. Which of the following is not a kind
95. In usual spur gearing, which of the c. Tend to produce and thrust on of cast iron?
following statement(s) is correct? the shafts a. Gray iron
a. Pitch circles and base circles are d. Consists of two left handed b. White iron
the same helical gears c. Malleable iron
b. Working depth includes the ELEMENTS 05 d. Lead iron
clearance 1. The ability of metals to stand loads 9. A machinery operation whereby the
c. Tooth outline are usually without breaking down: tool rotates while the feed is
involute curves a. Strain stationary.
d. Tooth outline are usually b. Stress a. Shaping
cycloidal curves c. Elasticity b. Milling
96. In general, the design stress and d. Strength c. Turning
factor of a\safety are related as 2. Which of the following is not a d. Reaming
 follows: classification of iron ore: 10. What process does not belong to the
a. Design stress=ultimate stress a. Siderite group?
times factor of safety b. Hermatite a. Brazing
b. Design stress= ultimate c. Sulfurite b. Soldering
stress divided by factor of d. Magnetite c. Hardening
safety 3. Ferrous metals contains a relative d. Resistance welding
c. Factor of safety= design stress large amount of: 11. Which tool does not belong to the
divided by ultimate stress a. Manganese group?
d. Ultimate stress=factor of safety b. Carbon a. Vice grip
divided by design stress c. Sulfur b. Feeler gage
97. In usual spur gearing, the: d. Phosphorous c. Torque wrench
a. Pitch circle and base circle are 4. Which of the following metal is easy d. Adjustable wrench
the same to chisel? 12. Which of the following metals is non
b. Working depth includes a. Alloy steel – magnetic?
clearance b. Manganese steel a. Manganese steel
c. Tooth outline are always c. Stainless steel b. Cast steel
cycloidal curves d. Cast iron c. Alloy steel
d. Tooth outline are usually 5. The ability of material or metal to d. Cast iron
involute curves resist being crushed is: 13. One important skill that operators of
98. Which of the following is the not the a. Fatigue strength machine tools must have is an
other name of circumferential stress b. Bending strength understanding of measurement
for thin walled cylinders. c. Torsional strength which demands:
a. Hoop stress d. Compressive strength a. Speed
b. girth stress 6. Which of the following is not part of b. Precision
c. tangential stress the headstock? c. Sociability
d. longitudinal stress a. Anvil d. Neatness

20

14. Which of the following is not part of 21. The space between the adjacent b. Square
a lathe machine? teeth? c. Right triangle
a. Fan a. Tooth d. Rectangle
b. Carriage b. Flank 29. If gears cannot connect parallel
c. Headstock c. Backlash shafts, they are called:
 d. Tailstock d. Width a. Cyclodial gears
15. The machine which can flatten 22. An iron has physical properties b. Helical gears
surface on a horizontal, vertical or closely resembling those of mild c. Spur gears
angular plane is: steel: d. Toothed gears
a. Drilling machine a. Malleable cast iron 30. The path traced by a point moving
b. Shaper machine b. Malleable iron at a fixed distance from an axis and
c. Power saw c. White iron with a uniform motion to the axis
d. Lathe machine d. Gray iron and a point moving such a path:
16. Which of the following is not the 23. Gears used to transmit power a. Helical motion
work of a machinist? between shafts axis of which it b. Spherical motion
a. Reboring intersects: c. Translational
b. Overhauling a. Spur gears d. Path of a point
c. Grinding b. Bevel gears 31. The maximum stress which is
d. Boring c. Helical gears reached during a tension test:
17. The area of the machine shop whose d. Straight bevel gears a. Stress
metal is being melted to form a new 24. An important accessories of milling b. Electricity
shape is the: machines: c. Strain
a. Foundry area a. Milling machine vise d. Tensile strength
b. Tool and die b. Cutters 32. The frustums of two cones are used
c. Welding c. Ram in a manner to permit a variation of
d. Mass production are d. Vertical milling attachment velocity ratio between two parallel
18. A machine use in testing steel 25. They are usually the steel or steel shafts:
generally strikes the specimen with casting: a. Evans friction cones
energy from 220 to 255 ft-lb. a. Mild steel b. Bevel cones
a. Izod test b. Carbon steel c. Spherical cones
b. Charpy test c. Fire box steel d. Friction gearing
c. Rockwell test d. Drop-forge-dies 33. Weld – metal impact specimen shall
d. Test blocks 26. The cheapest and the most be taken across the weld with one
19. An iron in which most of the carbon abundant engineering material. face substantially parallel to and
is chemically combined with the a. Aluminum within:
iron: b. Steel a. ¾”
a. Cast iron c. Cast iron b. 1/32”
b. Gray iron d. Babbitt c. ¼”
c. White iron 27. Milling machine accessories are used d. 1/16”
d. Malleable iron to hold milling cutter in the milling 34. A joint between two overlapping
20. Through how many degrees must an machine: members in which the overlapped
involute cam turn in order to raise its a. Spindle-nose tooling edge of one member is welded with
follower 3 inches if the diameter of b. Milling machine vise a fillet weld:
the base circle is 5 inches? c. Vertical milling attachment a. A single welded lock joint
a. 58.7 degrees d. Milling machine arbors b. Double-welded lap joint
b. 180 degrees 28. the size of an equal-leg length fillet c. A single-welded lap joint with
c. 64.4 degrees weld shall be based on the length of backing
d. 68.79 degrees the largest: d. Tack weld
a. Isosceles right triangle
21
35. Imparts of reciprocating motion to a of approximately right angles as in d. Tensile strength
single-point cutting tool: lap joint, tee-joint, corner joint: 49. The shearing strain of a block of
a. Dividing head a. Single welded lap joint metal, 3 inches high is subject to a
b. Slotting attachment b. Fillet weld shearing high force which distorts
c. Circular pitch c. Tack weld the top surface through a distance of
d. Circular milling attachment d. Butt weld 0.0036 inch. :
36. The follower reciprocates or 43. A corrosion occurs within or adjacent a. 0.0015 rad.
oscillates in a plane perpendicular to to a crevice formed by contact with b. 0.008 rad.
the axis of rotation of the cam. another piece of the same or c. 0.0010 rad.
a. Redial cam another metal: d. 0.0012 rad.
b. Cylindrical cam a. Pitting 50. Determine the number of teeth in a
c. Cam curves b. Galvanic driver of two spur gears mesh which
d. Tangential cam c. Erosion has a velocity ratio of 0.75. the
37. Strength of a material is that of a d. Crevice driven gear has 36 teeth:
stress intensity determined by 44. Wheels are sometimes used for the a. 50
considering the maximum test load transmission of high power when an b. 46
to act over the original area of the approximately constant velocity c. 26
test specimens: ratio is desired: d. 48
a. Yield point a. Bevel cones 51. Within the elastic limit, the stress is
b. Ultimate strength b. Friction gearing proportional to strain.
c. Breaking strength c. Spur friction wheels a. Hooke’s law
d. Elastic strength d. Evans friction wheels b. Modulus of elasticity
38. The follower reciprocates or 45. Gearing in which motion or power c. Offset ratio
oscillates in a plane parallel to the that is transmitted depends upon d. Buckingham’s principle
axis of the rotation: the friction between the surfaces in 52. The corrosion of iron or iron-base-
a. Cam curves contact: alloys:
b. Cylindrical cam a. Bevel gears a. Rusting
c. Tangential cam b. Spur friction wheels b. Crazing
d. Radial cam c. Evans friction cones c. Chalking
39. A test for pipe used for coiling in d. Friction gearing d. Fritting
sizes 2 inches: 46. A bevel gears of the same size 53. Steel containing large amount of
a. Flaring mounted on a shaft of 90 degrees: mild nickel and chromium:
b. Crush a. Crown gears a. Carbon steel
c. Flange b. Spur gears b. Stainless steel
d. Bend c. Angular gears c. Alloy steel
40. An alloy of tin, copper, antimony, or d. Miter gears d. Cat steel
sometimes lead: 47. A fillet weld whose size is equal to 54. It refers to any layer or deposit of
a. Gold the thickness of the thinner joint extraneous material of the heat-
b. Babbitt member: transfer-surface:
c. Aluminum a. Butt joint a. Low line
d. Cast iron b. Butt weld b. Pressure drop
41. A weld place in a groove between c. Tack weld c. Fouling
two abutting members: d. Full-fillet weld d. Scaling
a. Full-fillet weld 48. The ratio of stress to the 55. The total amount of permanent
b. Tack weld corresponding strain below the extension of the gage length
c. Butt weld proportional limit: measured after the specimen has
 d. Fillet weld a. Stress-strain diagram fractured and is expressed as
42. A weld of approximately triangular b. Gage method percentage increase of the original
cross-section that join two surfaces c. Modulus of elasticity gage length:
22

a. Elongation 63. The deterioration of organic coating c. 60,000 lb

b. Strain characterized as completely: d. 50,000 lb
c. Stress a. Chalking 70. An oil storage tank roof formed to
d. Elastic limit b. Rusting approximately spherical surfaces,
56. It is used to enable milling machine c. Chocking supported only at its periphery:
to take climb milling cuts: d. Fritting a. Self-supporting umbrella
a. Helical driving mechanism 64. Is a form of correction that develop roof
b. Spindle on a highly localized areas on a b. Self-supporting cone roof
c. Read out metal surfaces: c. Self-supporting
d. Backlash eliminator a. Crevice d. Supported cone roof
57. A weld made to hold the parts of b. Erosion 71. The unit of deformation is called:
weldment in proper alignment until c. Galvanic a. Torsion
the final weld are made: d. Spitting b. Strain
a. Butt weld 65. Test is designed primarily for c. Stress
b. Tack weld application to electric-welded tubing d. Shear
c. Fillet weld for detection of lack of penetration 72. A circle bounding the bottom of the
d. Full-fillet weld or overlaps resulting from flash teeth:
58. The change in length per unit removal in the weld: a. Addendum circle
original length is: a. Butt weld b. Addendum cylinder
a. Strain b. Paste c. Pitch circle
b. Stress c. Lap weld d. Deddendum circle
c. Deformation d. Double butt weld 73. A 3” diameter short shaft carrying 2
d. Elastic modulus 66. Have the same thermal and pulleys close to the bearings
59. The temperature above which the minimum film thickness limitation transmit how much horsepower if
alloy is liquid and will run: bearing. the shaft makes 280 rpm.
a. Melting point a. Ball bearing a. 199 Hp
b. Fow point b. Roller bearing b. 198 Hp
c. Pour point c. Thrust bearing c. 200 Hp
d. Liquids d. Oil bearing d. 210 Hp
60. A cone formed by elements which 67. An oil storage roof formed to 74. A cylindrical tank with 10 in. inside
are perpendicular to the elements of approximately the surface of a right diameter contains oxygen gas at
the pitch cone at the large end: cone, supported only at its 250 psi. Calculate the required wall
a. Cone distance periphery: thickness in (mm) under stress of
b. Back cone a. Self-supporting umbrella roof 28,000 psi.
c. Root cone b. Self-supporting dome roof a. 11.44 mm
d. Cone center c. Supported cone roof b. 11.34 mm
61. The machine used for testing of very d. Self-supporting cone roof c. 10.6 mm
thin steel or surface layers: 68. Test sometimes referred to as an d. 10.3 mm
a. Charpy test upsetting test: 75. The minimum clearance allowed for
b. Izod test a. Bend meshing spur gears with a circular
c. Description test b. Flaring pitch of 0.1571 and diametral pitch
d. Rockwell test c. Flange of 20. The spur gears have 25 teeth.
62. A gear is one in which angle is 90 d. Crush a. 0.007855
degrees that is the pitch cone has 69. What load P which causes a total b. 0.007558
become a plane. deformation of 0.036 inch. Of steel c. 0.008578
a. Crowned gear rock which has a cross-section area d. 0.007585
b. Angular gear of 4 in2 and a length of 6 ft. 76. SAE steel that corresponds to heat
c. Miter gear a. 55,000 lb treatment:
d. Spiral gear b. 40,000 lb a. SAE 1060
23

b. SAE 1117 d. 80 to 90 % b. SAE 4320

c. SAE 1030 83. Killed steel is very much associated c. SAE 1030
d. SAE 1020 with: d. SAE 4130
77. Which of the following is the a. Manganese 90. Alloy steel known for its resistance
differential of the shear equation: b. Sulphur to corrosion, abrasion and wear that
a. Bending moment c. Phosphorous is usually ideal for mill grinding of
b. Load of the beam d. Silicon ore in cement and concentrator
c. Tensile strength of the beam 84. Determine the estimated weight of application. It is usually combined
d. Slope of the beam an A-36 steel plate of size ½ x 4 x 8. molybdenum to increase the depth
78. Which of the following materials to a. 280 kg hardening.
be utilized to reduce cost in the b. 332 kg a. Manganese chromium steel
manufacturing of large worm gears? c. 301 kg b. Chromium-molly steel
 a. Alloyed aluminum d. 297 kg c. Chorome-nickel-molly steel
b. Bronze rim with cast iron 85. A type of welding whereby a wire or d. Manganese-molly steel
spider powder from the nozzle of a spray 91. Split pulley or pulley made of
c. Cast iron rim with bronze spider gun is fused by a gas plain, arc or separate sections bolted together at
d. All of these plasma jet and the molten particles the rim, the maximum speed should
79. It is hardening treatment whereby a are projected in a form of a spray by be limited to about _______% of the
cast metal is being heated to a very means of compressed air or gas. maximum speed of solid pulley.
high temperature then suddenly a. Electro-slug building a. 65 to 75 %
subjected to rapid cooling to b. Electro-beam welding b. 45 to 50 %
improve hardenability or wear c. Plasma-arc welding c. 55 to 60 %
resistance is called: d. Metal spray welding d. 80 to 90 %
a. Normalizing 86. Heating of metal above the critical 92. Major component of bronze casting
b. Tempering temperature and then cooling slowly is
c. Annealing usually in the furnace to reduce the a. Copper
d. Quenching hardness and improve the b. Manganese
80. Determine the estimated weight of machinability is called: c. Zinc
an A-36 steel plates size 3/16 x 6’ x a. Normalizing d. Lead
20’. b. Annealing 93. Galvanized steel plate is:
a. 919 lbs c. Tempering a. Aluminum
b. 1012 lbs d. Quenching b. Tin
c. 829 lbs 87. Accident prevention is: c. Zinc
d. 735 lbs a. An association of employers, d. Manganese
81. The length of arc between the two organization and individuals 94. What heat treatment process can
sides of a gear tooth on the pitch b. The foreman’s responsibility cast steel materials of high chrome,
circle: just as much as production high manganese, etc. type steel be
a. Circular thickness c. The responsibility of top subjected for the purpose of
b. Axial plane management matching process?
c. Helix angle d. A job of a safety director a. Annealing
d. Chordal curves 88. Major component of bronze casting: b. Tempering
82. Split pulley or pulley made of a. Copper c. Normalizing
separate section bolted together at b. Manganese d. Quenching
the rim, the maximum speed should c. Zinc 95. Cast alloy steel for very high
be limited to about _______% of the d. Lead temperature application:
maximum speed of solid pulley. 89. Commonly utilized / cheapest shaft a. Manganese-nickel steel casting
a. 65 to 75 % material available in the market with b. High chrome steel casting
b. 45 to 50 % carbon content of 0.28 to 0.34 %. c. Chrome-nickel steel casting
c. 55 to 60 % a. SAE 1432 d. High manganese casting
24
 96. Flexible material used to seal 3. Type of bolt commonly used in the A. The tool of the shaper moves
pressurized fluids, normally under construction that is threaded on while on the planer is
dynamic condition: both ends. stationary.
a. Nylon A. Stud bolt B. The shaper can perform slotting
b. Seal B. Acme thread bolts operation while the planer
c. Teflon C. Square threaded bolts cannot.
d. Packing D. Hex bolts C. The shaper handles large pieces
97. A type of gear tooth cut inside a 4. Hydrostatic bearing is one which: while the planer handles only
cylinder or ring: A. The lube oil is supplied small pieces.
a. Rack gear under pressure D. The tool of the shaper moves in
b. Ring gear B. Lube oil is not pressurized reciprocating motion while tool
c. Miter gear C. There is no lube oil in the planer moves in rotary
d. Internal gear D. Bearing is lightly loaded motion.
98. It has molybdenum alloy except: 5. Which of the following materials is 11. The path of contact i9nvolute gears
a. SAE 43XX unsuitable as a bearing? where the force is actually
b. SAE 41XX A. Teflon transmitted. It is a straight
c. SAE 6XXX B. Low carbon steel imaginary line passing through the
d. SAE 5XXX C. Cast iron pitch point and tangent to the base
99. To prevent leakage in dynamic seal: D. Nylon circle.
a. Gasket 6. Safety features that must be placed A. Principal reference plane
b. Seals and maintain at machine, B. Pitch point
c. Felts blacksmith, welding and foundry C. Front angle
d. Packings shop. D. Line of action
100. Which of the following elements A. Safety goggle 12. The hardness of helical and
when large quantity is harmful to the B. Walkway guide herringbone gear teeth after
ferrous metal? C. Safety notices and markings treatment is 210 to 300 brinell
a. Sulfur D. all of these hardness for gear and pinion is at:
b. Silicon 7. The angle at the base of the cylinder A. 360 brinell min.
c. Zinc of an involute gear that the tooth B. 400 brinell max.
d. Aluminum makes with the gear axis. C. 340-350 normal
ELEMENTS 06 A. Base helix angle D. All of these
1. Metal characteristics that withstand B. Pressure angle 13. A type of gear commonly used in
forces that causes twisting. C. Arc of recess parallel shaft transmission especially
A. Torsional strength D. Arc of approach when a smooth continuous action is
B. Modulus of elasticity 8. A kind of thread that is generally essential as in high speed drives up
C. Twisting moment used: to 12,000 fpm:
D. Elasticity A. UNEC A. Bevel gear
2. Fillet radius in machine parts is B. UNC B. Herringbone gear
usually introduced to: C. UNF C. Spur gear
A. Improve the look of the parts D. UNEF D. Helical gear
B. Reduce concentration of 9. Which of the following acronyms is 14. It is used in conjunction with circular
stress and extend life of the not generally used as standard? cross sectional members to retain oil
parts A. ASTM and prevent dirt, foreign particles,
C. Avoid obstruction B. SAE moisture and to permit pressure
D. Necessary to lessen casting C. IPS differential between exterior and
weight D. AISI interior of the applied part.
10. What is the difference between the A. Seal
shaper and planer? B. Gasket
C. Safety shield
25
 D. Packing C. Bronze is reddish in color while 28. What is the moment of inertia of a
15. An object thrown upward will return brass is a mixture of copper and rectangle about its base?
to earth with the magnitude of the antimony A. BH2/6
terminal velocity equal to: D. Bronze is mostly an alloy of B. BH3/3
A. Zero copper and tin while brass is a C. BH2/3
B. One-half the initial velocity mixture of copper of copper and D. BH3/12
C. Twice the initial velocity antimony. 29. What is the modulus of elasticity if
D. The initial velocity 22. The reciprocal of the diametral pitch the stress is 44,000 psi and a unit
16. A liquid metal: equivalent to the ratio of pitch strain of 0.00105?
A. Mercury diameter to the number of teeth: A. 41.905 X 106
B. Lead A. Lead B. 42.300 X 106
C. Zinc B. Clearance C. 41.202 X 106
D. Aluminum C. Module D. 43.101 X 106
17. What type of gear which can D. Involute 30. Which of the following is not a
transmit power at a certain angle? 23. What is the property of a material structural steel class?
A. Helical gear which resists forces acting to pull the A. Low carbon steel
B. Worm gear material apart? B. Stainless steel
C. Bevel gear A. Shear strength C. Medium carbon steel
D. Herringbone gear B. Tensile strength D. Tool and die steel
18. Type of V-belt to use in driving pulley C. Torsional strength 31. What happens to a drill if the
with speed of 360 rpm and D. Compressive strength operating speed is too fast?
transmitting 5 Hp. 24. Which do not belong to foundry or A. Drill will crack
A. Type C belts metal casting shop? B. Drill will become overheated and
B. Type B belts A. Shake-out machine will bend
C. Type A belts B. Molding machine C. Drill will become overheated
D. Type D belts C. Core making and will be drawn from steel
19. The arbitrary modification by D. Forging machine D. Drill will become very dull and
removing a small portion of a tooth 25. The enter of gravity of a solid wear fast
at the tip of gear tooth is called. pyramid or cone with a total height 32. Copper and most of its alloy can be
A. Tip removal of H is: hardened by:
B. Tip undercut A. 1/4 H A. Patenting
C. Tip relief B. 3/5 H B. Cold working
D. Pressure angle cut C. 1/3 H C. Case hardening
20. The first derivative of kinetic energy D. 1/3 H D. Soaking
with respect to velocity is: 26. The gradual chemical reaction by 33. A type of coupling that alloys slight
A. Power other substance such that the metal amount of torsional angular
 B. Acceleration is converted to an oxide or other flexibility due to introduction with
C. Momentum compounds: some elastic material cylindrically
D. None of these A. Corrosion wrapped around the bolts in the
21. What is the difference between B. Cheaping flange.
brass and bronze? C. Rusting A. Simple elastic bonded coupling
A. Brass is composed of copper D. Weathering B. Elastic material bushed
and zinc while bronze is 27. A material that should be avoided in coupling
composed of copper and tin constructing wood pattern: C. Elastic material bonded coupling
B. Brass is composed of copper and A. Sap wood D. All of these
zinc while bronze is basically B. Kiln dried wood 34. Outstanding safety record
copper and tin plus non ferrous C. Heart wood contributes to:
alloy such as manganese, D. Core portion of wood A. High productivity
aluminum, and chromium
26

B. Outstanding performance that 41. V-belts operate at speed of about 47. Most effective alloying element for
expects reward from (fpm) reducing brittleness of steel at a
management A. 4500 very low temperature.
C. Confidence in foreman’s ability B. 4400 A. Manganese
to perform well C. 4200 B. Molybdenum
D. Pride and enthusiasm to one-self D. 3600 C. Silicon
35. The capacity of metal to withstand 42. Name the type of chuck commonly D. Nickel
load without breaking is: used for holding work piece in a 48. Normal stress relieving temperature
A. Strength lathe operation? example, a 3-jaw for cast steel :
B. Stress universal chuck, 4-jaw independent A. 200 to350 oF
C. Elasticity chuck B. 400 to 500 oF
D. Strain A. Magnetic jaw chuck C. 300 to 400 oF
36. Finding the resultant of two or more B. 2-jaw independent D. 450 to 550 oF
forces is called: C. 8-jaw universal 49. It is advised that in rubber belts
A. Coplanar force D. Combination application / mounting it should
B. Non-coplanar force 43. For a high corrosion resistant have an initial tension of ________
C. Couple stainless steel, what minimum inch/ply.
D. Composition of forces chromium content is required? A. 18 to 24
37. A machinery operation whereby A. 8% B. 15 to 20
 done with the work accurately B. 4.3% C. 12 to 15
fastened has a reciprocating C. 1.1% D. 10
(forward and backward) motion and D. 5.8% 50. Past ME Board Question
the tool head is stationary. 44. Clearance to a new boiler installation Non- Ferrous filler metal is melted
A. Shaping to the existing or old plant building into grooves or as fillet on the
B. Planning should follow a minimum clearance mother metal; the base metal is not
C. Turning of _________ between top of the melted. This is commonly used for
D. Reaming boiler proper and the ceiling as joining iron based machine parts or
38. The phenomenon of continuous stated in the PSME code. in repair works of some materials it
stretching under load even if the A. 2000 mm(max) is called:
stress is less than the yield point: B. 1000 mm(max) A. spot welding
A. Elasticity C. 2130 mm(max) B. braze welding
B. Ductility D. 2150 mm(max) C. brazing
C. Plasticity 45. Ordinary steel begins to lose D. gas welding
D. Creep strength and elasticity significantly 51. Past ME Board Question
39. In a pair of gears, ________is the at about _______ degrees Fahrenheit. What is the common shop practice to
plane perpendicular to the axial A. 900-1000oF prevent solder from running away from
plane and tangent to the pitch B. 800-900OF surface to be joined?
surface. C. 750-850OF A. Surround the word with day
A. Pitch D. 600-700OF B. Introduce around the work rolled wet
B. Pitch plane 46. Statement that a given body is in cloth
C. Pitch circle static equilibrium means that the C. Put asbestos sheeting around the
D. Pitch point body cannot. work
40. What type of gear is used for high A. Have any type of motion D. All of these
speed operation? B. Be acted upon by more than one 52. Past ME Board Question
A. Helical force The three-moment equation may be
B. Spur C. Undergo any displacement used to analyze
C. Bevel D. Have any acceleration A. Tapered column
D. Worm B. Continuous beam
C. Composite beam
27

D. Axially end loaded beam Cold working of steel plates make the D. Elastic limit to proportional limit
53. Past ME Board Question metal _____. 65. Past ME Board Question
One of the causes of spur gear tooth A. Tougher Which of the following is not structural
breakage is the unbalanced load on one B. More ductile class of steel?
end of the tooth that results in higher C. Harder A. Low carbon steel
stresses than when the load is evenly D. More malleable B. Tool and die steel
distributed. To minimize this problem, 59. Past ME Board Question C. High chrome alloy steel
the face width “b” should not. Be greater Considering a maximum safe center D. High strength low alloy steel
than the thickness (or pitch) of the distance of sprockets should be _____ 66. Past ME Board Question
tooth. In the absence of test values, the pitches. Very long center distance cause The product of the resultant of all forces
following can be guide. catenary tension in the center. acting on a body and the time that the
A. .25PC<b<4Pc A. 70 resultant acts:
B. .20Pd<b<4Pd B. 80 A. Angular impulse
C. .25Pd<b<4Pd C. 60 B. Angular momentum
D. .20Pd<b<4Pc D. 50 C. Linear impulse
54. Past ME Board Question 60. Past ME Board Question D. Linear momentum
The property that characterizes a Hypoid gear is a special type of gear 67. Past ME Board Question
material ability to be drawn into a wire like: The smallest area at the point of rupture
A. Ductility A. Worm gear of a tensile specimen divided by the
B. Thermal conductivity B. Spur gear original area is called:
C. Tensile strength C. Herringbone gear A. Percentage elongation
D. Endurance limit D. Bevel gear B. Izod test
55. Past ME Board Question 61. Past ME Board Question C. Charpy test
Deals only with the motion of the bodies The maximum stress to which a material D. Percentage reduction of the
without reference to forces that cause may be subjected before failure occurs: area
them: A. Ultimate strength 68. Past ME Board Question
A. Dynamics B. Ultimate stress It equalizes the energy exerted and the
B. Kinetics C. Endurance limit work done thus preventing excessive or
C. Statistics D. Tensile stress sudden changes of speed:
D. Kinematics 62. Past ME Board Question A. Flywheel
56. Past ME Board Question A property of material which relates the B. Balance wheel
In shear pin or breaking pin design, we lateral strain to the longitudinal strain C. Flywheel pulley
may use the data experienced by Link- A. Stress D. All of these
Belt for 1/8 inch to 1 inch pins and the B. Strain 69. Past ME Board Question
breaking stress _____ ksi. C. Poisson’s ratio A mechanism which usually do the
A. 40 D. Strength indexing in a machine tool:
B. 55 63. Past ME Board Question A. Universal chuck
C. 50 All are associated with the grade of steel B. Slooter
D. 48 except: C. Dividing head
57. Past ME Board Question A. SAE 42XX D. Indexing
Recommended best cutting angle of drill B. SAE 13XX 70. Past ME Board Question
for work on steel or cast iron is _____ C. SAE 10XX Metal that assists lubrication or lubricant
degrees. D. SAE 74XX in itself:
A. 48 64. Past ME Board Question A. Zinc
B. 63 Poisson’s ratio is the ratio of: B. Antimony
C. 59 A. Shear strain to compression strain C. Babbit
D. 50 B. Elastic limit compressive strain D. Lead
58. Past ME Board Question C. Lateral strain to longitudinal 71. Past ME Board Question
strain
28
A system of forces in space is in Device used to measure accurately 84. Past ME Board Question
equilibrium. If two unequal and opposite speed: Ratio of unit lateral deformation to the
collinear forces are added, which of the A. Speedometer unit longitudinal deformation:
following if any is true? B. Dial indicator A. Poissons ratio
A. Equilibrium is maintained C. Tachometer B. Strain
B. Equilibrium is destroyed D. Dial gauge C. Stress
C. An unbalance moment exists 78. Past ME Board Question D. Modulus of rigidity
D. None of these is true If the velocity of a mass is the same all 85. Past ME Board Question
72. Past ME Board Question the time during which motion takes For moderate speed of mating gears, the
It is a science of motion that can be place is called: ideal ratio contact is:
solved in terms of scalar or vector A. Deceleration A. 1.25 – 4.00
algebra: B. Uniform motion B. 1.20 – 1.45
A. Kinematics C. Acceleration C. 1.00 – 130
B. Curvilinear translation D. None of these D. 0.35 – 1.45
C. Projectiles 79. Past ME Board Question 86. Past ME Board Question
D. Acceleration Length of contact between two mating A shaft is to be checked for concentricity.
73. Past ME Board Question parts in a screw and nut threads A suitable method of performing the
Permanent deformation or strain may measured axially is called: check is:
occur without fracture. A. Arc of contact A. Bench centers and dial indicator
A. Malleability B. Depth of engagement B. Line shafting bearing alignment
B. Elasticity C. Length of engagement C. Observing vibration of the shafting
C. Ductility D. Axis of contact D. None of these
D. Plasticity 80. Past ME Board Question 87. Past ME Board Question
74. Past ME Board Question The distance a helical gear or worm A kind of thread in which the width of
The ability of a metal to be deformed would thread along its axis is called: the thread is approximately equal to the
considerably without rupture is called: _____ depth of the thread and the space
A. Malleability A. Length of action between threads are approximately
B. Elasticity B. Length of contact equal.
C. Ductility C. Land A. Square thread
D. Plasticity D. Lead B. Acme thread
75. Past ME Board Question 81. Past ME Board Question C. Buttress thread
When two elastic bodies collide, which of Major and minor diameters are D. Whitworth thread
the following laws can be used to solve commonly used in: 88. Past ME Board Question
for the resulting velocity? A. Screw thread Which of the following is not used to
A. Dalton’s law B. Bolts resemble the shaped of tool bit?
B. Avogadro’s law C. Gear A. Round nose
C. Conservation of energy D. All of these B. Center cut
D. Conservation of momentum and 82. Past ME Board Question C. Square nose
conservation of energy A lathe with multiple cutting stations: D. Thread cutting
76. Past ME Board Question A. Turret lathe 89. Past ME Board Question
When the hole is smaller than the shaft, B. Engine lathe Negative allowance is also called:
it will take pressure to put the parts C. Manual lathe A. Interference of metal
together. The allowance is said to be D. None of these B. Feeler gage
negative and is termed: 83. Past ME Board Question C. Micrometer
A. Negative tolerance The nominal diameter of the bolts is the: D. Tolerance
B. Negative allowance A. Major diameter 90. Past ME Board Question
C. Negatives fits B. Minor diameter A property of matter which causes it to
D. Interference of metal C. Mean diameter resist any change in its motion or state
77. Past ME Board Question D. All of these of rest:
29

A. Brake 97. Past ME Board Question D. all of the above

B. Friction Tooth width measured along the chord at 3. Past ME Board Question
C. Inertia the pitch circle: Liners are normally made of:
D. Impulse A. Flank A. cast iron
91. Past ME Board Question B. Face width B. alloyed bronze
Separate forces which can be so C. Width of space C. alloyed steel
combined are called: D. Chordal thickness D. alloyed aluminum
A. Non-concurrent forces 98. Past ME Board Question 4. Past ME Board Question
B. Couple In the gear design, the total work load Need in as cast condition steel casting
C. Combined forces must be equally shared by its arms. Rim with carbon content less than_________
D. Concurrent forces must be rigid to support these arms and % C.
92. Past ME Board Question also the head is recommended for its A. 0.26
A lathe machine threading mechanism stiffening value. The assumption in the B. 0.20
A. Reversed gear and lever detailed design of rim thickness and C. 0.15 to 0.16
B. Spindle gear depth of bead is ____ circular pitch (PC). D. 0.25
C. Change stud gear A. 0.65 5. Past ME Board Question
D. All of these B. 0.50 The yield strength of a regular yellow
93. Past ME Board Question C. 0.56 brass (65 to 70% Cu, 30 to 35% Zn) can
It is the difference of addendum and D. 0.44 be increased/improved by:
addendum which is equivalent to the 99. Past ME Board Question A. cold working
whole depth less working depth. Alloy that improves strength of steel at B. tempering
A. Fillet space high temperature application C. chill casting
B. Filet radius A. Tungsten D. heat treatment
C. Clearance B. Molybdenum 6. Past ME Board Question
D. Backlash C. Chromium The purposes of these parts in
94. Past ME Board Question D. All of these application are to have better bearings
 Machine tool used for straight lines on 100. Past ME Board Question to seal the guard against marring; etc.
metal surfaces mad of sharp tool steel is A furnace used in melting ferrous A. bearing journal
called. metals: B. metallic seal
A. Plain scriber A. Annealing furnace C. washer
B. A trammel B. Tempering furnace D. shaft seal
C. Hermaphrodite caliper C. Induction furnace 7. Past ME Board Question
D. Divider D. Normalizing furnace Metals are conducive because:
95. Past ME Board Question Element 07 A. the electron are loosely bound
All are associated with standard material 1. Past ME Board Question to the nuclei and therefore
specified except: A furnace used in melting non-ferrous mobile
A. American Iron and Steel Institute metals. B. having characteristic metallic luster
B. Society of Automotive Engineers A. cupola furnace C. they are on the left side of the
C. Southeast Asia Iron and Steel B. crucible furnace periodic table
Institute C. induction furnace D. they have extra electrons as
D. American Society for Testing D. tempering furnace exhibited by normally possible
Materials 2. Past ME Board Question balance state
96. Past ME Board Question Endurance strength is nearly 8. Past ME Board Question
The best instrument for measuring a proportional to the ultimate strength It is considered semi-solid lubricant:
thousand of an inch: but not with: A. lube oil
A. Micrometer A. yield strength B. graphite
B. Tachometer B. design stress C. grease
C. Calliper C. shear stress D. all of these
D. Pyrometer 9. Past ME Board Question
30

What are the common cutting fluids B. retarded motion D. Circular pitch
used for cutting metals? C. negative impulse 23. Past ME Board Question
A. water with soda borax D. all of these It is recommended for high speed
B. light mineral oil 17. Past ME Board Question application that the minimum number
C. soluble oil It is recommended not to have a direct of teeth in small sprocket should be:
D. all of these drive and drive sprockets if the ratio of A. 26 to 30
10. Past ME Board Question their teeth. B. 12 to 16
Good stabilizer in stainless steel: Exceed _____ use two or more step C. 26 to 28
A. columbium combination. D. 18 to 24
 B. titanium A. 10 times 24. Past ME Board question
C. tantalum B. 8 times Continuous stretching under load even if
D. all of these C. 5 times the stress is less than the yield point:
11. Past ME Board Question D. 6 times A. Plasticity
The good deoxidizer in steel melting: 18. Past ME Board Question B. elasticity
A. Manganese It is used to charged rotary motion to C. creep
B. silicon reciprocating motion: D. ductility
C. aluminum A. Helical Gear 25. Past ME Board Question
D. All of these B. Rack Gear Which of the following is not structural
12. Past ME Board Question C. Worm gear class of steel?
The usual ratio of water to soluble oil D. Spur gear A. high speed steel
used as cutting fluid: 19. Past ME Board Question B. tool and die
A. 50% water to 50% oil Busses that are independent loads: C. Low Carbon
B. 2 water to 1 oil A. Working stress D. high Carbon
C. 3 water to 1 oil B. Operating stress 26. Past ME Board Question
D. 4 to 80 water to 1 oil C. Residual stress Opposite direction parallel forces:
13. Past ME board Question D. shear stress A. concurrent
Killed steel is always associated with: 20. Past ME Board Question B. coplanar
A. Silicon The Distance of the tooth, which is C. couple
B. Manganese equal to the sum of the addendum and D. non-coplanar
C. Phosporous deddendum: 27. Past ME Board Question
D. Sulfur A. full depth The ratio of the moment of inertia in the
14. Past ME Board Question B. whole depth cross-section of the beam to the section
Which of the following does not belong C. working depth modulus
to the group? D. deddendum A. equal to the radius of gyration
A. welding 21. Past ME Board Question B. equal to the area of the cross-
B. Soldering This concave portion of the tooth profile section
C. Casting where it joints the bottom of the tooth C. measure of a distance
D. brazing space: D. dependent on the modulus of
15. Past ME Board Question A. fillet curve elasticity
Which of the following is most popular B. fillet radius 28. Past ME Board Question
soldering of metal? C. bottom depth Gear used to transmit power at high
A. 10/80 D. fillet velocity ratios between non-intersecting
B. 45/55 22. Past ME Board Question shafts that are usually but not
C. 50/50 In gear design, the ratio of the pitch necessarily at right angle.
D. 60/40 diameter in inches to the number of A. helical gear
16. Past ME Board Question teeth: B. bevel gear
The motion of an object A. module C. worm gear
diminished/decreased speed B. diametral pitch D. spiral gear
A. deceleration C. English module 29. Past ME Board Question
31
 A. 0.02 in/ft D. Mean speed C. Saddle Key
B. 0.03 in/ft 6. Past ME Board Question D. Roll pin
C. 0.01 in/ft An old rule of thumb for 12. Past ME Board Question
D. 0.05 in/ft transmission shafting is that the What type of fits used for involute
ELEMENTS 09 deflection should not exceed _____ of spline?
1. Past ME Board Question length between supports. A. Close fit
For shafts, the shear due to bending A. 0.01 in. per foot B. Press fit
is a maximum at the neutral plane B. 0.08 in. per foot C. Sliding fit
where the normal stress is: C. 0.02 in. per foot D. All of these
A. Minimum D. 0.05 in. per foot 13. Past ME Board Question
B. Constant 7. Past ME Board Question Which of the following is used for
C. Maximum also For transmission shafts the allowable permanent fits and similar to
D. Zero deflection is 1 degree in a length of involute splines except that the
2. Past ME Board Question _____ diameters. pressure angle is 14.5˚?
The minimum value of numerical A. 20 A. Separation load
combined shock and fatigue factor B. 25 B. Spline shaft
to be applied in every case to the C. 30 C. Stub serrations
computed bending moment of the D. 40 D. Involute serrations
shaft is: 8. Past ME Board Question 14. Past ME Board Question
A. 2.0 What is the limiting torsional It is used a coupling or in addition to
B. 1.75 deflection for machinery shafts, if another couplings where in case of
C. 1.5 the criteria of limiting torsional overload there is danfer of injury to
D. 1.3 deflection vary from 0.08˚ per foot machine or to material in process.
3. Past ME Board Question of length? A. Shear pin
What is the other name given to A. 1˚ B. Flange coupling
short shafts on machines? B. 2.5˚ C. Involute serrations
A. Spindles C. 2˚ D. King pin
B. Head shafts D. 3.5˚ 15. Past ME Board Question
C. Core shafts 9. Past ME Board Question What is the maximum shaft angle for
D. All of these Bevel gears of sizes 5 in. to 15 in. a single Hooke’s coupling?
4. Past ME Board Question should not be lift or depress more A. 10˚
What is the other name given to a than _____, as Gleason statement. B. 17˚
line shaft? A. 0.004 C. 15˚
A. Countershaft B. 0.003 D. 20˚
B. Main shaft C. 0.002 16. Past ME Board Question
C. Long shaft D. 0.001 What are the two principal parts of a
D. Head shaft 10. Past ME Board Question Journal Bearing?
5. Past ME Board Question What type of key that allows the hub A. Bearing and Journal
The speed at which the center of to move along the shaft but prevents B. Shaft and Babbit
mass will be equal the deflecting the rotation of the shaft? C. Clearance and Fitted
forces on the shaft; the shaft with its A. Woodruff Key D. Shaft and Cylinder
attached bodies will then vibrate B. Feather Key 17. Past ME Board Question
violently, since the centrifugal force C. Gibbs Key When line of action of the load
changes its direction as the shaft D. Square Key bisects the arc of partial bearing, the
turns in: 11. Past ME Board Question bearing is said to be:
A. Nominal speed What is the other name for Kennedy A. Eccentrically loaded
B. Critical speed Key? B. Fully loaded
C. Relative speed A. Tangential Key C. Centrally loaded
B. Woodruff Key D. Partially loaded
41
18. Past ME Board Question A. Heavy B. 6 ksi
What is the difference in radii of the B. Medium C. 7 ksi
bearing and Journal? C. Light D. 9 ksi
A. Even clearance D. All of these 31. Past ME Board Question
B. Clearance ratio 25. Past ME Board Question Experience suggests that the most
C. Odd clearance A type of roller bearing in which the economical designs are obtained for
D. Radial clearance balls are assembled by the eccentric a belt speed of:
19. Past ME Board Question displacement of the inner ring A. 6000 to 7500 fpm
When radii of both the bearing and A. Shallow groove ball bearing B. 3000 to 5000 fpm
the journal are the same, then the B. Filling-slot ball bearing C. 3500 to 4700 fpm
bearing is said to be: C. Self-aligning ball bearing D. 5000 to 1000 fpm
A. Fitted bearing D. Deep-groove ball bearing 32. Past ME Board Question
B. Clearance bearing 26. Past ME Board Question The tension in the belt due to
C. Full bearing Which of the following is not a type centrifugal force increasing rapidly
D. Ambiguous bearing of bearing? above about:
20. Past ME Board Question A. Shallow groove ball bearing A. 2500 fpm
What is the line that passes through B. Filling-slot ball bearing B. 3000 fpm
the centers of the bearing and the C. Self-aligning ball bearing C. 3500 fpm
journals? D. Deep-groove ball bearing D. 4000 fpm
A. Line of action 27. Past ME Board Question 33. Past ME Board Question
B. Line of centers What is the usual density of the What is the recommended speed for
C. Line of symmetry leather belt? leather belts?
D. Tangent line A. 0.035 lb/in³ A. 6000 to 7000 fpm
21. Past ME Board Question B. 0.0135 lb/in³ B. 5000 to 6000 fpm
Which of the following is considered C. 0.025 lb/in³ C. 7000 to 8000 fpm
advantageous for bearing materials? D. 0.0465 lb/in³ D. 4500 to 5600 fpm
A. Conformability 28. Past ME Board Question 34. Past ME Board Question
B. Compatibility Which of the following is the What is the usual recommended
C. Embeddability approximate density of a fat rubber speed for fabric belts?
D. All of these belt? A. 4000 to 5000 fpm
22. Past ME Board Question A. 0.055 lb/in³ B. 3000 to 4000 fpm
What is the recommended B. 0.0135 lb/in³ C. 2000 to 3000 fpm
coefficient of fluctuation of flywheels C. 0.045 lb/in³ D. 2000 and more fpm
for punching, shearing, pressing D. 0.0465 lb/in³ 35. Past ME Board Question
machine? 29. Past ME Board Question Which of the following is the
A. 0.005-0.1 A toothed wheel whose tooth recommended initial tension of the
B. 0.007-0.01 elements are straight and parallel to belt?
C. 0.03-0.05 the shaft axis or used to transmit A. 75 ib/in of width
D. 0.01-0.03 motion and power between parallel B. 73 lb/in of width
23. Past ME Board Question shafts C. 71 lb/in of width
Which of the following considers 200 A. Helical gear D. 80 lb/in of width
series of bearing? B. Spur gear 36. Past ME Board Question
A. Heavy C. Worm gear Two shafts at right angles to each
B. Medium D. Bevel gear other may be connected by what
C. Light 30. Past ME Board Question arrangement?
D. All of these The breaking strength of oak-tanned A. Half turn
24. Past ME Board Question beltings varies from 3 to more than: B. Quarter turn
Which of the following considers the A. 5 ksi C. ¾ turn
300 series of bearing? D. One turn
42
37. Past ME Board Question 43. Past ME Board Question 49. Past ME Board Question
What is the minimum number of A fit generally used on those Which of the following indicates the
teeth on a smaller sprocket for low dimensions involved in a fit such as degree of concentration?
speed? pin in a hole. A. Power factor
A. 12 A. Unilateral B. Service factor
B. 21 B. Lateral C. Stress factor
C. 17 C. Bilateral D. Stress concentration factor
D. 14 D. None of these 50. Past ME Board Question
38. Past ME Board Question 44. Past ME Board Question The internal stresses that exists in
What is the minimum number of It is a relatively finely spaced any part of the material that is
teeth on a smaller sprocket for irregularity of the surfaces. subjected to temperature and not
moderate speed? A. Smoothness acted upon by an external load
A. 17 B. Waviness A. Residual stress
B. 21 C. Lay B. Form stress
C. 12 D. Roughness C. Superposed stress
D. 14 45. Past ME Board Question D. Control stress
39. Past ME Board Question Which of the following is the surface 51. Past ME Board Question
What is the usual minimum number finish to heavy cuts or coarse feed? It is the process that cold works a
of teeth on a smaller sprocket for A. 200 rms limited amount of material, thus
high speed? B. 400 rms giving a higher strength, and it
A. 21 C. 80 rms leaves a surface compressive stress.
B. 24 D. 500 or greater rms A. Surface finishing
C. 12 46. Past ME Board Question B. Tensioning
D. 14 Which of the following is the most C. Surfacing
40. Past ME Board Question dominant cause (approximately 80 D. Surface rolling
Which of the following is the %) of machine failures? 52. Past ME Board Question
measure of torsional stress? A. Torsion Fatigue strength is increased by
A. Accuracy B. Negligence repeated loads just below the
B. Stiffness C. Fatigue failures normal fatigue limit followed by
C. Rigidity D. Compression small step by step increase of the
D. Precision 47. Past ME Board Question loading.
41. Past ME Board Question For wrought steel in its commonly A. Coaxing
When tested in compression, ductile met commercial forms, it is often B. Waxing
materials usually exhibit _____ assumed that the average C. Mixing
characteristics up to the yield endurance limit for an average (50 D. Relieving
strength as they do when tested in % survival) with the BrinellHardness 53. Past ME Board Question
tension. is limited to: It is the diameter of the imaginary
A. The same A. 500 cylinder that bounds the crest of an
B. More than B. 400 external thread and the roots of an
C. Less than C. 240 internal thread.
D. Approximately the same D. 450 A. Mean diameter
42. Past ME Board Question 48. Past ME Board Question B. Root diameter
A tolerance where the size of a part What is the range of the endurance C. Stress diameter
is permitted to be either larger or ratio or Czaud quotes values for D. Major diameter
smaller than the given dimension steel? 54. Past ME Board Question
A. Bilateral A. 0.23 to 0.65 It is the distance in inches a screw
B. Unilateral B. 0.34 to 0.87 thread (a helix) advances axially in
C. Lateral C. 0.63 to 0.93 one turn.
D. None of these D. 0.34 to 0.45 A. Pitch
43
 B. Mean pitch D. 76 % Under the theories of failure, for
C. Lead 61. Past ME Board Question static loading of ductile material, the
D. Circular pitch It is a screw fastening with a nut on design stress is:
55. Past ME Board Question it A. Yield Stress / Factor of
Which of the following bolts is A. Bolt Safety
recommended for general use? B. U – bolt B. Ultimate Stress / Factor of Safety
A. UNC C. Rivet C. Ultimate Stress / Proportional
B. UNEF D. Screw Limit
C. UNF 62. Past ME Board Question D. Yield point / Proportional Limit
D. NC A fastening which has no nut and 68. Past ME Board Question
56. Past ME Board Question turns in to a threaded hole Under the theories of failure, the
Which of the following is frequently A. Bolt value of shear stress is how many
used bolt in automotive and aircraft B. Fastener times that of a tensile stress?
industries? C. Rivet A. Four times
A. UNC D. Screw B. Half
B. UNEF 63. Past ME Board Question C. Double
C. UNF An old name for an unfinished D. One-fourth
D. NC through bolt comes with a square. 69. Past ME Board Question
57. Past ME Board Question A. Coupling bolt The theory of mechanics of material
Which of the following is particular B. Stud bolt shows that the results from the
bolt used in aeronautical equipment? C. Machine bolt octahedral shear stress theory and
A. UNC D. Automobile bolt those from maximum distortion-
B. UNEF 64. Past ME Board Question energy theory are:
C. UNF It is a type of coil where the helical A. The same
D. NC coil is wrapped into a circle forming B. Less than
58. Past ME Board Question an annular ring. C. More than
What type of bolt usually used for A. Volute spring D. Not related
high-pressure pipe flanges, cylinder B. Hair spring 70. Past ME Board Question
head studs etc. C. Motor spring It is the distance measure axially
A. UNC D. Garter spring from a point on one thread to the
B. UNEF 65. Past ME Board Question corresponding point on adjacent
C. UNF It is a type of spring where thin flat thread.
D. 8 UN strip wound up on itself as a plane A. Axial pitch
59. Past ME Board Question spiral, usually anchored at the inside B. Z – pitch
It is the stress or load induced by the end. C. Lead
tightening operation. A. Motor spring D. Lead angle
A. Initial stress B. Garter spring 71. Past ME Board Question
B. Initial tension C. Volute spring It is the angle between a tangent to
C. Residual stress D. Helical spring the pitch helix and plane normal to
D. None of these 66. Past ME Board Question the axis of the screw.
60. Past ME Board Question It is the ratio of the length of the A. Helix angle
For non-metallic gaskets, it has been column and the radius of gyration of B. Lead angle
found that they should have a the cross-sectional area about a C. Tangent angle
certain minimum amount of centroidal axis. D. Vertical angle
compression as _____ for a certain A. Contact ratio 72. Past ME Board Question
cork gasket. B. Slenderness ratio It is suggested that the design factor
A. 62 % C. Centroidal ratio on the yield strength be about 1.5
B. 86 % D. Column ratio for the smooth load, about 2 to 2.25
C. 68 % 67. Past ME Board Question for minor shock loading, and up to
44
 _____ for severe shock loads, 78. Past ME Board Question For thrust bearing, the speed at
especially when the loading reverses A coupling used for absorbing some moderate operating condition is:
during operation. shock and vibration that may appear A. 50 <Vm> 200 fpm
A. 4.5 on the shaft and of preventing the B. 50 <Vm> 250 fpm
B. 3.5 occurrence of reversed stresses C. 50 <Vm> 220 fpm
C. 3.0 caused by the shaft deflecting at the D. 50 <Vm> 250 fpm
D. 4.0 coupling preventing at the coupling 85. Past ME Board Question
73. Past ME Board Question A. Rigid coupling If the ends are joined by wire lacing
A typical hub length fall between B. Flange coupling with machine, the usual efficiency of
_____ C. Flexible coupling joint is:
A. 1.25D to 2.5D D. None of these A. 100 %
B. 1.3D to 3.4D 79. Past ME Board Question B. 75 %
C. 1.25D to 4.0D It is the difference in the radii of the C. 85 %
D. D to 7.0D bearing and the journal. D. 88 %
74. Past ME Board Question A. Even clearance 86. Past ME Board Question
A key with one several patented B. Clearance ratio On high speed centrifugal blowers, it
methods of keying is driven or C. Fit clearance has been observed that the arc of
pressed into a hole that is small D. Radial clearance contact is reduced from 180˚ at rest
enough to dose the slit, assembled 80. Past ME Board Question to _____ in motion.
in radial direction. A bearing in which the radii of the A. 100˚
A. Fit key journal and the nearing are the same B. 90˚
B. Roll pin A. Fitted nearing C. 95˚
C. Saddle key B. Full bearing D. 110˚
D. Pin key C. Partial bearing 87. Past ME Board Question
75. Past ME Board Question D. Clearance bearing The recommended net belt pull for
A key that allows the hub to move 81. Past ME Board Question rubber belt is:
along the shaft but prevents the What is the approximate length-to- A. 11.34 lb/ply per inch of width
rotation of the shaft diameter ratio of hydrodynamic B. 13.75 lb/ply per inch of width
A. Woodruff key bearings? C. 16.35 lb/ply per inch of width
B. Gibbs key A. 1 D. 20.34 lb/ply per inch of width
C. Feather key B. 4 88. Past ME Board Question
D. Square key C. 3 For minimum quietness, use
76. Past ME Board Question D. 2 sprockets with _____ or more teeth.
For involute spline, the type of fits 82. Past ME Board Question A. 21
used: The operating temperature of oil B. 23
A. Close fit films in the bearing must C. 25
B. Sliding fit approximately: D. 27
C. Press fit A. 140˚F to 150˚F 89. Past ME Board Question
D. All of these B. 140˚F to 160˚F If two intersecting shafts re to be
77. Past ME Board Question C. 120˚F to 190˚F belt connected, _____ guide pulleys
A coupling that transmits power via D. 120˚F to 190˚F are to be used.
the frictional forces induced by 83. Past ME Board Question A. 1
pulling the flange toward each other At higher temperatures, oil oxidizes B. 2
over slotted tapered sleeves. more rapidly above: C. 3
A. Flange coupling A. 120˚F D. 4
B. Ribbed compression coupling B. 200˚F 90. Past ME Board Question
C. Rigid coupling C. 140˚F Wire ropes are made from cold-
D. Flanged compression D. 160˚F drawn with _____ or more teeth.
coupling 84. Past ME Board Question A. 21
45
 B. 23 What is the minimum suggested obtained by pulling the band tight
C. 25 design factor of wire ropes for into the wheel.
D. 27 miscellaneous hoisting equipment is: A. Block brake
91. Past ME Board Question A. 2 B. Clutch
A wire rope that the wires and B. 3 C. Band brake
strands are twisted in the opposite C. 5 D. Centrifugal brake
direction D. 4 4. Which of the following clutches that
A. Long lay 98. Past ME Board Question has a disadvantage of heavier
B. Perform To avoid excessive wear rate the rotating masses.
C. Regular lay recommended limiting pressure for 6 A. Multiple disc clutch
D. Lang lay x 19 ropes is _____ for cast steel. B. Cone clutch
92. Past ME Board Question A. 700 psi C. Disc clutch
A wire rope that the wires and B. 900 psi D. Twin clutching
strands are twisted on the same C. 1000 pi 5. Which of the following welds have
direction D. 1200 psi been considered as resistance weld
A. Long lay 99. Past ME Board Question which is usually round in the same
B. Perform To avoid wear rate the dorm as the electrodes that press
C. Regular lay recommended limiting pressure for 6 the sheets together?
D. Lang lay x 19 ropes is _____ for manganese A. Edge joints
93. Past ME Board Question cast steel. B. Spot welds
Which of the following ropes is used A. 2500 psi C. CIG welds
for haulage, egging, guard rails? B. 2000 psi D. TIG welds
A. 6 X 35 IWRC C. 3000 psi 6. A welding which consist of short
B. 6 X 15 IWRC D. 2300 psi lengths (2-3 in. long) of welds with
C. 7 X 8 IWRC 100. Past ME Board Question space between as 6 inches on
D. 7 X 7 IWRC What friction devices that are used centers.
94. Past ME Board Question to connect shafts? A. Intermittent weld
Which of the following has been A. Clutches B. Spot weld
considered as general purpose rope? B. Spring C. MIG weld
A. 6 x 19 IWRC C. Brakes D. TIG weld
B. 7 x 25 IWRC D. Holders 7. A welding operation that use hot
C. 7 x 25 IWRC Elements 10 flame and metal rod.
D. 6 x 9 IWRC 1. The total frictional energy that is A. Gas welding
95. Past ME Board Question stored in the brake parts principally B. Arc welding
Which of the following ropes is used in the drum or disk is approximately: C. Resistance welding
for lines, hawsers, overhead cranes, A. 56% up D. Automatic welding
and hoists? B. 90% up 8. The arc is covered with a welding
A. 6 x 37 IWRC C. 86% up composition, and bare electrode wire
B. 6 x 35 IWRC D. 75% up is fed automatically.
C. 6 x 25 IWRC 2. The brake capacity to absorb energy A. Resistance welding
D. 7 x 26 IWRC is known as: B. Induction welding
96. Past ME Board Question A. Energy C. Submerged welding
The regular materials wire ropes are B. Power D. Spot welding
made of: C. Resistance brake 9. What is the recommended
A. Chromium D. Braking torque coefficient of fluctuation of flywheels
B. Wrought iron 3. A kind of braking system such that if for punching, shearing, pressing
C. Cast steel the band wraps partly around the machine is:
D. High-carbon iron brake drum and the braking action is A. 0.005 – 0.1
97. Past ME Board Question B. 0.002 – 0.07
46
 C. 0.03 – 0.05 16. Which of the following bolts provided B. Engine lathe
D. 0.01 – 0.03 with a hole at one end instead of C. Cannon lathe
10. The part of the machine that usual head? D. Turret lathe
absorbs the energy delivered by a A. Stud bolt 23. What devices on lathe used for
sharp force or blow. B. Eye bolt carrying the revolving spindle?
A. Spring C. Machine bolt A. Head stock
B. Anvil D. Stove bolt B. Header
C. Brakes 17. What operation generally carried out C. Head suction
D. Flywheel to divide the parent coiled sheet into D. None of these
11. It is the friction of wheel inclination narrower coils? 24. The recommended means of
from the vertical position. A. Slotting supporting the chuck during the
A. Camber B. Squeezing mounting procedure to the lathe
B. Toe-in C. Squaring spindle is to use:
C. Caster D. Slitting A. Crane
D. King pin inclination 18. It is the process used to form B. Jack
12. Which of the following is a machine shallow, round, raised recessed C. Overhead
which takes large quantities of raw troughs of uniform width in a D. Ratchet
or finished materials and binds them straight curved or circular form. 25. Too much ________ in flat belt
with a rope or metal straps or wires A. Hemming operation tend to cause excessive
into a large package? B. Beading wear slippage and may burn the
A. Bacher C. Embossing belt.
B. Bending machine D. Bludging A. Play
C. Baler 19. The process of removing excess B. Slack
D. Automatic screw machine metals from the edge of a strip to C. Stiffness
13. It is the grasping of an outside work make it suitable for drawing without D. Tightness
piece in a chunk or jawed device in a wrinkling or to obtain final 26. It is a chromium steel tape in AISI-
lathe. complicated shape which was not SAE designation.
A. Clucking directly possible by blanking. A. 10XX
B. Clamping A. Lancing B. 25XX
C. Chucking B. Slugging C. 50XX
D. Clam shelling C. Notching D. 40XX
14. Which of the following is a D. Trimming 27. Which of the following is not
mechanical linkage or mechanism 20. Which of the following is the recommended for use in a driving
that can turn about a center or processed of removing coarse speed exceeding 2000 ft/min.?
rotation? scratches or tool marks? A. Flat leather belt
A. Oscillation A. Polishing B. Herringbone gear
B. Crank B. Buffing C. Silent sprocket
C. Coupler C. Honing D. V-belt
D. Drag link D. Lapping 28. It is a low cost bearing used
15. What type of compound screw which 21. Which of the following ropes is worldwide for automobile or low
produces a motion equal to the galvanized and consist of 6 strands, horsepower motor application. It is
difference in motion between the 7 wires each, and a hemp core? made of thin coating of over flat
two component screws? A. Reverse lay rope metal strip.
A. Machine screw B. Guy rope A. Babbitt
B. Tanden screw C. Lang lay rope B. Cadmium brass
C. Differential screw D. Regular rope C. Lead
D. Variable screw 22. It is a large lathe used for turning D. Tin
and boring cannons. 29. The most common tool to measure
A. Gun lathe diameter in machine shop operation
47
 but normally and always used with B. Materializing C. Opposite
steel scale for measurement. C. Quenching D. Parallel
A. Caliper D. Tempering 44. Plane of rotation is defined as plane
B. Micrometer 37. Which of the following type of wood perpendicular to a:
C. Protractor is usually used in making wood A. Gear axis
D. Vernier pattern in the foundry? B. Gear ratio
30. In impact force introduced to case A. Dried sap wood C. Normal plane
the metal to flow in shaped mold B. Hard wood D. Pitch diameter
according to the shape to dies C. Kiln dried wood 45. Which of the following can be a con
made. D. Scrap wood current?
A. Hardness 38. The progressive change in position A. Collinear
B. Spinning of ______is called motion. B. Couple
C. Swaging A. Component C. Parallel
D. Toughness B. Couple D. All of these
31. Find the polar section modulus of a C. Link 46. Cutting lubricant used in drilling,
steel shafting with “D” as the D. Mass reaming and tapping for brass and
diameter. 39. Strain or _______ is a change in bronze.
A. πD³/16 geometry/shape of the body due to A. Dry
B. πD³/32 the action of a force on it. B. Soda water
C. πD³/32 A. Bending stress C. Soluble oil
D. πD³/16 B. Deformation D. Turpentine
32. Forces of equal in magnitude but C. Shear stress 47. In general accepted limit of diamond
opposite in direction are parallel are D. Stress wheel speed should be in the range
called: 40. The effective face width of a helical of _______ fpm.
A. Acceleration gear divided by the axial pitch. This A. 1000/2000
B. Coplanar is sometimes called face overlap. B. 2500/3500
C. Couple A. Angle overlap C. 3000/4000
D. Non-coplanar B. Axial overlap D. 5000/6000
33. Composition of forces is at the ______ C. Contact overlap 48. Prepared tool bit will now consist of
of two or more forces. D. Helical overlap face, nose and:
A. Combination 41. For mass production of casting it is A. Cutting tool
B. Opposition generally cheaper to use ________ B. Shank
C. Resultant pattern for longer life. C. Sharp tool
D. Summary A. Aluminum D. Tool edge
34. Circular pitch is measured along the B. Brass 49. This is an alloy in bronze casting that
________ in the circular gear. C. Metal assists lubrication and in itself a
A. Circle D. Wooden lubricant.
B. Line of action 42. It is a plane between mating teeth or A. Lead
C. Pitch center the amount of which a tooth space B. Manganese
D. Pitch diameter exceed the thickness of an engaging C. Phosphorous
35. Stiffness is the material’s ability to tooth is called: D. Tin
______ deformation under stress. A. Backlash 50. For longer sprocket chain life the
A. Non-coplanar B. Clearance speed range of ______ fpm is
B. Planar C. Pitting recommended.
C. Resist D. Space A. 1200-1400
D. Staffer 43. The forces that can be combined or B. 1500-1600
36. It imparts the ductility, toughness, called _____component forces. C. 1800-2000
and plasticity of steel. A. Different D. 2000-2100
A. Annealing B. Helical
48
51. All stainless steel type is SAE A. BUN 66. Property, which enables a material,
designation except: B. UNC be drawn into a wire.
A. 92XX C. UNEF A. ductility
B. 300XX D. WOOD B. elasticity
C. 304XX 59. Maximum moment formula for beam C. plasticity
D. 515XX simply supported at both ends and D. utility
52. It is white metal with good oxidation subjected to a load uniformly 67. The stress that causes the material
and corrosion resistance. This has distributed over its length. to shorten.
also good electrical magnetic A. wL/2 A. bearing
properties. B. wL²/8 B. compressive
A. Aluminum C. wL²/16 C. shear
B. Copper D. wL/12 D. tensile
C. Nickel 60. What is the special bearing used 68. The most known lubricants bearing
D. Titanium with high deflection? being utilized in whatever category
53. It is a molybdenum steel-tape in A. Babbitt of load and speed are oil, air grease
AISI-SAE designation. B. Ball and dry lubricants like:
A. 44XX C. Roller A. bronze
B. 45XX D. Self aligning B. graphite
C. 50XX 61. which of the following bearing is C. lead
D. 51XX used for low load and less expensive D. silicon
54. Cutting lubricants used in drilling, production 69. It is a gear commonly used in
reaming tapping for hand spots in A. Babbitt parallel shaft transmission especially
cast iron. B. ball bearing when a smooth continuous action is
A. Dry C. roller bearing essential as in high speed drives up
B. Kerosene D. self aligning to 12000 fpm.
C. Soda water 62. the lateral strain in axial tension A. Bevel gear
D. Turpentine members can be calculated by; B. Helical gear
55. In a ________ design, the lead of a A. deformation C. Herringbone gear
single thread is equal to the pitch. B. Hooke’s law D. Spur gear
A. Bevel gear C. Poisson’s ratio 70. The reciprocal of a diametral pitch or
B. Bolt D. William’s line the ratio of the pitch diameter to the
C. Helical gear 63. it is abundantly used worldwide as number of teeth
D. Hypoid gear coating on top of the plate A. clearance
56. A of chisels used in cutting of automobile. B. involute
keyways, square corner or slots. A. Babbitt C. lead
A. Cape B. lead D. module
B. Diamond head C. manganese 71. What tool(s) will be used in making
C. Flat D. tin wood pattern in the foundry shop?
D. Round 64. a liquid metal at room temperature. A. Band saw
57. The maximum recommended ideal A. aluminum B. Drill machine
number of teeth to use for bigger B. mercury C. hammer
sprocket is: C. zinc D. saw and chisel
A. 120 D. zirconium 72. Type of bolt commonly used in the
B. 127 65. it is a steel with SAE specification construction that is threaded in both
C. 132 13XX ends.
D. 143 A. chromium A. Acme threaded bolts
58. A bolt for general application that B. manganese B. Hex bolt
posses a stronger thread is a type C. molybdenum C. Square threaded
_____ screw. D. nickel D. Stud bolt
49
73. Ability of material to absorb strain 81. What do impact tests determine? C. parallel
energy and will return to its original A. Creep test D. resultant
state. B. hardness 89. The_____ is one of the rigid members
A. creep C. toughness / bodies joined together to form a
B. fatigue strength D. yield strength kinematics chain.
C. hardness 82. Sound travels fastest in: A. coplanar
D. resilience A. air at 0˚F and 1 atmospheric B. frame
74. The ratio of lateral strain to B. air at 70˚F and 1 C. link
longitudinal strain. atmospheric D. machine
A. deformation C. air at 70˚F and 0lbf /in 90. The resultant of a pair of equal
B. modulus of elasticity D. steel at 70˚F forces but opposite in direction is
C. poisson’s ratio 83. The yield strength of common yellow called _____.
D. William’s line brass (70% Cu, 30%Zn) A. concurrent
75. Basic size is the same as design size A. annealing B. couple
if there is no: B. chill casting C. non-concurrent
A. allowance C. cold working D. resultant
B. clearance D. heat treatment 91. The helical and herringbone gear
C. limits 84. How do you call the forces not lie on teeth cut after heat treatment
D. tolerance the same plane? should have a hardness in the range
76. Forces that meet at a common point A. component of 210/300BHN. The pinion gear
are called: B. composition of forces teeth hardness on the other hand.
A. co-linear C. non-coplanar Ideally/normally should be at ______
B. concurrent D. resolution BHN.
C. coplanar 85. the distance between the center of A. 250/320
D. couple oscillation and the point of B. 350/380
77. Pair of equal and opposite (not suspension is called: C. 400/345
collinear) forces that tend cause a A. fix axis D. 340/350
rotation of a body. B. center of gravity 92. As a rule the center to center
A. centroids C. center of percussion distance between sprockets should
B. couple D. radius of oscillation not be less than _____ times the
C. equilibrium 86. if the velocity is variable and diameter of the bigger sprocket and
D. vector regular/ constantly increasing the not less than 30 times the pitch or
78. Stress that resist being pulled apart. rate of change is called: more than about 50 times to pitch.
A. compressive A. acceleration A. 1.5
B. shear B. constant work B. 2
C. tensile C. moment C. 2.5
D. torsional D. motion D. 3
79. What is the other term applied to 87. The kinematics chain in which one 93. What is the carbon content range of
dynamic seals? link is considered fixed for the SAE 4140 chrome-molly steel after
A. gasket purpose of analysis but motion is treatment?
B. packing possible in other link: A. 0.30/0.45
C. seal A. belting B. 0.38/0.43
D. shield B. frame C. 0.38/0.45
80. Which type of hardening will work to C. mechanism D. 0.30/0.50
some extent in all metals? D. sprocket chain 94. Gear are manufactured usually in
A. annealing 88. All forces in the same plane are the following processes: milling,
B. austenitizing called generating, shaving, grinding and
C. martempering A. coplanar A. blanking
D. work hardening B. couple B. dinking
50
 C. heat treatment A. Nickel nuts and other general applications
D. molding B. Aluminu in the coarse-thread series.
95. Flat belt that is too tight will induce C. White Iron A. UNC
strain on the bearing and belt ______. D. Lead B. UNF
A. Life will be shortened 2. It is a silvery dull, soft metal and the C. White iron
B. Result to uneconomical second lightest of all metals used in D. Lead
operation the industry. 9. What is the actual torque ratio of
C. Suffer/ shatter A. Nickel gear set divided by its gear ratio?
D. Will be sheared/cut B. Aluminum A. approach ratio
96. The resulting cross-sectional area of C. White Iron B. clearance
the tensile test specimen divided by D. Lead C. contact ratio
the specimen original area is called: 3. The least among iron ores for it D. efficiency
A. charpy test contains many impurities, poor in 10. Which of the following has low
B. % elongation iron contact and commonly used in coefficient of expansion, corrosion
C. Impact test England. resistant, weak in strength, and used
D. Izod test A. Hematite for non-ferrous applications as
97. SAE 51XXX belongs to the ______ B. Magnetite alloying elements?
steel family. C. Limanite A. Aluminum
A. carbon D. Siderite B. Aluminum oxide
B. chromium 4. Which of the following is not C. Copper oxide
C. manganese considered to be precious metal? D. Copper
D. nickel A. Silver 11. Which of the following material(s) is
98. Which of the following gasket B. Gold recommended for large sprocket of
material which should avoid hot C. Platinum large speed ratio and having firm
liquid/steam application? D. Steel engagement?
A. Asbestos fiber 5. It is an alloy of copper and zinc. It is A. nickel-chromium steel
B. Nylon fiber approximately 1/3 zinc and 2/3 B. copper
C. Rubberized copper. C. cast iron
D. Wool A. Brass D. aluminum
99. Which of the following that describes B. Bronze 12. In which of the following carrying
the same material properties all C. Muntz metal capacity where roller bearing is
cover/ direction and at any particular D. silver utilized better than ball bearing?
point in a structural member? 6. It is a copper-tin alloy and is named A. heavy load
A. heterogeneous either bell metal or brown metal. B. low load
B. homogenous A. Brass C. high temperature load
C. isentropic B. Bronze D. reversing load
D. isotropic C. Muntz metal 13. Which of the following materials
100. Arc produced by two tungsten D. silver having thermal expansion of about
electrodes into which jet hydrogen is 7. It is a furnace that converts pig iron 10 times higher than those of
directed. into steel by oxidizing out the materials and has more heat
A. Atomic hydrogen welding surplus carbon and using oxygen by generated during machining?
B. Electro-beam welding throwing raw iron into the furnace. A. Aluminum
C. Hydrogen bomb A. Open-heart furnace B. Asbestos
D. Hydrogen lancing B. Electric furnace C. Plastic
Elements 11 C. Cupola D. PVC
1. A white metal, almost as bright as D. Bessemer 14. To avoid scoring in the bearing
silver and is malleable and ductile 8. The most commonly-used series in surface and the shaft on to
and can be welded. the bulk production of bolts, screws, contamination/ absorption of the
time dirt in the bearing during
51
 operation/ lubrication the bearing B. power saw C. Drilling Machine D. Milling
material to apply should have good C. boring machine Machine
____________properties D. drilling machine 30. It is ability of a material to resist the
A. anti-scoring 22. All of these are classifications of iron loads that are applied suddenly and
B. corrosion resistance ore; except what? often at high velocity.
C. embeddability A. magnetite C. siderite A. Fatigue strength B. Impact
D. Conformability B. hematite D. sulfurite strength
23. It refers to the internal resistance of C.Hardness D.Shock strength
15. What do impact test measure? a material to being deformed and is 31. A steel of carbon range of 0.05to
A. Compactness measured in terms of the applied 0.03 percent is considered as what
B. Ductility load. type of steel?
C. Plasticity A. stress C. A. Low carbon steel
D. Toughness ductility B. High carbon steel
16. Which of the following types of gear B. strain D. C. Medium carbon steel
transmit power at a certain angle? malleability D. Very high carbon steel
A. Bevel 24. The property of a material which 32. A steel of carbon range of 0.30 to
B. Helix resists forces acting to pull the 0.45 percent a considered as what
C. Herringbone material apart. type of steel?
D. Spur A .tensile strength C. bending A. Low carbon steel
17. Which of the following gasket strength B. High carbon steel
material is not use for high B. compressive strength D. torsional C. Medium carbon steel
temperature? strength D. Alloyed Steel
A. Asbestos 25. The property of a material to resist 33. A steel of carbon range of 0.45 to
B. Plastic nylon loads that are applied 0.75 percent a considered as what
C. Rubberized A. magnetite C. siderite type of steel?
D. Wool B. hematite D. sulfurite A. Low carbon steel
18. How do you call a plane 26. The property of a material to resist B. High carbon steel
perpendicular to the gear axis? various kinds of rapidly alternating C. Medium carbon steel
A. Normal plane stresses. D. Alloyed Steel
B. Pitch plane A. fatigue strength B.bending 34. A steel of carbon range of 0.45 to
C. Plane of rotation strength 0.75 percent a considered as what
D. Radius of gyration C. compressive strength D. impact type of steel?
19. Which of the following is the strength A. Low carbon steel
specification of molybdenum alloy? 27. The ability of a material to resist B. High carbon steel
A. SAE 3XXX loads that are applied suddenly and C. Medium carbon steel
B.SAE 4XXX often at high velocity. D. Very high carbon steel
C. SAE 5XXX A. fatigue strength B. bending 35. Which of the ff. alloying elements of
D. SAE 6XXX strength steel will tend to increase its
20. Which of the following is abundant C. compressive strength D. impact strength w/out decreasing its
for ferrous metals? strength toughness or ductility and w/ its
A. Sulfur 28. The ability of a material to stretch, large quantities the steel become
B. Phosphorous ben, or twist w/out breaking or tough but develop high resistance
C. Manganese cracking. to corrosion and shock?
D. Carbon A.Ductility B. Malleability A. chromium
21. What machine is used to flatten C. Hardness D. Compressibility B. manganese
surface on a vertical, horizontal or 29. Which of the ff. is considered to be C. molybdenum
even angular plane? the father of all machine tools? D. nickel
A. Shaper machine A. Lathe Machine B.Boring 36. Which of the ff. alloying elements of
Machine steel will produce the greatest
52
 hardening effect like carbon and at D. Quenching structure because the presence of
the same time reduces the 42. It is the heat treatment of steel that slag.
enlargement of its grain structure. produces extremely hard surface. A. nodular iron
A. chromium The process consists of exposing the B. malleable iron
B. manganese steel to hot ammonia gas for some C. wrought iron
C. molybdenum hours. D. gray iron
D. nickel A. Nitriding 49. A type of ferrous metal w/c is formed
37. Which of the ff. alloying elements of B. Cyaniding by remelting pig iron and scrap iron
steel will produce fine grain C. Carburizing in a cupola furnace. It is brittle and
structure and promotes greater D. Ammonia bath usually gray in color, and
toughness and ductility? 43. How do you call the metals that commonly used in making casting.
A. chromium contain large amount of carbon A. cast iron
B. manganese content? B. malleable iron
C. molybdenum A. ferrous metal C. wrought iron
D. nickel B. non ferrous metal D. gray iron
38. Which of the ff. alloying elements of C. base metal 50. A classification of iron ore w/c
steel w/c makes it extremely hard D. precious metal contains 70% iron when pure and
and resistance to _w/out making it 44. All these are the basic kinds of cast 50% iron when mined.
brittle? iron , Except: A. Hematite
A. chromium A. gray iron B. Magnetite
B. manganese B. malleable iron C. Limanite
C. molybdenum C. white iron D. Siderite
D. nickel D. red iron 51. .A classification of iron ore w/c
39. It is the elements used mostly in 45. Which of the ff. are the basic kinds contains 72.5% iron when pure and
steels designed for metal cutting of cast iron is harder and more the remaining percentages are
tools. The steels added by this difficult to machine because it impurities.
element are tough, hard and very contains carbon in carbide state? A. Hematite
resistant to wear. A. gray iron B. Magnetite
A. chromium B. malleable iron C. Limanite
B. tungsten C. white iron D. Siderite
C. molybdenum D. wrought iron 52. Which of the ff. iron ores also known
D. nickel 46. How do you call metals that have no as “brown hematite” or ferric oxide a
40. It is the element whose chief carbon content? yellowish brown powder?
function is to strengthen the ferrite. A. ferrous metal A. Hematite
It is used w/ tungsten to develop red B. malleable iron B. Magnetite
hardness or the ability to remain C. non ferrous metal C. Limanite
hard when red hot. D. white iron D. Siderite
A .chromium 47. Which of the ff. is the type of cast 53. Which of the ff. represents
B. cobalt iron that can stand more shock and manganese steel?
C. molybdenum blow than regular cast iron? A .13XX
D. nickel A. nodular iron B.40XX
41. It also known as the strain drawing. B. malleable iron C.50XX
It is the process whereby certain C. wrought iron D.10XX
degree of hardness is sacrificed in D. gray iron 54. It is another kind of furnace where
order to reduce brittleness and 48. It is a metal of almost pure iron, cast iron is remelted to make them
increase the toughness of steel tool. ductile and very tough. It can be into cast iron. The furnace is charges
A. Tempering hammered and shaped at high w/ layers of coke and pig iron plus
B. Normalizing temperature. It has a fibrous scrap iron.
C. Annealing A. Open-hearth furnace
53
 B. electric furnace B. Medium carbon steel 66. The top surface joining the two sides
C. Cupola C. High carbon steel of a thread.
D. Bessemer D. Very high carbon steel A. pitch
55. A furnace w/c consists of blowing a 60. A steel numbered SAE-AISI, C1035 B. crest
stream of air through a molten mass when not rolled and contains 0.30% C. lead
of iron pig. A stream of air is turned to 0.60% carbon. D. space
on through the wind box and enters A. Low carbon steel 67. The amount of variation permitted in
the converter at the bottom. B. Medium carbon steel the size of a part is the difference
Manganese, carbon and other C. High carbon steel between the limits of maximum and
elements of varying amounts are D. Very high carbon steel the minimum dimensions of a given
added to produce steel w/c is then 61. A steel numbered SAE-AISI, C1035 part. It may be expressed at plus,
poured and solidifies. when not rolled and contains 0.60% minus, or as both plus and minus.
A. Open-hearth furnace to 1.30% carbon and used when A. tolerance
B. electric furnace extra hardness is required. B. limits
C. Cupola A. Low carbon steel C. variation
D. Bessemer B. Medium carbon steel D. clearance
56. A furnace similar to open hearth. C. High carbon steel 68. The instrument used to reshape a
This principal difference is the D. Very high carbon steel grinding wheel that is grooved or out
method of heating the charged .It is 62. Which of the ff. alloying elements of round is called a:
used in producing quality of steels used in making high speed steel. A. wheel aligner
because melting and refining is A .Molybdenum B. wheel emery
closely controlled. B. nickel C. wheel dresser
A. Open-hearth furnace C. manganese D. wheel cutter
B. electric furnace D. Silicon 69. The instrument used to remove old
C. Cupola 63. Which of the ff. alloying elements packing from cacking glands and
D. Bessemer used in springs to make more stuffing boxes are called:
57. It is the process of reheating or reliant. A. packing tools
drawing of metal that has been A Silicon B. gland box cleaner
hardened to a comparatively low B. Tungsten C. packing bits
temperature in order to relieve the C. hardness and resistance D. packing screw
hardening strain and increase the D. Nickel 70. When working on bearings and
toughness of the steel. 64. It refers to that property in steel w/c checking for high spots, it is
A. Tempering resist indention or penetration .It is customary to apply what?
B. Annealing usually expressed in forms of the A. white lead
C. Cyaniding area of an indention made by a B. dykem blue
D. Normalizing special ball under standard load, or C. red lead
58. Case hardening is the process of the depth of a special indenter. D. prussian blue
hardening the outer surface of the A. Hardness 71. If you wanted to check the face of a
metal and the inner parts are soft B. Ductility pump slide valve or other flat-faced
.What percentage of carbon content C. Malleability valve ,you could check for trueness
that this type of hardening is D. wears resistance on a:
allowed. 65. The distance from the point on a A. flat board
A.15% and above screw thread to a corresponding B. piece of glass
B.10 to 20% only point on a adjacent thread, C. surface plate
C. less than 5% only measured parallel to the axis. D. bearing plate
D. Any of the ff. A. Pitch 72. Which of the ff. is used to keep a
59. Steel numbered SAE-AISI, C1018 and B. lead metal clean while soldering?
contains 0.10% to 0.30% carbon. C. thread A. flax
A. Low carbon steel D. crest B. flux
54
 C. torch C. flaring tool D. tube countersink B.”V” block
D. insulated 81. Which of the ff. is not a standard C.jaw holder
73. Before splicing electric wires, they thread form? D. chuck
should be: A. square B. double 90. When measuring a drill for size
A. tinned flute measure across the:
B. soldered C. American national D.60 deg. A. margin
C. cleaned and tinned sharp V B. shank
D. insulate 82. How do you call the tool used to cut C. flutes
74. To check the speed of a motor or the threads in a hole? D. porx
other rotary machine one would use A .top B.bit 91. IN threaded members, w/c of the ff.
a: C.tap D. reamer defines N.C?
A. galvanometer 83. Hand taps are provided in sets of A. neutral cut
B. tachometer three. Which of the ff. set of three? B. national cut
C. micrometer A. taper, plug, and end C. national course
D. Geiger counter B. taper, plug and bottom D. not center
75. Before drilling a hole in a piece of C. short, taper and bottom 92. In threaded members, w/c of the ff.
metal , it should be: D. short, medium and long represents N.F?
A. marked w/ chalk 84. Which of the ff. taps should be used A. national file
B. scribed to start a thread? B. neutral file
C. center punch A. plug B. bottom C. National fine
D. protracted C. short D. taper D. not found
76. A tap or die marked ¼-20 indicates: 85. Which of the ff. size of the drill is 93. What tool used in precision work to
A.1/4”2 radius-20 cm. long used in preparing to tap a hole? smooth or enlarge_______
B.1/4” diameter-20 threads per A. equal to the size of the tap A. round out
in B. larger than the size of the tap B. reamer
C.1/4” radian -20 threads per in C. smaller than the size of the C. drift pin
D.1/42 turn-20 times tap D. protractor
77. After a piece of pipe has been cut, D. none of the above 94. Which of the ff. chisels would be
the hole is clean out w/ a: 86. Pipe taps are: used for cutting a groove?
A. piper reamer A. the same size from end to end A. diamond –point chisel
B. pipe taper B. tapered B. round nose chisel
C. pipe cleaner C. not fluted C. cold chisel
D. hole cleaner D. not hardened D. hot chisel
78. What do you call the tool(s) used for 87. When preparing to tap a hole pipe 95. Which of the ff. is not a cut of file?
cutting threads? fitting the size of the drill will be: A. smooth
A. pipe cutter A. larger than the tap size B. half-round
B. pipe threader B. smaller than the tap size C. Second cut
C. pipe stock’ and die` C. equal to the size of the tap D. bastard
D. pipe ratchet cutter D. none of the above 96. How do you call the tool used for
79. How do you call the tool used when 88. Which of the ff. does not have to be cleaning files?
working large size of pipe? lubricated when drilling? A. files cleaner B. file oilstone
A .chain pipe wrench A. steel C. file card D. scraper
B. chain holder B. monel 97. Which of the ff. is the smallest size
C. chains tongs C. brass drill?
D.A or B D. tool steel A. #80 B. #1
80. What tool is used when preparing to 89. How do you call the tool used when C. #60 D. #0
put fittings on copper tubing? cutting a hole in the side of a round 98. Which of the ff. is the largest size
A. tube spreader B. tube piece of metal? drill?
retarder A. vise A. A B.Z
55
 C.X D.XX 6. Which of the following would c. Pipe stock
99. The size of a drill is stamped on the: cause hot bearings? d. Pipe cutter
A. point B. margin A. Improper oil 14. How do you call the pipe fitting
C. shank D. flute B. Improper alignment which has two openings and
100. A. operator must wear C. Dirt in oil provides a turn of 90 degrees?
goggles D. All of the above a. An elbow
B. the surface to be babbitted must 7. What is the approximate melting b. A coupling
be free of moisture point of Babbitt? c. A tee
C. the surface to be babbitted must A. 1000 deg. F d. A union
be clean B. 750 deg. F 15. In which of the following where
D. all of the above C. 650 deg. F plug cock offers?
ELEMENTS 12 D. 500 deg. F a. More resistance to flow
1. Which of the following safety 8. Which of the following is correct than a globe valve
precautions should be followed in pouring Babbitt? b. The same resistance to
when renewing a flange gasket? A. It can be done in several flow as a globe valve
A. drain the line thoroughly pouring c. Less resistance to
B. tie down isolation valves B. Must be poured all at one flow than a globe
C. isolate the section to be time valve
worked on C. Can be done at intervals d. The same resistance to
D. all of these D. Must be done in cool place flow as an angle valve
2. In installing a new flange gasket, 9. Which of the following groups of 16. What is the common flux to be
which of the following must be pipe sizes is correct? used when soldering brass,
done first? A. ¼, 1/2, ¾, 7/8, 1 copper or tin?
A. Flange faces are painted B. ¼, 3/8, ½, ¾, 1 a. Tallow
B. Flange faces are C. ¼, 3/8, ½, 5/8, ¾, 1 b. Borax
absolutely clean D. ¼, ½, 5/8, ¾, 1 c. Rosin
C. Isolating valves are open 10. Which of the following where d. Sal ammoniac
D. Old gasket is in place pipe wrench (Stillson) was 17. In one turn of the screw in a
3. Which of the following is correct designed to be used? micrometer, it moves the spindle
about standard wire gage? a. Hexagonal objects by what amount?
A. #10 is larger than #5 b. Square objects a. 0.25”
B. #1 is smaller than #2 c. Round objects b. 0.025”
C. #25 is smaller than #20 d. Flat objects c. 0.205”
D. #30 is larger than #25 11. In which of the following where d. 0.110”
4. Which of the following tools pipe is measured? 18. What is the process used to
would be most useful when a. Inside diameter retard corrosion on iron pipe?
taking leads on bearings? b. Thickness of wall a. Soldering
A. Dividers c. Outside diameter b. Tempering
B. Micrometer d. Wire gage c. Annealing
C. Outside calipers 12. In which of the following where d. Galvanizing
D. Center gage tubing is measured by: 19. On XX heavy pipe the extra
5. What is the wrench size for a ¾” a. Inside diameter metal is added to which of the
nut? b. Thickness of wall following?
A. 1-1/4” c. Outside diameter a. Outside
B. ¾” d. Wire gage b. Inside
C. 1- 1/2” 13. How do you call the tool used to c. Half on the inside, half
D. 10/24” cut threads on pipe? on the outside
a. Pipe tool
b. Pipe vise
56
 d. Three quarters in the c. 48 b. Weaker than a soldered
outside, one quarter on d. 45 joint
the inside 25. Sheet metal of #18 gage is c. The same strength as a
20. Which is very necessary when heavier than: soldered joint
installing packing in a packing a. 12 gage d. Three times as strong as
box? b. 22 gage a soldered joint
a. Leave one old turn at the c. 14 gage 31. Brazing requires which of the
bottom of the packing d. 16 gage following/
box 26. What is the use of shims? a. Hot solder
b. Remove one turn and a. Separate fresh and salt- b. More heat
install one new turn of water lines c. Soft solder
packing b. Replace fuses d. A and B
c. Leave sufficient and c. Adjust cylinder liners 32. What is/are the primary
clearance on each d. Adjust bearing reason(s) why lead is used in
turn to allow for clearances solder?
expansion 27. How do you call the process a. It has a high melting
d. Place end cuts directly in used to retard corrosion (rust) on b. It is cheap
line with each other iron pipe and fitting? c. It has a low melting
21. A square foot of steel plate 1/8” a. Tinning d. B and C
thick weighs 5 pounds. The b. Galvanizing 33. What is the name of the taper
weight of a steel plate 10 feet c. Soldering shank used on drills?
long and 4 feet wide would be d. Sulphurizing a. Miller
how much? 28. In pipe fittings the term “offset” b. Starrett
a. 200 lbs refers to what? c. Morse
b. 20 lbs a. A cut-off running at right d. Stanley
c. 2000 lbs angles to the original 34. What is the effect if the melting
d. 20,000 lbs piping point of solder is very high?
22. Cast iron weighs 640 pounds per b. Two pipes running a. Weaker the solder joint
cubic foot. How much is the parallel to each other b. Stronger the solder
weight of cast iron block c. A bend in the pipe joint
14”x12”x18”? d. Two sizes of pipe in the c. Softer the solder joint
a. 1200 lbs same run d. Harder the solder joint
b. 1120 lbs 29. In machine shop, if the lips of 35. Which of the following will likely
c. 1000 lbs the drill are of different lengths happen if the angle on a drill is
d. 1088 lbs then which of the following will less than 59 deg.?
23. A tank 28” in diameter and 14’ likely happen? a. The drill will make a
high is filled with water. The total a. The drill will not cut larger hole
pressure on the bottom of the b. The hole will be larger b. The drill will make a
tank is: than the drill smaller hole
a. 3741 lbs c. The hole will be smaller c. The hole will take
b. 2573 lbs than the drill longer to drill and
c. 4257 lbs d. None of these will more power is
d. 3000 lbs happen required to drive the
24. A double-bottom tank is 18’ 30. Which of the following drill
wide, 24’ long and 4’ deep. It is statement(s) is correct for the d. The drill will not center
filled with fresh water. The total “brazed joint”/ properly
capacity in tons is: a. Stronger than a 36. What is/are the reason(s) of soda
a. 50 soldered joint being added to water and used
b. 55 for cooling instead of water?
57
 a. It reduces the amount of 43. A piece if stock 6” long is 2” bottom of the next
heat generated diameter at one end and is cut thread
b. It improves the finish with a taper of ½” to the foot. d. The distance from the
c. It overcomes rusting The diameter of the smaller end bottom of a head on a
d. All of these will be: bolt to the first thread
37. What will likely happen if the a. 1 – ½” 48. A tool bit for cutting an
drill’s speed is too high? b. 1 – ¼” American National thread should
a. Cut faster c. 1 – ¾” be ground with what angle?
b. Cut slower 44. If a piston ring is to be made a. 45˚
c. Lose its temper 1/64” larger in diameter per inch b. 60˚
d. Not cut diameter of the cylinder which it c. 90˚
38. The lip clearance of a drill should is to fit , the required diameter d. 30˚
be approximately how many of the piston ring to fit an 8” 49. An approximate safe rule for
degrees? cylinder will be: cutting new pistons for steam
a. 20 deg. – 25 deg. a. 8 – ¼” pumps is to allow:
b. 12 deg. – 15 deg. b. 8 – 3/16” a. 0.002” between piston
c. 5 deg. – 10 deg. c. 8 – 1/8” and cylinder for each
d. 15 deg. – 20 deg. d. 8 – 5/32” inch diameter of piston
39. If the cutting edges of a drill are 45. What is the reason why drill b. 0.001” between
cut at different angles: “squeal’s” when cutting? piston and cylinder
a. The drill will not cut a. Drill being ground for each inch
b. The hole will be larger improperly diameter of piston
than the drill b. Insufficient lubrication c. 0.010” between piston
c. The hole will be smaller c. Drill being too hot and cylinder for each
than the drill d. Any of the above inch diameter of piston
d. None of the above 46. In what operation where “center d. 0.0001” between piston
40. What is the correct cutting angle drilling” is to be found? and cylinder for each
on a drill for ordinary work? a. Drilling center in an odd- inch diameter of piston
a. 45 deg. shaped piece of metal 50. An approximate safe rule for
b. 59 deg. b. Drilling and cutting new piston rings for
c. 50 deg. countersinking with steam pumps is to make the
d. 65 deg. one tool ring:
41. A piece of stock 8” long is 4” c. Centering with one tool a. 1/32” larger in diameter
diameter on one end and 1” and drilling with another per inch diameter of
diameter on the other end. The d. Drilling a center in a cylinder
taper per foot is: piece of stock in a drill b. 1/16” larger in diameter
a. 4” press than that of the cylinder
b. 4 – ¼” 47. Which of the following defines c. 1/16” larger in
c. 4 – ½” “pitch” in threads? diameter per inch
d. 4 – 1/16” a. A distance of the full diameter of cylinder
42. A piece of stock 8” long is 3” length of the thread d. 0.005” larger in
diameter at one end and 1 – ½” b. The distance from a diameter per inch
diameter at other end. The taper point on one thread diameter of cylinder
per inch is: to a corresponding 51. What is the approximate gap
a. ½” point on the next clearance for new piston rings
b. 3/16” thread measured for steam pumps?
c. ¾” parallel to the axis a. 0.003” for each inch
d. 5/16” c. The distance from the of diameter of
top of one thread to the cylinder
58
 b. 0.001” for each inch of b. Copper gasket on each 64. Grinding wheels have a range of
diameter of cylinder side of the wheel soft to hard abrasive materials
c. 0.010” for each inch of c. Only the steel washers depending on the use. Most
diameter of cylinder provided with the manufacturers letter their
d. 0.050” for each inch of machine wheels from A to Z. Which of the
diameter of cylinder d. None of the above following marks represents the
52. The familiar “3/8 – 16” in 58. What is the other term for the hardest?
machine shop means what? operation of “truing” a grinding a. E
a. 6 pieces, 3/8” long wheel? b. Z
b. Gear with 16 teeth and a a. Centering c. A
3/8” arbor hole b. Sizing d. E1
c. 3/8” square , 16” lone c. Dressing 65. What is the main difference
d. 3/8” diameter, 16 d. Rounding between a planer and a shaper?
threads per inch 59. What tool is used to check a. The planer has an offset
53. The work should be held ______, external pipe threads? table and the shaper has
when using a drill press. a. Plug gage a horizontal table
a. The hand b. Pitch gage b. The shaper has a rotting
b. A vise or clamp c. Thread gage table and the planer has
c. A gloved hand d. Ring gage a horizontal table
d. Pliers 60. What tool is used to check c. The table of a planer
54. What is/are the reason/s why internal pipe threads? has a reciprocating
tapered shanks are used on a. Plug gage motion past the tool
large drill presses? b. Pitch gage head while the table
a. The drill can be centered c. Thread gage of the shaper is
more easily d. Ring gage stationary and the
b. The drill can be easily 61. Which of the following is used to tool head has a
forced out of a sleeve cut gears? reciprocating motion
with a drift a. Gear cutter d. One is larger than the
c. The shank will not turn b. Gear center other
when cutting c. Gear hob 66. One of the factors involved in
d. The shank can be d. Gear threader the choice of grinding wheel is:
reground when worn 62. If you use dry grinding wheel for a. The kind of material to
55. Which of the following is not a sharpening tool bits, dip the end be ground
common drill shank? of the bit in water frequently to b. The amount of stock to
a. Straight prevent: be removed
b. Fluted a. Burning your fingers c. The kind of finish
c. Taper b. Annealing the cutting required
d. Bit edge of the bit d. All of the above
56. What is the usual cutting angle c. Hardening of the tip 67. The “tang” of a file is the part
on a drill for drilling mild steel? d. The tip from crystallizing that:
a. 39 deg. a. Does the cutting
b. 59 deg. 63. A piece of tool steel held against b. Has no teeth
c. 49 deg. an emery wheel will give off: c. Fits into the handle
d. 69 deg. a. White sparks with d. Is opposite the handle
57. When installing a new grinding stars on the ends 68. In general, files are divided into
wheel, always use: b. Yellow sparks two classes called:
a. Blotting paper c. No sparks a. Single-cut and
gaskets on each side d. Green sparks double-cut
of the wheel b. Rough and smooth
59
 c. Fine and coarse a. Filing the surface c. Dirt on it
d. Heel and sizes b. Acid-cleaning the d. Any of the above
69. The length of a file is measured surface 80. Prepared soldered paste flux is
from: c. Scraping the surface most popular if you did not have
a. End to end d. Any of the above any, you could use:
b. Point to end 75. What is (are) the hand tool(s) a. Hydrochloric acid
c. Point to heel used for cutting threads on b. Nitric acid
d. Heel to end round stocks? c. Sulfuric acid
70. Which of the following where a. Stock and die d. Any of the above
“pillar” files are used? b. Stock 81. Hard solder is made of which of
a. Filling slots c. Die wrench the following?
b. Filing against a shoulder d. Stock cutter a. Copper and zinc
c. Filing keyways 76. A tapered piece of stock is 2” b. Tin and copper
d. Any of the above long, 1-1/8” diameter at one end c. Tin and zinc
71. Which of the following will and ¾” diameter at the other d. Tin and lead
usually happen to the blade of end. The taper per foot is: 82. Which of the following is the flux
flexible hacksaw applied by too a. 2” usually used for hard soldering?
much pressure? b. 2 – ¼” a. Rosin
a. Snap easily c. 2 – ½” b. Barium
b. Buckle or run out of d. 2 – 1/16” c. Borax
line 77. Which of the following best d. Alum
c. Cut too fast defines sweating? 83. In which of the following where
d. Cut on a slant a. Soldering two different straight muriatic acid is often
72. Which of the following best kinds of metal together used as a flux?
defines soldering? b. Separating two pieces of a. Galvanized iron
a. It is holding two metals metal that have been b. Sheet steel
together by heating soldered together c. Cast iron
b. It is joining two c. Tinning two surfaces, d. Any of the above
metals by a third soft applying, flux 84. For aluminum, special solders
metal that is applied between them, are being used and will usually
in molten state holding the two require which of the following?
c. It is holding two different together and heating a. More heat
kind of metals together d. None of the above b. The same heat as
by heating 78. If muriatic acid is used as a flux, copper wire
d. It is joining two metals the soldered area must be c. Less heat
together by heating cleaned thoroughly afterwards to d. The same heat as sheet
73. What is the use of flux in prevent: metal
soldering? a. Anyone touching it from 85. Copper is annealed by heating to
a. Keep the solder from getting burned a cherry red color and _____.
running off the metal b. Remaining acid from a. Dousing in cold water
b. Keep the metal from eating the metal b. Dousing in oil
getting too hot c. The acid from c. Cooling slowly in air
c. Keep the tip of the evaporating and the d. Dousing in hot water
soldering iron clean solder disintegrating 86. Soft solder is made of which of
d. Remove and prevent d. None of the above the following?
oxidation of the 79. Solder will not unite with a metal a. Copper and zinc
metals surface that has: b. Tin and copper
74. A surface should be prepared for a. Grease on it c. Tin and lead
soldering by: b. Oxidation on it d. Tin and zinc
60
87. A piece of mild steel held a. 4 flutes B. Aluminum
against an emery wheel will give b. 2 flutes C. Tubing
off ____. c. 3 flutes D. Any of the above
a. Bright shiny sparks d. No flutes Elements 13
b. No sparks 94. Where is the correction position 1. Hacksaw blades are made of what
c. Light straw-colored of the tool bit when facing off a materials?
sparks piece of material in the lathe A. tool steel
d. Green sparks chuck? B. tungsten alloy steel
88. A gear wheel making 156 RPM a. Above center C. high-speed steel
has 56 teeth. It drives another b. Below center D. any of the above
gear at 91 RPM. The number of c. At the center 2. A hacksaw blade with 24 TPI is best
teeth on the second gear is: d. Off center suitable for cutting which of the following
a. 65 95. Standard vise has ______ jaws? materials?
b. 50 a. Soft A. tubing
c. 90 b. hard B. brass and copper
d. 96 c. semi-hard C. sheet metal over 18 gage
89. Tool steel can be hardened by d. semi-soft D. any of the above
which of the following? 96. In machining, which of the 3. Which of the following is a "must"for all
a. Heating red hot and following could be the reason if hard hacksaw blades?
plunging into water tool bit burns? A. It has a hard back and flexible teeth
b. Heating red hot and a. Speed is too slow B. It has a flexible back and hard teeth
cooling in a blast of air b. Material is too hard C. It has the entire blade hardened
c. Heating red hot and c. Speed is too fast D. It will only fit a solid frame hacksaw
plunging into linseed or d. Material cannot be cut 4. How many positions can a hacksaw blade
cottonseed oil 97. Which of the following where the be placed in a frame?
d. Any of the above, lathe compound is used? A. Two positions
depending on type a. Angle cutting B. One position
and use b. Facing C. Four position
90. At what temperature where soft c. Grooving D. Three position
solder approximately melts? d. Any of the above 5. Files are divided into two general classes.
a. 250 deg. 98. When the dial on the cross-feed How are these classified?
b. 450 deg. is turned 0.010”, how much is A. Rough and smooth
c. 350 deg. removed from the diameter of B. Single-cut and double-cut
d. 550 deg. the stock being cut? C. Large and small
91. What material where a scriber is a. 0.010” D. Glat shapes and round shapes
made from? b. 0.005” 6. The term "set" of a saw best defines
a. Carbon steel c. 0.020” what?
b. Tool steel d. 0.015” A. To set properly in the frame
c. Cold-rolled steel 99. Which of the following describes B. Alternate teeth are turned
d. Hot-rolled steel a flexible back hacksaw blade? slightly to left and right to make
92. What should be done first before a. Only the teeth cutting slot slightly wider than
applying layout blue on a piece hardened the thickness of the blade
of metal? b. A movable back C. The teeth have been case-hardened
a. Roughened c. Flexible ends for better cutting
b. Clean d. Only the back hardened D. The teeth are set evenly apart
c. Hot 100. The flexible type hacksaw blade is best 7. All hard hacksaw blades is best suited for
d. cold suited for which of the following work on which of the following?
93. How many flutes does a drill bit materials? A. Brass
have? A. Channel iron
61
 B. Cast iron 14. What is the used for finishing a piece of 22. What is the approximate distance of the
C. Tool steel work to size with a file? marking on a micrometer barrel?
D. Any of the above a. Double-cut-fine tooth file a. 0.025" apart
8. Which of the following is the best b. Mill file b. 0.0025" apart
instrument for measuring thousandths of an c. Single-cut fine tooth file c. 0.250" apart
inch? d. Crossing file d. 2.50" apart
a. Caliper 15. The process of finishing off a piece of 23. Which of the following is the effect if the
b. Micrometer metal with a real smooth finish. lathe is put into back gear?
c. Tachometer a. Draw - filing a. Go backward of the same speed
d. Pyrometer b. Mill-filing b. Faster
9. A hacksaw blade with 34 teeth per inch c. Side-filing c. Slower
should be used for cutting which of the d. Flat-filing d. At a lower speed backward
following materials? 16. How do you call a small piece of metal 24. The work should be held with _______
a. Brass clogged between the teeth on the file? when using a drill press?
b. Heavy stock a. Clogs a. The hand
c. Cast iron b. Pins b. A vise or clamp
d. Thin wall tubing c. Flats c. A pair of pliers
10. Where is the hacksaw blade should be d. Bumps d. Gloves on
placed in the? 17. Which of the following is described as 25. What is normally used in drilling a hole in
a. The teeth pointing forward the "safe edge" of tge file? a piece of work held in a lathe chuck?
b. The teeth pointing backward a. The end opposite the handle a. Compound rest
c. One end looser than the other end b. The edge with no teeth b. Tailstock and drill chuck
d. The teeth facing in any direction c. The one with the handle c. Cross-feed
11. Which of the following is the usual d. None of the above d. Headstock
procedure when cutting a long thin piece of 18. The best procedure when filing a piece of 26. Copper is annealed by heating to a
metal? metal in a lathe is to take: cherry red color and:
a. Turn the blade upside down in the a. Short even strokes a. Dousing in cold water
frame b. Long fast strokes b. Dousing in oil
b. Turn the blade at right angles c. Long slow strokes c. Cooling slowly in air
to the frame d. Short fast strokes d. Dousing in hot water
c. Use a blade with fewer teeth per 19. Which of the following information is 27. What is the main purpose of "annealing"
inch necessary when ordering a file? a metal?
d. Set the blade in the frame with a. Size (length) a. To make the metal harder
the teeth facing toward you b. Type of teeth b. To make the metal softer
12. A hacksaw blade with 18 teeth per inch c. Shape c. To make the metal harder
is best suited for cutting what materials? d. All of the above medium-hard
a. Solid stock 20. Which of the following is the best file to d. To make the metal harder shiny
b. Aluminum be used when finishing sharp corners or 28. Te purpose of "tempering” is to make a
c. Cast iron slots and grooves? metal what?
d. Any of the above a. Mill file a. Harder
13. What is the used of coolant in the power b. Knife file b. Less brittle
hacksaw when cutting materials? c. Square c. Softer
a. Absorb the heat of friction d. Jeweler's file d. More brittle
b. Prevent the blade from over 21. How is "eleven-sixteenths" of an inch 29. What is the minimum diameter of a
heating expressed in decimal? piece of round stock necessary to make a
c. Prevent the blade from losing its a. 0.6785 square key 3/4 on a side?
temper b. 0.6875 a. 1.5"
d. All of the above c. 0.7685 b. 1.0"
d. 0.6578 c. 1.06"
62
 d. 0.75" b. Cutting angles c. Polishing
30. A scriber is made from what materials? c. Small-diameter cutting d. Pickling
a. Carbon steel d. None of the above 45. The process in which the metalis dipped
b. Tool steel 38. When cutting the materials in a lathe, in dilute acid solutions to remove dirt grease
c. Cold-rolled steel the harder the materials being cut, the tool and oxides.
d. Hot-rolled steel bit should be: a. Sheradizing
31. Before applying layout blue on a piece of a. More side rake b. Super finishing
metal, it must be: b. More top rake c. Polishing
a. Roughened c. Less side rake d. Pickling
b. Cleaned d. No side rake 46. A hot-dip or electroplate application of
c. Heated 39. What is the primary purpose of knurling? tin to steel.
d. Cold a. Smooth material a. Tin-plating
32. A drill bit has how many flutes? b. Roughen material b. Metal spraying
a. 4 flutes c. Polish material c. Organic finishes
b. 2 flutes d. Sharpen material d. Lapping
c. 3 flutes 40. What do you call the process of 47. A fine grinding operation used to obtain
d. No flutes removing the sharp edges from a piece of exact fit and dimensional accuracy.
33. Te alignment of coupling faces can be stock? a. Tin-plating
checked by what process? a. Knurling b. Metal spraying
a. Inserting an inside micrometer b. Planning c. Organic finishes
b. Inserting a thermocouple c. Chamfering d. Lapping
c. Inserting a feeler gage d. Turning 48. The covering of surfaces with an organic
between the coupling faces at various 41. At what speed that carbon steel drill film of paint enamel or lacquer.
points around the circumference should be operated? a. Tin-plating
d. rotating and measuring to nearest a. Speed greater than that when b. Metal spraying
permanent fitting using a high speed drill c. Organic finishes
34. A piece of cast iron held against emery b. Speed less than that when d. Lapping
wheel will gas off what? using a high speed drill 49. The spraying of molten metal onto
a. Dull yellow sparks c. The same speed as that when product. Methods include metalizing,metal
b. Red sparks using a high speed drill powder spraying and plasma frame
c. Bright shiny sparks d. None of the above spraying.
d. No sparks 42. A specific method of zinc galvanizing in a. Tin-plating
35. When cutting materials in a lathe, the which parts are tumbled in zinc dust at high b. Metal spraying
softer the materials being cut, the tool bit temperatures. c. Organic finishes
should have: a. Sheradizing d. Lapping
a. More top rake b. Super finishing 50. Application of a thin phosphate on steel
b. Double top rake c. Polishing to improve corrosion resistance.
c. Less top rake d. Pickling a. Parkerizing
d. Any of the above 43. Abrasion of parts against wheels or belts b. Honing
36. After grinding a tool bit, the cutting coated with polishing compounds. c. Hand surfacing
should be: a. Sheradizing d. Galvanizing
a. Case-hardened b. Super finishing 51. This process is known as bonderizing
b. Stoned with an oilstone c. Polishing when used as a partner for paints.
c. Rubbed with emery cloth d. Pickling a. Parkerizing
d. Rubbed with crocus cloth 44. A super fibe grinding operation used to b. Honing
37. When turning a piece of round metal in a expose no fragmented, crystalline base c. Hand surfacing
lathe, the front clearance should be smaller metal. d. Galvanizing
for: a. Sheradizing
a. Large-diameter cutting b. Super finishing
63
52. The grinding operation using stones 58. A fine finishing operation, similar to 65. Often ground in the cutting tool face to
moving in a reciprocating pattern. Leaves a polishing, using a very fine polishing cause long chips to break into shorter, more
characteristic cross-hatch pattern compound. manageable pieces.
a. Parkerizing a. Electroplating a. A chip breaker grooves
b. Honing b. Calorizing b. Discontinuous chips
c. Hand surfacing c. Burnishing c. Non-segmented chips
d. Galvanizing d. Buffing d. Type-two chips
53. The creation (by sprayng,plating, fusion 59. Rotating parts in a barrel filled with an 66. What is the typical chip ratio?
welding, or heat treatment) of a hard metal abrasive or non abrasive medium. Widely a. 0.50
surface in a softer product. used to remove burrs, flash, scale, and b. 0.75
a. Parkerizing oxides c. 0.25
b. Honing a. Abrasive cleaning d. 1.00
c. Hand surfacing b. Calorizing 67. The angle at which the tool meets the
d. Galvanizing c. Barrel finishing workpiece is characterized by:
54. A zinc coating applied to low carbon d. Anodizing a. True rake angle
steel to improve corrosion resistance. The 60. An electroplating - acid bath oxidation b. Clearance angle
coating can be applied in a file dip bath, by process for aluminum and magnesium. The c. Relief angle
electroplating or by dry tumbling workplace is the anode in the electrical d. Wedge angle
(sheradizing) circuit. 68. Which of the following is the sum of the
a. Parkerizing a. Abrasive cleaning rake, clearance of wedge angles?
b. Honing b. Tumbling a. 90deg.
c. Hand surfacing c. Barrel finishing b. 180deg.
d. Galvanizing d. Anodizing c. 45deg.
55. The electro-deposition of a coating onto 61. Shooting sand (i.e sand blasting), steel d. 75deg.
the workplace. Electrical current is used to grit, or steel shot against work pieces to 69. What is the relative velocity difference
drive ions in solution to the part. The remove casting sand, scale and oxidation. between the tool and the workpiece?
workpiece is the cathode in the electrical a. Abrasive cleaning a. Cutting speed
circuit. b. Tumbling b. Chip velocity
a. Electroplating c. Barrel finishing c. Shear velocity
b. Calorizing d. Anodizing d. Rake velocity
c. Burnishing 62. What is the other term for barrel 70. How do you call the velocity of the chip
d. Buffing finishing? relative to the act face?
56. The diffusing of aluminum into a steel a. Abrasive cleaning a. Cutting speed
surface,producing an aluminum oxide that b. Tumbling b. Chip velocity
protects the steel from high-temperature c. Barrel finishing c. Shear velocity
corrosion d. Anodizing d. Rake velocity
a. Electroplating 63. Brittle materials produce discrete 71. How do you call the velocity of the chip
b. Calorizing fragments known as relative to the work piece?
c. Burnishing a. A chip breaker grooves a. Cutting speed
d. Buffing b. Discontinuous chips b. Chip velocity
57. How do you call the process of fine c. Non-segmented chips c. Shear velocity
grinding it peering operation designed to d. Type-two chips d. Rake velocity
leave a "characteristic pattern on the 64. Ductile materials form long helix-coiled 72. Which of the following is the primary
surface of the workplace"? string chips known as: parameter affecting the cutting energy
a. Electroplating a. Continuous chips requirement?
b. Calorizing b. Discontinuous chips a. Compressive stress
c. Burnishing c. Segmented chips b. Shear stress
d. Buffing d. Type-one chips c. Torsional stress
d. Bending stress
64
73. The energy expended per unit volume 80. Which of the following are used in a. Ceramic tools
removed is known as: specific case, usually finishing operations? b. Diamonds
a. Specific cutting energy a. Sintered carbides c. High speed Steel
b. Metal removal rate b. Ceramic tools d. Carbon tool steel
c. Cutting horsepower c. Diamonds 88. Cast non-ferrous tools are brittle but can
d. Absolute cutting energy d. Cast non-ferrous be used up to approximately:
74. A plain carbon steel with approximately 81. Used as finishing operation since very a. 1700 F
0.9 to 1.3% carbon, which has been fine and dimensionally accurate surface can b. 2200 F
hardened and tempered? be produced. c. 2000 F
a. Carbon tool steel a. Grinding d. 600 F
b. High speed steel b. Snagging 89. They are produced through powder
c. Low speed steel c. Honing metallurgy from non-ferrous materials.
d. Medium speed steel d. Lapping a. Diamonds
75. Contains tungsten or chromium and 82. Describes very rough grinding, such as b. Cast non-ferrous
retains its hardness up to approximately t5hat performed in foundries to remove c. Ceramic tools
600C. gates, fins, and risers from cesting. d. Sintered Carbides
a. Carbon tool steel a. Grinding 90. Sintered carbide operates as cutting
b. High speed steel b. Snagging speeds how many times as fast as HSS tools:
c. Low speed steel c. Honing a. 2 to 5
d. Medium speed steel d. Lapping b. Thrice
76. Cast non-ferrous tools are brittle but can 83. Grinding in very much little material, c. 5 to 7
be used up to approximately: 0.001 to 0.005 is removed. d. Twice
a. 1000 C a. Grinding 91. Which of the following is manufactured
b. 925 C b. Snagging from aluminum oxide have the same
c. 1500 C c. Honing expected life as carbide tools but can
d. 750 C d. Lapping operate at speeds from two to three times
77. Which of the following is produced 84. Which of the following is not a higher?
through powder metallurgy from non-ferrous measuring device? a. Ceramic tools
metals? a. Orsatanalyser b. High speed steels
a. Sintered carbides b. Thermometer c. Diamonds
b. Ceramic tools c. Micrometer caliper d. Carbon tool steel
c. Diamonds d. Divider 92. Able in the presence of high temperature
d. Cast non-ferrous 85. A plain carbon steel with approximately iron used in specific cases, usually in
78. Ceramic tools operate at what 0.9 to 1.3% carbon which has been finishing operations.
temperatures? hardened and tempered. a. Ceramic tools
a. Below 2000F a. Carbon tool steel b. Diamonds
b. Below 2200F b. Cast non-ferrous c. High speed steel
c. Above 2000F c. High speed steel d. Aluminum
d. Above 2200F d. Diamond 93. Percent of the heat developed in cutting
79. Which of the following is manufactured 86. Carbon tool steel can be given a good is due to friction between the tool and the
from aluminum oxide have the same edge, but is restricted to use below: work piece is?
expected life as carbide tools but can a. 400 to 600 F a. Approximately 50%
operate at speeds from two to three times b. 300 to 400 F b. Approximately 10%
higher? They operate below 1100 C. c. 700 to 800 F c. Approximately 25%
a. Sintered carbides d. 800 to 1000 F d. Approximately 75%
b. Ceramic tools 87. Which of the following contains tungsten 94. Which of the following is used to reduced
c. Diamonds or chromium and retains its hardness up to friction, removed heat, remove chips and
d. Cast non-ferrous approximately 1100 F, a property known as protect against corrosion.
red harness? a. Water vapor
65
 b. Carbon 1. Which of the following uses high- 8. It is used to cut or burn very small
c. Air energy electrical discharges to shape holes in the work piece with high
d. Cutting fluid electrically conducting work piece? dimensional accuracy.
95. Which of the following is a good heat A. electrochemical machining A. electrochemical machining
remove but it promote rust? B. electrochemical grinding B. laser machining
a. Air C. electrical discharge machining C. chemical milling
b. Kerosene D. ultrasonic grinding D. electronic erosion
c. Carbon Dioxide 2. For common brass tools, wear ratios 9. A general term used to denote the
d. Water for the tool and work piece vary blanking, bending and forming and
96. Addition of ___________ to water produces between: shearing of thin-gage metals.
an efficient inexpensive cutting fluid that A. 4:1 A. presswork
does not promote rusting. B. 20:1 B. transfer die
a. Sal soda C. 20:1 C. strip die
b. Kerosene lubricants D. 8:1 D. brake
c. Straight cutting oil 3. For expensive tool materials, wear 10. Used with dies and punches to form
d. Air ratios for the tool and work piece vary the work pieces
97. It reduces friction and do not cause rust between: A. station
but are less efficient of heat removal than A. 4:1 B. transfer die
water: B. 20:1 C. strip die
a. Sal soda C. 10:1 D. presses
b. Kerosene lubricants D. 8:1 11. With ___________ the work piece
c. Straight cutting oil 4. It removes heat by electrolysis in a advances through a sequence of
d. Air high current deplating operation operations:
98. Taylor’s equation relates cutting speed v A. electrochemical machining A. presswork
and tool life T for particular combination of B. electronic erosion B. brakes
tool and workplace, VTn = constant. This C. electrospark machining C. tonnage
equation is also known as: D. electrical discharge machining D. progressive dies
a. Flank wear 5. What is the other name of electrolytic 12. Cut pieces from flat plates, strips
b. Nose failure grinding? and coil stock
c. Crater wear A. laser grinding A. shearing
d. Tool life B. electrochemical grinding B. bends allowance
99. After any cutting or standard grinding C. ultrasonic grinding C. forming dies
operation, the surface of the workplace will D. chemical milling D. spring back
consist of: 6. It is typically used in the manufacture 13. It produces usable pieces, leaving
a. Smear metal of printed circuit boards, is the selective the source piece behind as scrap
b. Ultrafinishing removal of material not protected by a A. punching
c. Superfinishing mask. B. drawing
d. Centerless grinding A. chemical milling C. blanking
100. A method that does not require B. laser machining D. coining
clamping, chucking, or holding round work C. ultrasonic machining 14. The operation of removing scrap
pieces. D. electronic erosion blanks from the work piece, leaving the
a. Centerless grinding 7. It can be used to shape hard brittle source piece as the final product
b. Laser machining materials such as glass, ceramics, A. punching
c. Chemical milling crystals and gem stones, as well as tool B. drawing
d. Ultrafinishing steels and other metals. C. clanking
ELEMENTS 14 A. chemical milling Coining
B. laser machining 15. A cold forming process that converts
C. ultrasonic machining a flat into hollow vessel
D. electronic erosion A. embossing
66
B. drawing C. powered hammers D. plastic molding
C. swaging D. impactor forging 30. To facilitate the removal of the
d. punching 23. The forging blows are repeated at pattern, all surfaces parallel to the
16. It is used in the production of coins, the rate of more than 300 times a direction of withdrawal are slightly
is a severe operation requiring high minute for tapered. This taper is called
tonnage, due to the fact that the metal A. gravity drop hammers or board A. gate
flow is completely confined within the hammers B. riser
die cavity B. press forging C. sprue
A. coining C. powered hammers D. draft
B. embossing D. impactor forging 31. In the gating system, the metal is
C. swaging 24. The work piece is held in position poured into a sprue hole and enters a
D. blanking while the dies are hammered vertical passage known as
17. Forms shallow raised letters or other horizontally into it from both sides A. gates
designs in relief on the surface of sheet A. gravity drop hammers or board B. downgate
metal blanks hammers C. draft
A. coining B. press forging D. risers
B. embossing C. powered hammers 32. Serve as accumulators to feed
C. swaging D. impactor forging molten metal into the cavity during
D. blanking 25. Involves holding and applying initial shrinkage
18. Reduce the work piece area by cold pressure to round heated blanks A. gates
flowing the metal into die cavity by a A. upset forming B. downgate
high compressive force or impact B. flash C. draft
A. coining C. pickling D. risers
B. embossing D. parting line 33. An entrance to the cavity maybe
C. swaging 26. With_________, the part is shaped by constricted to control the rate of fill and
D. blanking a slow squeezing reaction, rather than such constrictions are known
19. The repeated hammering of a work impacts as__________
piece to obtain the desired shape A. drop forging A. gates
A. spring back B. impactor forging B. downgate
B. blanking C. press forging C. sprue
C. punching D. upset forging D. risers
D. forging 27. Following forging, the part will have 34. Molten metal is poured into a metal
20. Relies on closed impression dies to a thin projection of excess metal as or graphite mold where pressure is not
produce the desired shape ________at the parting line used to fill the mold
A. hammer forging A. pickling A. sand molding
B. open die forging B. flash B. plastic molding
C. smith forging C. trimmer dies C. gravity molding
D. drop forging D. upset D. non-gravity molding
21. What is the other name give to 28. The flash is trimmed off by 35. Suitable for creating parts of zinc,
gravity drop hammers? ___________in a subsequent operation aluminum, copper, magnesium, and
A. board hammers A. pickling lead/tin alloys
B. press forging B. upset A. die casting
C. powered hammers C. trimmer dies B. investment casting
D. impactor forging D. forging C. centrifugal casting
22. The forging blows are repeated at 29. With________, a mold is produced by D. continuous casting
the rate of several times a minute for packing and around a pattern 36. More than how may percent of all die
A. gravity drop hammers or board A. sand molding casting uses zinc alloys?
hammers B. gravity molding A. 50%
B. press forging C. die casting B. 25%
67
C. 75% D. white iron D. scalar
D. 80% 44. Which of the forces whose line of 51. The use of hardened steel for the
37. Molten metal is forced under actions are parallel but not necessarily mating metal gear appears to give the
pressure into a permanent metallic mold equal in magnitude best results and longer operational life.
known as A. couple The usual hardness in the range of
A. die B. resultant A. over 600 BHN
B. mold C. non collinear B. below 350 BHN
C. alloy D. non concurrent C. 300 to 400 BHN
D. torpedo 45. The product of the mass and the D. over 400 BHN
38. The cast iron flywheels are velocity of the center of gravity of the 52. It is the product of the resultant of all
commonly designed with a factor of body is called forces acting on a body and the time
safety of ________________ A. linear momentum A. linear momentum
A. 14 to 15 B. linear impulse B. angular momentum
B. 8 to 9 C. angular impulse C. linear impulse
C. 10 to 13 D. angular momentum D. all of these
D. 6 to 12 46. Two parallel shaft connected by pure 53. The separate forces which can be so
39. A pair of equal and opposite (not rolling turn in the same direction and combined are called
collinear) forces that tend cause a having a speed ratio of 2.75, what is the A. concurrent forces
rotation of a body distance of the two shaft if the smaller B. couple
A. couple cylinder is 22cm in diameter C. non concurrent forces
B. equilibrium A. 16.60cm D. component forces
C. centroids B. 25.25cm 54. Continuous stretching under load
D. vector C. 30.25cm even if the stress is less than the yield
40. It is the ratio of the pitch diameter in D. 19.25cm point
inches to the number of teeth 47. The distance between similar A. plasticity
A. pitch circle equality-spaced tooth surfaces in a B. creep
B. module given direction and along a given line C. elasticity
C. English module A. pitch circle D. ductility
D. pitch diameter B. pitch 55. The most known lubricants being
41. When the motion is diminished C. pitch plane utilized in whatever category of load and
/decreasing instead of increasing is D. pitch diameter speed are oil, air, grease and dry
called 48. It is simply defined as a simple push lubricants like
A. deceleration and pull A. bronze
B. retarded motion A. power B. silicon
C. uniform negative impulse B. work C. lead
D. all of these C. inertia D. graphite
42. Which of the following is a unit or D. force 56. A coupling that allows axial
energy 49. How did you call opposite directional flexibility/movement in the operation.
A. ft-lb forces equal in magnitude and parallel Made of alternate bolting of steel,
B. BTU/hr A. non coplanar leather, fabric and/or plastic material
C. hp B. couple into the two flanges
D. watt C. centroid A. flexible disk coupling
43. When high strength and durability D. coplanar B. flexing Oldham coupling
are a requirements for choosing gear 50. Which of the following terms is C. flexible toroidal spring coupling
materials it is preferable to use applied to quantities such as time, D. elastic-material bonded coupling
_________material volume and density? 57. It consists of two cranks, a stationary
A. hardened bronze A. couple piece called the line of centers and the
B. phenolic laminated B. components connecting rod is
C. steel C. resultants A. five bar linkage
68
B. three-crank linkage C. hardening of each tooth D. all of these
C. four-crank braces D. hunting tooth addition 72. The angle included between the
D. four-bar linkage 65. helix angle in the range of sides of the thread measured in an axial
58. Used to change rotary motion to _____________ degree is recommended plane in a screw thread
reciprocating motion for wide-face helical gears A. angle of thread
A. rack gears A. less than 15 B. helix angle thread
B. helical gears B. 20 to 35 C. angle between thread or 40
C. hypoid gears C. less than 20 D. half angle thread or 20
D. herringbone gears D. 20 to 22 73. When an air entrainment agent is
59. The effective face width of a helical 66. Difference between maximum put into a concrete mix
gear divided by gear axial pitch material limits mating parts. Or it is a A. the water/cement ratio must be
A. approach ratio minimum clearance or maximum reduced
B. arc of recess interference between parts B. the strength will decrease
C. arc of action A. tolerance C. minimal effect
D. face overlap B. variance D. the strength will suffer up to 50%
60. Pitch diameter less the diameter of C. fits 74. The ratio of moment of inertia on a
the roller chain is equal to D. allowance cross-section of a beam to this section
A. top land 67. The changes in shape or geometry of modulus is
B. addendum the body due to action of a force on it is A. a measure of distance
C. bottom diameter called deformation or B. equal to the radius of gyration and
D. face overlap A. shear stresses compression
61. Generally applied on speed reducer B. compressive stress C. multiplied by the bending moment of
due to large speed ratio C. stresses inertia determine the yield stress
A. bevel gears D. strains D. equal to the area of the cross-section
B. worm gears 68. The reciprocal of a diametral pitch or and tension
C. helical gears the ratio of the pitch diameter to the no. 75. The ratio of moment of inertia of the
D. hypoid gears of teeth cross section of a beam to the section
62. If shaft size is specified as-diameter A. lead modulus is___________?
2.00’’ max, and 1.99’’ min in diameter B. involute A. equal to the radius of gyration
then the 0.010’’ could be defined as C. module B. equal to the area of the cross
A. allowance D. clearance section
B. variance 69. One of these materials is not a C. multiplied by the bending moment to
C. fit structural steel? determine the stress
D. tolerance A. low carbon steel D. measure of distance
63. A material plane was subjected to a B. stainless steel 76. Poisson’s ratio is the ratio of
load. When the load was removed the C. tool and die steel A. elastic limit to yield strength
strain disappeared. From the structural D. medium carbon steel B. lateral deformation to the
change which of the following can be 70. In elastic body whose primary longitudinal deformation
considered about this material? function is to deflect order load C. shear strain to unit strain
A. it has high modules of elasticity A. clutch D. elastic limit to shear strength
B. it is plastic B. brake 77. Alloy that improves strength of steel
C. it does not follow Hookes law C. stopper at high temperature application
D. it is elastic D. spring A. aluminum
64.For an evenly distributed and uniform 71. Flat leather belting not B. silicon
wear on each meshing gear tooth, the recommended for used in a speed in C. manganese
ideal design practice is to considered a excess of______________ fpm D. chromium
A. wear resistance alloy addition to tooth A. 3600 78. The differential of the shear equation
gears B. 6000 is the
B. heat treatmentof the gears C. 4800 A. deflection of the beam
69
B. tensile strength of beam C. aluminum oxide B. 6000
C. comprehensive strength of the beam D. iron oxide C. 7000
D. load on the beam 86. The best materials for brake drums D. 6500
79. Length of contact between two is 93. The properties of metal to withstand
mating parts in a screw and nut threads A. aluminum loads without breaking down is
measured axially is termed___________ B. steel material A. elasticity
A. length of engagement C. cast iron B. plasticity
B. arc of contacts D. wrought iron C. strength
C. axis of contact 87. The property that characterizes a D. strain
D. depth of engagement material’s ability to be drawn into a wire 94. Almost always the soldering
80. The sum of their addendums and A. tensile strength materials are a combination of the
deddendum is B. endurance limit following alloys
A. whole depth C. ductility A. all of these
B. width of space D. thermal conductivity B. tin & antimony
C. full depth 88. The alloy materials used in the C. lead & tin
D. working depth production of metal working tools D. lead & antimony
81. It is recommended not to have a A. titanium, phosphorus 95. The most popular of all soldering
direct drive between driven and drive B. vanadium, chromium, molybdenum materials in use has composition of
sprockets if the ratio of their teeth C. tungsten, silicon, hadfield A. 45/55% tin & lead
exceeds ____________. Use 2 or more step D. high carbon steel B. all of these
combination 89. Which of the phases of steel C. 50/50% tin & lead
A. 10 times elements has a face-centered cubic D. 60/40% tin & lead
B. 5 times structure? 96. The relative strength of a cut
C. 8 times A. pyrite welding could be safety assumed
D. 6 times B. cementite as___________% efficiency
82. Stresses that are independent of C. austenite A. 95
loads is called________________ D. all of these B. 90
A. working stress 90. The rigidity of polymer can be C. 98
B. simple stress increased by D. 92
C. residual stress A. furnace melting 97. It is a work-supporting device which
D. combined stress B. crystallization is bolted to the saddle of the lathe
83. Ability to resist deformation under C. normalizing machine. I t travels with the cutting tool
stress D. shot opening it is a prevention of the springing away
A. plasticity 91. The difference between cast steel of the work piece from cutting tools
B. stiffness and cast iron A. rubber-flex collets
C. toughness A. all of these B. follower rest
D. all of these B. cast steel has usually less than 1% C. tool post
84. The property of material wherein the C. while cast iron has 2% or 3.6% carbon D. carriage stop
content is continuously distributed range 98. Which of the following raw materials
through its entire mass D. cast iron has lower strength are used in the foundry molding
A. plasticity more brittle and has lower ductility operation?
B. homogeneity than cast steel A. silica sand, bentonite, flour/paste
C. malleability 92. It is a general practice to use the water
D. all of these following allowable stresses 4000 psi for B. silica sand paste, graphite electrode
85. Material having a high electrical maintransmitting shaft and 8500 psi for C. silica sand and paste
resistance and should not be used as small short shafts and counter shaft for D. silica sand, linseed oil, flour
conductor of electrical current lineshaft carrying pulley it is___________ 99. Which of the following is not a part
A. nickel psi of micrometer caliper?
B. silicon base alloys A. 7800 A. thimble
70
 B. spindle low temperatures up to how many 12. Plain carbon steel standard
C. head screw degrees Fahrenheit? designation SAE ______.
D. anvil A. -380 A. 6xxx
100. B. -260 B. 10xx
A. normalizing C. -400 C. 13xx
B. flame hardening D. -320 D. 2xxx
C. tempering 7. The length of the hub should not be 13. If the inertia is 90 lb ft2 and the
D. annealing maid lesser than the face width of speed of the driver shaft is to be
Elements 15 the gear. Hub lengths usually vary increased from 0 to 2500 rpm in 5
1. Which of the following is the from 1.25 D to 2 D where D is the seconds, shaft material is of SAE
allowable tensile strength of the shaft diameter. What should be the 4140 with yield strength of 110000
steel plates? reasonable diameter of the steel lbs. /in2, find the clutch starting
A. 396.41 N/m2 hub? torque in in–lb ft.
B. 379.31 N/m2 A. 2 D A. 159
C. 296.12 N/m2 B. 1.55 D B. 146
D. 310.11 N/m2 C. 1.8 D C. 128
2. Which of the following standard SAE D. 1.20 D D. 191
designation of manganese steel? 8. Torsional deflection is a significant 14. How many 5/16 inch holes can be
A. 13xx consideration in the design of shaft punch in one motion in a steel plate
B. 11xx and the limit should be in the range made of SAE 1010 steel 7/16 inch
C. 10xx of how many degrees/foot of length? thick using a force of 55 tons. The
D. 8xx A. 0.4 to 1 ultimate strength for shear is 50 ksi
3. Compute the torque received by the B. 0.08 to 1 and use 2 factor of safety.
motor shaft running at 4250 rpm. C. 0.1 to 1 A. 5.8
Transmitting 11hp, through a 10 inch D. 0.6 to 1 B. 5
diameter 20o involute gear. The shaft 9. If the pitch of a screw is 2/9 find the C. 3.7
is supported by ball bearing at both thread per inch. D. 6.5
ends and the gear is fixed at the A. 0.34 15. Which of the following cannot be
middle of 8” shaft length. B. 5.4 used in drilling machine?
A. 163 in lb C. 4.5 A. Reaming
B. 132 in lb D. 17 B. Lapping
C. 167 in lb 10. Steel spring material is usually C. Spot facing
D. 138 in lb hardened from 400 to 500 BHN and D. Broaching
4. The SAE 2340 shafting contains how the carbon content is in the range of 16. A kilowatt is equal to:
many percent nickels? how many percent? A. 8851.2 in-lb/secs.
A. 3.85 Ni A. 0.50 to 0.90% B. 57 BTU/min
B. 3.25 to 3.75% Ni B. 0.45 to 0.48 C. 1140 joule/sec
C. 4% Ni C. 0.96 to 0.97 D. 44.200 ft-lb/min
D. 3.84% Ni D. All of these 17. Molybdenum-chromium-nickel steel
5. Which of the following standard SAE 11. Shafts readily available in the designation.
designation for chromium steel? market are made in many ways and A. SAE48xx
A. 92 xx wide variety of material composition. B. SAE56xx
B. 3 xxx It is likely be cold drawn carbon steel C. SAE43xx
C. 5 xxx in size smaller than _____ inches D. SAE46xx
D. 11xx diameter. 18. Single force which produce the same
6. In general, alloys with high nickel A. 3.75 effect upon a mass replacing two or
content retain toughness to quiet B. 5 more forces acting together is
C. 4 called:
D. 51/2 A. Vector
71
 B. Component of forces 25. Curve formed by the path of a point B. Aluminum parts
C. Resultant on a straight line as it rolls along a C. Cast iron materials
D. Resolution convex base curve. The base curve D. Bronze parts
19. Permissible variation of the is usually a circle and generally used 32. Bearing surface that completely
manufactured/machined dimension as the profile of gear. surrounds the journal is also called:
is called: A. Axial plane A. Offset bearing
A. Intolerance fits B. Arc of recess B. Centrally loaded bearing
B. Allowance C. Involute C. Full bearing
C. Deviation D. Arc of action D. Babbit bearing
D. Tolerance 26. Resultant of two or more component 33. The purpose of lubrication is as
20. Peculiar strength of the metal to forces is called: mentioned except :
resist being crushed: A. Composition of forces A. To lighten the load
A. Shear strength B. Component B. Prevent adhesion
B. Compressive strength C. Resultant C. Prevent corrosion/oxidation
C. Ultimate strength D. Collinear of forces D. Cool the moving elements
D. Elastic limit 27. A material having a high electrical 34. Tools usually used in wood pattern
21. What pressure is required for resistance and should not be used making in foundry shop.
punching a hole 2’’ diameter thru for conductor for electric current. A. Saws and chisel
1/4 ‘’ steel plates? A. Alloyed magnesium B. Knives and drills
A. 40 tons B. Nickel C. Band saw
B. 45 tons C. Silicon base alloy D. Drill machine
C. 50 tons D. Zinc 35. It is a plane perpendicular to the
D. 35 tons 28. It improves red hardness of steel. axial plane and to the pitch plane in
22. What is the working strength of a 2’’ A. Silicon gears the parallel axes and the plane
bolt which is screwed up tight in a B. Cobalt of rotation coincides.
packed joint when the allowable C. Lead A. Tangent line
working stress is 12000 psi? D. Manganese B. Transverse
A. 20.4 ksi 29. Designated pipe color used in C. Straight line
B. 23.4 ksi communication. D. Reference angle
C. 22.4 ksi A. Silver gray 36. A 36 tooth pinion with a turning
D. 18 ksi B. Bare speed of 300 rpm drives 120 tooth
23. Determine the bursting steam C. Aluminum gray gear of 14 1/2 o d involute full depth
pressure of a steel shell with a D. White pressure angle. What would be the
diameter of 10inches and made of ¼ 30. The design stress and factor of speed of the driven gear?
thick steel plates. The joint efficiency safety are related in the following A. 1000 rpm
is at 70% and the tensile strength is manner. B. 90 rpm
60 ksi. A. Design stress= ultimate C. 100 rpm
A. 4400 psi stress/ factor of safety D. 140 rpm
B. 42.8 ksi B. Ultimate stress = factor or 37. Several force which can be
C. 10.5 ksi safety / design stress plus combined is called:
D. 8500 psi concentration factor A. Resultant
24. Commonly used by steel melter as C. Factor or safety = design stress / B. Components
deoxidizer because of its easy ultimate stress C. Composition of forces
availability and cheap price. D. Design stress= factor of safety / D. Collinear forces
A. Silicon time stress concentration factor 38. The surface along the fillet curve or
B. Zinc 31. Not adaptable to welding due to low between the fillets radius of the two
C. Aluminum tensile strength and poor ductility adjacent tooth or a gear:
D. Manganese etc. A. Bottom land
A. Copper parts B. Fillet
72
 C. Flank surface to 10ths of thousandths of following can be considered about
D. Top land the centimeter. this material?
39. Ideal herringbone gear helix is in the A. Blade type micrometer A. It does not follow Hooke’s Law
range of: B. Planimeter B. It is elastic
A. Bottom land C. Dial caliper C. It has high modulus of elasticity
B. Fillet D. Micrometer D. It is plastic
C. Flank 46. Molybdenum steel standard 53. Allowance added in the casing
D. Top land designation SAE. pattern to compensate for the
40. Ideal herringbone gear helix is in the A. 88xx contraction of metal
range of: B. 40xx A. Tapering allowance
A. 30 to 45 C. 48xx B. Finish allowance
B. 25 to 30 D. 46xx C. Shrinkage allowance
C. 35 to 50 47. Also called eccentrically loaded D. Draft pattern
D. 15 to 20 bearing is: 54. Ratio of the angle of action to the
41. A three extension coil spring is A. Full bearings pitch angle
hooked in series that supports a B. Partial bearings A. Contact ratio
single weight of 100 kgs. The first C. Offset bearings B. Ratio gearing
spring is rated at 0.400 kg/mm and D. Fitted bearings C. Approach ratio
the other 2 lower springs is rated at . 48. In the selection of wire rope, regular D. Module
64 kg/in. Compute the total lay means wire and strands arrange 55. General purpose grade of steel used
deflection. in the following manner. for broiler plate, structure etc.
A. 263 mm A. Twisted in the same direction usually with carbon content of:
B. 156 mm B. Twisted in opposite direction A. 0.20 to 30%C
C. 268 mm C. Twisted in any direction B. 0.35 to 0.50%C
D. None of these D. Twisted in along direction C. 0.15 to 0.25%C
42. The lack of backlash in spur gear 49. In involute teeth, the pressure angle D. All of these
design/operation may result to: is often defined as the angle 56. The angle made by the helix of the
A. Overloading between the line of action and the thread(in a straight thread) at the
B. All of these line tangent to the pitch circle. It is pitch diameter with a plane
C. Jamming also termed as: perpendicular to the axis called:
D. Overheating A. Helix angle A. Angle of thread
43. The distance from a point on a screw B. Angle of obliquity B. Lead angle
thread to corresponding points on C. Angle of recess C. Truncation
the next thread measure along the D. Arc of action D. Lead
axis. 50. Instantaneous center is also called: 57. The principle materials used in the
A. Flank A. Centro production of metal working tools:
B. Crest B. Virtual center A. High carbon steel
C. Lead C. Rot Opole B. Titanium, phosphorous
D. Pitch D. All of these C. Tungsten, silicon, had field Mn
44. As recommended the center to 51. What is the stress to strain ratio D. Vanadium, chromium,
center distance between sprockets within the elastic limit? molybdenum
should not be less than ______ times A. Elastic limit 58. In the interest of design
the bigger sprocket. B. Elastically simplification and good kinematics
A. 2.216 C. Modulus of elasticity compromise bevel gears adopted a
B. 1 1/2 D. Compressive ratio standard pressure angle of ______
C. 1 3/4 52. A material plane was subjected to a degrees/
D. 2.59 load. When the load was removed A. 200 involute stub
45. Machine shop instrument for the strain disappeared. From the B. 14 1/2 involute full depth
checking the flatness of plane structural change which of the C. 200
73
 D. 17 1/2 D. bh3/3 72. Compute the deflection of a 18 coil
59. The property of material that relates 65. Cold rolled shafting is not available helical soaring having a load of
the lateral strain to longitudinal in diameter larger than: 100kgs. The modulus of elasticity in
strain. A. 6 inches shear of spring is 96.62 Gpa, OD of
A. Stress B. 6 ½ inches 9256 cm and width diameter of 9525
B. Poisson’s ratio C. 5 inches mm. The spring is square and
C. Strain D. 5 ½ inches ground ends.
D. Endurance limit 66. Height of tooth above pitch circle or A. 9 mm
60. It is generally recommended and the radial distance between pitch B. 112 mm
normal for a designer to add a circle and top land of the tooth. C. 101 mm
hunting tooth to evenly distribute A. Top root D. 14 mm
the wear on meshing teeth like a 53 B. Land 73. A flanged bolt coupling has ten (10)
teeth gears mesh with 30 teeth C. Addendum steel 25.4 mm diameter bolts evenly
pinion. Find the rotation of pinion to D. Hunting tooth tighten around a 415 mm bolt circle.
mesh with same pair of teeth again. 67. The function of clutch in the Determine the torque capacity of the
A. 120 machine tool is? connection if the allowable shearing
B. 61 A. Lowering of drive speed stress in the bolt is 50 MN/m2.
C. 81 B. To disconnect or connect at A. 59.95 KN-m
D. 53 will the drive B. 46.15 KN-m
61. The shaft whose torque varies from C. Alignment of the drive shaft C. 52.6 KN-m
2000 to 6000 in lbs has 1 1/2 in in D. To insure that two shaft line up D. 43.8 KN-m
diameter and 60000 psi yield at high speed 74. The material that can cut/wear
strength. Compute for the shaft 68. A resulting force that replace two or hardest substance subjected to:
mean average stress. more forces acting together. A. Carbide
A. 6036 psi A. Vector B. Tungsten
B. 5162 psi B. Resultant C. Abrasive
C. 6810 psi C. Couple D. Vanadium
D. 5550 psi D. Equilibrant 75. A ridge of uniform section in the
62. The angle made by the helix of the 69. Stress relieving is also _____ for the form of a helix cut around the
thread(in a straight thread) at the purpose of reducing the internal circumference of a cylinder and
pitch diameter with a plane stresses of steel material/metal. advancing along the axis.
perpendicular to the axis is called: A. Normalizing A. Thread roots
A. Lead angle B. Annealing B. Screw threads
B. Lead C. Tempering C. Helix thread
C. Truncation D. All of these D. Chamfers
D. Angle of thread 70. Matensite (stainless steel) contains 4 76. Cast iron flywheel are commonly
63. The rule of thumb in journal bearing to 26% Cr. And a maximum of _____ designed with factor of safety of
design; the clearance ratio/clearance % nickel A. 10 to 13
should be. A. 2.5 B. 10 to 14
A. 0.0090 B. 3.5 C. 10 to 12
B. 0.0010 C. 3.25 D. 8 to 13
C. 0.0042 D. 2.0 77. Class of material exhibiting
D. 0.00120 71. Matensite (stainless steel) contains 4 decreases electrical conductivity
64. The moment of inertia of a rectangle to 26% Cr. And a maximum of _____ with increasing temperature.
whose base is “b” height “h” about % nickel A. Aluminum
its based is: A. 2.5 B. Metals
A. bh3/4 B. 3.5 C. P-type semiconductor
B. bh3/24 C. 3.25 D. N-type semiconductor
C. bh3/12 D. 2.0
74
78. The welding made along the edges 85. It is rigid piece which serves to gravity must be kept below the
of two parallel plates is called: transmit force from a piece another foundations too that usually about
A. Groove joint piece or to cause / control motion. ______ times the usual total
B. Edge joint A. Follower combined weight of the machinery it
C. Fillet joint B. Cam motion is supposed to support.
D. Corner joint C. Crank A. 3 to 4
79. Not part and in fact should not be D. Link B. 2 to 4
used in the steel melting process: 86. A 20 kgs. Cast iron piece rest on a C. 3 to 7
A. Coke plain horizontal aluminum surface. D. 3 to 5
B. Zinc To move the object it needs a force 92. A cylinder tank with 10” inside
C. Silicon of 7 lbs. The density of AI is 0.098 diameter contains oxygen gas at
D. Aluminum lb/in3 and iron is 0.260 lb/in3 2500 psi. Calculate the required wall
80. Rule of thumb in calculating the A. 0.172 thickness in (mm) under stress of 28
equipment foundation mass should B. 1.601 000 psi.
be _____ times the weight of the C. 0.186 A. 11.34 mm
machinery it is supposed to support. D. 0.160 B. 12.44 mm
A. 3 – 5 87. Which of the following is an iron C. 10.24 mm
B. 3 – 9 based alloy containing 9 – 16% D. 10.54 mm
C. 3 – 6 chromium? 93. The process of peening the joint
D. 2 – 4 A. Mn Hadfield steel portion immediately after the
81. The strength of non ferrous alloys is B. Stainless steel welding greatly improves the fusion
at maximum at room temperature C. Chrome-molly steel structures avoids possible cracking,
while that ferrous metal has a D. High chrome steel avoid possible distortion etc.
maximum strength at ______0F 88. Shafting up to 3 inches in diameter Peening can also ____process at the
A. 400 is usually made from cold rolled same time.
B. 450 steel and the common biggest A. Tempering
C. 1200 diameter cold rolled steel is: B. Normalizing
D. 350 A. 4 1/4 inches C. Mar tampering
82. The ratio of stress acting on an B. 6 3/4 inches D. Annealing
elastic substance to the decrease in C. 6 7/8 inches 94. What do you call the distance
volume per unit volume. D. 5 inches between rivet center nearest each
A. Bulk modulus 89. It is ideal for maximum quietness in other in adjacent rows?
B. Elastic limit sprockets drive operation to choose A. Pitch
C. Modulus of resilience _____ or more teeth.\ B. Margin
D. Modulus of elasticity A. 24 C. Back pitch
83. The normal helix angle in helical B. 27 D. Diagonal pitch
gear is recommended in the range of C. 18 95. Which of the following is a major
_____ degrees. D. 21 alloy in tool steel?
A. Less than 18 90. All associate with standard material A. Cr
B. 15 to 25 specification except: B. Cobalt
C. 20 to 35 A. American Iron and Steel Institute C. Fen
D. 20 to 30 B. Society of Automotive Engineers D. Mn
84. Type of bolt commonly used in the C. Southeast Asia Iron and 96. Should two equal and opposite
construction that is threaded in both Steel Institute collinear forces is added to the
ends. D. American Society for Testing forces already in equilibrium, which
A. Stud bolt Material of the following statement is true?
B. Hex bolt 91. For stable equipment foundation the A. Unbalance moment is
C. Acne threaded bolt total combined engine driven maintained
D. Square threaded bolts equipment and foundation center of B. Equilibrium is maintained
75
 C. Equilibrium is disturbed C. Yield D. ±0.050
D. It creates an unbalanced D. ultimate 10. Which of the following is the
situation 3. Which of the following is the ratio of tolerance where the size of a part
97. In the pressure vessels, which of the moment and stress? may be larger only, or smaller only,
following resists internal pressure A. Strain than the given dimension?
through bending? B. section modulus A. Unilateral
A. Shell – type element C. contraction B. Lateral
B. Cam – type element D. passions ratio C. Bilateral
C. Plate – type element 4. What is the flexural stress when of a D. none of these
D. Spherical – type element symmetrically cross-section beam 11. A tolerance where the size of the
98. Which of the following flanges is when the vertical shear is part is permitted to be either larger
suitable for low and moderate maximum? or smaller than the given dimension.
pressure? A. Infinity A. Unilateral
A. Ring – flange B. Zero B. Lateral
B. Lap joint flange C. maximum C. Bilateral
C. Tapered - hub flange D. minimum D. none of these
D. Welding neck type 5. The riveted joint in ASME Code has 12. Which of the following is the basis
99. It is the process of pre – stressing or as design surface compressive for ASA fits?
over – stressing of a hollow stress ________ higher than the A. Basic number system
cylindrical member beyond the design tensile stress. B. basic hole system
elastic range. A. 70% C. basic size system
A. Pre-stage B. 60% D. unit system
B. Autofrettage C. 35% 13. When the hole is smaller than the
C. Stress relieving D. 50% shaft, it will take force or pressure to
D. Countersinking 6. What is the ratio of the minimum put the cold parts together. In such
100. It is the phenomenon strength of joint to the strength of case the allowance is negative.
occurring when two touching solid joint in the pressure vessel? Which of the following terms is
surfaces have a high contact A. Efficiency appropriate for such allowance?
pressure and when these surfaces B. relative strength A. Negative fits of metal
have minute relative motion. C. performance factor B. interference of metal
A. Pre-stressing D. joint efficiency C. positive fits of the metal
B. Fretting 7. What is the usual factor of safety for D. intangible fits
C. Friction a pressure vessel? 14. What is the direction of the
D. Carving A. 4 predominant surface pattern?
B. 1.5 A. Smoothness
ELEMENTS 16 C. 3 B. Waviness
1. For ordinary steel, the modulus of D. 5 C. lay
elasticity usually falls between 8. It is the permissible variation of the D. roughness
__________ million pounds. size. 15. It is the irregularities of departures
A. 20 to 30 A. Tolerance from the nominal surface of greater
B. 35 to 45 B. Limit spacing than roughness?
C. 20 to 35 C. fits A. Waviness
D. 25 to 30 D. none of these B. roughness
2. The modulus of elastic for metals in 9. Considering that there is no fit, what C. lay
compression is usually taken as that is the permissible liberal tolerance in D. smoothness
in: machining work? 16. It is the surface finish of micrometer
A. Tension A. ±0.010 in rms.
B. Bearing B. ±0.090 A. 1
C. ±0.020 B. 2
76
 C. 3 24. It is the study of the body’s motion 31. What is the large wood screw used
D. 4 independent of the forces on the to fasten machinery and equipment.
17. Which of the following gears has the body. A. Lag screw
simplest type of teeth? A. Kinetics B. loss screw
A. Helical gears B. Dynamics C. wood screw
B. spur gears C. Kinematics D. cross screw
C. bevel gears D. mechanics 32. What is the minimum length of
D. worm gears 25. What is the reciprocal of the velocity contact in a tapped hole for cast
18. In gears, an imaginary circle on ratio? iron?
which the lever arm is based in; A. Train value A. 1.7D
A. Base circle B. Ratio factor B. 1.5D
B. pitch circle C. modular value C. 1.2D
C. addendum circle D. none of these D. 2.1D
D. clearance circle 26. It is a type of bolt finished all over 33. It is the ratio of the mean diameter
19. It is the circle tangent to the and has usually having coarse of coil over the coil diameters.
addendum of the meshing gears. threads. A. Wahl factor
A. Clearance circle A. Coupling bolt B. spring index
B. base circle B. stud bolt C. coil ratio
C. Addendum circle C. machine bolt D. lead scale
D. pitch circle D. automobile bolt 34. What is the overall length of springs
20. The distance from a point on one 27. It is a type of bolt distinguishes by a when it is compress until all adjacent
gear to the corresponding point short portion of the shank coils touched?
measured along the base circle. underneath the head being square A. Free length
A. Normal pitch or finned or ribbed. B. solid length
B. circular pitch A. Coupling bolt C. compressed length
C. axial pitch B. stud bolt D. expansion length
D. diametral pitch C. machine bolt 35. It is the length of a coil spring under
21. A line passing through the pitch D. carriage bolt no load?
point that is tangent to both base 28. It is a type of bolt threaded on both A. Compressed length
circles of a gear is: ends and can be used where a B. free length
A. Pressure line through bolt impossible. C. solid height
B. perpendicular line A. Coupling bolt D. none of these
C. tangent line B. carriage bolt 36. In general, the steels springs are
D. center line C. stud bolt made of relatively of relative height
22. Which of the following is the contact D. machine bolt carbon steel usually;
ratio for a good gear design? 29. Which of the following is not a type A. 5%
A. 1.5:1 of bolt? B. less than 0.5%
B. 1:1.3 A. Stud bolt C. more than 0.5%
C. 1:3 B. Steel bolt D. 7.5%
D. 1.2:2 C. machine bolt 37. It is a low cost spring materials,
23. In pressure vessels, which of the D. coupling bolt suitable where service is not severe
following resists internal pressure 30. It is a locking device that is used to and dimensional precision is not
through tension? maintain pressure between threads needed.
A. Shell-type element of the bolt and nut. A. Helical spring wire
B. cam type element A. Gasket B. stainless steel
C. plate-type element B. lock washer C. hard drawn wire spring
D. spherical type element C. lock nut D. copper
D. filler

77
38. What is the hard drawn (80% A. Biaxial 52. What is the other name given to
reduction) spring wire made of high B. mono-axial short shafts in machines?
carbon steel? C. uniaxial A. Spindles
A. Oil tempered wire D. triaxial B. head shafts
B. music wire 46. What do you call the system that C. core shafts
C. tension wire has finite values of principal D. all of these
D. chromium wire stresses? 53. The other name given to a line shaft.
39. Which of the following wires with A. Triaxial A. Countershaft
good quality and is used for impact B. Uniaxial B. Main shaft
loading? C. monoaxial C. Long shaft
A. Hard drawn wire D. biaxial D. Head shaft
B. song wire 47. A screw that requires positive torque 54. The speed at which the center of
C. helical spring wire to lower the load, or to loosen the mass will be equal the deflecting
D. chromium-silicon wire screw if it has been turned tight forces on the shaft; the shaft with its
40. When heat-threated wire is coiled against a resistance. attached bodies will then vibrate
cold, it should be stress relieved for A. Self locking screw violently, since the centrifugal force
bending stress and after cooling it is B. lock screw change its direction as the shaft
heated at some: C. self screw turns in:
A. 400°F D. power screw A. Nominal speed
B. 600°F 48. What is the rotating member used in B. Critical speed
C. 700°C transmitting power? C. Relative speed
D. 500°F A. Shaft D. Mean speed
41. Which of the following is not a B. counter shaft 55. An old rule of thumb for
function of spring? C. axle transmission shafting is that the
A. Absorbs energy D. washer deflection should not exceed
B. source of potential energy 49. For machineries shop the _________ of length between
C. measure weight permissible deflection is supports.
D. measure thickness approximately: A. 0.01 in. per foot
42. Which of the following is the type of A. 0.02in/ft B. 0.08 in. per foot
spring made in the form of dished B. 0.03in/ft C. 0.02 in. per foot
washer? C. 0.01in/ft D. 0.05 in. per foot
A. Air spring D. 0.05in/ft 56. For transmission shafts the allowable
B. believe spring 50. For shafts, the shear due to bending deflection is 1 degree in a length of
C. volute spring is a maximum at the neutral plane __________ diameters.
D. motor spring where the normal stress is: A. 20
43. What is the type of the failure due to A. Minimum B. 25
instability? B. Constant C. 30
A. Buckling C. maximum also D. 40
B. slenderness ratio D. zero 57. What is the limiting torsional
C. Stability 51. The minimum value of numerical deflection for machinery shafts, if
D. Euler’s failure combined shock and fatigue factor the criteria of limiting torsional
44. What type of formula that is best to be applied in every case to the deflection vary from 0.08˚ per foot
applied to a very slender column? computed bending moment of the of length?
A. Column formula shaft is: A. 1˚
B. slenderness formulas A. 2.0 B. 2.5˚
C. moment formulas B. 1.75 C. 2˚
D. Euler formula C. 1.5 D. 3.5˚
45. If two principal stresses is zero, the D. 1.3 58. Bevel gears of sizes 5 inches to 15
state of stress is: inches should not be lift or depress
78
 more than__________, as Gleason B. Shaft and babbit C. Light
statement. C. Clearance and fitted D. All of these
A. 0.004 D. Shaft and cylinder 73. Which of the following considers the
B. 0.003 66. When the line of action of the load 300 series of bearing?
C. 0.002 bisects the arc of partial bearing, the A. Medium
D. 0.001 bearing said to be: B. Heavy
59. What type of key that allows the hub A. Eccentrically loaded C. Light
to move along the shaft but prevents B. Fully loaded D. All of these
the rotation of the shaft? C. Centrally loaded 74. A type of roller bearing in which the
A. Woodruff key D. Partially loaded balls are assembled by the eccentric
B. Feather key 67. What is the difference in radii of the displacement of the inner ring.
C. Gibbs key bearing and Journal? A. shallow groove ball bearing
D. Square key A. Even clearance B. filling-slot ball bearing
60. What is the other name for Kennedy B. Clearance ratio C. self-aligning ball bearing
key? C. Odd clearance D. deep-groove ball bearing
A. Tangential key D. Radial clearance 75. Which of the following is not a type
B. Woodruff key 68. When radii of both the bearing and of ball bearing?
C. Saddle key the journal are the same, then the A. shallow groove ball bearing
D. Roll pin bearing is said to be: B. filling-slot ball bearing
61. What type of fits used for involute A. Fitted bearing C. self-aligning ball bearing
spline? B. Clearance bearing D. deep-groove ball bearing
A. Close fit C. Full bearing 76. Which of the following is the
B. Press fit D. Ambiguous bearing approximate density of the leather
C. sliding fit 69. What is the line that passes through belt?
D. All of these the centers of the bearing and the A. 0.035 lb/in3
62. It is used for permanent fits and journal? B. 0.0135 lb/in3
similar to involute splines except A. Line of action C. 0.025 lb/in3
that the pressure angle is 14.5˚. B. Line of centers D. 0.0465 lb/in3
A. Separation load C. Line of symmetry 77. Which of the following is the
B. Splines shaft D. Tangent line approximate density of a fat rubber
C. Stub serrations 70. Which of the following is considered belt?
D. Involute serrations advantageous for bearing materials? A. 0.055 lb/in3
63. It is used in a coupling or in addition A. Conformability B. 0.0135 lb/in3
to another coupling where, in case of B. Compatibility C. 0. 045 lb/in3
overload, there is danger of injury to C. Embed ability D. 0.0465 lb/in3
machine or to material in process. D. All of these 78. A toothed wheel whose tooth
A. Shear pin 71. A conclusion repeatedly verified by elements are straight and parallel to
B. Flange coupling experiment is that the smoother the shaft axis or used to transmit
C. Involute serrations surface: motion and power between parallel
D. King pin A. Has the greater load shafts.
64. What is the maximum shaft angle for capacity of the bearing A. Helical gear
a single Hooke’s coupling? B. Has the lesser capacity of the B. Spur gear
A. 10˚ bearing C. Worm gear
B. 17 C. Has constant load D. Bevel gear
C. 15˚ D. None of these 79. The breaking strength of oak-tanned
D. 20˚ 72. Which of the following considers the beltings varies from 3 to more than:
65. What are the two principal parts of a 200 series of bearing? A. 5 ksi
Journal Bearing? A. Heavy B. 6 ksi
A. Bearing and journal B. Medium C. 7 ksi
79
 D. 9 ksi A. 21 masses and inversely proportional to
80. Experience suggests that the most B. 24 distance square between their
economical designs are obtained for C. 12 centers.
a belt speed of: D. 14 A. Hooke’s law
A. 6000 to 7500 fpm 88. The resultant of a pair of equal B. Law of gravitation
B. 3000cto 5000 fpm forces but opposite in direction is: C. Law of motion
C. 3500 to 4700 fpm A. Concurrent D. Newton’s law
D. 5000 to 1000 fpm B. Couple 94. Any object thrown upward will return
81. The tension in the belt due to C. Non-concurrent to earth with the magnitude of the
centrifugal force increasing rapidly D. Resultant terminal velocity equal to:
above about: 89. The helical and herringbone gear A. 50% of the initial velocity
A. 2500 fpm teeth cut after heat treatment B. 80% of the initial velocity
B. 3000 fpm should have a hardness in the range C. About 90% of the initial velocity
C. 35000 fpm of 210/300BHN. The pinion gear D. The initial velocity
D. 4000 fpm teeth hardness on the other hand 95. Flat belt that is too tight will induce
82. For leather belts, recommended ideally/normally should be at strain on the bearing and belt
speed is: __________ BHN. __________.
A. 6000 to 7000 fpm A. 250/320 A. Life will be shortened
B. 5000 to 6000 fpm B. 350/380 B. Result to uneconomical
C. 7000 to 8000 fpm C. 400 operation
D. 4500 to 5600 fpm D. 340/350 C. Suffer/shatter
83. The recommended initial tension of 90. As a rule, the center distance D. Will be sheared/cut
the belt is: between sprockets should not be 96. The resulting cross-sectional area of
A. 75 lb/in of width less than __________ times the the tensile test specimen divided by
B. 73 lb/in of width diameter of the bigger sprocket and the specimen original area is called:
C. 71 lb/in of width not less than 30 times the pitch nor A. Charpy test
D. 80 lb/in of width more than about 50 times to pitch. B. % elongation
84. Two shafts at right angles to each A. 1.5 C. Impact test
other may be connected by what B. 2 D. Izod test
arrangement? C. 2.5 97. SAE 51XXX belongs to the __________
A. Half turn D. 3 steel family.
B. Quarter turn 91. A single force which produces the A. Carbon
C. ¾ turn same effect upon a mass as two or B. Chromium
D. One turn several forces acting together is C. Manganese
85. The minimum number of teeth on a called: D. Nickel
smaller sprocket for low speed is: A. Components 98. In itself, it is a lubricant and usually
A. 12 B. Composition forces one of the important elements in
B. 21 C. Resolution forces casting non-ferrous metals like
C. 17 D. Resultant bronze, for example:
D. 14 92. All forces in the same plane are A. Antimony
86. The minimum number of teeth on a called: B. Babbit
smaller sprocket for moderate speed A. Coplanar C. Lead
is: B. Couple D. Zinc
A. 17 C. Parallel 99. Gasket material, which should avoid
B. 21 D. Resultant hot liquid/steam applications.
C. 12 93. Which of the following laws which A. Asbestos fiber
D. 14 states that the force of attraction B. Nylon fiber
87. The minimum number of teeth on a between two bodies is directly C. Rubberized
smaller sprocket for high speed is: proportional to the product of their D. Wool
80
 100. The same material properties all B. relative strength A. Negative fits of metals
over / direction and at any particular C. performance factor B. interference of metal
point in a structural member is: D. joint efficiency C. positive fits of the metal
A. Heterogeneous 7. What is the usual factor of safety for D. intangible fits
B. Homogenous a pressure vessel? 14. What is the direction of the
C. Isentropic A. 4 predominant surface pattern?
D. Isotropic B. 1.5 A. Smoothness
Elements 16 C. 3 B. Waviness
1. For ordinary steel, the modulus of D. 5 C. Lay
elasticity usually falls between 8. It is the permissible variation of the D. roughness
__________ million pounds. size. 15. It is the irregularities of departures
A. 20 to 30 A. Tolerance from the nominal surface of greater
B. 35 to 45 B. limit spacing than roughness?
C. 20 to 35 C. fits A. Waviness
D. 25 to 30 D. none of these B. Roughness
2. The modulus of elastic for metals in 9. Considering that there is no fit, what C. Lay
compression is usually taken as that is the permissible liberal tolerance in D. smoothness
in: machining work? 16. It is the surface finish of micrometer
A. Tension A. ±0.010 in rms.
B. Bearing B. ±0.090 A. 1
C. yield C. ±0.02 B. 2
D. ultimate D. ±0.050 C. 3
3. Which of the following is the ratio of 10. Which of the following is the D. 4
moment and stress? tolerance where the size of a part 17. Which of the following gears has the
A. Strain may be larger only, or smaller only, simplest type of teeth?
B. section modulus than the given dimension? A. Helical gears
C. contraction A. Unilateral B. spur gears
D. passions ratio B. Lateral C. bevel gears
4. What is the flexural stress when of a C. Bilateral D. worm gears
symmetrically cross-section beam D. none of these 18. In gears, an imaginary circle on
when the vertical shear is 11. A tolerance where the size of the which the lever arm is based in;
maximum? part is permitted to be either larger A. Base circle
A. Infinity or smaller than the given dimension. B. pitch circle
B. Zero A. Unilateral C. addendum circle
C. Maximum B. Lateral D. clearance circle
D. minimum C. Bilateral 19. It is the circle tangent to the
5. The riveted joints in ASME Code D. none of these addendum of the meshing gears.
have as design surface compressive 12. Which of the following is the basis A. Clearance circle
stress __________ higher than the for ASA fits? B. base circle
design tensile stress. A. Basic number system C. Addendum circle
A. 70% B. basic hole system D. pitch circle
B. 60% C. basic size system 20. The distance from a point on one
C. 35% D. unit system gear to the corresponding point
D. 50% 13. When the hole is smaller than the measured along the base circle.
6. What is the ratio of the minimum shaft, it will take force or pressure to A. Normal pitch
strength of joint to the strength of put the cold parts together. In such B. circular pitch
solid joint in the pressure vessel? case the allowance is negative. C. axial pitch
A. Efficiency Which of the following terms is D. diametral pitch
appropriate for such allowance?
81
21. A line passing through the pitch 28. It is a type of bolt threaded on both A. Helical spring wire B. stainless
point that is tangent to both base ends and can bbe used where a steel
circles of a gear is: through bolt impossible. C. hard drawn wire spring D.
A. Pressure line A. Coupling bolt copper
B. perpendicular line B. carriage bolt 38. What is the hard drawn (80%
C. tangent line C. stud bolt reduction) spring wire made of high
D. center line D. machine bolt carbon steel?
22. Which of the following is the contact 29. Which of the following is not a type A. Oil tempered wire B. music
ratio for a good gear design? of bolt? wire
A. 1.5:1 A. Stud bolt B. Steel bolt C. tension wire D. chromium wire
B. 1:1.3 C. machine bolt D. coupling bolt 39. Which of the following wires with
C. 1:3 30. It is a locking device that is used to good quality and is used for impact
D. 1.2:2 maintain pressure between threads loading?
23. In pressure vessels, which of the of the bolt and nut. A. Hard drawn wire B. song
following resists internal pressure A. Gasket B. lock washer wire
through tension? C. lock nut D. filler C. helical spring wire D. chromium-
A. Shell-type element 31. What is the large wood screw used silicon wire
B. cam type element to fasten machinery and equipment. 40. When heat-threated wire is coiled
C. plate-type element A. Lag screw B. loss screw cold, it should be stress relieved for
D. spherical type element C. wood screw D. cross screw bending stress and after cooling it is
24. It is the study of the body’s motion 32. What is the minimum length of heated at some:
independent of the forces on the contact in a tapped hole for cast A. 400°F B. 600°F C.
body. iron? 700°C D. 500°F
A. Kinetics A. 1.7D B. 1.5D 41. Which of the following is not a
B. Dynamics C. 1.2D D. 2.1D function of spring?
C. Kinematics 33. It is the ratio of the mean diameter A. Absorbs energy B. source of
D. Mechanics of coil over the coil diameters. potential energy C. measure weight
25. What is the reciprocal of the velocity A. Wahl factor B. spring index D. measure thickness
ratio? C. coil ratio D. lead scale 42. Which of the following is the type of
A. Train value 34. What is the overall length of springs spring made in the form of dished
B. Ratio factor when it is compress until all adjacent washer?
C. modular value coils touched? A. Air spring B. believe spring
D. none of these A. Free length B. solid length C. volute spring D. motor spring
26. It is a type of bolt finished all over C. compressed length D. expansion 43. What is the type of the failure due to
and has usually having coarse length instability?
threads. 35. It is the length of a coil spring under A. Buckling B. slenderness ratio
A. Coupling bolt no load? C. stability D. Euler’s failure
B. stud bolt A. Compressed length B. free 44. What type of formula that is best
C. machine bolt length applied to a very slender column?
D. automobile bolt C. solid height D. none of these A. Column formula B.
27. It is a type of bolt distinguishes by a 36. In general, the steels springs are slenderness formulas
short portion of the shank made of relatively of relative height C. moment formulas D. Euler
underneath the head being square carbon steel usually; formula
or finned or ribbed. A. 5% B. less than 0.5% 45. If two principal stresses is zero, the
A. Coupling bolt C. more than 0.5% D. 7.5% state of stress is:
B. stud bolt 37. It is a low cost spring materials, A. Biaxial B. mono-
C. machine bolt suitable where service is not severe axial
D. carriage bolt and dimensional precision is not C. uniaxial D. triaxial
needed.
82
 46. What do you call the system that the centrifugal force change its direction 62. It is used for permanent fits and
has finite values of principal as the shaft turns in: similar to involute splines except
stresses? A. Nominal speed B. Critical that the pressure angle is 14.5˚.
A. Triaxial B. uniaxial speed A. Separation load B. Spline
C. monoaxial D. biaxial C. Relative speed D. Mean shaft
47. A screw that requires positive torque speed C. Stub serrations D. Involute
to lower the load, or to loosen the 55. An old rule of thumb for serrations
screw if it has been turned tight transmission shafting is that the deflection 63. It is used in a coupling or in addition
against a resistance. should not exceed to another coupling where, in case of
A. Self locking screw B. lock _________ of length between overload, there is danger of injury to
screw supports. machine or to material in process.
C. self screw D. power screw A. 0.01 in. per foot A. Shear pin B. Flange coupling
48. What is the rotating member used in B. 0.08 in. per foot C. Involute serrations D. King pin
transmitting power? C. 0.02 in. per foot 64. What is the maximum shaft angle for
A. Shaft B. counter D. 0.05 in. per foot a single Hooke’s coupling?
shaft 56. For transmission shafts the A.10˚ B. 17˚
C. axle D. washer allowable deflection is 1 degree in a length C. 15˚ D. 20˚
49. For machineries shop the of __________ diameters. 65. What are the two principal parts of a
permissible deflection is A.20 B. 25 Journal Bearing?
approximately: C. 30 D. 40 A. Bearing and journal B. Shaft
A. 0.02in/ft B. 0.03in/ft 57. What is the limiting torsional and babbit
C. 0.01in/ft D. 0.05in/ft deflection for machinery shafts, if the C. Clearance and fitted D. Shaft and
50. For shafts, the shear due to bending criteria of limiting torsional deflection vary cylinder
is a maximum at the neutral plane from 0.08˚ per foot of length? 66. When the line of action of the load
where the normal stress is: A.1˚ B. 2.5˚ bisects the arc of partial bearing, the
A. Minimum B. constant C.2˚ D. 3.5˚ bearing said to be:
C. maximum also D. zero 58. Bevel gears of sizes 5 inches to 15 A. Eccentrically loaded B. Fully
51. The minimum value of numerical inches should not be lift or depress more loaded
combined shock and fatigue factor than__________, as C. Centrally loaded D. Partially
to be applied in every case to the Gleason statement. loaded
computed bending moment of the A. 0.004 B. 0.003 C. 67. What is the difference in radii of the
shaft is: 0.002 D. 0.001 bearing and Journal?
A. 2.0 B. 1.75 Answer: B A. Even clearance B. Clearance
C. 1.5 D. 1.3 59. What type of key that allows the ratio
52. What is the other name given to hub to move along the shaft but C. Odd clearance D. Radial
short shafts in machines? prevents the rotation of the shaft? clearance
A. Spindles B. head shafts A. Woodruff key B. Feather key 68. When radii of both the bearing and
C. core shafts D. all of these C. Gibbs key D. Square the journal are the same, then the
53. The other name given to a line key bearing is said to be:
shaft. 60. What is the other name for Kennedy A. Fitted bearing B. Clearance
A. Countershaft B. Main key? bearing
shaft A. Tangential key B. Woodruff C. Full bearing D. Ambiguous
C. Long shaft D. Head key bearing
shaft C. Saddle key D. Rollpin 69. What is the line that passes through
54. The speed at which the center of 61. What type of fits used for involute the centers of the bearing and the
mass will be equal the deflecting forces spline? journal?
on the shaft; the shaft with its attached A. Close fit B. Press fit A. Line of action B. Line of
bodies will then vibrate violently, since C. Sliding fit D. All of these centers

83
 C. Line of symmetry D. Tangent 78. A toothed wheel whose tooth A.17 B. 21
line elements are straight and parallel to C. 12 D. 14
70. Which of the following is considered the shaft axis or used to transmit 87. The minimum number of teeth on a
advantageous for bearing materials? motion and power between parallel smaller sprocket for high speed is:
A. Conformability B. shafts. A.21 B. 24
Compatibility A. Helical gear B. Spur C. 12 D. 14
C. Embeddability D. All of gear 88. The resultant of a pair of equal
these C. Worm gear D. Bevel forces but opposite in direction is:
71. A conclusion repeatedly verified by gear A. Concurrent B. Couple
experiment is that the smoother 79. The breaking strength of oak-tanned C. Non-concurrent D.
surface: beltings varies from 3 to more than: Resultant
A. Has the greater load A.5 ksi B. 6 ksi 89. The helical and herringbone gear
capacity of the bearing C. 7 ksi D. 9 ksi teeth cut after heat treatment
B. Has the lesser capacity of the 80. Experience suggests that the most should have a hardness in the range
bearing economical designs are obtained for of 210/300BHN. The pinion gear
C. Has constant load a belt speed of: teeth hardness on the other hand
D. None of these A.6000 to 7500 fpm B. 3000 to ideally/normally should be at
72. Which of the following considers the 5000 fpm __________ BHN.
200 series of bearing? C. 3500 to 4700 fpm D. 5000 to A.250/320 B. 350/380
A. Heavy B. Medium 1000 fpm C. 400 D. 340/350
C. Light D. All of 81. The tension in the belt due to 90. As a rule, the center distance
these centrifugal force increasing rapidly between sprockets should not be
73. Which of the following considers the above about: less than __________ times the
300 series of bearing? A.2500 fpm B. 3000 fpm diameter of the bigger sprocket and
A .Medium B. Heavy C. 35000 fpm D. 4000 fpm not less than 30 times the pitch nor
C. Light D. All of these 82. For leather belts, recommended more than about 50 times to pitch.
74. A type of roller bearing in which the speed is: A.1.5 B. 2
balls are assembled by the eccentric A.6000 to 7000 fpm B. 5000 to C. 2.5 D. 3
displacement of the inner ring. 6000 fpm 91. A single force which produces the
A. shallow groove ball bearing C. 7000 to 8000 fpm D. 4500 to same effect upon a mass as two or
B. filling-slot ball bearing 5600 fpm several forces acting together is
C. self-aligning ball bearing 83. The recommended initial tension of called:
D. deep-groove ball bearing the belt is: A. Components B. Composition
75. Which of the following is not a type A.75 lb/in of width B. 73 lb/in forces
of ball bearing? of width C. Resolution forces D.
A. shallow groove ball bearing C. 71 lb/in of width D. 80 lb/in of Resultant
B. filling-slot ball bearing width 92. All forces in the same plane are
C. self-aligning ball bearing 84. Two shafts at right angles to each called:
D. deep-groove ball bearing other may be connected by what A. Coplanar B. Couple
76. Which of the following is the arrangement? C. Parallel D. Resultant
approximate density of the leather A. Half turn B. Quarter turn 93. Which of the following laws which
belt? C. ¾ turn D. One turn states that the force of attraction
A.0.035 lb/in3 B. 0.0135 lb/in3 85. The minimum number of teeth on a between two bodies is directly
C. 0.025 lb/in3 D. 0.0465 lb/in3 smaller sprocket for low speed is: proportional to the product of their
77. Which of the following is the A.12 B. 21 masses and inversely proportional to
approximate density of a fat rubber C. 17 D.14 distance square between their
belt? 86. The minimum number of teeth on a centers.
A.0.055 lb/in3 B. 0.0135 lb/in3 smaller sprocket for moderate speed A. Hooke’s law B. Law of
C. 0.045 lb/in3 D. 0.0465 lb/in3 is: gravitation
84
 C. Law of motion D. Newton’s 1. For large speed ratio and large 7. To avoid scoring in the bearing
law sprocket utilized it is recommended surface and the shaft due to
94. Any object thrown upward will return cast ____________ material since the __________ contamination/absorption
to earth with the magnitude of the large sprocket teeth are having of the fine dirt in the bearing during
terminal velocity equal to: fewer engagements. operation/lubrication the bearing
A. 50% of the initial velocity A. allowed steel B. high material to apply should have good
B. 80% of the initial velocity treated steel C. iron lubrication.
C. About 90% of the initial velocity D. malleable iron A. Anti-scoring B. resistance
D. The initial velocity 2. Roller bearing is utilized on _________ conformability
95. Flat belt that is too tight will induce carrying capacity and is better than C. corrosion resistance D. embed
strain on the bearing and belt ball in this condition. ability
__________. A. Heavy load B. high 8. What do impact tests measure?
A. Life will be shortened temperature load C. low load A. Compactness B. Ductility
B. Result to uneconomical D. reserving load C. Plasticity D.
operation 3. To enhance mechanical properties, Toughness
C. Suffer/shatter fabrication characteristics or any 9. Corresponding piping color for
D. Will be sheared/cut other attributes of steel, some alkaline.
96. The resulting cross-sectional area of elements are added in melting in A. Blue B. Green
the tensile test specimen divided by specific ranges or minimum aside
the specimen original area is called: from carbon and generally termed: B. C. Red D. Violet
A. Charpy test B. % A. Alloy steel B. AISI steel 10. Type of gear that transmits power at
elongation C. Bessemer steel D. SAE an angle.
C. Impact test D. Izod test steel A. Bevel B. Helix
97. SAE 51XXX belongs to the __________ 4. Materials is having thermal C. Herringbone D. Spur
steel family. expansion of about 10 times higher 11. Which of the following gasket
A. Carbon B. than those of materials and has material is not used for high
Chromium more heat generated during temperature?
C. Manganese D. Nickel machining is: A. Normal Plane B. Plastic
98. In itself, it is a lubricant and usually A. Aluminum B. Asbestos Nylon
one of the important elements in C. Plastic D. PVC C. Rubberized D. Wool
casting non-ferrous metals like 5. To hold to minimum, the axial 12. A plane perpendicular to the gear
bronze, for example: direction of deflection/movement, a axis.
A. Antimony B. Babbit separate thrust bearing or preloaded A. Asbestos B. Pitch Plane
C. Lead D. Zinc bearing capable of absorbing C. Plane of Rotation D. Radius
99. Gasket material, which should avoid considerable load is required. The of gyration
hot liquid/steam applications. type of bearing to use is a __________ 13. Specification of molybdenum alloy.
A. Asbestos fiber B. Nylon bearing. A. SAE3XXX B. SAE4XXX
fiber A. Deep grove ball C. SAE5XXX D. SAE6XXX
C. Rubberized D. Wool B. double row angular contract 14. A_________ chain is an assembly of
100. The same material C. tapered roller bearing lines and joints.
properties all over / direction and at D. wide type self-aligning A. Dynamic B. Kinetic
any particular point in a structural 6. Pulley made of ________ ordinary is C. Sprocket D. Static
member is: 45 to 55% less in weight and 2.35 to 15. The recommended means of
A. Heterogenous B. 2.70% less slippage compared supporting the chuck during the
Homogenous with________ pulley. mounting procedure to the lathe
C. Isentropic D. Isotropic A. Iron/steel B. steel/iron spindle is to use:
ELEMENTS 17 C. wood/iron D. A. Crane B. Jack C. Overhead D.
wood/steel Racket

85
16. Too much __________ in a flat belt 24. Circular pitch is measured along the exceed the thickness of an engaging
operation tend to cause excessive __________ in the circular gear. tooth is called:
wear slippage and may burn A. Circle B. Line of action A. Backlash B. Clearance
A. load B. Lack C. C. pitch center D. pitch C. Pitting D. Space
Usage D. Tightness diameter 34. The forces that be combined or
17. It is a chromium steel tape in AISI- 25. Stiffness is the materials ability called component forces.
SAE designation. to__________ deformation under A. Different B. Helical
A. 10XX B. 25XX stress. C. Opposite D. parallel
C.50XX D. 40XX A. Non-polar B. planar 35. Plane of rotation is defined as plane
18. Which of the following is not C. resists D. Staffer perpendicular to a
recommended for use in a driving 26. The pipe color in steam is: A. gear axis B. gear ratio
space exceeding 2000ft/min? A. Blue B. Gray C. normal planeD. pitch diameter
A. Flat leather belt B. C. Silver gray D. White 36. Cutting lubricant used used in
Herringbone gear 27. What method is used the yield point drilling reaming and tapping for
C. Silent sprocket D. V-Belt of some brittle materials? brass and bronze
19. It is low cost bearing used worldwide A. Offset ratio B. modulus of A. Dry B. Soda
for automobile or low horse power resilience water C. Soluble oil
motor applications. It is made of thin C. modulus measurement D. D. Turpentine
coating of over flat metal strip. parallelogram method 37. Non-concurrent forces when in
A. Babbit B. Cadmium brass 28. Wood pattern in the foundry is action are:
C. Lead D. Thin normally constructed out of: A. Collinear B. Couple
20. The most common useful tools to A. Dried sap wood B. hard C. parallel D scalar
measure diameter in machine shop wood C. kiln dried 38. The general accepted limit of
operation but normally and always wood D. scrap wood diamond wheel speed should be in
used with steel scale for 29. The progressive change in position the range of ________ fpm.
measurement. of is called motion. A. 1000/2000 B. 2500/3500
A. Caliper B. A. Component B. couple C. 3000/4000 D. 5000/6000
Micrometer C. C. link D. mass 39. Prepared tool bit will now consist of
Protractor D. Vernier 30. Strain or ________ is a change in face , nose and
21. In impact force introduce to cause geometry / shape of the body due to A. Cutting tool B. shank
the metal in a shape mold according action of a force on it. C sharp tool D tool
to the shape to dies made. A. Bending Stress B. edge
A. Hardness B. Spinning Deformation 40. This is an alloy in bronze casting that
C. Swaging D. C. Shear stress D. stress assist lubrication and in itself a
Toughness 31. The effective face width of a helical lubricant:
22. Forces of equal in magnitude but gear divided by the axial pitch. This A. Lead B. manganese
opposite in direction are parallel sometimes called face overlap. C phosphate D .tin
called A. Angle overlap B. Axial 41. For longer sprocket chain life the
A. Acceleration B. Coplanar overlap C. Contact speed range of_______ fpm is
C. Couple D. Non- overlap D. Helical overlap recommended.
coplanar 32. For mass production of casting it is A. 92xx B. 300xx C. 304xx
23. Composition of force is at generally chapter to use:______ D. 515xx
the____________ of two or more longer life. 42. All stainless type is SAE designation
forces. A. Gear axis B. normal plane except:
A. Combination B. C. contact overlap D. A. 92XX B. 300XX
Opposition C. pitch diameter C. 304XX D. 515XX
Resultant D. 33. It is a place between mating teeth or 43. It is white metal with good oxidation
Summary the amount of which a tooth space and corrosion resistance. This has
also electrical magnetic properties.
86
 A. Aluminum B. Copper 53. For low load and less experience smooth continuous action is
C. Nickel D. production. essential as in high speed drives up
Titanium A. Babbitt B. ball to 12,000 fpm.
44. It is molybdenum steel – tape in C. Roller D. Self A. Bevel gear B. Helical
AISI_SAE designation aligning gear C. Herringbone
A. 44XX B. 45XX 54. The lateral stain in axial tension gear D. Spur gear
C. 50XX D. members can be calculated by 63. The reciprocal of a diametral pitch or
51XX A. Deformation B. the ratio of the pitch diameter to the
45. Cutting lubricant used used in Hooke’s law C. number of teeth.
drilling reaming and tapping for Poisson’s ratio D. William’s A. Clearance B. Involute
brass and bronze law C. Lead D. Module
A. Dry B. Soda 55. The most abundant being used in 64. What tool will be used in making
water C. Soluble oil automobiles worldwide is coated wood pattern in the foundry shop?
D. Turpentine with_______ on top of the plate. A. Band saw B. Drill machine
46. In a ______ design, the lead of a A. Babbitt B. lead C. C. Hammer D. Saw and chisel
single thread is equal to the pitch. manganese D. tin 65. Type of bolt commonly used in the
A. bevel gear B. bolt 56. A liquid metal at room temperature. construction that is threaded in both
C. helical gear D. hypoid A. Aluminum B. ends.
gear mercury C. Zinc A. Acme threaded bolts B.
47. A type of chisel used in cutting of D. Zirconium Hex bolt C. Hardness
keyways, square corners or slots. 57. Steel with SAE specification 13XX. d. Stud bolt
A. Cape B. Diamond A. Chromium B. 66. Ability of a material to absorb strain
head C. Flat Manganese C. energy and will return to its original
D. Round Molybdenum D. Nickel state.
48. The maximum recommended ideal 58. Property, which enables a material A. Creep B. Fatigue
number of teeth to use for bigger to be drawn into a wire. strength C. Hardness
sprocket is: A. Ductility B. Elasticity D. Resilience
A. 120 B. 127 C. Plasticity D. Utility 67. The ratio of lateral strain to
C. 132 D. 143 59. Heating a metal to a temperature longitudinal strain.
49. The teeth on the outer ring surface above the critical temperature and A. Deformation B. Modulus
is called the external gear: from cooling slowly usually done in of elasticity C.
A. Develop B. Flank the furnace to reduce the hardness Poisson’s ratio D.
C. Gear D. Involute and improve the machinability is a William’s line
50. A bolt general application that process called 68. Basic size is the same as design size
posses a stronger thread is a type of A. Annealing B. if there is no:
_____ screw. Normalizing C. A. Allowance B. Clearance
A. BUN B. UNC quenching D. tempering C. Limits D. Tolerance
C. UNEF D. WOOD 60. The stress that causes the material 69. Forces that meet at common point is
51. Maximum moment formula for beam to shorten: called:
simply supported at both and A. Bearing B. Compressive A. Co-linear B.
subject to a load uniformly disturbed C. Shear D. tensile concurrent C.
over its length. 61. The most common lubricants being coplanar D. couple
A. wL/2 B. wL/8 utilized in whatever category of load 70. A pair of equal and opposite (not
C. wL/8 D. wL/12 and speed are oil, grease and dry collinear) forces that tend to cause a
52. Special bearing used with high lubricants like rotation of a body.
deflection. A. Bronze B. Graphite A. Centroids B. Couple
A. Babbitt B. ball C. Lead D. Silicon C. Equilibrium D. Vector
C. Roller D. Self 62. Commonly used in parallel shaft 71. Stress that resist being pulled apart.
aligning transmission especially when a
87
 A. Compressive B. Shear A. Belting B. Frame 87. Pulley made of ______ ordinary is 45
C. Tensile D. Torsional C. Mechanism D. Sprocket to 55% less in weight and 2.35 to
72. Dynamic seal is also known as: chain 2.70% less slippage compared with
A. Gasket B. packing 81. The ____ is one of the rigid _______ pulley.
C. seal D. shield members / bodies joined together to A. Iron/steel B. steel/iron
73. Acceleration is proportional to the form a kinetic chain. C. wood/iron D. wood/steel
force. A. Coplanar B. Frame 88. A plane perpendicular to the gear
A. Hooke’s law B. Law of C. Link D. Machine axis.
gravitation C. Law of 82. For large speed ratio and large A. Normal plane B. Pitch plane
motion D. Newton’s law sprocket utilized it is recommended C. Plane of rotation d. Radius of
74. Which type of hardening will work to cast _______ material since the large gyration
some extent in all metals? sprocket teeth are having fewer 89. The minimum value of numerical
A. Annealing B. Austenitizing engagements. combined shocks and fatigue factor
C. Martempering D. Work A. Alloyed steel B. heat to be applied in every case to the
hardening treated steel C. Iron computed bending moment of the
75. Sound travel fastest in : D. Malleable iron shaft is:
A. Air at 00 F and 1 atmosphere 83. Roller bearing is utilized on______ A. 2.0 B.1.75
B. Air at 700 F and 1 atmosphere carrying capacity and is better than C. 1.5 D. 1.3
C. Air at 700 F and 0 lbf/ in2 ball in this condition. 90. What is the other name given to
D. steel at 700 F A. Heavy load B high short shafts on machines?
76. The yield strength of common yellow temperature load C. low A. Spindles B. head
brass ( 70%Cu, 30%Zn) can be load D. reversing load shafts C. core shafts
increased by: 84. To enhance mechanical properties, D. all of these
A. Annealing B. chill casting fabrication characteristics or any 91. The other given to a line shaft is:
C. cold working D. heat other attributes of steel, some A. Countershafts B. main
treatment elements are added in melting in shaft C. long shaft
77. Forces not on the same place is specific ranges or minimum aside D. head shafts
called______ from carbon and generally termed: 92. The speed at which the center of
A. Component B. Composition of A. Alloy steel B. AISI steel mass will be equal the deflecting
forces C. Non-coplanar C. Bessemer steel D. SAE forces on the shafts; shaft with its
D. Resolution steel attached bodies will then vibrate
78. The distance between the center of 85. Materials is having thermal violently, since the centrifugal forces
oscillation and the point of expansion of about 10 times higher changes its direction as the shaft
suspension is called: than those of materials and has turns in:
A. Fix axis more heat generated during A. Nominal speed B.
B. Center of gravity machining is: critical speed C.
C. Center of percussion A. Aluminum B. Asbestos relative speed D. mean
D. Radius of oscillation C. Plastic D. PVC speed
79. If the velocity is variable and 86. To hold to minimum, the axial 93. An old rule of thumb for
regularly/constantly increasing the direction of deflection/movement, a transmission shafting is that the
rate of change is called: separate thrust bearing or preloaded deflection should not exceed ____ of
A. Acceleration B. bearing capable of absorbing length between supports.
Constant work C. considerable load is required. The A. 0.01 in. per foot B. 0.08
Moment D. Motion type of bearing to use is a _______ in. per foot C. 0.02 in. per
80. The kinematic chain in which one bearing. foot D. 0.05 in. per foot
link is considered fixed for the A. Deep grove ball 94. For transmission shaft the allowable
purpose of analysis but motion is B. double row angular contract deflection is 1 degree in a large of
possible in other links. C. tapered roller bearing _____ diameters.
D. wide type self-aligning
88
 A. 20 B. 25 C. 30 D. 20 10. A type of roller bearing in which the
D. 40 3. What are the two principal parts of a balls are assembled by the eccentric
95. What is the limiting torsional Journal Bearing? displacement of the inner ring.
deflection for machinery shafts, if A. bearing and journal A. shallow grove ball bearing
the criteria of limiting torsional B. shaft and babbit B. filling-slot ball bearing
deflection vary from 0.08% per foot C. clearance and fitted C. self-aligning ball bearing
of length? D. shaft and cylinder D. deep-grove ball bearing
A. 10 B. 2.50 C. 20 D. 4. When the line of action of the load, 11. Which of the following is not a type
3.50 bisects the arc of partial bearing, the of ball bearing?
96. Bevel gear with size 5 in. to 15 in bearing is said to be? A. shallow grove ball bearing
should not be lift or depress more A. eccentrically loaded B. filling-slot ball bearing
than____, as Gleason statement. B. fully loaded C. self-aligning ball bearing
A. 0.004 B. 0.003 C. 0.002 C. centrally loaded D. deep-grove ball bearing
D. 0.001 D. partially loaded 12. Which of the following is the
97. What type of key that allows the hub 5. When radii of both the bearing and approximate density of the leather
to move along the shaft but prevents the journal are the same, then the belt?
the rotation of the shaft? bearing is said to be: A. 0.035
A. Woodruff Key B. Feather A. fitted bearing B. 0.0135
Key C. Gibbs Key B. clearance bearing C. 0.025
D. Square Key C. full bearing D. 0.0465
98. What is the other name for Kennedy D. ambiguous bearing 13. Which of the following is the
Key: 6. Which of the following cannot be a approximate density of a fat rubber
A. Tangential key B. possion’s ratio of a material belt?
woodruff key C. saddle A. 0.35 A. 0.055
key D. roll pin B. 0.40 B. 0.0135
99. What type of fits used for involute C. 0.75 C. 0.045
spline? D. 0 D. 0.0465
A. Close fit B. press fit 7. A conclusion repeatedly verified by 14. A toothed wheel whose tooth
C. sliding fit D. all of these experiment is that the smoother elements are straight and parallel to
100. It is used for surface: the shaft axis or used to transmit
permanent fits and similar to A. has the greater load capacity motion and power between parallel
involute splines except that the of the bearing shafts.
pressure angle is 14.5 0. B. has the lesser capacity of the A. helical gear
A. Separation load B. spline bearing B. spur gear
shaft C. stub serration C. has constant load C. worm gear
D. involute serration D. none of these D. bevel gear
ELEMENTS 18 8. Which of the following considers the 15. The breaking strength of oak-tanned
1. Which of the following has been 200 series of bearing? belting varies from 3 or more than:
considered as general purpose rope? A. heavy A. 5
A. 6 x 19 IWRC B. medium B. 6
B. 7 x 25 IWRC C. light C. 7
C. 7 x 25 IWRC D. all of these D. 9
D. 6 x 9 IWRC 9. Which of the following considers the 16. Experience suggests that the most
2. What is the maximum shaft angle for 300 series of bearing? economical designs are obtained for
a single Hooke’s coupling? A. heavy a belt speed of:
A. 10 B. medium A. 6000 to 7500
B. 17 C. light B. 3000 to 5000
C. 15 D. all of these C. 3500 to 4700
D. 5000 to 1000
89
17. The tension in the belt due to A. Hoist 32. Which of the following is used to
centrifugal force increasing rapidly B. Spring change the direction of an applied
above about: C. Lever tensile force?
A. 2500 D. Roller A. Gears
B. 3000 25. A measure of the material’s ability to B. Flywheels
C. 3500 yield and absorb highly localized and C. Pulleys
D. 4000 rapidly applied stresses. D. Ropes
18. For leather belts recommended A. Hardness 33. For most wire ropes and chains with
speed is? B. Stiffness 180 contact, the loss factor at low
A. 6000 to 7000 C. Toughness speed varies between:
B. 5000 to 6000 D. Resilience A. 1.03 to 1.06
C. 7000 to 8000 26. A material can fail after repeated B. 1.20 to1.50
D. 4500 to 5600 loadings even if the stress level C. 1.07 to 1.10
19. For fabric belts, recommended never exceeds the ultimate strength. D. 1.60 to 1.80
speed is: A. Fatigue failure 34. What method to determine the
A. 4000 to 5000 B. Ductile failure reactions on continuous beams?
B. 3000 to 4000 C. Brittle failure A. two-moment equations
C. 2000 to 3000 D. Mechanical failure B. three-moment equations
D. 2000 and more 27. The load at which a column fails is C. second moment equations
20. The recommended initial tension of known as: D. third moment equations
the belt is: A. Dead load 35. What is the best method for
A. 75 B. Critical load increasing a spring’s fatigue life?
B. 73 C. Moving load A. Sprickling
C. 71 D. Dynamic load B. Stress relieving
D. 80 28. The percentage difference of solid C. Shot peening
21. Two shafts at right angles to each and working deflections is known as: D. Shot relieving
other may be connected by what A. Cash allowance 36. The distance from a point on one
arrangement? B. Spring rate gear to the corresponding point
A. Half turn C. Spring allowance measured along the base circle.
B. Quarter turn D. Spring index A. Diametral pitch
C. turn 29. A shaft’s natural frequency of B. Normal pitch
D. One turn vibration is referred to as the: C. Circular pitch
22. A statement of how the total normal speed D. Chordal pitch
moment is derived from a number of A. high speed 37. Which of the following is a single
forces acting simultaneously at a B. critical speed measure that combines the external
point. C. low speed dynamic load of an application with
A. Goodman’s theorem 30. A fine finishing operation, similar to a gear drive’s reliability and
B. Soderberg’s theorem polishing, is using a very fine operating life?
C. Varignon’s theorem polishing compound. Burnishing A. ratio factor
D. Moore’s theorem A. Buffing B. reliability factor
23. A simple mechanical machine with B. Calorizing C. service factor
the ability to increase an applied C. Electroplating D. life factor
force. 31. A process in which metal is dipped in 38. Describes very rough grinding, such
A. Hinges dilutes acid solutions to remove dirt, as that performed in foundries to
B. Roller grease, and oxides. remove gates, fins, and risers from
C. Lever A. Pickling casting.
D. Spring B. Sheradizing A. Snagging
24. Any device used to raise or lower an C. Polishing B. Lapping
object. D. Pakerizing C. Honing
90
 D. Snuggling 46. When tested in compression, ductile C. 240
39. A fine grinding operation used to materials usually exhibit _____ D. 450
obtain exact fit and dimensional characteristics up to the yield 53. What is the range of the endurance
accuracy. strength as they do when tested in ratio or Czaud votes values for steel?
A. Honing tension. A. 0.23 to 0.65
B. Lapping A. the same B. 0.34 to 0.87
C. Buffing B. more than C. 0.63 to 0.93
D. Burnishing C. more than D. 0.34 to 0.45
40. The process of separating different D. approximately the same 54. Which of the following indicates the
sizes of the same material. 47. A tolerance where the size of a part degree of concentration?
A. Screening is permitted to be either larger or A. Power factor
B. Sieving smaller than the given dimension. B. Service factor
C. Separation A. Bilateral C. Stress factor
D. Fractioning B. unilateral D. Stress concentration factor
41. The process of separating a C. lateral 55. The internal stresses that exist in
material into a variety of specifically D. None of these any part of the material that is
sized groups. 48. A fit generally used on those subjected to temperature and not
A. Centrifuging dimensions involved in such as pin acted upon by an external load.
B. Sieving in a hole. A. Residual stress
C. Fractioning A. Unilateral B. Form stress
D. Screening B. Lateral C. Superposed stress
42. An interrupted quenching process C. Bilateral D. Control stress
resulting in an austenite-to-banite D. None of these 56. It is the process that cold works a
transition. 49. It is relatively finely spaced limited amount of material, thus
A. Austempering irregularities of the surface. giving a higher strength, and it
B. Martempering A. Smoothness leaves a surface compressive stress.
C. Austenitizing B. Waviness A. Surface finishing
D. Martenitizing C. Lay B. Tensioning
43. The material will become D. Roughness C. Surfacing
progressively stronger, harder, and 50. It is the surface finish of heavy cuts D. Surface rolling
more brittle until it eventually fails. or coarse feed. 57. Fatigue strength is increased by
A. Hot working A. 200rms repeated loads just below the
B. Tempering B. 400rms normal fatigue limit, followed by
C. Cold working C. 80rms small step by step increase of the
D. Normalizing D. 500 or greater rms loading.
44. A swinging support constructed as 51. Which of the following is the most A. Coaxing
part of the vessel and that supports dominant cause (approximately B. Triaxing
the man way cover when it is 80%) of machine failures? C. Mixing
unbolted and moved aside. A. Torsion D. Relieving
A. Nozzles B. Negligence 58. It is the diameter of the imaginary
B. Handholes C. Fatigue failures cylinder that bounds the crest of an
C. Davit D. Compression external thread and the roots of an
D. Orifice 52. Wrought steel in its commonly met internal thread.
45. Which of the following is the commercial, it is often assumed that A. Mean diameter
measure of torsional stress? the average endurance for an B. Root diameter
A. accuracy average Su (50% survival) the Brinell C. Stress diameter
B. stiffness hardness is limited to: D. Major diameter
C. rigidity A. 500
D. quality B. 400
91
59. It is the distance in inches a screw A. Bolt 73. Under theories of failure, the value
thread ( a helix) advances axially in B. U-bolt of shear stress is how many times
one turn C. Rivet that of the tensile stress?
A. Pitch D. Screw A. Four times
B. Mean pitch 67. A fastening which has no nut and B. Half
C. Lead turns in to a threaded hole. C. Double
D. Circular pitch A. Bolt D. One-fourth
60. Which of the following bolts is B. Fastener 74. The theory of mechanics of material
recommended for general use? C. Rivet shows that the result from the
A. UNC D. Screw octahedral shear stress theory and
B. UNEF 68. An old name for an unfinished those from the maximum distortion-
C. UNF through bolt comes with square. energy theory are:
D. NC A. Coupling bolt A. the same
61. It is frequently used bolt in B. Stud bolt B. less than
automotive and aircraft industries. C. Machine bolt C. more than
A. UNC D. Automobile bolt D. not related
B. UNEF 69. It is a type of coil where the helical 75. It is the distance measure auxiliary
C. UNF coil is wrapped into a circle forming from a point on one thread to the
D. NC an annular ring. corresponding point on an adjacent
62. Which of the following is particular A. Volute spring thread.
bolt used in aeronautical equipment? B. Hairspring A. Axial pitch
A. UNC C. Motor spring B. Z-pitch
B. UNEF D. Garter spring C. Lead
C. UNF 70. It is a type of spring where thin flat D. Lead angle
D. NC strip wound up on itself as a plane 76. It is the angle between a tangent to
63. What type of bolt usually used for spiral, usually anchored at the inside the pitch helix and plane normal to
high-pressure pipe flanges, cylinder end. the axis of the screw.
head studs etc? A. Motor spring A. Helix angle
A. UNC B. Garter spring B. Lead angle
B. UNF C. Volute spring C. Tangential angle
C. UNEF D. Helical spring D. Vertical angle
D. 8 UN 71. The ratio of the length of the column 77. It is suggested that the design factor
64. It is the stress or load induced by the and the radius of gyration of the on the yield strength be about 1.5
tightening operation. cross-sectional area about a for the smooth load, about 2 to 2.25
A. Initial stress centroidal axis. for minor shock loading, and up to
B. Initial tension A. Contact ratio _____ for sever shock loads,
C. Residual stress B. Slenderness ratio especially when the loading reverses
D. None of these C. Centroidal ratio during operation.
65. For non-metallic gaskets, it has been D. Column ratio A. 4.5
found that they should have a 72. Under the theories of failure, for B. 3.5
certain minimum amount of static loading of ductile material, the C. 3.0
compression as ______ for a certain design stress is: D. 4.0
cork gasket. A. Yield Stress/Factor of Safety 78. A typical hub length fall between:
A. 62% B. Ultimate stress/Factor of Safety A. 1.25D to 2.5D
B. 86% C. Ultimate stress/Proportional B. 1.3D to 3.4D
C. 68% Limit C. 1.25D to 4.0D
D. 76% D. Yield point/Proportional Limit D. D to 7.0D
66. It is a screw fastening with a nut on 79. A key that are square or flat and
it. tapered with head
92
 A. Pin keys C. Flexible coupling 93. On high speed centrifugal blowers, it
B. Gib-head keys D. None of these has been observed that the arc of
C. Saddle keys 86. It is the difference in the radii of the contact is reduced from 1800 at rest
D. None of these bearing and the journal. to _____ in motion.
80. A key that may either straight of A. Even clearance A. 1000
tapered. It is usually a drive fit. B. Clearance ratio B. 900
A. Pin keys C. Fit clearance C. 950
B. Gib-head keys D. Radial clearance D. 1100
C. Saddle keys 87. A bearing in which the radii of the 94. The recommended net belt pull for
D. None of these journal and the bearing are the rubber belt is:
81. A key with one several patented same. A. 11.34lb/ply per inch of width
methods of keying is driven or A. Fitted bearing B. 13.75lb/ply per inch of width
pressed into a hole that is small B. Full bearing C. 16.35lb/ply per inch of width
enough to close the slit, assembled C. Partial bearing D. 20.34lb/ply per inch of width
in radial direction. D. Clearance bearing 95. For minimum quietness, use
A. Fit key 88. What is the approximate length-to- sprockets with _____ or more teeth.
B. Roll pin diameter ratio of hydrodynamic A. 21
C. Saddle key bearings? B. 23
D. Pin key A. 1 C. 25
82. A key that allows the hub to move B. 4 D. 27
along the shaft but prevents the C. 3 96. If two intersecting shafts are to be
rotation of the shaft. D. 2 belt connected _____ guide pulleys
A. Woodruff key 89. The operating temperature of oil are to be used.
B. Gibs key films in the bearing must A. 1
C. Feather key approximately: B. 2
D. Square key A. 1400F to 1500F C. 3
83. For involute spline, the type of fits B. 1400F to 1600F D. 4
used: C. 1200F to 1900F 97. Wire ropes are made from cold-
A. Close fit D. 1200F to 1900F drawn with _____ or more teeth.
B. Sliding fit 90. At the higher temperatures, oil A. 21
C. Press fit oxidizes more rapidly above: B. 23
D. All of these A. 1200F C. 25
84. A coupling that transmits power via B. 2000F D. 27
the frictional forces induced by C. 1400F 98. A wire rope that the wires and
pulling the flange toward each other D. 1600F strands are twisted in the opposite
over slotted tapered sleeves. 91. For thrust bearing, the special at direction.
A. Flange coupling moderate operating condition is: A. Long lay
B. Ribbed compression coupling A. 50<Vm>200fpm B. Perform
C. Rigid coupling B. 50<Vm>250fpm C. Regular lay
D. Flanged compression C. 50<Vm>220>fpm D. Lang lay
coupling D. 50<Vm>250fpm 99. A wire rope that the wires and strand
85. A coupling used for absorbing some 92. If the ends are joined by wire lacing are twisted in the same direction.
shock and vibration that may appear with machine, the usual efficiency of A. Long lay
on one shaft and of preventing the joint is: B. Perform
occurrence of reversed stresses A. 100% C. Regular lay
caused by the shaft deflecting at the B. 75% D. Lang lay
coupling preventing at the coupling. C. 85%
A. Rigid coupling D. 88%
B. Flange coupling
93
 100. Which of the following ropes B. spring 13. A welding operation that use hot
is used for haulage, rigging, and C. brakes flame and metal rod.
guard rails? D. holders A. gas welding
7. The total frictional energy that is B. arc welding
A. 6 x 35 IWRC
B. 6 x 15 IWRC stored in the brake parts principally C. resistance welding
in the drum or disk is approximately? D. automatic welding
C. 7 x 8 IWRC
A. 56% up 14. The arc is covered with a welding
D. 7 x 7 IWRC
B. 90% up composition and bare electrode wire
ELEMENTS 19 C. 86% up is fed automatically.
1. Which of the following ropes is used D. 75% up A. resistance welding
for lines, hawsers, overhead cranes, 8. The brake capacity to absorb energy B. induction welding
and hoist? is known as? C. submerged welding
A. 6 x 37 IWRC A. energy D. spot welding
B. 6 x 35 IWRC B. power 15. What is the recommended
C. 6 x 25 IWRC C. resistance brake coefficient of fluctuation pf flywheels
D. 7 x 26 IWRC D. centrifugal brake for punching, shearing, pressing
2. The regular materials for wire ropes 9. a kind of braking system such that if machine is?
are made of? the band wraps partly around the A. 0.005-0.1
A. chromium brake drum and the braking action is B. 0.002
B. wrought iron obtained by pulling the band tight C. 0.03-0.05
C. cast steel into the wheel. D. 0.01-0.03
D. high-carbon iron A. block brake 16. The part of machine that absorbs
3. What is the minimum suggested B. clutch the energy delivered by a sharp
design factor of wire ropes for C. band brake force or blow.
miscellaneous hoisting equipment D. centrifugal brake A. spring
is? 10. Which of the following clutches that B. anvil
A. 2 has a disadvantage of heavier C. brakes
B. 3 rotating masses? D. flywheel
C. 5 A. multiple disc clutch 17. It is the friction of wheel inclination
D. 4 B. cone clutch from the vertical position.
4. To avoid excessive wear rate the C. disc clutch A. camber
recommended limiting pressure for 6 D. tin clutching B. toe-in
x 19 ropes is ___________for cast 11. Which of the following welds have C. caster
steel. been considered as resistance weld D. king pin inclination
A. 700 psi which is usually round in the same 18. Which of the following is a machine
B. 900 psi dorm as the electrodes that press which takes large quantities of raw
C. 1000 psi the sheet together? or finished materials and binds them
D. 1200 psi A. edge joints with a rope or metal straps or wires
5. 5. To avoid excessive wear rate the B. spot welds into a large package?
recommended limiting pressure for 6 C. CIG welds A. bacher
x 19 ropes is ___________for D. TIG welds B. bending machine
manganese cast steel. 12. A welding which consist of short C. baler
A. 2500 psi lengths ( 2-3 long ) of welds with D. automatic screw machine
B. 2000 psi space between as 6 inches on 19. It is the grasping of an outside work
C. 3000 psi centers. piece in a chunk or a jawed device in
D. 2300 psi A. intermittent weld a lathe.
6. What friction device that are used to B. spot weld A. clucking
connect shafts? C. MIG weld B. clamping
A. clutches D. TIG weld C. chucking
94
D. clam shelling 26. Which of the following is the process A. the geometrical structure factor F(h,
20. Which of the following is a of removing course scratches or toll k, l) is the ratio of the amplitude of the X-ray
mechanical linkage or mechanism marks? B. reflected from a plane in a crystal to
that can turn about a center or A. polishing the amplitude of the X-ray scattered from a
rotation? B. buffing single electron
A. oscillation C. honing C. X-ray diffraction is only useful
B. crank D. lapping for studying simpler crystal such as the
C. coupler 27. Which of the following ropes is body centered cubic structure rather
D. drag link galvanized and consists of 6 strands, than more complex crystals like the
21. What type of compound screw which 7 wires each and a hemp core? hexagonal closed packed structure
produces a motion equal to the A. reverse lay rope D. X-ray diffraction can be used to
difference in motion between the B. guy rope determine the gain size of a specimen
two component screws? C. lang lay rope 33. Which of the following describes
A. machine screw D. regular rope diffusion in a crystal structure?
B. tanden screw 28. It is a large lathe used for turning A. it is not possible
C. differential screw and boring cannons. B. it occurs only in alloys, never in pure
D. variable screw A. gun lathe crystals
22. Which of the following bolts provided B. engine lathe C. it often uses an exchange or
with a hole at one end instead of C. cannon lathe vacancy mechanism
usual head? D. turret lathe D. it occurs primarily as a result of
A. stud bolt 29. What device on the lathe machine mechanical work
B. eye bolt used for carrying the revolving 34. Which of the following does not
C. machine bolt spindle? produce vacancies interstitial
D. stove bolt A. head stock defects, or impurity defects in a
23. What operation generally carried out B. header material?
to divide the parent coiled sheet into C. head suction A. plastic deformation
narrow coils? D. none of these B. quenching
A. slotting 30. If the faced-centered cubic lattice is C. slow equilibrium cooling
B. squeezing compared with the hexagonal D. irradiation with high energy particles
C. squaring closed-packed lattice, which of the 35. Which of the following are true
D. slitting following features describes the statements about the modulus of
24. It is the process used to form hexagonal closed-packed structure elasticity, E?
shallow, round, raised recessed only? A. it is the same as the rupture
troughs of uniform width in a A. it has the closest packed lattice modulus
straight curved or circular form. structure B. it is the slope of the stress-
A. hemming B. its coordination number is 2 strain diagram in the linearly elastic
B. beading C. its deformation properties are region
C. embossing more directional C. it is the ratio of stress to volumetric
D. buldging D. its stacking order is reversed strain
25. The process of removing excess 31. In molecules of the same D. its value depends only on the
metal from the edge of a strip to composition, what are variations of temperature of the material
make it suitable for drawing without atomic arrangements known as? 36. In general, what are the effects of
wrinkling or to obtain final A. polymers cold-working a metal?
complicated shape which was not B. monomers A. increase strength and ductility
directly possible by blanking. C. isomers B. decrease strength and ductility
A. lancing D. crystal system C. increased strength, decreased
B. slugging 32. Which of the following statements is D. decreased strength, increased
C. notching not true regarding X-ray diffraction? ductility
D. trimming
95
 37. Which of the following does cold- B. they are located primarily in highly B. aggregate gradation
working cause? strained and distorted positions C. water-cement ratio
A. elongation of grains in the flow C. they have a higher free energy than D. absolute volume of cement
direction, an increase in dislocation atoms in the undisturbed part of the crystal 47. According to the ACI code, the
density, and over all increase in energy lattice modular ratio, n, of structural
of the metal D. all of the above concrete with a
B. elongation of grains in the flow 41. For a completely corrosion-resistant 28—day ultimate compressive
direction, a decrease in dislocation density, stainless steel, what minimum strength, for, of 3000 is nearest to:
over all decrease in energy of the metal percentage of chromium in the alloy A.7 B. 9 C. 8 D. 10
C. elongation of grains in the flow is required? 48. What are valence electrons?
direction, a decrease in dislocation density, A. 1.1% B. 8.3% C. 3.2% D. A. the outer shell electrons
and over all increase in energy of the metal 11% B. electrons with positive charge
D. shortening of grains in the flow 42. Modulus of resilience is? C. the electrons of the complete
direction, a decrease in dislocation density, A. the same as the modulus of quantum shells
over all decrease in energy of the metal elasticity D. the K-quantum shell electrons
38. Which of the following statement is B. a measure of a materials ability 49. Which of this not a viscoelastic
false? to store strain energy material?
A. the amount or percentage of C. the reciprocal of the modulus of A. Plastic B. rubber C. metal D.
cold work cannot be obtained from elasticity glass
information about change in the area of D. a measure of the deflection of a 50. Which of the following statements is
thickness of a metal member false?
B. the process of applying force to 43. When a metal is cold worked all of A. Both copper and aluminum have a
metal at temperature below the temperature the following generally occur face-centered crystal structure.
of crystallization in order to plastically EXCEPT: B. Both magnesium and zinc have a
deform the metal is called cold-working A. Recystallization temperature hexagonal close-packed crystal structure
C. annealing eliminates most of the decrease. C. Iron can have either a face-centered
defects caused by the cold working of a B. Ductility decreases or a body centered cubic crystal structure.
metal C. Grains become equi-axed D. Both lead and cadmium have a
D. annealing reduces the hardness of a D. Tensile strength increases hexagonal close-packed crystal
metal 44. Which of the following affects most structure.
39. Which of the following statement is of the electrical and thermal 51. Past ME Board Question
false? properties of materials? Cutting lubricant used in drilling
A. there is considerable increase in the A. the atomic weight expressed in reaming, and tapping for brass and
hardness and the strength of a cold-worked grams per gram atom bronze.
metal B. the electrons, particularly the A. Dry
B. cold-working a metal significantly outermost ones B. Soda water
reduces its ductility C. the magnitude of electrical charge of C. Soluble oil
C. cold-working causes a slight the protons D. Turpentine
decrease in the density and electrical D. the weight of the atoms 52. Past ME Board Question
conductivity of a metal 45. Which of the following is not a Type of bolt commonly used in the
D. cold work decreases the yield method of non-destructive testing of construction that is threaded in both
point as well as the strength and steel casting and forgings? ends.
hardness of the metal A. radiography A. Acme threaded bolts
40. Which of the following correctly B. ultrasonic B. Hex bolt
describes atoms located at grain C. magnetic particle C. Square threaded
boundaries? D. chemical analysis D.Stud bolt
A. they are subjected to the same type 46. Compressive strength of fully cured 53. Past ME Board Question
of inter atomic forces that are presented in concrete is most directly related to: Forces that meet a common point
the interior atoms of the crystals A. sand-gravel are called:
96
 A. Co-linear 61. Past ME Board Question B. dies casting
B. Concurrent A furnace used in melting non-ferrous C. injection molding
C. Coplanar metals called. D. shell molding
D. Couple A. crucible furnace 68. Past ME Board Question
54. Past ME Board Question B. cupola furnace The hardness of steel increase if it
Dynamic seals are also known as C. induction furnace contains:
A. Gasket D. tempering furnace A. austenite
B. Packing 62. Past ME Board Question B. copper
C. Seal Which of the following elements when C. pearlite
D. Shield large quantity is harmful to the ferrous D. martensite
55. Past ME Board Question metal? 69. Past ME Board Question
The material for engine radiation is A. aluminum Which one is different from the
usually made of: B. silicon remaining?
A. Admiralty brass C. sulphur A. cyaniding
B. Navy brass D. zinc B. electroplating
C. Silicon brass 63. Past ME Board Question C. flame hardening
D. Yellow brass SAE metal that responds to heat D. nitriding
56. Past ME Board Question treatment: 70. Past ME Board Question
Mirror finish has surfaces fitness of A. SAE 1117 An engineer’s hammer is made of:
__________ rms. B. SAE 1060 A. cast iron
A. 1 B.1 to 3 C. 2 to 5 D. C. SAE 1030 B. B forged steel
2 to 8 D. SAE 1020 C. high speed steel
57. Past Me Board Question 64. Past ME Board Question D. mild steel
Non- metallic material of high An iron in which most of the carbon is 71. Past ME Board Question
melting temperature being used as chemically combined with the iron Ductile fracture is characterized by:
furnace lining is called: called: A. appreciable plastic
A. Dolomite clay bricks A. cast iron deformation prior to
B. Quartz bricks B. gray iron propagation of crack
C. Refractories C. malleable iron B. fragmentation into more than
D. Silica sand D. white iron two pieces
58. Past ME Board Question 65. Past ME Board Question C. negligible deformation
In greater quantity, this element is Material, usually ceramics employed D. rapid rate for crack propagation
harmful to the molten ferrous metal. where resistance to very high 72. Past ME Board Question
A.Aluminum B. oxides C. silicon temperature is required as for furnace A scriber is made of:
D. sulfur linings and metal melting pots called: A. carbon steel
59. Past ME Board Question A. bricks B. cold rolled steel
What is the SAE specification B. clay C. hot rolled steel
number of molybdenum? C. insulator D. tool steel
A. SAE 2XXX D. refractories 73. Past ME Board Question
B. SAE 3XXX 66. Past ME Board Question Knurling is done to:
C. SAE 4XXX Polyesters belong to the group of: A. polish material
D. SAE 5XXX A. phenolics B. roughen material
60. Past ME Board Question B. Teflon C. sharpen the material
Which of the following is not a structural C. thermoplastic plastics D. smooth material
class of steel? D. thermosetting plastics 74. Past ME Board Question
A. high carbon 67. Past ME Board Question Non-metallic materials of high melting
B. high speed steel The process commonly used over temperature used in the construction of
C. low carbon thermo plastic material is: furnaces, crucibles and so forth are
D. tool and die A. cold forming called:
97
 A. ceramics The distance between the crest and the A. K Monel
B. grate base of the thread measured B. Monel
C. insulators perpendicular to the axis. C. inconel
D. refractories A. axis of thread D. inconel
75. Past ME Board Question B. depth of engagement 87. Past ME Board Question
It is a process by which a hot plastic C. depth of thread Trimming is a process associated with?
metal is made to flow into dies by the D. length of engagement A. electroplating
application of sudden blows to the 81. Past ME Board Question B. forging
material. Name of mechanism, which a welding C. machining of metals
A. drop forging operator holds during gas welding and at D. press work
B. extrusion the end of which the gases are burned to 88. Past ME Board Question
C. machine forging perform the various gas welding Foundry crucible is made of?
D. press forging operation. A. German silver
76. Past ME Board Question A. hose B. graphite
It is one in which specimen, supported at B. gage C. lead
both ends as a simple beam, and is C. switch D. mild steel
broken by the impact strength of the D. torch 89. Past ME Board Question
metal. 82. Past ME Board Question A twist drill is specified by
A. charpy test A hand tool used to measure engine A. its diameter and lip angle
B. izod test crank web deflection. B. it shank and diameter
C. Rockwell test A. compound gage C. shank, material and
D. universal test B. dial gage diameter
77. Past ME Board Question C. distortion gage D. shank, material and flute size
An operation to make smaller hole in D. feeler gage 90. Past ME Board Question
exact center for lathe center 83. Past ME Board Question Select the one that is gear finishing
A. broaching It is used for cutting long pieces of process.
B. central drilling metals. A. gear hobbling
C. counter boring A. broaching machine B. gear milling
D. reaming B. planer C. gear shaping
78. Past ME Board Question C. power saw D. gear shaving
It is a process of cleaning the face of D. shaper 91. Past ME Board Question
grinding wheel by means of a dresser for 84. Past ME Board Question Broaching operation is generally used in
removing the glazing and loading of It is used to true and align machine automobile industry as:
wheel and to improve the cutting action tools, fixtures and works. A. it is a mass production machine
of a wheel. A. dial gage B. it is an automatic machine
A. dressing B. dial indicator C. operation is completed in one
B. lapping C. feeler gage stroke
C. polishing D. radial indicator D. semi-skilled operators can
D. truing 85. Past ME Board Question be employed
79. Past ME Board Question In cranes and other hoisting equipment 92. Which statement about area
A ____________ consist of a slide and a operating rules, how many whistle moment of inertia is false?
swivel vise mounted on the compound signals are required to lower the boom? A. I = ∫ d² ( dA )
rest in place of the toll post. A. Five short blasts B. the area moment of inertia
A. grinding attachment B. Two short blasts arises whenever the magnitude
B. milling attachment C. Three short blasts of the surface forces varies
C. reaming attachment D. Four short blasts linearly with distance
D. relieving attachment 86. Past ME Board Question C. the moment of inertia of a large
80. Past ME Board Question Which of the following material has 66% area is equal to the summation
nickel, 29% copper and 3% aluminum?
98
 of the inertia of the smaller A. air entrained is recommended class of materials known as
areas within the large area. when concrete is severe frost glasses.
D. the area closest to the axis action D. Most metals are strong, ductile, and
of interest is the most B. with air entrainment, the malleable. In general, they are
significant quantity of water to produce a heavier than most other substances.
93. Which of the following affects most given consistency (slump) is 3. Which of the following is not a
of the electrical and thermal reduced viscoelastic material?
properties of materials? C. with air entrainment, the A. Plastic
A. The atomic weight expressed in quantity of water to produce a B. Rubber
grams per gram atom. specified 28 day compressive C. Metal
B. the electrons, particularly strength is reduced D. Glass
the outermost ones D. air entrainment reduces 4. In molecules of the same composition,
C. the magnitude of electrical resistance to the freeze-thaw what are variations of atomic
charge of the protons that occurs when salt is used arrangements known as?
D. the weight of the atoms to melt ice or snow A. Polymers
94. Which of the following is not a 100. In the design of a reinforced B. Monomers
method of non destructive testing of concrete structure, tensile strength C. Isomers
steel castings and forgings? of the concrete is normally: D. Crystal system
A. radiography A. assumed to be 1/10 of the 28- 5. What is the atomic packing factor for a
B. ultrasonic day compressive strength simple cubic crystal?
C. magnetic particle B. determined by beam test A. 0.48
D. chemical analysis C. neglected B. 0.52
95. compressive strength of fully cured D. assumed to be 200 psi C. 0.75
concrete is most directly related to: D. 0.58
A. sand-gravel 6. Which of the following statements is
B. aggregate gradation false?
C. water-cement ratio A. Both copper and aluminum have a
D. absolute volume of cement ELEMENTS 20 face-centered crystal structures.
96. According to the ACI code, the 1. All of the following groups of plastics are B. Both magnesium and zinc have a
modular ratio, n, of structural thermoplastic, EXCEPT: hexagonal close-packed crystal
concrete with a 28- day ultimate A. Polyvinylchloride (PVC) and polyvinyl structure.
compressive strength, fc, of 3000 is acetate C. Iron can have either a face-centered
nearest to: B. Polyethylene, polypropylene, and or a body-centered cubic crystal
A. 7 B. 6 C. 9 D. 10 polysterene structure.
97. What are valence electrons? C. Tetrafluoroethylene (Teflon, and D. Both lead and cadmium have a
A. the outer shell electrons other fluorocarbons) hexagonal close-packed crystal
B. electrons with positive charge D. Phenolics, melamine and epoxy structure.
C. the electrons of the complete 2. Which of the following statements is 7. Which crystal structure possesses the
quantum shells false? highest number of close-packed planes
D. the K- quantum shell electrons A. Ceramics are inorganic-nonmetallic and close-packed direction?
98. What is the strong bond between solids that are processed or used at A. Simple cubic
hydrogen atoms known as? high temperature. B. Face-centered cubic
A. the ionic bond B. Metals are chemical elements that C. Body-centered
B. the metallic bond form substances that are opaque, D. Close-packed hexagonal
C. ionic and metallic bond lustrous, and good conductors of 8. What are most common slip planes for
D. the covalent bond heat and electricity. face-centered cubic and body-centered
99. all of the following statements about C. Oxides, carbides, and nitrides cubic structures, respectively?
air entrained concrete are correct, are considered to be within the A. Face-centered: (111), body-
EXCEPT: centered: (110)
99
 B. Face-centered: (100), body-centered: C. Indeterminate B. Unsupported length to its maximum
(110) D. Zero radius of gyration
C. Face-centered: (110), body-centered: 15. The mass moment of inertia of a cylinder C. Length to its moment of inertia
(111) about its central axis perpendicular to a D. Unsupported length to its least
D. Face-centered: (111), body-centered: circular cross section is: radius of gyration
(100) A. Directly proportional to its radius 22. The relationship between the extension
9. Entrance losses between tank and pipe B. Independent of its radius of a spring and the force required to
or losses through elbows, fittings and C. Directly proportional to its produce the extension is:
valves are generally expressed as length A. F= ma
functions of: D. Independent of its length B. F= µN
A. Kinetic energy 16. How many independent properties are C. F= mv²/ R
B. Friction factor required to completely fix the D. F= kx
C. Pipe diameter equilibrium state of a pure gaseous 23. The linear portion of the stress-strain
D. Volume flow rate compound? diagram of steel is known as the:
10. With regard to corrosion of metals, A. 0 A. Modulus of elongation
passivation is the process that: B. 2 B. Plastic range
A. Intensifies deterioration temporarily C. 1 C. Irreversible range
B. Inhibits further deterioration D. 3 D. Elastic range
C. Changes the composition of the 17. The moment of inertia of any plane 24. Principal stresses occur on those planes:
metal figure can be expressed in units of A. Where the shearing stress is
D. Alter the grain size of the metal length to the: zero
11. How are lines of constant pressure in a A. First power B. Which are 45 degrees apart
fluid related to the force field? B. Second power C. Where the shearing is a maximum
A. They are parallel to the force field. C. Third power D. Which are subjected only to tension
B. They are perpendicular to the D. Fourth power 25. The ratio of the moment inertia of the
force field. 18. The vector which represents the sum of cross section of a beam to the section
C. They are at 45° angles to the force a group of force vectors is called the: modulus is:
field. A. Magnitude A. Equal to the radius of gyration
D. They are perpendicular only to the B. Resultant B. Equal to the area of the cross
force of gravity. C. Sum section
12. What are the units of Reynolds number D. Phase angle C. A measure of distance
of pipe flow? 19. Which of the following is not a vector D. Multiplied by the bending moment to
A. m/s quantity? determine the stress
B. lbm/ft-sec² A. Velocity 26. When an air entertainment agent is
C. ft²/sec B. Speed introduced into a concrete mix:
D. none of the above C. Acceleration A. The strength will increase
13. For fully developed laminar flow of fluids D. Displacement B. The strength will decrease
through pipes, the average velocity is 20. The stress in an elastic material is: C. The strength will not be affected
what fraction of the maximum velocity in A. Inversely proportional to the D. The water/ cement ratio must be
the pipe? material’s yield strength reduced from 10-15%
A. 1/8 B. Inversely proportional to the force 27. Structural steel elements subjected to
B. 1/2 acting torsion develop:
C. 1/4 C. Proportional to the A. Tensile stress
D. 3/4 displacement of the material B. Compressive stress
14. For a system to be n equilibrium, the acted upon by the force C. Shearing stress
sum of the external forces acting on the D. Inversely proportional to the strain D. Bending stress
system must be: 21. The “SLENDERNESS RATIO” of a column 28. The deflection of a beam is:
A. Equal to unity is generally defined as the ratio of its: A. Directly proportional to the modulus
B. A maximum A. Length to its minimum width of elasticity and moment of inertia
100
 function of spring? C. axle transmission shafting is that the
A. Absorbs energy D. washer deflection should not exceed
B. source of potential energy 49. For machineries shop the _________ of length between
C. measure weight permissible deflection is supports.
D. measure thickness approximately: A. 0.01 in. per foot
42. Which of the following is the type of A. 0.02in/ft B. 0.08 in. per foot
spring made in the form of dished B. 0.03in/ft C. 0.02 in. per foot
washer? C. 0.01in/ft D. 0.05 in. per foot
A. Air spring D. 0.05in/ft 56. For transmission shafts the allowable
B. believe spring 50. For shafts, the shear due to bending deflection is 1 degree in a length of
C. volute spring is a maximum at the neutral plane __________ diameters.
D. motor spring where the normal stress is: A. 20
43. What is the type of the failure due to A. Minimum B. 25
instability? B. Constant C. 30
A. Buckling C. maximum also D. 40
B. slenderness ratio D. zero 57. What is the limiting torsional
C. Stability 51. The minimum value of numerical deflection for machinery shafts, if
D. Euler’s failure combined shock and fatigue factor the criteria of limiting torsional
44. What type of formula that is best to be applied in every case to the deflection vary from 0.08˚ per foot
applied to a very slender column? computed bending moment of the of length?
A. Column formula shaft is: A. 1˚
B. slenderness formulas A. 2.0 B. 2.5˚
C. moment formulas B. 1.75 C. 2˚
D. Euler formula C. 1.5 D. 3.5˚
45. If two principal stresses is zero, the D. 1.3 58. Bevel gears of sizes 5 inches to 15
state of stress is: inches should not be lift or depress
78

more than__________, as Gleason B. Shaft and babbit C. Light

statement. C. Clearance and fitted D. All of these
A. 0.004 D. Shaft and cylinder 73. Which of the following considers the
B. 0.003 66. When the line of action of the load 300 series of bearing?
C. 0.002 bisects the arc of partial bearing, the A. Medium
 D. 0.001 bearing said to be: B. Heavy
59. What type of key that allows the hub A. Eccentrically loaded C. Light
to move along the shaft but prevents B. Fully loaded D. All of these
the rotation of the shaft? C. Centrally loaded 74. A type of roller bearing in which the
A. Woodruff key D. Partially loaded balls are assembled by the eccentric
B. Feather key 67. What is the difference in radii of the displacement of the inner ring.
C. Gibbs key bearing and Journal? A. shallow groove ball bearing
D. Square key A. Even clearance B. filling-slot ball bearing
60. What is the other name for Kennedy B. Clearance ratio C. self-aligning ball bearing
key? C. Odd clearance D. deep-groove ball bearing
A. Tangential key D. Radial clearance 75. Which of the following is not a type
B. Woodruff key 68. When radii of both the bearing and of ball bearing?
C. Saddle key the journal are the same, then the A. shallow groove ball bearing
D. Roll pin bearing is said to be: B. filling-slot ball bearing
61. What type of fits used for involute A. Fitted bearing C. self-aligning ball bearing
spline? B. Clearance bearing D. deep-groove ball bearing
A. Close fit C. Full bearing 76. Which of the following is the
B. Press fit D. Ambiguous bearing approximate density of the leather
C. sliding fit 69. What is the line that passes through belt?
D. All of these the centers of the bearing and the A. 0.035 lb/in3
62. It is used for permanent fits and journal? B. 0.0135 lb/in3
similar to involute splines except A. Line of action C. 0.025 lb/in3
that the pressure angle is 14.5˚. B. Line of centers D. 0.0465 lb/in3
A. Separation load C. Line of symmetry 77. Which of the following is the
B. Splines shaft D. Tangent line approximate density of a fat rubber
C. Stub serrations 70. Which of the following is considered belt?
D. Involute serrations advantageous for bearing materials? A. 0.055 lb/in3
63. It is used in a coupling or in addition A. Conformability B. 0.0135 lb/in3
to another coupling where, in case of B. Compatibility C. 0. 045 lb/in3
overload, there is danger of injury to C. Embed ability D. 0.0465 lb/in3
machine or to material in process. D. All of these 78. A toothed wheel whose tooth
A. Shear pin 71. A conclusion repeatedly verified by elements are straight and parallel to
B. Flange coupling experiment is that the smoother the shaft axis or used to transmit
C. Involute serrations surface: motion and power between parallel
D. King pin A. Has the greater load shafts.
64. What is the maximum shaft angle for capacity of the bearing A. Helical gear
a single Hooke’s coupling? B. Has the lesser capacity of the B. Spur gear
A. 10˚ bearing C. Worm gear
B. 17 C. Has constant load D. Bevel gear
C. 15˚ D. None of these 79. The breaking strength of oak-tanned
D. 20˚ 72. Which of the following considers the beltings varies from 3 to more than:
65. What are the two principal parts of a 200 series of bearing? A. 5 ksi
Journal Bearing? A. Heavy B. 6 ksi
A. Bearing and journal B. Medium C. 7 ksi
79
 D. 9 ksi A. 21 masses and inversely proportional to
80. Experience suggests that the most B. 24 distance square between their
economical designs are obtained for C. 12 centers.
a belt speed of: D. 14 A. Hooke’s law
A. 6000 to 7500 fpm 88. The resultant of a pair of equal B. Law of gravitation
B. 3000cto 5000 fpm forces but opposite in direction is: C. Law of motion
C. 3500 to 4700 fpm A. Concurrent D. Newton’s law
D. 5000 to 1000 fpm B. Couple 94. Any object thrown upward will return
81. The tension in the belt due to C. Non-concurrent to earth with the magnitude of the
centrifugal force increasing rapidly D. Resultant terminal velocity equal to:
above about: 89. The helical and herringbone gear A. 50% of the initial velocity
A. 2500 fpm teeth cut after heat treatment B. 80% of the initial velocity
B. 3000 fpm should have a hardness in the range C. About 90% of the initial velocity
C. 35000 fpm of 210/300BHN. The pinion gear D. The initial velocity
D. 4000 fpm teeth hardness on the other hand 95. Flat belt that is too tight will induce
82. For leather belts, recommended ideally/normally should be at strain on the bearing and belt
speed is: __________ BHN. __________.
A. 6000 to 7000 fpm A. 250/320 A. Life will be shortened
B. 5000 to 6000 fpm B. 350/380 B. Result to uneconomical
C. 7000 to 8000 fpm C. 400 operation
D. 4500 to 5600 fpm D. 340/350 C. Suffer/shatter
83. The recommended initial tension of 90. As a rule, the center distance D. Will be sheared/cut
the belt is: between sprockets should not be 96. The resulting cross-sectional area of
A. 75 lb/in of width less than __________ times the the tensile test specimen divided by
B. 73 lb/in of width diameter of the bigger sprocket and the specimen original area is called:
C. 71 lb/in of width not less than 30 times the pitch nor A. Charpy test
D. 80 lb/in of width more than about 50 times to pitch. B. % elongation
84. Two shafts at right angles to each A. 1.5 C. Impact test
other may be connected by what B. 2 D. Izod test
arrangement? C. 2.5 97. SAE 51XXX belongs to the __________
A. Half turn D. 3 steel family.
B. Quarter turn 91. A single force which produces the A. Carbon
C. ¾ turn same effect upon a mass as two or B. Chromium
D. One turn several forces acting together is C. Manganese
85. The minimum number of teeth on a called: D. Nickel
smaller sprocket for low speed is: A. Components 98. In itself, it is a lubricant and usually
A. 12 B. Composition forces one of the important elements in
B. 21 C. Resolution forces casting non-ferrous metals like
C. 17 D. Resultant bronze, for example:
D. 14 92. All forces in the same plane are A. Antimony
86. The minimum number of teeth on a called: B. Babbit
smaller sprocket for moderate speed A. Coplanar C. Lead
is: B. Couple D. Zinc
A. 17 C. Parallel 99. Gasket material, which should avoid
B. 21 D. Resultant hot liquid/steam applications.
C. 12 93. Which of the following laws which A. Asbestos fiber
D. 14 states that the force of attraction B. Nylon fiber
 87. The minimum number of teeth on a between two bodies is directly C. Rubberized
smaller sprocket for high speed is: proportional to the product of their D. Wool
80

100. The same material properties all B. relative strength A. Negative fits of metals
over / direction and at any particular C. performance factor B. interference of metal
point in a structural member is: D. joint efficiency C. positive fits of the metal
A. Heterogeneous 7. What is the usual factor of safety for D. intangible fits
B. Homogenous a pressure vessel? 14. What is the direction of the
C. Isentropic A. 4 predominant surface pattern?
D. Isotropic B. 1.5 A. Smoothness
Elements 16 C. 3 B. Waviness
1. For ordinary steel, the modulus of D. 5 C. Lay
elasticity usually falls between 8. It is the permissible variation of the D. roughness
__________ million pounds. size. 15. It is the irregularities of departures
A. 20 to 30 A. Tolerance from the nominal surface of greater
B. 35 to 45 B. limit spacing than roughness?
C. 20 to 35 C. fits A. Waviness
D. 25 to 30 D. none of these B. Roughness
2. The modulus of elastic for metals in 9. Considering that there is no fit, what C. Lay
compression is usually taken as that is the permissible liberal tolerance in D. smoothness
in: machining work? 16. It is the surface finish of micrometer
A. Tension A. ±0.010 in rms.
B. Bearing B. ±0.090 A. 1
C. yield C. ±0.02 B. 2
D. ultimate D. ±0.050 C. 3
3. Which of the following is the ratio of 10. Which of the following is the D. 4
moment and stress? tolerance where the size of a part 17. Which of the following gears has the
A. Strain may be larger only, or smaller only, simplest type of teeth?
B. section modulus than the given dimension? A. Helical gears
C. contraction A. Unilateral B. spur gears
D. passions ratio B. Lateral C. bevel gears
4. What is the flexural stress when of a C. Bilateral D. worm gears
D. none of these 18. In gears, an imaginary circle on
 symmetrically cross section beam
when the vertical shear is 11. A tolerance where the size of the which the lever arm is based in;
maximum? part is permitted to be either larger A. Base circle
A. Infinity or smaller than the given dimension. B. pitch circle
B. Zero A. Unilateral C. addendum circle
C. Maximum B. Lateral D. clearance circle
D. minimum C. Bilateral 19. It is the circle tangent to the
5. The riveted joints in ASME Code D. none of these addendum of the meshing gears.
have as design surface compressive 12. Which of the following is the basis A. Clearance circle
stress __________ higher than the for ASA fits? B. base circle
design tensile stress. A. Basic number system C. Addendum circle
A. 70% B. basic hole system D. pitch circle
B. 60% C. basic size system 20. The distance from a point on one
C. 35% D. unit system gear to the corresponding point
D. 50% 13. When the hole is smaller than the measured along the base circle.
6. What is the ratio of the minimum shaft, it will take force or pressure to A. Normal pitch
strength of joint to the strength of put the cold parts together. In such B. circular pitch
solid joint in the pressure vessel? case the allowance is negative. C. axial pitch
A. Efficiency Which of the following terms is D. diametral pitch
appropriate for such allowance?
81

21. A line passing through the pitch 28. It is a type of bolt threaded on both A. Helical spring wire B. stainless
point that is tangent to both base ends and can bbe used where a steel
circles of a gear is: through bolt impossible. C. hard drawn wire spring D.
A. Pressure line A. Coupling bolt copper
B. perpendicular line B. carriage bolt 38. What is the hard drawn (80%
C. tangent line C. stud bolt reduction) spring wire made of high
D. center line D. machine bolt carbon steel?
22. Which of the following is the contact 29. Which of the following is not a type A. Oil tempered wire B. music
ratio for a good gear design? of bolt? wire
A. 1.5:1 A. Stud bolt B. Steel bolt C. tension wire D. chromium wire
B. 1:1.3 C. machine bolt D. coupling bolt 39. Which of the following wires with
C. 1:3 30. It is a locking device that is used to good quality and is used for impact
D. 1.2:2 maintain pressure between threads loading?
 Machine Design Examination 10

1. The total frictional energy that is stored in the brake parts principally in the drum or disk is approximately :
A. 56% up B. 90% up C. 86% up D. 75% up
2. The brake capacity to absorb energy is known as :
A. Energy B. Power C. Resistance brake D. Braking torque
3. A kind of braking systems such that if the band wraps partly around the breaking drum, and the braking action is
obtained by pulling the band tight into the wheel.
A. Block brake B. Clutch C. Band rake D. Centrifugal brake
4. Which of the following clutches that has a disadvantage of heavier rotating masses.
A. Multiple disc clutch B. Cone clutch C. Disc clutch D. Twin clutching
5. Which of the following welds have been considered as resistance weld which is usually round in the same dorm
as the electrodes that press the sheets together.
A. Edge joints B. Spot welds C. CIG welds D. TIG welds
6. A welding which consists of short lengths (2-3 in. long) of welds with space between as 6 inches on centers.
A. Intermittent weld B. Spot weld C. MIG weld D. TIG weld
7. A welding operation that use hot flame and metal rod
A. Gas welding B. Arc welding C. Resistance welding D. Automatic welding
8. The arc is covered with a welding composition, and bare electrode wire is fed automatically.
A. Resistance welding B. Induction welding C. Submerged welding D. Spot welding
9. What is the recommended coefficient of fluctuation of flywheels for punching, shearing, pressing machine is :
A. 0.005 - 0.1 B. 0.002 - 0.07 C. 0.03 - 0.05 D. 0.01 - 0.03
10. The part of machine that absorbs the energy delivered by a sharp force or blow.
A. Spring B. Anvil C. Brakes D. Flywheel
11. It is the friction of wheel inclination from the vertical position.
A. Camber B. Toe-in C. Caster D. King pin inclination
12. Which of the following is a machine which takes large quantities of raw or finished materials and binds them
with a rope or metal straps or wires into a large package.
A. Bacher B. Bending machine C. Baler D. Automatic screw machine
13. It is grasping of an outside workpiece in a chunk or a jawed device in a lathe.
A. Clucking B. Clamping C. Chucking D. Clamshelling
14. Which of the following is a mechanical linkage or mechanism that can turn about a center or mechanism that
can turn about a center or rotation.
A. Oscillation B. Crack C. Coupler D. Drag link
15. What type of compound screw which produces a motion equal to the difference in motion between the two
component screws?
A. Machine screw B. Tanden screw C. Differential screw D. Variable screw
16. Which of the following bolts provided with a hole at one end instead of usual head?
A. Stud bolt B. Eye bolt C. Machine bolt D. Variable screw
17. What operation generally carried out to divide the parent coiled sheet into narrower coils?
A. Slotting B. Squeezing C. Squaring D. Slitting
18. It the process used to form shallow, round, raised recessed troughs of uniform width in a straight curved or
circular form.
A. Hemming B. Beading C. Embossing D. Budging
19. The process of removing excess metal from the edge of a strip to make it suitable for drawing without wrinkling
or to obtain final complicated shape which was not directly possible by blanking.
A. Lancing B. Slugging C. Notching D. Trimming
20. Which of the following is the processes of removing coarse scratches or tool marks?
A. Polishing B. Buffing C. Honing D. Lapping
21. Which of the following ropes is galvanized and consists of 6 strands, 7 wires each, and a hemp core?
A. Reverse Lay Rope B. Guy Rope C. Lang Lay Rope D. Regular Rope
22. It is a large lathe used for turning and boring cannons.
A. Gun lathe B. Engine lathe C. Cannon lathe D. Turret lathe
23. What device on a lathe machine used for carrying the revolving spindle?
A. Head stock B. Header C. Head suction D. None of these
24. The recommended means of supporting the chuck during the mounting procedure to the lathe spindle is to use:
A. Crane B. Jack C. Overhead D. Ratcher
25. Too much _______ in a flat belt operation tend to cause excessive wear slippage and may burn tw belt.
A. Play B. Slack C. Stiffness D. Tightness
26. It is a chromium steel tape in AISI-SAE designation.
A. 10XX B. 25XX C. 50XX D. 40XX
27. Which of the following is not recommended for use in a driving speed exceeding 2000 ft/min.?
A. Flat leather belt B. Herringbone gear C. Silent sprocket D. V-Belt
28. It is low cost bearing used worldwide for automobile or low horsepower motor applications. It is made of thin
coating of over flat metal strip.
A. Babbit B. Cadmium brass C. Lead D. Thin
29. The most common useful tools to measure diameter in machine shop operation but normally and always used
with steel scale for measurement.
A. Caliper B. Micrometer C. Protractor D. Vernier
30. In impact force introduced to cause the metal to flow in a shaped mold according to the shape to dies made.
A. Hardness B. Spinning C. Protractor D. Toughness
31. Find the polar section modulus of a steel shafting with "D" as the diameter.
A. πD³/16 πD³/32 C. πD²/32 D. πD²/16
32. Forces of equal in magnitude but opposite in direction are parallel called:
A. Acceleration B. Coplanar C. Couple D. Non-coplanar
33. Composition of force is at the _______ of two or more forces.
A. Combination B. Opposition C. Resultant D. Summary
34. Circular pitch is measured along the __________ in the circular gear.
A. Circle B. Line of action C. Pitch center D. Pitch diameter
35. Stiffness is the material's ability to _______ deformation under stress.
A. Non-planar B. Planar C. Resist D. Stafer
36. It imparts the ductility, toughness, and plasticity of steel.
A. Annealing B. Materializing C. Quenching D. Tempering
37. Which of the following types of wood is usually used in making wood pattern in the foundry?
A. Dried sap wood B. Hard wood C. Kiln dried wood D. Scrap wood
38. The progressive change in position of _________ is called motion.
A. Component B. Couple C. Link D. Mass
39. Strain or __________ is a change in geometry / shape of the body due to action of a force on it.
A. Bending stress B. Deformation C. Shear stress D. Stress
40. The effective face width of a helical gear divided by the axial pitch. This is sometimes called face overlap.
A. Angle overlap B. Axial overlap C. Contact overlap D. Helical overlap
41. For mass production of casting it is generally cheaper to use _______ pattern for longer life.
A. Aluminum B. Brass C. Metal D. Wooden
42. It is a plane between mating teeth or the amount of which a tooth space exceed the thickness of an engaging
tooth is called.
A. Backlash B. Clearance C. Pitting D. Space
43. The forces that can be combined or called _________.
A. Different B. Helical C. Opposite D. Parallel
44. Plane of rotation is defined as plane perpendicular to a:
A. Gear axis B. Gear ratio C. Normal plane D. Pitch diameter
45. Which of the following can be a concurrent?
A. Collinear B. Couple C. Parallel D. All of these
46. Cutting lubricant used in drilling reaming, and tapping for brass and bronze.
A. Dry B. Soda water C. Soluble oil D. Turpentine
47. The general accepted limit of diamond wheel speed should be in the range of ______ fpm.
A. 1000/2000 B. 2500/3500 C. 3000/4000 D. 5000/6000
48. Prepared tool bit will now resist of face, nose and:
A. Cutting tool B. Shank C. Sharp tool D. Tool edge
49. This is an alloy in bronze casting that assists lubrication and in itself a lubricant.
A. Lead B. Manganese C. Phosphorus D. Tin
50. For longer sprocket chain life the speed range of ________ fpm is recommended.
A. 1200 - 1400 B. 1500 - 1600 C. 1800 - 2000 D. 2000 - 2100
51. All stainless steel type in SAE designation except :
A. 92XX B. 300XX C. 304XX D. 515XX
52. It is metal with good oxidation and corrosion resistance. This has also good electrical magnetic properties.
A. Aluminum B. Copper C. Nickel D. Titanium
53. It is a molybdenum steel-tape in AISI-SAE designation
A. 44 XX B. 45 XX C. 50 XX D. 51 XX
54. Cutting lubricants used in drilling, reaming and tapping for hard spots in cast iron.
A. Dry B. Kerosene C. Soda water D. Turpentine
55. In a ________ design, the lead of a single thread is equal to the pitch.
A. Bevel gear B. Bolt C. Helical gear D. Hypiod gear
56. A type of chisel used in cutting of keyways, square corners or slots.
A. Cape B. Diamond head C. Flat D. Round
57. The maximum recommended ideal number of teeth to use for bigger sprocket is:
A. 120 B. 127 C. 132 D. 143
58. A bolt for general application that posses a stronger threaded is a type of _____ screw.
A. BUN B. UNC C. UNEF D. WOOD
59. Maximum moment formula for beam simply supported at both ends and subject to a load uniformly distributed
over its length.
A. wL/2 B. wL²/8 C. wL²/16 D. wL/12
60. What is the special bearing used with high deflection?
A. Babbitt B. Ball C. Roller D. Self aligning
61. Which of the following bearing is used for low load and less expensive production.
A. Babbitt B. Ball bearing C. Roller bearing D. Self aligning
62. The lateral strain in axial tension members can be calculated by:
A. Deformation B. Hooke's law C. Poisson's ratio D. Willan's line
63. It is abundantly used worldwide as coating on top of the plate of automobiles.
A. Babbitt B. Lead C. Manganese D. Tin
64. A liquid metal at room temperature.
A. Aluminum B. Mercury C. Zinc D. Zirconium
65. It is a steel with SAE specification 13XX.
A. Chromium B. Manganese C. Molybdenum D. Nickel
66. Property, which enables a material to be drawn into a wire.
A. Ductility B. Elasticity C. Plasticity D. Utility
67. The stress that causes the material to shorten.
A. Bearing B. Compressive C. Shear D. Tensile
68. The most known lubricants being utilized in whatever category of load and speed are oil, air, grease and dry
lubricants like:
A. Bronze B. Graphite C. Lead D. Silicon
69. It is a gear commonly used in parallel shaft transmission especially when a smooth continuous action is essential
as in high speed drives up to 12,000 fpm.
A. Bevel gear B. Helical gear C. Herringbone gear D. Spur gear
70. The reciprocal of a diametral pitch or the ratio of the pitch diameter to the number of teeth.
A. Clearance B. Involute C. Lead D. Module
71. What tool(s) will be used in making wood pattern in the foundry shop?
A. Band saw B. Drill machine C. Hammer D. Saw and chisel
72. Type of bolt commonly used in the construction that is threaded in both ends.
A. Acme threaded bolts B. Hex bolt C. Square threaded D. Stud bolt
73. Ability of a material to absorb strain energy and will return to its original state.
A. Creep B. Fatigue strength C. Hardness D. Resilience
74. The ratio of lateral strain to longitudinal strain.
A. Deformation B. Modulus of elasticity C. Poisson's ratio D. Willan's line
75. Basic size is the same as design size if there is no:
A. Allowance B. Clearance C. Limits D. Tolerance
76. Forces that meet at a common point are called :
A. Co-linear B. Concurrent C. Coplanar D. Couple
77. A pair of equal and opposite (not collinear) forces that tend to cause a rotation of a body.
A. Centroids B. Couple C. Equilibrium D. Vector
78. Stress that resist being pulled apart.
A. Compressive B. Shear C. Tensile D. Torsional
79. What is the other term applied to dynamic seals?
A. Gasket B. Packing C. Seal D. Shield
80. Which type of hardening will work to some extent in all metals?
A. Annealing B. Austenitizing C. Martemping D. Work hardening
81. What do impact tests determine?
A. Creep strength B. Hardness C. Toughness D. Yield strength
82. Sound travels fastest in:
A. Air at 0℉ and 1 atmosphere C. Air at 0℉ and 0 lbf/in²
B. Air at 70℉ and 1 atmosphere D. Steel at 70℉
83. The yield strength of common yellow brass (70% Cu, 30%Zn) can be increased by:
A. Annealing B. Chill casting C. Cold working D. Heat treatment
84. How do you call the forces not lie on the same plane?
A. Component B. Composition of forces C. Non-coplanar D. Resolution
85. The distance between the center of oscillation and the point of suspension is called :
A. Fix axis B. Center of gravity C. Center of percussion D. Radius of oscillation
86. If the velocity is variable and regular / constantly increasing the rate of change is called :
A. Acceleration B. Constant work C. Moment D. Motion
87. The kinematics chain is which one link is considered fixed for the purpose of analysis but motion is possible in
other links.
A. Belting B. Frame C. Mechanism D. Sprocket chain
88. All forces in the same plane is called :
A. Coplanar B. Couple C. Parallel D. Resultant
89. The ________ is one of the rigid members / bodies joined together to form a kinematic chain.
A. Coplanar B. Frame C. Link D. Machine
90. Te resultant of a pair of equal forces but opposite in direction is called ___________.
A. Concurrent B. Couple C. Non-concurrent D. Resultant
91. The helical and herringbone gear teeth cut after heat treatment should have a hardness in the range of
210/300BHN. The pinion gear teeth hardness on the other hand, ideally /normally should be at ________ BHN.
A. 250/320 B. 350/380 C. 400/345 D. 340/350
92. As a rule the center to center distance between sprocket should not be less than _____ times the diameter of
the bigger sprocket and not less than 30 times the pitch nor more than about 50 times to pitch.
A. 1.5 B. 2 C. 2.5 D. 3
93. What is the carbon content range of SAE 4140 chrome-moly steel after heat treatment?
A. 0.30/0.45 B. 0.38/0.43 C. 0.38/0.45 D. 0.30/0.50
94. Gears are manufactured usually in the following processes : milling, generating, shaving, grindinga and:
A. Blanking B. Dinking C. Heat treatment D. Molding
95. Flat belt that is too tight will induce strain on the bearing and belt ________.
A. Life wil be shortened C. Suffer/shatter
B. Result to uneconomical operation D. Will be sheared /cut
96. The resulting cross-sectional area of the tensile test specimen divided by the specimen original area is called :
A. Charpy test B. % elongation C. Impact test D. Izod test
97. SAE 51XXX belongs to the ______ steel family.
A. Carbon B. Chromium C. Manganese D. Nickel
98. Which of the following gasket material which should avoid hot liquid /steam applications?
A. Asbestos fiber B. Nylon fiber C. Rubberized D. Wool
99. Which of the following that describes the same material properties all over /direction and at any particular point
in a structure member?
A. Heterogeneous B. Homogeneous C. Isentropic D. Isotropic
100. Arc produced by two tungsten electrodes into which a jet of hydrogen is directed .
A. Atomic hydrogen welding C. Hydrogen bomb
B. Electro-beam welding D. Hydrogen lancing
ELEMENTS IN MACHINE DESIGN (J.T.) – MODULE 6 10. In designing the spoke or wheel arm of a flywheel, it is
ideal to consider that the cross-sectional area of the
1. For acceptable ideal range of tightness which may result spoke at rim side should not be less than ___ of the cross
from the application of specific combination of area at the hub side.
allowances and tolerances: a. 80%
a. Allowance limit b. 1/3
b. Tolerance limit c. 90%
c. Interference d. 3/8
d. Fit 11. The cutting up to 70% is best for drilling extremely hard
2. A radian is equal to _____. metals and for soft materials ___ degrees may be
a. 57.02o applied.
b. 57.706o a. 60
c. 57.296o b. 45
d. 57.190o c. 40
3. A material having a high electrical resistance and should d. 48
not be used for conductor of electric current. 12. Single force which produces the same effect upon a mass
a. Alloyed magnesium replacing two or more forces acting together is called:
b. Silicon base alloy a. Vector
c. Nickel b. Resultant
d. Zinc c. Components of forces
4. The product of the mass and the linear velocity of the d. Resolution
body: 13. ____ is the process necessary to reduce the brittleness
a. Linear impulse in alloy steel.
b. Couple a. Martempering
c. Linear momentum b. Carburizing
d. Vector c. Normalizing
5. The recommended center distance of sprockets should d. Tempering
not less than ____ times the diameter of bigger sprocket. 14. The welded joints permit placing the added metal exactly
a. 1.75 where needed and produce an integral structure which
b. 2 can develop ____% efficiency on any thickness section
c. 1 ½ especially for mild metal materials.
d. 2 ¼ a. 95%
6. The absolute viscosity of the fluid divided by its density b. 85%
expressed in the same terms of units is also called ____. c. 100%
a. Centistokes d. 90%
b. Kinematic viscosity 15. The lack of backlash in a spur gear design/operation may
c. Petroff’s equation result to ____.
d. Light petroleum oil a. Overloading
7. It improves red hardness of steel: b. Jamming
a. Silicon c. All of these
b. Lead d. Overheating
c. Cobalt 16. ____ forces means when their lines of action can be
d. Manganese extended to meet to one point.
8. It is required that pipes bigger than ___ mm should not a. Concurrent
be screwed but flanged. b. Centroids
a. 76.2 c. Collinear
b. 63.5 d. Resultants
c. 2 ½ inch 17. Percentage of cut on the return stroke of hacksaw blade
d. 68.5 is ___.
9. Formed by the intersection by the adjacent flanks of a. 2%
adjacent threads when extended is called. b. 3%
a. Crest apex c. 1%
b. All of these d. 0%
c. Sharp root 18. Imaginary formed by the intersection of the flanks of a
d. Sharp crest thread when extended is called ___.
a. Sharp crest

1
 b. Sharp root a. Mn Hadfield steel
c. Root apex b. Chrome-moly steel
d. All of these c. Stainless steel
19. Permissible variation of the manufactured/machined d. High chrome steel
dimension is called: 29. A rule of thumb, the speed limit of flywheel rim, speed
a. Intolerable fits should be 6000 fpm for cast iron material and for cast
b. Deviation steel flywheel rim at ____ fpm.
c. Allowance a. 3050
d. Tolerance b. 4500
20. Molybdenum-chromium-nickel steel designation: c. 7000
a. SAE 48xx d. 10000
b. SAE 43xx 30. The distance between rivet centers nearest each other in
c. SAE 56xx adjacent rows is called ____.
d. SAE 46xx a. Pitch
21. ____ is also called strain hardening. b. Back pitch
a. Work hardening c. Margin
b. Quenching d. Diagonal pitch
c. Annealing 31. The purpose of lubrication is mentioned EXCEPT.
d. Normalizing a. To lighten the load
22. A major alloy in tool steel. b. Prevent corrosion/adhesion
a. Cr c. Prevent adhesion
b. FeN d. Cool the moving elements
c. Cobalt 32. The process of peening the joint portion immediately
d. Mn after the welding greatly improves the fusion structures,
23. Distance measured perpendicular to the axis between avoids possible cracking, avoids possible distorsion, etc.
the cress of the thread and the root of its mating thread Peening can also ___ process at the same time.
in a thread assembly of screws. a. Tempering
a. Tolerance class b. Martempering
b. Crest truncation c. Normalizing
c. Crest clearance d. Annealing
d. Tolerance limit 33. Resultant of two or more components forces is also
24. Bearing surface that completely surrounds called ____.
a. Offset bearing a. Component of forces
b. Full bearing b. Resultant
c. Centrally loaded bearing c. Component
d. Babbitt bearing d. Collinear forces
25. The width of a tooth space exceeds the thickness of each 34. For stable equipment foundation, the total combined
of the engaging tooth on the pitch circle. engine, driven equipment and foundation center of
a. Allowance gravity must be kept below the foundation to that
b. Bottom land usually about ____ times the usual total combined
c. Top land weight of the machinery it is supposed to support.
d. Backlash a. 3 to 4
26. ___ addition imparts resistance to atmospheric corrosion b. 3 to 7
in steel, etc. c. 2 to 4
a. Aluminium bronze d. 3 to 5
b. Manganese 35. All associated with standard materials specification
c. Copper EXCEPT:
d. Bronze a. American Iron and Steel Institute
27. Should two equal and opposite collinear forces is added b. Souteast Asia Iron and Steel Institute
to the forces already in equilibrium, which of the c. Society of Automotive Engineers
statement is true? d. American Society for Testing Materials
a. Unbalanced of moment is maintained 36. It is ideal for maximum quietness in sprocket drive
b. Equilibrium is disturbed operation to choose ___ or more teeth.
c. Equilibrium is maintained a. 24
d. It creates an unbalanced situation b. 18
28. Iron base alloy containing 9-16% chromium. c. 27

2
 d. 21 46. The welding made along the edges of two parallel plates
37. Shafting up to 3 inches in diameter of cold rolled steel is is called ___.
___. a. Groove joint
a. 4 ¼ inches b. Fillet joint
b. 6 7/8 inches c. Edge joint
c. 6 ¾ inches d. Corner joint
d. 5 inches 47. Class of material exhibiting decreased electrical
38. Designated pipe color used in communication: conductivity with increasing temperature.
a. Silver gray a. Aluminium
b. Aluminium gray b. P-type semiconductors
c. Bare c. Metals
d. White d. N-type semiconductors
39. Not part and in fact should not be used in the steel 48. Cast iron flywheels are commonly designed with a factor
melting process. of safety of:
a. Coke a. 10 to 13
b. Silicon b. 10 to 12
c. Zinc c. 10 to 14
d. Aluminium d. 8 to 13
40. It is rigid piece which serves to transmit force from a 49. Stress relieving also ___ for the purpose of reducing the
piece to another piece or to cause/control motion. internal stresses of steel material/metal.
a. Follower a. Tempering
b. Crank b. Normalizing
c. Cam motion c. All of these
d. Link d. Annealing
41. Type of bolt commonly used in the construction that is 50. A ridge of uniform section in the form of a helix cut
threaded in both ends. around the circumference of a cylinder and advancing
a. Stud bolt along the axis.
b. Acme thread a. Thread roots
c. Hex bolt b. Helix thread
d. Square threaded bolts c. Screw threads
42. Ten normal helix angles in helical gears is recommended d. Chamfers
in the range of ___ degrees. 51. Martensite (stainless steel) contains 4 to 26% Cr and a
a. Less than 18 maximum of ___ % nickel.
b. 20 to 35 a. 2.5
c. 15 to 25 b. 3.25
d. 20 to 30 c. 3.5
43. The ratio of stress acting on an elastic substance to the d. 2.0
decrease in volume per unit volume. 52. The design of stress and factor of safety are related in
a. Bulk modulus the following manner:
b. Modulus of resilience a. Design stress = ultimate stress/factor of safety
c. Elastic limit b. Ultimate stress = factor of safety/design stress plus
d. Modulus of elasticity concentration factor
44. Rule of thumb in calculating the equipment foundation c. Factor of safety = design stress/ultimate stress
mass should be ___ times the weight of the machinery it d. Design stress = factor of safety time stress
is supposed to support. concentration factor
a. 3 – 5 53. The material that can cut/wear hardest substance
b. 3 – 6 subjected to:
c. 3 – 9 a. Carbide
d. 2 - 4 b. Abrasive
45. The strength of non-ferrous alloys is at maximum at c. Tungsten
room temperature while that of ferrous metal has a d. Vanadium
maximum strength at ___ F. 54. The resulting force that replace two or more forces
a. 400 acting together.
b. 1200 a. Vector
c. 450 b. Couple
d. 350 c. Resultant

3
 d. Equilibrant c. Bilateral
55. Peculiar strength of the metal to resist being crushed. d. Allowance
a. Shear strength 64. The total machinery weight plus the foundation weight
b. Ultimate strength should be well distributed in the corresponding soil area
c. Compressive strength which is enough to cause a bearing stress within the safe
d. Elastic limit bearing capacity of the soil with a factor of safety of ___.
56. Which of the following is not a viscoelastic material? a. 4.5
a. Teflon b. 3
b. Plastic c. 4.2
c. All of these d. 5.0
d. Metal 65. ___ is a plane perpendicular to the axial plane and to the
57. Alloy steel used in manufacturing bolts, studs, tubings pitch plane. In gears the parallel axes, and the plane of
subjected to torsional stresses. rotation coincide.
a. AISI 3141 a. Tangent plane
b. AISI 2330 b. Straight plane
c. AISI 4830 c. Transverse plane
d. AISI 4310 d. Reference plane
58. Method of finishing/shaping a machine part of 66. The stress in an elastic material is:
exceptionally high carbon or high chromium steel parts a. Inversely proportional to the materials yield strength
(or very hard material) b. Inversely proportional to the force acting
a. Using oxygen lancing c. Proportional to the displacement of the material
b. Machining using carbide insert acted upon by the force
c. Using abrasive grinding d. Inversely proportional to the strain
d. Machining with high speed tool steel 67. The “slenderness ratio” of a column is generally defined
59. In a chain drive design for large speed reduction it is as the ratio of its:
preferable to use a double reduction or compound type a. Length of its minimum width
of transmission instead of single two sprockets b. Unsupported length to its maximum radius of
transmission. Drives’ should be so designed that the gyration
angle between two tight chain strands does not exceed c. Length of its moment of inertia
___ degrees. d. Unsupported length to its least radius of gyration
a. 45 68. The relationship between the extension of a spring and
b. 60 the force required to produce the extension is:
c. 55 a. F = ma
d. 90 b. F = µN
60. Steel springs are made of high carbon steel, heat treated c. F = mV2/R
and/or cold worked to a high elastic limit to get good d. F = kx
elastic deflection. In general the carbon content is at ___. 69. The linear portion of the stress-strain diagram of steel is
a. 0.40% or more known as the:
b. 0.65% or more a. Modulus of elongation
c. 0.50% or more b. Plastic range
d. 0.66% or more c. Irreversible range
61. The surface along the fillet curves or between the fillet d. Elastic range
radius of the two adjacent tooth of a gear. 70. The ratio of the moment of inertia of the cross section of
a. Bottom land a beam to the section modulus is:
b. Flank a. Equal to the radius of gyration
c. Fillet b. Equal to the area of the cross section
d. Top land c. A measure of distance
62. Not adaptable to welding due to low tensile strength and d. Dependent on the modulus of elasticity of the beam
poor ductility, etc. material
a. Copper parts 71. When an air entrainment agent is introduced into a
b. Cast iron materials concrete mix
c. Aluminum parts a. The strength will increase
d. Bronze parts b. The strength will decrease
63. Plus or minus tolerance can also be called as ____. c. The strength will not be affected
a. Total tolerance d. The water/cement ratio must be reduced from 10-
b. Unilateral tolerance 15%

4
72. Structural steel elements to torsion develop: d. Shear strain to compressive strain
a. Tensile strength 80. Hooke’s law for an isotopic homogeneous medium
b. Compressive stress experiencing one dimensional stress is:
c. Shearing stress a. Stress = E (strain)
d. Moment b. Strain = E (stress)
73. The deflection of a beam is: c. Force (Area) = E (change in length/length)
a. Directly proportional to the modulus of elasticity and d. Strain energy = E (internal energy)
moment of inertia 81. The modulus of rigidity of a steel member is:
b. Inversely proportional to the modulus of elasticity a. A function of the length and depth
and length of the beam cube b. Defined as the unit shear stress divided by the unit
c. Inversely proportional to the modulus of elasticity shear deformation
and moment of inertia c. Equal to the modulus of elasticity divided by one
d. Directly proportional to the load imposed and plus Poisson’s ratio
inversely to the length squared d. Defined as the length divided by the moment of
74. The differential of the shear equation is which of the inertia
following? 82. A thin homogeneous metallic plate containing a hole is
a. Load on the beam heated sufficiently to cause expansion. If the coefficient
b. Tensile strength of beam of surface expansion is linear, the area of the will:
c. Bending moment of the beam a. Increase at twice the rate the area of the metal
d. Slope of the elastic curve increases
75. A vertically loaded beam, fixed at one end and simply b. Increase at the same rate as the area of the metal
supported at the other is indeterminate to what degree? increases
a. First c. Stay the same
b. Second d. Decrease at the same rate as the area of the metal
c. Third increases
d. Fourth 83. The maximum bending moment of a beam simply
76. A thin walled pressurized vessel consist a right circular supported at both ends and subject to a total load W
cylinder with flat ends. Mid way between the ends the uniformly distributed over its length L is expressed by the
stress is greater in what direction? formula:
a. Longitudinal a. WL/8
b. Circumference b. WL2/8
c. Radial c. WL/2
d. At an angle of 45o to the longitudinal d. WL2/2
77. The bending moment at a section of a beam is derived 84. The three moment equation may be used to analyze:
from the: a. A continuous beam
a. Sum of the moments of all external forces on one b. A beam loaded at the third points
side of the section. c. A step tapered column
b. Difference between the moments on one side of the d. The three element composite system
section and the opposite side 85. In a long column (slenderness ratio > 160) which of the
c. Sum of the moments of all external forces on both following has the greatest influence on its tendency to
sides of the section buckle under a compressive load.
d. Sum of the moments of all external forces between a. The modulus of elasticity of the material
supports b. The compressive strength of the material
78. The stress concentration factor: c. The radius of gyration of the column
a. Is a ratio of the average stress on a section to the d. The length of the column
allowable stress 86. The area of the shear diagram of a beam between any
b. Cannot be evaluated for brittle materials two points on the beam is equal to the:
c. Is the ratio of the areas involved in a sudden change a. Change in shear between the points
of cross section b. Total shear beyond the two points
d. Is the ratio of the maximum stress produced in a c. Average moment between the two points
cross section to the average stress over the section d. Change in moment between the two points
79. Poisson’s ratio is the ratio of the: 87. Poisson’s ratio is principally used in:
a. Unit lateral deformation to the unit longitudinal a. The determination of capability of a material for
deformation being shaped
b. Unit stress to unit strain b. The determination of capacity of a material for
c. Elastic limit to the proportional limit plastic deformation without fracture

5
 c. Stress-strain relationship where stresses are c. Strain hardening is produced by cold working
applied in more than one direction (deformation below the recrystallization
d. The determination of the modulus of toughness temperature).
88. Young’s modulus of elasticity for a material can be d. More strain hardening requires more time-
calculated indirectly from which of the following temperature exposure for relief.
properties of the material? 95. All of the following processes strengthen metals, EXCEPT:
a. Temperature, coefficient of expansion and dielectric a. Annealing above the recrystallization temperature.
constant b. Work hardening by mechanical deformation below
b. Temperature, coefficient of expansion and specific the recrystallization temperature.
heat c. Heat treatments such as quenching and tempering,
c. Density and velocity of sound in the material for production of a finer microstructure.
d. Density and interatomic spacing in the material d. Increasing the carbon content of low carbon steels.
89. The linear portion of the stress-strain diagram of steel is 96. Intrinsic silicon becomes extrinsically conductive, with
known as the: electrons as majority carriers, when doped with which of
a. Modulus of elasticity the following?
b. Plastic range a. Aluminium
c. Irreversible range b. Antimony
d. Elastic range c. Boron
90. Modulus of resilience is: d. Germanium
a. The same as the modulus of elasticity 97. Steels can be strengthened by all of the following
b. A measure of a materials ability to store strain EXCEPT:
energy a. Annealing
c. The reciprocal of the modulus of elasticity b. Quenching and tempering
d. A measure of the deflection of a member c. Work hardening
91. Imperfections within metallic crystal structures maybe all d. Grain refinement
of the following, EXCEPT: 98. If 1080 steel (0.80 wt. %C) is annealed by very low
a. Lattice vacancies, or extra interstitial atoms cooling from 1000 C (1832 F) to ambient temperature, its
b. Ion pairs missing in ionic crystals microstructure will consist almost solely of:
c. Displacement atoms to interstitial sites a. Austenite
d. Linear defects, or slippage dislocations caused by b. Bainite
shear c. Cementite
92. All of the following statements about strain energy are d. Pearlite
correct EXCEPT: 99. Which of the following is not a method of non-
a. It is caused by generation and movement of destructive testing of steel castings and forgings?
dislocations through shear or plastic deformation a. Radiography
b. It results from trapped vacancies in the crystal lattice b. Magnetic particle
c. It is proportional to the length of dislocation, shear c. Ultrasonic
modulus and shortest distance between equivalent d. Chemical analysis
lattice sites 100. Compressive strength of fully cured concrete is most
d. It is less for sites at grain boundaries than for directly related to:
internal sites within the crystal structure a. Sand-gravel ratio
93. When a metal is cold worked of the following generally b. Fineness modulus
occur EXCEPT: c. Absolute volume
a. Recrystallization temperature decreases d. Water-cement ratio
b. Ductility decreases
c. Grains become equi-axed - End -
d. Tensile strength increases
94. All of the following statements about strain hardening
are correct EXCEPT:
a. Strain hardening strengthens metals, resistance to
deformation increases with the amount of strain
present.
b. Strain hardening is relieved during softening,
annealing above the recrystallization temperature.

6
ELEMENTS IN MACHINE DESIGN (J.T.) – MODULE 5 b. 0.0043
c. 0.0010
1. The property of material that relates the lateral strain to d. 0.0012
longitudinal strain. 10. The moment of inertia of a rectangle whose base “b” and
a. Stress height “h” about its base is:
b. Strain a. bh3/4
c. Poisson’s circle b. bh3/12
d. Endurance limit c. bh3/24
2. Also called eccentrically loaded bearing is ______. d. bh3/3
a. Full bearings 11. Cold rolled shafting is not available in diameter larger
b. Offset bearings than _____.
c. Partial bearings a. 6 inches
d. Fitted bearings b. 5 inches
3. In the selection of wire rope, regular lay means wires and c. 6 ½ inches
strands are arranged in the following manner: d. 5 ½ inches
a. Twisted in the same direction 12. The cast iron flywheels are commonly designed with a
b. Twisted in any direction factor of safety of ____.
c. Twisted in opposite direction a. 14 to 15
d. Twisted in along direction b. 10 to 13
4. In involute teeth, the pressure angle is often defined as c. 8 to 9
the angle between the line of action and the line tangent d. 6 to 12
to the pitch circle. It is also termed as: 13. A pair of equal and opposite (not collinear) forces that
a. Helix angle tend to cause rotation of a body.
b. Angle of recess a. Couple
c. Angle of obliquity b. Centroids
d. Arc of action c. Equilibriums
5. Height of tooth above pitch circle or the radial distance d. Vector
between pitch circle and top land of the tooth. 14. The ratio of the pitch diameter in inches to the number
a. Top root of teeth.
b. Addendum a. Pitch circle
c. Land b. English module
d. Hunting tooth c. Module
6. The function of clutch in the machine is: d. Pitch
a. Lowering of drive speed 15. When the motion is diminished/decreasing instead of
b. Alignment of drive shaft increasing is called:
c. To disconnect or connect at will the drive a. Deceleration
d. To insure that two shafts b. Uniform negative impulse
7. It is generally recommended and normal for a designer to c. Retarded motion
add a hunting tooth to evenly distribute the wear on d. All of these
meshing teeth like a 53 teeth gear mesh with 30 teeth 16. ____ is a unit of energy.
pinion. Find the rotation of pinion to mesh with same a. Ft-lb
pair of teeth again. b. Hp
a. 120 c. Btu/hr
b. 81 d. Watt
c. 61 17. When high strength and durability are a requirements for
d. 53 choosing ear materials it is preferable to use __ material.
8. The angle made by the helix of the thread (in a straight a. Hardened bronze
thread) at the pitch diameter with a plain perpendicular b. Steel
to the axis is called ______. c. Phenolic laminated
a. Lead angle d. White iron
b. Truncated 18. ____ forces when actions are parallel.
c. Lead a. Couple
d. Angle of thread b. Non collinear
9. The rule of thumb in journal bearing design, the c. Resultant
clearance ratio/clearance should be: d. Non concurrent
a. 0.0090

1
19. The product of the mass and the velocity of the center of 28. The most known lubricants being utilized in whatever
gravity of the body is called: category of load and speed are oil, air, grease, and dry
a. Linear momentum lubricants like:
b. Angular impulse a. Bronze
c. Linear impulse b. Lead
d. Angular momentum c. Silicon
20. The distance between similar, equally-spaced tooth d. Graphite
surfaces in a given direction and along a given line. 29. A coupling that allows axial flexibility/movement in the
a. Pitch circle operation. Made of alternate bolting steel, leather, fabric
b. Pitch plane and/or plastic material into the two flanges:
c. Pitch a. Flexible disc coupling
d. Pitch diameter b. Flexible toroidal spring coupling
21. Could be defined as simply push or pull. c. Flexible Oldham coupling
a. Power d. Elastic-material bonded coupling
b. Inertia 30. It consist of two cranks, a stationary piece called the line
c. Work of centers and the connecting rod is a:
d. Force a. Five-bar linkage
22. Opposite directional forces equal in magnitude and b. Four-crank braces
parallel is called ____. c. Three-crank linkage
a. Non coplanar d. Four-bar linkage
b. Centro 31. Used to change rotary motion to reciprocating motion
c. Couple ___.
d. Coplanar a. Rack gears
23. Quantities such as time, volume and density are b. Hypoid gears
completely specified when their magnitude is known is c. Helical gears
also called: d. Herringbone gears
a. Couple 32. The effective face width of a helical gear divided by gear
b. Resultant pitch.
c. Components a. Approach ratio
d. Scalar b. Arc of action
24. The use of hardened steel for the mating metal gear c. Arc of recess
appears to give the best results and longer operational d. Face overlap
life. The usual hardness is in the range of: 33. Pitch diameter less the diameter of the roller chain is
a. Over 600 BHN equal to:
b. 300 to 400 BHN a. Top land
c. Below 350 BHN b. Bottom diameter
d. Below 400 BHN c. Addendum
25. ___ is the product of the resultant of all forces acting on d. Inside diameter
a body and the time. 34. Generally applied on speed reducer due to large speed
a. Linear momentum ratio.
b. Linear impulse a. Bevel gears
c. Angular momentum b. Helical gears
d. Angular impulse c. Worm gears
26. The separate forces which can be so combined are d. Hypoid gears
called: 35. If shaft is specified as – diameter 2.00” max and 1.99”
a. Concurrent forces min in diameter then the 0.010” could be defined as
b. Non concurrent forces ____.
c. Couple a. Allowance
d. Component b. Fit
27. Continuous stretching under load even if the stress is less c. Variance
than the yield point. d. Tolerance
a. Plasticity 36. A material plane was subjected to a load. When the load
b. Elasticity was removed, the strain disappeared. From the
c. Creep structural change, which of the following can be
d. Ductility considered about this material?
a. It has high modulus of elasticity

2
 b. It does not follow Hooke’s Law c. Helix angle thread
c. It is plastic d. Half angle thread or 20o
d. It is elastic 46. An elastic body whose primary function is to deflect
37. Helix angle in the range of ____ degrees is under load.
recommended for wide face helical gears. a. Clutch
a. Less than 15 b. Stopper
b. Less than 20 c. Brake
c. 20 to 35 d. Spring
d. 20 to 22 47. Steel plates allowable tensile strength.
38. Difference between maximum material limits of mating a. 396.41 N/m2
parts. Or it is minimum clearance or maximum b. 296.12 N/m2
interference between parts. c. 379.31 N/m2
a. Tolerance d. 310.11 N/m2
b. Fits 48. Poisson’s ratio is the ratio of:
c. Variance a. Elastic limit to yield strength
d. Allowance b. Lateral deformation to the longitudinal
39. The concave portion of the tooth profile where it joins deformation
the bottom of the tooth. c. Shear strain to unit strength
a. Root circle d. Elastic limit to shear strength
b. Fillet radius 49. Manganese steel standard designation, SAE _____.
c. Fillet curves a. 13xx
d. Fillet b. 10xx
40. The changes in shape or geometry of the body due to c. 11xx
action of a force on it is called deformation or ___. d. 8xxx
a. Shear stresses 50. One of these materials is not a structural steel?
b. Stresses a. Low carbon steel
c. Compressive stress b. Tool and die steel
d. Strain c. Stainless steel
41. For an evenly distributed and uniform wear on each d. Medium carbon steel
meshing gear tooth, the ideal design practice is to 51. The ratio of moment of inertia on a close section of a
consider a _____. beam to this section modulus is:
a. Wear resistance alloy addition to tooth gears a. A measure of distance
b. Heat treatment of the gears b. Equal to the radius of gyration and compression
c. Hardening of each tooth c. Multiplied by the bending moment
d. Hunting tooth addition d. Equal to the area of the cross-section and tension
42. The reciprocal of a diameter pitch or the ratio of the 52. The SAE 2340 shafting contain ____ Nickel.
pitch diameter to the no. of teeth. a. 3.85% Ni
a. Lead b. 4% Ni
b. Module c. 3.25 to 3.75% Ni
c. Involute d. 3.84% Ni
d. Clearance 53. Chromium steel standard designation, SAE _____.
43. Abilty to resist deformation under stress a. 92xx
a. Plasticity b. 5xxx
b. All of these c. 3xxx
c. Stiffness d. 11xx
d. Toughness 54. Alloy that improves strength of steel at high temperature
44. Flat leather belting not recommended for used in a application.
speed in excess of _____ fpm. a. Aluminium
a. 3600 b. Manganese
b. 4800 c. Silicon
c. 6000 d. Chromium
d. All of these 55. When an air entrainment agent is put into a concrete
45. The angle included between the sides of the thread mix.
measured in an axial plane in a screw thread. a. The water/cement ratio must be reduced
a. Angle of thread b. The strength will decrease
b. Angle between thread or 40o c. Minimal effect

3
 d. The strength will suffer up to 50% a. Aluminium
56. In general, alloys with high nickel content retain b. Cast iron
toughness to quite low temperature up to ___ F. c. Steel material
a. – 380 d. Wrought iron
b. – 400 66. The alloy materials used in the production of metals
c. – 260 working tools.
d. – 320 a. Titanium, phosphorous
57. The differential of the shear equation is the ____. b. Tungsten, silicon, hadfield mn
a. Deflection of the beam c. Vanadium, chromium, molybdenum
b. Compressive strength of the beam d. High carbon steel
c. Tensile strength of beam 67. Torsional deflection is a significant consideration in the
d. Load on the beam design of shaft and the limit should be in the range of
58. It is recommended not to have a direct drive between ____ degree/foot of length.
driven and drive sprockets if the ratio of their teeth a. 0.4 to 1
exceeds ____. Use 2 or more step combination. b. 0.1 to 1
a. 10 times c. 0.08 to 1
b. 8 times d. 0.6 to 1
c. 5 times 68. The property that characterizes a materials ability to be
d. 6 times drawn into a wire.
59. The length of the hub should not be made lesser than the a. Tensile strength
face width of the gear. Hub lengths usually vary from b. Ductility
1.25D to 2 D, where D is the shaft diameter. The c. Endurance limit
reasonable diameter of steel hub should be: d. Thermal conductivity
a. 2D 69. For steel shafting design in an average condition, the
b. 1.8D maximum distance in feet between bearing to avoid
c. 1.55D excessive linear deflection is by formula, L = 8.95D2/3 for
d. 1.20D shaft subjected to no bending except its own weight but
60. Length of contact between two mating parts in a screw for shafting with bending action of pulleys, etc. the
and nut threads measured axially is termed ___. formula then will be L = _____.
a. Length of engagement a. 4D2/3
b. Axis of contact b. 7.0D2/3
2/3
c. Arc of contact c. 5.2D
2/3
d. Depth of engagement d. 6.0D
61. The sum of their addendums and dedendums. 70. Which of the phases of steel elements has a face-
a. Whole depth centered cubic structure?
b. Full depth a. Pyrite
c. Width of space b. Austenite
d. Working depth c. All of these
62. It is recommended for high speed application that the d. Cementite
minimum number of teeth in small sprocket should be: 71. Steel spring material is usually hardened to 400 to 500
a. 26 to 30 BHN and the carbon content is in the range of ____.
b. 12 to 16 a. 0.50% to 0.905%
c. 26 to 28 b. All of these
d. 18 to 24 c. 0.45 to 0.48%
63. Stresses that are independent of loads is called ___. d. 0.96 to 0.97%
a. Working stress 72. Principal stresses occur on these plane.
b. Residual stress a. Which are subjected to ultimate tension
c. Simple stress b. The shearing stress is zero
d. Combined stress c. Which are subjected to maximum compression
o
64. Materials having a high electrical resistance and should d. Which are 45 apart
not be used as conductor of electrical current. 73. The property of material wherein the content is
a. Nickel continuously distributed through its entire mass.
b. Aluminium oxide a. Plasticity
c. Silicon base alloys b. Malleability
d. Iron oxide c. Homogeneity
65. The best material for brake drums is ___. d. All of these

4
74. The properties of metals to withstand load without tool. It is a prevention of the springing away of the
breaking down is: workpiece from cutting tools.
a. Elasticity a. Rubber-flex collets
b. Strength b. Tool post
c. Plasticity c. Follower rest
d. Strain d. Carriage stop
75. Shafts readily available in the market are made in many 83. Almost always the soldering materials are a combination
ways and wide variety of material composition. It is likely of the following alloys:
be cold drawn carbon steel in size smaller than ___ a. All of these
inches diameter. b. Lead and tin
a. 3.75 c. Tin and antimony
b. 4 d. Lead and antimony
c. 5 84. The most popular of all soldering materials in use has
d. 5 12 composition of:
76. Plain carbon steel standard designation, SAE ____. a. 45/55% tin and lead
a. 6xxx b. 50/50% tin and lead
b. 13xx c. All of these
c. 10xx d. 60/40% tin and lead
d. 2xxx 85. The relative strength of a butt welding could safely
77. The rigidity of polymer can be increased by: assumed as ___ as % efficiency.
a. Furnace smelting a. 95
b. Normalizing b. 98
c. Crystallization c. 90
d. Shot peening d. 92
78. The difference between cast steel and cast iron. 86. Which of the following raw materials are used in the
a. All of these foundry molding operation?
b. Cast steel has usually less than 1%C while cast iron a. Silica sand, bentonite, flour/paste water
has 2% or 3.6% carbon range b. Silica sand and paste
c. Cast iron has lower strength more brittle and has c. Silica sand, paste, graphite electrode
lower ductility than cast steel. d. Silica sand, linseed oil, flour
d. Iron is usually the initial product after purifying iron 87. The following are parts of a micrometer calliper except
ore then further processing by removal of more for:
impurities and carbon content to be able to produce a. Thimble
steel grade. b. Head screw
79. It is a general practice to use the following allowable c. Spindle
stresses, 4000 psi for main transmitting shaft, short d. Anvil
shafts and countershaft. For lineshaft carrying pulley it is 88. To avoid brittleness of weld or the residual stress in the
___ psi. welding it is normally stress relieved of ____.
a. 7800 a. Normalizing
b. 7000 b. Tempering
c. 6000 c. Flame hardening
d. 6500 d. Annealing
80. Drilling machine cannot do: 89. Steel with certain % of carbon maximum can readily be
a. Reaming welded by all process and the resulting strength of the
b. Spot facing portion welded is as strong as the base material.
c. Lapping a. 0.15%C max
d. Broaching b. 0.35%C max
81. Material charges in foundry melting operation are c. 0.25%C max
composed of d. 0.30%C max
a. Limestone, foundry coke and silica sand 90. Commonly used steel melter as deoxidizer because of its
b. Iron ore, quartz and charcoal easy availability and cheap price.
c. Steel scrap, alloys and charcoal foundry coke a. Silicon
d. Scrap wood, alloys and limestone b. Aluminium
82. ____ is a work supporting device which is bolted to the c. Zinc
saddle of the lathe machine. It travels with the cutting d. Manganese

5
91. Curved formed by the path of point on a straight line as it d. 3
rolls along a convex base curve. The base curve is usually 100. Molybdenum steel standard designation, SAE ---.
a circle and generally used as the profile of gear tooth. a. 88xx
a. Axial plane b. 48xx
b. Involute c. 40xx
c. Arc of recess d. 46xx
d. Arc of action
92. Several force which can be combined is called: - End -
a. Resultants
b. Composition of forces
c. Components
d. Collinear forces
93. Ideal herringbone gear helix is in the range of ____.
a. 30 to 45
b. 35 to 50
c. 25 to 30
d. 15 to 20
94. The distance from a point on a screw thread to a
corresponding point on the next thread measure along
the axis.
a. Flank
b. Lead
c. Crest
d. Pitch
95. As recommended the center to center distance between
sprockets should not less than ___ times the bigger
sprocket.
a. 2.26
b. 1 ¼
c. 1 ½
d. 2.59
96. Machine shop instrument for checking the flatness of
plane surfaces to 10ths of thousands of a centimetre.
a. Blade type micrometer
b. Dial calliper
c. Planimeter
d. Micrometer
97. Tools usually used in wood pattern making in a foundry
shop.
a. Saw and chisels
b. Band saw
c. Knives and drills
d. Drill machine
98. Recommended design practice for steel lineshafting to
limit the linear deflection to ____ inch/foot of length
(maximum).
a. 0.020
b. 1.010
c. 1.012
d. 0.150
99. Big chain sprocket wheels are designed with spokes/arms
are generally elliptical in cross section with major axis
___ times the minor axis.
a. 2
b. 2 ½
c. 1 ½

6
ELEMENTS IN MACHINE DESIGN (J.T.) – MODULE 3 c. Rockwell test
1. The size of an equal-leg length fillet weld shall be based d. Test blocks
on the length of the largest: 11. The area in the machine shop whose metal I s being
a. Isosceles right triangle melted to form a new shape is the:
b. Square a. Foundry area
c. Right triangle b. Tool and die
d. Rectangle c. Welding area
2. Milling machine accessories are used to hold milling d. Mass production area
cutter in the milling machine: 12. Which of the following is not the work of the machinist:
a. Spindle-nose tooling a. Reboring
b. Milling-machine vise b. Overhauling
c. Vertical milling attachment c. Grinding
d. Milling machine arbors d. Boring
3. The cheapest and the most abundant engineering 13. The machine which can flatten surface on a horizontal,
materials: vertical or angular plane is:
a. Steel a. Drilling machine
b. Aluminium b. Shaper machine
c. Cast iron c. Power saw
d. Babbitt d. Lathe machine
4. They are usually the steel or steel casting: 14. Which of the following is not part of a lathe machine:
a. Mild steel a. Fan
b. Carbon steel b. Carriage
c. Firebox steel c. Headstock
d. Drop-forge-dies d. Tailstock
5. An important accessories of milling machines: 15. One important skill that operators of machine tools must
a. Milling machine vise have an understanding of measurement which demands:
b. Cutters a. Speed
c. Ram b. Neatness
d. Vertical milling attachment c. Precision
6. Gears used to transmit power between shafts axis of d. Sociability
which intersect: 16. Which of the following metals is non-magnetic?
a. Spur gear a. Manganese steel
b. Bevel gear b. Cast steel
c. Helical gear c. Alloy steel
d. Straight gear d. Cast iron
7. An iron has physical properties closely resembling those 17. Which tool does not belong to the group?
of mild steel: a. Vise grip
a. Malleable cast iron b. Feeler gage
b. Malleable iron c. Torque wrench
c. White iron d. Adjustable wrench
d. Gray iron 18. What process does not belong to the group?
8. The space between the adjacent teeth: a. Brazing
a. Tooth b. Soldering
b. Backlash c. Hardening
c. Flank d. Resistance welding
d. Width 19. A machinery operation whereby the tool rotates while
9. An iron in which most of the carbon is chemically the feed is stationary:
combined with the iron: a. Shaping
a. Cast iron b. Milling
b. Gray iron c. Turning
c. White iron d. Reaming
d. Malleable iron 20. Which of the following is not a kind of cast iron?
10. A machine used in testing steel generally strike the a. Gray iron
specimen with an energy from 220 to 265 ft-lb: b. White iron
a. Izod test c. Malleable iron
b. Charpy test d. Lead iron

1
21. Which of the following is not used to temper steel? a. Pitch circle and base circle are the same
a. Oil bath b. Working depth includes the clearance
b. Brine/salt bath c. Tooth outline are always cycloidal curves
c. Steam bath d. Tooth outline are usually involute curves
d. Water bath 32. One of the following is not common terms relating to the
22. Which of the following is not a part of a headstock? classification of fits:
a. Anvil a. Tunking
b. Spindle b. Snug
c. Motor c. Medium force fit
d. Backgear d. Bound
23. The ability of material or metal to resist being crushed is: 33. Galvanized iron is a term referring to iron coated with:
a. Fatigue strength a. Tin
b. Bending strength b. Zinc
c. Torsional strength c. Magnesium
d. Compressive strength d. Aluminium
24. Which of the following metal is easy to chisel? 34. Stainless steel is obtained principally by the use of which
a. Alloy steel alloying element:
b. Manganese steel a. Chromium
c. Stainless steel b. Nickel
d. Cast iron c. Carbon
25. Ferrous metals contain a relatively large amount of: d. Tungsten
a. Manganese 35. One of the following is not a tap used for cutting threads
b. Carbon in holes:
c. Sulphur a. Tapping tap
d. Phosphorous b. Plug tap
26. Which of the following is not a classification of iron ore: c. Taper tap
a. Siderite d. Bottoming tap
b. Hematite 36. A machining operation whereby the tool reciprocates
c. Sulfurite and the feed is stationary, is called:
d. Magnetite a. Planning
27. The ability of metals to stand loads without breaking b. Shaping
down is: c. Turning
a. Strain d. Reaming
b. Stress 37. One of the following metals which respond to heat
c. Elasticity treatment:
d. Strength a. Cast iron
28. Herringbone gears are gears which: b. Wrought iron
a. Do not operate on parallel shafts c. Medium carbon steel
b. Have line of contact between the teeth d. Low carbon steel
c. Tend to produce end thrust on the shafts 38. Ferrous metals contain a relatively large amount of:
d. Consists of two left handed helical gears a. Carbon
29. In general, the design stress and factor of safety are b. Manganese
related as follows: c. Phosphorous
a. Design = ultimate stress divided by factor of safety d. Sulphur
b. Design = ultimate stress times factor of safety 39. Which of the following is not a strength property of
c. Ultimate = stress factor of safety divided by design metals?
stress a. Tensile
d. Factor of stress = design stress divided by ultimate b. Rocking strength
stress c. Fatigue
30. The internals stresses existing in a welded connection d. Torsional strength
are: 40. A machine used in shaping metal by means of abrasive
a. Relieved by x-ray analysis wheel or the removal of metals with an abrasive is called:
b. May be relieved when the weld is peened a. Planer machine
c. Not relieved when the weld is peened b. Power saw
d. Not relieved by heat treatment c. Shaper machine
31. In the usual spur gearing the: d. Grinding machine

2
41. Which of the following is not a kind of mandrel? a. 50%
a. Expansion mandrel b. 25%
b. Taper mandrel c. 0%
c. Contraction mandrel d. 15%
d. Gang mandrel 51. The intensity of stress that causes unit strain is known as:
42. The kind of center which is being attached and meshed a. Unit stress
to the tailstock spindle which is also static while the work b. Bulk modulus
is rotating is: c. Modulus of rigidity
a. Dead center d. Modulus of elasticity
b. Live center 52. For steel, the ultimate strength in shear as compared to
c. Focal center in tension is nearly:
d. Work center a. Same
43. Which of the following is not a part of the headstock? b. Half
a. Spindle c. One-third
b. Anvil d. Two-third
c. Back gear 53. Select the one that has no unit:
d. Motor a. Kinematic viscosity
44. Which process does not belong to the group? b. Surface tension
a. Resistance welding c. Bulk modulos
b. Soldering d. Strain
c. Hardening 54. When a part is constrained to move and heated, it
d. Brazing develops:
45. The ratio of the average shear to maximum shear stress a. Principal stress
for a circular section equal to b. Tensile stress
a. 2 c. Compressive stress
b. 2/3 d. Shear stress
c. 3/2 55. Tensile stress of a material is given by:
d. ¾ a. Maximum load during test over original cross-
46. When a solid cube is subjected to equal normal forces of sectional area
the same type on all its faces. The ratio of volumetric b. Average load during test over original cross-sectional
strain/linear strain along any of the three axes will be area
equal to: c. Maximum load during test over area at the time of
a. 1 fracture
b. 2 d. Average load during the test over area at the time
c. √2 fracture
d. 3 56. The size of hole that is drilled in plates for riveting is:
47. The ratio of Bulk modulus to shear modulus for Poisson’s a. Equal to diameter of rivet shank
ratio of 0.25 will be equal to: b. Slightly smaller than the diameter of rivet shank
a. 3/2 c. 1.5 to 2 mm smaller than the diameter of rivet for
b. 5/6 rivets of 25 mm and above size
c. 1 d. 1.5 to 2 mm larger than the diameter of the rivet
d. 6/3 for rivets 25 mm and above size
48. The stress strain curve for a glass rod during tensile test 57. The horsepower that can be transmitted by a shaft 60
is: mm diameter at 180 rpm with permissible shear stress of
a. a straight line 850 kg/cm2 shall be approximately:
b. a parabola a. 30 – 35
c. a sudden break b. 35 – 50
d. an irregular curve c. 50 – 60
49. When shear force is zero along a section, the bending d. 60 – 85
moment at that section will be: 58. A column is called short column when:
a. Zero a. The length is more than 30 times the diameter
b. Minimum b. Slenderness ratio is more than 120
c. Maximum c. The length is less than 8 times the diameter
d. Minimum or maximum d. The slenderness ratio is more than 32
50. Percentage reduction of area while performing tensile 59. Which one is the correct statement about true stress-
test on cast iron may be of the order of: strain method?

3
 a. There is no such phenomenon like true stress or d. Longitudinal stress
true strain 68. Modulus of rigidity can be defined as the ratio of:
b. True stress is load per unit area (actual) and similarly a. Linear stress to longitudinal strain
true strain is determined under actual conditions. b. Stress to volumetric strain
c. This method can be used for compression test as c. Shear stress to shear strain
well d. Stress to strain
d. It is more sensitive to changes in mechanical 69. 1 Meganewton per square meter is equal to:
conditions a. 1,000,000 N/mm2
60. The total strain energy stored in a body is called: b. 10,000 N/mm2
a. Resilience c. 100 N/mm2
b. Proof resilience d. 1 N/mm2
c. Modulus of resilience 70. The value of shear stress changes is induced in the shaft
d. Toughness because of the applied couple that
61. A material that is capable of absorbing a large quantity of a. From maximum at the center to zero at the
energy before fracture is called: circumference
a. Ductility b. From zero at the center to maximum at the
b. Toughness circumference
c. Resilience c. From maximum at the center to minimum at the
d. Shock proof circumference
62. Coaxing increases the: d. From minimum at the center to maximum at the
a. Strength by reversible cycling circumference
b. Corrosion resistance by spraying 71. In the design of pulley, key and shaft:
c. Hardness by surface treatment a. All three are designed for same strength
d. Fatigue resistance by over-stressing the metal by b. Key is made weaker
successively increasing loadings c. Pulley is made weaker
63. Two shafts made up of mild steel one having circular d. Shaft is made weaker
cross section and the other being hollow circular with 72. The radial pressure and hoop tension for a thick cylinder
inner diameter half of the outer diameter. The ratio of is:
the torque that can be transmitted in two cases given by: a. Maximum at inner surface and decreases towards
a. 2 outer surface
b. 17/16 b. Minimum at inner surface and increased towards
c. 1 outer surface
d. 15/16 c. Minimum at inner and outer surfaces and maximum
64. For a circular shaft subjected to torque the value of shear in middle
stress is equal to: d. Maximum at inner and outer surfaces and minimum
a. Is uniform throughout in middle
b. Has maximum value at the axis 73. Auto frottage is the method of:
c. Has maximum value at the surface a. Calculating stresses in thick cylinders
d. Is zero at the axis and linearly increases to a b. Relieving thick cylinders
maximum value at the surface of the shaft c. Prestressing thick cylinders
65. In laminated spring the strips are provided in different d. Increasing life of thick cylinders
lengths for: 74. Ties are load carrying members that carry:
a. Economy a. Torsional loads
b. Reduction in weight b. Axial compressive load
c. Improved appearance c. Axial tension loads
d. Equal distribution stress d. Transverse loads
66. Select the one for which diamond riveted joint can be 75. If the areas of cross sections of square and circular
adopted: beams are same and both are put to equal bending
a. Butt joint moment, then tne correct statement is:
b. Lap joint a. The circular beam is more economical
c. Double riveted lap joints b. The square beam is more economical
d. All types of joints c. Both the beams are equally strong
67. Hoop stress refers to d. Both the beams are equally economical
a. Circumferential tensile stress 76. In actual machines:
b. Compressive stress a. Mechanical advantage is unity
c. Radial stress b. Mechanical advantage is less than unity

4
 c. Mechanical advantage is less than velocity ratio 85. The curve of a catenary by nature is:
d. Mechanical advantage is equal to velocity ratio a. Ellipse
77. The essential condition of equilibrium of a body is: b. Hyperbolic
a. The algebraic sum of horizontal components of all c. Circular
forces must be zero d. Parabolic
b. The algebraic sum of vertical components of all 86. If the only force acting on two bodies is their mutual
forces must be zero interactions and if both bodies start from rest, the
c. The algebraic sum of forces about a point must be distance travelled b each will be a:
zero a. Proportional to the masses of the bodies
d. All of the above b. Inversely proportional to the masses of the bodies
78. Coulomb friction is: c. Inversely proportional to the square of the masses of
a. Friction between two electrically charge bodies the bodies
b. Friction between two bodies having relative motion d. Directly proportional to the square of the masses of
c. Friction between a solid and a liquid the bodies
d. Friction between two dry surfaces 87. Which statement is correct?
79. The coefficient of friction is equal to: a. A body cannot have any energy without having
a. The angle between the normal reaction and the momentum
resultant of normal reaction and the limiting friction. b. A body can have kinetic energy without having
b. The tangent of the angle between the normal momentum
reaction and the resultant of the normal reaction c. A body in motion will always have kinetic energy
and the limiting friction. more than the potential energy
c. The tangent of the angle of the net resultant force d. None of the above
with the direction of motion. 88. A man is standing near the edge of a uniformly rotating
d. The tangent of the angle between the normal platform about an axis passing through its center. The
reaction and direction of limiting friction. speed of rotation of the platform will decrease if he:
80. The limiting force of friction is equal to: a. Moves towards the axis of rotation
a. The value of friction force that stops the movement b. Accepts a heavy bag from one of its friends
of the body. standing nearby and hold it in his hand.
b. The value of friction force that cannot exceed under c. Extend his arms outwards.
a given situation. d. Jumps out from the platform.
c. The friction force when the body is just about to 89. A shaft revolving in a bearing forms a:
move. a. Lower pair
d. The friction force acting on a body when it is in b. Sliding pair
motion. c. Higher pair
81. Ice is slippery when a man walks on it because: d. Cylindrical pair
a. It has a smooth surface 90. Select the one that is a higher pair:
b. It has no friction a. Thomson indicator mechanism
c. It is very chilly b. Harts straight line mechanism
d. Increase of pressure causes it to melt. c. Crossby indicator mechanism
82. One joule is the same as: d. Tooth gearing mechanism
8
a. 10 ergs 91. The mechanism used to enlarge or reduce moments for
b. 107 ergs reproducing drawings to different scales is called:
6
c. 10 ergs a. Clinograph
d. 105 ergs b. Trisquare
83. Static friction is: c. Graphometer
a. Always greater than the dynamic friction. d. Pantograph
b. Always less than the dynamic friction. 92. When a ship is travelling in sea, which of the effect is
c. Always equal to the dynamic friction. more dangerous?
d. Either greater or more than the dynamic friction. a. Rolling
84. When two forces that act at a point are such that if the b. Pitching
direction of one is reversed, the direction of the resultant c. Steering
is turned through 90o, the forces must be: d. All of the above
a. Equal in magnitude 93. Slip in belt drive is:
o
b. Inclined at less than 90 a. Loss of power
o
c. Inclined at more than 90 b. Difference between the angular velocities of two
o
d. Acting at 180 pulleys

5
 c. Difference between the velocities of two pulleys
d. Difference between the linear speed of the rim of
pulley and the belt on it.
94. In case of flat belt drive the length of belt in:
a. Open belt depends on sum of the diameters of
pulleys
b. Open belts depends on difference of the diameters
of the pulleys
c. Cross belts depends on the sum of the diameters of
pulleys
d. Cross belts depends on the difference of the
diameters of the pulleys
95. Kinematic pairs are those parts that have:
a. Point or line contact between the two elements
when in motion
b. Surface contact between the two elements when in
motion
c. Elements of pairs not held together mechanically
d. Two elements that allow relative motion
96. A cam with a roller follower would constitute, which type
of pair?
a. Lower pair
b. Higher pair
c. Open pair
d. Close pair
97. The pitch point on a cam is:
a. Any point on pitch curve
b. The point of cam pitch that has the maximum
pressure angle
c. A point at a distance equal to pitch circle radius from
the center
d. None of the above
98. The cam angle is:
a. The angle of rotation of the cam for a definite
displacement of the follower.
b. Angle subtended by live portion of cam at the cam
center.
c. The angle subtended at the cam center by the
portion of cam during which the follower moves.
d. The angle subtended by the cam at the cam center
when the follower dwells.
99. Module can be expressed in:
a. Mm
b. Mm/no. of teeth
c. Dimensionless
d. None of the above
100. A reverted gear train is one in which:
a. The direction of rotation of first and last gear is
opposite
b. The direction of rotation of first and the last gear is
the same
c. The first and last gear are on the same shaft
d. The first and the last gear are essentially on
separate by parallel shafts.
- End -

6
ELEMENTS IN MACHINE DESIGN (J.T.) – MODULE 2 c. Case hardening
d. Soaking
1. In a pair of gears, ___________ is the plane 10. What happens to a drill if the operating speed is too fast?
perpendicular to the axial plane and tangent to the pitch a. Drill will crack
surface. b. Drill will become overheated and will bend
a. Pitch c. Drill will become overheated and will be drawn
b. Pitch plane from the steel
c. Pitch circle d. Drill will become very dull and wear dust
d. Pitch point 11. Which of the following is not a structural steel class?
2. The phenomenon of continuous stretching under load a. Low carbon steel
even if the stress is less than the yield point: b. Stainless steel
a. Elasticity c. Medium carbon steel
b. Ductility d. Tool and die steel
c. Plasticity 12. The section modulus of a rectangle of base “b” and
d. Creep height “h” about its base is:
3. The machinery operation whereby done with the work a. bh2/6
accurately fastened has a reciprocating (forward and b. bh3/3
backward) motion and the tool head is stationary. c. bh2/12
a. Shaping d. bh3/12
b. Planing 13. A material that should be avoided in constructing wood
c. Turning pattern:
d. Reaming a. Sap wood
4. Finding the resultant of two or more forces is called: b. Kiln dried wood
a. Coplanar forces c. Heart wood
b. Non-coplanar d. Core portion of wood
c. Couple 14. The gradual chemical reaction by other substance such
d. Composition that metal is converted to an oxide or other compounds:
5. The capacity of metal to withstand load without breaking a. Corrosion
is: b. Cheaping
a. Strength c. Rusting
b. Stress d. Weathering
c. Elasticity 15. The center of gravity of a solid pyramid or cone with a
d. Strain total height of H is:
6. Outstanding safety record contributes to: a. ¼ H
a. High productivity and quality of work b. 3/5 H
b. Outstanding performance that expects reward from c. 1/3 H
management. d. ½ H
c. Confidence in foremen’s ability to perform well. 16. Which do not belong to foundry or metal casting shop?
d. Pride and enthusiasm to one-self. a. Shake-out machine
7. A type of coupling that allows slight amount of b. Molding machine
torsional/angular flexibility due to introduction with c. Coremaking
some elastic material cylindrically wrapped around the d. Forging machine
bolts in the flange. 17. What is the property of a material which resists force
a. Simple elastic bonded coupling acting to pull the material apart?
b. Elastic-material bushed coupling a. Shear strength
c. Elastic-material bonded coupling b. Tensile strength
d. All of these c. Torsional strength
8. In a uniformly loaded beam, the maximum vertical d. Compressive strength
shearing force occurs 18. The reciprocal of diametral pitch equivalent to the ratio
a. At the center of pitch diameter to the number of teeth:
b. At the section of maximum moment a. Lead
c. At beam bottom fiber b. Clearance
d. At either end support c. Module
9. Copper and most of its alloys can be hardened by: d. Involute
a. Patenting 19. What is the difference between brass and bronze?
b. Cold working

1
 a. Brass is composed of copper and zinc while bronze c. Spur gear
is composed of copper and tin. d. Helical gear
b. Brass is composed of copper and zinc while bronze is 28. The hardness of helical and herringbone gear teeth after
basically copper and tin plus non-ferrous alloy such heat treatment is 210 to 300 Brinell Hardness, for gear
as manganese, aluminium and chromium. and pinion is at:
c. Bronze is reddish in color while brass is a mixture of a. 360 Brinell min
copper and antimony. b. 400 Brinell max
d. Bronze is mostly an alloy of copper and tin while c. 340 – 360 normally
brass is a mixture of copper and antimony. d. All of the above
20. The first derivative with respect to velocity of kinetic 29. The path of contact in involute gears where the
energy is: force/power is actually transmitted. It is a straight
a. Power imaginary line passing through the pitch point and
b. Energy tangent to the base circle.
c. Momentum a. Principle reference plane
d. None of these b. Pitch point
21. The arbitrary modification by removing a small portion of c. Front angle
a tooth material at the tip of the gear tooth is called: d. Line of action
a. Tip removal 30. What is the difference between a shaper and a planer?
b. Tip undercut a. The tool of the shaper moves while on the planer is
c. Tip relief stationary.
d. Pressure angle cut b. The shaper can perform slotting operation while the
22. Types of V-belt to use in a driving pulley with speed of planer cannot.
360 rpm and transmitting 5 hp: c. The shaper handles large pieces while the planar
a. Type C belts handles only small pieces.
b. Type B belts d. The tool of the shaper moves in reciprocating
c. Type A belts motion while the tool in the planar moves in rotary
d. Type D belts motion.
23. What type of gears that can transmit power at an angle? 31. What is the metal characteristics to withstand forces that
a. Helical gear cause twisting?
b. Worm gear a. Torsional strength
c. Bevel gear b. Modulus of elasticity
d. Herringbone gear c. Twisting moment
24. A liquid metal: d. Elasticity
a. Mercury 32. In greater quantity this element is harmful to the ferrous
b. Lead metal:
c. Zinc a. Sulphur
d. Aluminium b. Silicon
25. An object thrown upward will return to earth with a c. Zinc
magnitude of the terminal velocity equal to: d. Aluminium
a. Zero 33. To prevent leakage in dynamic seal:
b. One-half of the initial velocity a. Gaskets
c. Twice the initial velocity b. Seals
d. The initial velocity c. Felts
26. Used in conjunction with circular cross sectional d. Packings
members to retain oil and prevent dirt, foreign particles, 34. It has molybdenum alloy except:
moisture and to permit pressure differential between a. SAE 43xx
exterior and interior of the applied part: b. SAE 41xx
a. Seal c. SAE 6xxx
b. Gasket d. SAE 2xxx
c. Safety shield 35. A type of gear tooth cut inside a cylinder or ring:
d. Packing a. Rack gear
27. Commonly used in parallel-shaft transmission especially b. Ring gear
when a smooth, continuous section is essential as in high c. Miter gear
speed drives up to 12,000 fpm: d. Internal gear
a. Bevel gear 36. Flexible material used to seal pressurized fluids,
b. Herringbone gear normally under dynamic condition:

2
 a. Nylon b. Lube oil is not pressurized
b. Seal c. There is no lube oil
c. Teflon d. Bearing is lightly loaded
d. Packing 46. One of the following materials is unsuitable as a bearing:
37. Cast alloy steel for very high temperature application: a. Teflon
a. Manganese-nickel steel castings b. Low carbon steel
b. High-chrome steel castings c. Cast iron
c. Chrome-nickel steel castings d. Nylon
d. High manganese casting 47. Safety features that must be placed and maintained at
38. What heat treatment process can cast steel materials of machine, blacksmith, welding and foundry shop.
high chrome, high manganese, etc. type of steel be a. Safety goggle
subjected for the purpose of machining process? b. Walkaway guide
a. Annealing c. Safety notices in markings
b. Tempering d. All of these
c. Normalizing 48. The angle, at the base cylinder of an involute gear, that
d. Quenching the tooth makes with the gear axis:
39. Galvanized steel plate is a plate coated with: a. Base helix angle
a. Aluminium b. Pressure angle
b. Tin c. Arc of recess
c. Zinc d. Arc of approach
d. Manganese 49. A kind of thread that is generally used:
40. Major component of bronze casting: a. UNEC
a. Copper b. UNC
b. Manganese c. UNF
c. Zinc d. UNEF
d. Lead 50. Which is not the generally used standard
41. Split pulley or pulley made of separate sections bolted a. ASTM
together at the rim, the maximum speed should be b. SAE
limited to about ___ % of the maximum speed of solid c. IPS
pulley. d. AISI
a. 65 to 75% 51. Alloy steel known for its resistance to corrosion, abrasion
b. 45 to 50% and wear that is usually ideal for mill grinding of ore in
c. 55 to 60% cement and concentrator application. It is usually
d. 80 to 90% combined with molybdenum to increase the depth
42. Fillet radius in machine parts is usually introduced to: hardening:
a. Improve the look of the parts. a. Manganese chromium steel
b. Reduce concentration of stress and extend the life b. Chromium molybdenum steel
of parts. c. Chrome-nickel-moly steel
c. To avoid obstruction. d. Manganese-moly steel
d. Necessary to lessen casting weights. 52. Commonly utilized/cheapest shaft material available in
43. Type of bolt commonly used in the construction that is the market with carbon content of 0.28 to 0.34%C.
threaded in both ends: a. SAE 4132
a. Stud bolts b. SAE 4320
b. Acme threaded bolts c. SAE 1030
c. Square threaded bolts d. SAE 4130
d. Hex bolts 53. In a pair of gears it is the plane that contains the two
44. Heating of the metal to a temperature above the critical axis, in single gear, it may be any plane containing the
temperature and then cooling slowly usually in the axis and the given point.
furnace to reduce the hardness and improve a. Axial plane
machinability is called: b. Pitch plane
a. Annealing c. Normal plane
b. Tempering d. All of the above
c. Normalizing 54. Accident prevention is:
d. Quenching a. An association of employers, organization and
45. A hydrostatic bearing is one which: individuals
a. The lube oil is supplied under pressure b. A job of a safety director

3
 c. The foreman’s responsibility just as much as a. SAE 1060
production b. SAE 1117
d. The responsibility of top management c. SAE 1030
55. Heating of metal above the critical temperature and then d. SAE 1020
cooling slowly usually in the furnace to reduce the 64. A circle bounding the bottoms of the teeth:
hardness and improve the machinability is called: a. Addendum circle
a. Normalizing b. Addendum cylinder
b. Annealing c. Pitch circle
c. Tempering d. Dedendum circle
d. Quenching 65. A unit deformation is called:
56. A type of welding whereby a wire or powder from the a. Torsion
nozzle of a spray gun is fused by a gas flame, arc or b. Strain
plasma jet and the molten particles are projected in a c. Stress
form of a spray by means of compressed air or gas. d. Shear
a. Electro-slug welding 66. An oil storage roof formed to approximately a spherical
b. Electro-beam welding surface, supported only at its periphery:
c. Plasma-arc welding a. Self-supporting umbrella roof
d. Metal spray welding b. Self-supporting cone roof
57. Killed steel is very much associated with: c. Self-supporting
a. Manganese d. Supporting cone roof
b. Sulphur 67. Test sometimes referred to as an upsetting test:
c. Phosphorous a. Bend
d. Silicon b. Flaring
58. The concave portion of the tooth profile where it joins c. Flange
the bottom of the tooth space. d. Crush
a. Fillet curve 68. An oil storage roof formed to approximately the surface
b. Fillet of a right cone, supported only at its periphery:
c. Undercut a. Self-supported umbrella roof
d. Plane b. Self-supported dome roof
59. The length of arc between the two sides of a gear tooth c. Supported cone roof
on the pitch circle: d. Self-supporting cone roof
a. Circular thickness 69. Have the same thermal and minimum film thickness
b. Axial plane limitation as sleeve bearing:
c. Helix angle a. Ball bearing
d. Chordal angle b. Roller bearing
60. It is hardening treatment whereby a cast metal is being c. Thrust bearing
heated to a very high temperature then suddenly d. Oil whip
subjected to rapid cooling to improve hardenability or 70. Test is designed primarily for application to electric-
wear resistance is called: welded tubing for detection of lack of penetration or
a. Normalizing overlaps from flash removal in the weld:
b. Tempering a. Buttweld
c. Quenching b. Paste
d. Annealing c. Lap weld
61. To reduce cost in the manufacturing of large worm gears d. Double butt weld
the materials to utilize: 71. Is a form of correction that develop on a highly localized
a. Alloyed aluminium rim with cast iron spider. areas on a metal surface:
b. Bronze rim with cast steel spider. a. Crevice
c. All of these b. Erosion
d. Cast iron rim with bronze spider. c. Galvanic
62. The differential of the shear equation is which one of the d. Apitting
following: 72. The deterioration of organic coating characterized as
a. Bending moment of the beam. completely:
b. Load of the beam. a. Chalking
c. Tensile strength of the beam. b. Rusting
d. Slope of the elastic curve. c. Checking
63. SAE steel that responds to heat treatment: d. Fritting

4
73. A gear is one which is 90 deg that is the pitch cone has 82. The corrosion of iron or iron-base-alloys:
become a plane: a. Rusting
a. Angular gear b. Crazing
b. Crown gear c. Chalking
c. Miter gear d. Fritting
d. Spiral bevel gear 83. The ratio of stress to the corresponding strain below the
74. A machine used for testing of very thin steel or surface proportional limit
layers: a. Stress-strain diagram
a. Charpy test b. Gage method
b. Izod test c. Modulus of elasticity
c. Description d. Tensile strength
d. Rockwell superficial 84. A fillet weld whose size is equal to the thickness of the
75. A cone formed by elements which are perpendicular to thinner joint member:
the elements of the pitch cone at the large end: a. Butt weld
a. Cone distance b. Tack weld
b. Back cone c. Lap weld
c. Root cone d. Full-fillet weld
d. Cone center 85. A bevel gear of the same size mounted on a shafts at 90
76. The temperature above which the alloy is liquid and will deg:
run: a. Crown gear
a. Melting point b. Spur gear
b. Flow point c. Angular gears
c. Pour point d. Miter gears
d. Liquidus 86. Gearing in which the motion or power that is transmitted
77. A weld made to hold the parts of a weldment in proper depends upon the friction between the surface in
alignment until the final welds are made: contact:
a. Butt weld a. Bevel cones
b. Tack weld b. Spur friction wheels
c. Fillet weld c. Evans friction cones
d. Full fillet weld d. Friction gearing
78. Is used to enable milling machine to take climb milling 87. Wheels are sometimes used for the transmission of high
cuts: power when an approximately constant velocity ratio is
a. Helical driving mechanism desired:
b. Spindle a. Bevel cones
c. Read out b. Friction gearing
d. Backlash eliminator c. Spur friction wheels
79. The total amount of permanent extension of the gage d. Evans friction cones
length measured after the specimen has fractured and is 88. A corrosion occurs within the or adjacent to a crevice
expressed as percentage increase of the original gage formed by contact with another piece of the same or
length: another metal:
a. Elongation a. Pitting
b. Strain b. Galvanic
c. Stress c. Erosion
d. Elastic limit d. Crevice
80. It refers to any layer or deposit of extraneous material on 89. A weld of approximately trtiangular cross-section that
a heat-transfer surface: join two surface at approximately right angles as in lap
a. Low line joint, tee-joint, corner joint:
b. Pressure drop a. Single welded lap joint
c. Fouling b. Fillet weld
d. Scaling c. Tack weld
81. Steels containing large amounts of mild nickel and d. Butt weld
chromium: 90. An alloy of tin, copper, antimony, or sometimes lead:
a. Carbon steel a. Gold
b. Stainless steel b. Babbitt
c. Alloy steel c. Aluminium
d. Cast steel d. Cast iron

5
91. A weld place in a groove between two abutting a. Cycloidal gears
members: b. Helical gears
a. Full-fillet weld c. Spur gears
b. Tack weld d. Toothed gears
c. Butt weld
d. Fillet weld - End -
92. A test for pipe used for coiling in sizes 2 inches:
a. Flaring
b. Crush
c. Flange
d. Bend
93. The follower reciprocates or oscillates in a plane parallel
to the axis of rotation:
a. Cam curves
b. Cylindrical cam
c. Tangential cam
d. Radial cam
94. Strength of a material that is of a stress intensity
determined by considering the maximum test load to act
over the original area of the test specimens:
a. Yield point
b. Ultimate strength
c. Breaking strength
d. Elastic limit
95. The follower reciprocates or oscillates in a plane
perpendicular to the axis of rotation of the cam:
a. Cam curves
b. Cylindrical cam
c. Tangential cam
d. Radial cam
96. Impacts of reciprocating motion to a single-point cutting
tool:
a. Dividing head
b. Slotting attachment
c. Circular pitch
d. Circular milling attachment
97. A joint between two overlapping members in which the
overlapped edge of one member is welded with a fillet
weld:
a. A single welded lap joint
b. Double-welded lap joint
c. A single-welded lap joint with backing
d. Tack weld
98. Weld-metal impact specimen shall be taken across the
weld face substantially parallel to and within:
a. ¾ in
b. 1/32 in
c. ¼ in
d. 1/16 in
99. The maximum stress which is reached during a tension
test:
a. Stress
b. Elasticity
c. Strain
d. Tensile strength
100. If gears cannot connect parallel shafts, they are called:

6
 lOMoARcPSD|30187372

Module 1 - Materials engineering

Bachelor of Science in Mechanical Engineering (University of Mindanao)

Studocu is not sponsored or endorsed by any college or university

Downloaded by Secrett hahahhaa (lract080@gmail.com)
 lOMoARcPSD|30187372

ELEMENTS IN MACHINE DESIGN (J.T.) – MODULE 1 10. The reciprocal of a diametral pitch or the ratio of pitch
diameter to the number of teeth.
1. The function of clutch in the machine tool is: a. Lead
a. Lowering of drive speed b. Module
b. Alignment of drive shaft c. Involute
c. To disconnect or connect at will the drive d. Clearance
d. To insure that two shafts line up at high speed 11. For an evenly distributed and uniform wear on each
2. Height of tooth above pitch circle or the radial distance meshing gear tooth, the ideal design practice is to
between pitch circle or the radial distance between pitch consider a _____________.
circle and top land of the tooth. a. Wear resistance alloy addition to tooth gear
a. Top root b. Heat treatment of gears
b. Addendum c. Hardening of each tooth
c. Land d. Hunting tooth addition
d. Hunting tooth 12. The changes in shape or geometry of the body due to
3. In involute teeth, the pressure angle is often defined as action of a force on it is called deformation or _____.
the angle between the line of action and the line tangent a. Shear stresses
to the pitch circle. It is termed as: b. Stresses
a. Helix angle c. Compressive stress
b. Angle of recess d. Strain
c. Angle of obliquity 13. Could be defined as simply push or pull.
d. Arc of action a. Work
4. In the selection of wire rope, regular lay means wires and b. Force
strands are arranged in the following manner: c. Inertia
a. Twisted in same direction d. Power
b. Twisted in any direction 14. The differential of the shear equation is which one of the
c. Twisted in opposite direction following:
d. Twisted in along direction a. Bending moment of the beam.
5. Also called eccentrically loaded bearing is ____________. b. Tensile strength of the beam.
a. Full bearing c. Slope of the elastic curfve
b. Offset bearing d. Load of the beam
c. Partial bearing 15. Gear used to transmit power at high velocity ratios
d. Fitted bearing between non-intersecting shafts that are usually but not
6. The property of material that related the lateral strain to necessarily at right angle.
longitudinal strain. a. Helical gear
a. Stress b. Bevel gear
b. Strain c. Worm gear
c. Poisson’s ratio d. Spiral gear
d. Endurance limit 16. The ratio of the moment of inertia of the cross section of
7. The angle included between the side of the thread the beam to the section modulus;
measured in an axial plane in a screw thread: a. Equal to the radius of gyration
a. Angle of thread. b. Equal to the area of the cross section
b. Angle between thread or 40o. c. Measure of a distance
c. Helix angle thread d. Dependent on the modulus of elasticity of beam
d. Half angle thread or 20o. measured
8. Flat leather belting not recommended for use in an 17. Opposite direction parallel forces:
excess of ______ fpm. a. Concurrent
a. 3600 b. Coplanar
b. 4800 c. Couple
c. 6000 d. Non-coplanar
d. All of these 18. Which of the following is the structural class of steel?
9. Ability to resist deformation under stress: a. High speed steel
a. Plasticity b. Tool and die
b. All of these c. Low carbon
c. Stiffness d. High carbon
d. Toughness 19. Continuous stretching under load even if the stress is
less than the yield point:

Downloaded by Secrett hahahhaa (lract080@gmail.com)

 lOMoARcPSD|30187372

a. Plasticity 29. The following pertain to joining of metals except:

b. Elasticity a. Welding
c. Creep b. Soldering
d. Ductility c. Casting
20. It is recommended for high speed application that the d. Brazing
minimum number of teeth in small sprocket should be: 30. Killed steel is always associated with:
a. 26 to 30 a. Silicon
b. 12 to 16 b. Manganese
c. 26 to 28 c. Phosphorous
d. 18 to 24 d. Sulphur
21. In gear design, the ratio of pitch diameter in inches to the 31. The usual ratio of water to soluble oil used as cutting
number of teeth: fluid:
a. Module a. 50% water to 50% oil
b. Diametral pitch b. 2 water to 1 oil
c. English module c. 3 water to 1 oil
d. Circular d. 4 to 80 water to 1 oil
22. The concave portion of the profile where it joins the 32. The good deoxidizer in steel melting:
bottom of the tooth space: a. Manganese
a. Fillet curve b. Silicon
b. Fillet radius c. All of these
c. Bottom curve d. Aluminium
d. Fillet 33. Good stabilizer in stainless steel:
23. The distance of the tooth which is equal to the a. Columbium
addendum and dedendum” b. Titanium
a. Full c. All of these
b. Whole depth d. Tantalium
c. Working depth 34. What is/are the common cutting fluids used for cutting
d. Dedendum metals?
24. Stresses that are independent of loads: a. All of these
a. Working stress b. Water with soda or borax
b. Operating stress c. Light mineral oil
c. Residual stress d. Soluble oil
d. Shear stress 35. It is considered semi-solid lubricant:
25. It is used to change rotary motion to reciprocation a. All of these
motion: b. Lube oil
a. Helical gear c. Graphite
b. Rack gear d. Grease
c. Worm gear 36. Metals are conducive because:
d. Spur gear a. The electrons are loosely bound to the nuclei and
26. It is recommended not to have a direct drive and therefore mobile
sprockets if the ratio of their teeth exceeds ______, use b. Having a characteristics metallic cluster
two or more step combination. c. They are on the left side of the periodic table.
a. 10 times d. They have extra electrons as exhibited by normally
b. 8 times possible balance state.
c. 5 times 37. The purpose of these parts in application are to have
d. 6 times better bearings to seal the guard against marring, etc.
27. The motion of an object diminished/decreased speed: a. Bearing journal
a. Deceleration b. Metallic seal
b. All of the above c. Washer
c. Retarded motion d. Shaft seal
d. Negative impulse 38. The yield strength of a regular yellow brass (65 to 70%
28. Most popular soldering material: Cu, 30 to 35% Zn) can be increased/improved by:
a. 10/80 a. Cold working
b. 45/55 b. Tempering
c. 50/50 c. Chill casting
d. 60/40 d. Heat treatment

Downloaded by Secrett hahahhaa (lract080@gmail.com)

 lOMoARcPSD|30187372

39. Used in as cast condition steel casting with carbon shaft/countershaft, etc. With these allowable stresses
content less than __________ % C. what will be simplified formula to determine transmitted
a. 0.26 HP, diameter of the shaft or even the rpm (N)?
b. 0.15 to 0.18 a. HP = D3N/80
c. 0.20 b. HP = D3N/53.5
d. 0.25 c. All of these
40. Liners normally are made of: d. HP = D3N/38
a. Cast iron 49. Machine tool used for laying straight lines on metal
b. Alloyed bronze surfaces made of sharp tool steel is called:
c. Alloyed steel a. Plain scriber
d. Alloyed aluminium b. A trammel
41. Endurance strength is nearly proportional to the ultimate c. Hermaphrodite
strength but not with ________. d. Divider
a. Yield strength 50. It is the difference of addendum and dedendum which is
b. Design stress equivalent to the whole depth less working depth.
c. Shear stress a. Fillet space
d. All of the above b. Fillet radius
42. A furnace used in melting non-ferrous metals: c. Clearance
a. Cupola furnace d. Backlash
b. Crucible furnace 51. A lathe machine threading mechanism:
c. Induction furnace a. Reverse gear and lever
d. Normalizing furnace b. Spindle gear
43. Alloy that improves strength of steel at high temperature c. All of these
application: d. Change stud gear
a. Tungsten 52. Separate forces which can be so combined are called:
b. Molybdenum a. Non-concurrent forces
c. All of these b. Couple
d. Chromium c. Combined forces
44. In a gear design, the total work load must be equally d. Concurrent forces
shared by its arms. Rim must be rigid to support these 53. That property of matter which causes it to resist any
arms and also the bead is recommended for its stiffening change in its motion or state of rest:
value. The assumption in the detailed design of rim a. Brake
thickness and depth of bead is ____ circular pitch. b. Friction
a. 0.65 c. Inertia
b. 0.50 d. Impulse
c. 0.56 54. Negative allowance is also called:
d. 0.44 a. Interference of metal
45. Tooth width measured along the chord at the pitch circle: b. Clearance
a. Flank c. Advance
b. Face width d. Allowance of positive fit
c. Width of space 55. Which of the following is not used to resemble the shape
d. Chordal thickness of tool bit?
46. The best instrument for measuring a thousand of an inch: a. Round nose
a. Micrometer b. Center cut
b. Tachometer c. Square nose
c. Calliper d. Thread cutting
d. Pyrometer 56. A kind of thread in which the width of the thread is
47. All are associated with standard material specification, approximately equal to the depth of the thread and the
EXCEPT: space between threads are approximately equal.
a. American Iron and Steel Institute a. Square thread
b. Society of Automotive Engineers b. Acme thread
c. Southeast Asia Iron and Steel Institute c. Buttress thread
d. American Society for Testing Materials d. Whitworth thread
48. The allowable stresses that are generally used in practice 57. A shaft is to be checked for concentricity. A suitable
are 4 ksi for main power transmitting shaft, 6 ksi for method of performing the check is:
lineshaft carrying pulleys and 8.5 ksi for small, short a. Bench centers and dial indicator

Downloaded by Secrett hahahhaa (lract080@gmail.com)

 lOMoARcPSD|30187372

b. Bench bottom and calliper 67. When two elastic bodies collide, which of the following
c. Bench top and tachometer laws can be used to solve for the resulting velocity?
d. Bench vise and planer a. Dalton’s law
58. For moderate speed of mating gears, the ideal ratio of b. Avogadro
contact is: c. Conservation of energy
a. 1.25 – 4 d. Conservation of momentum and conservation of
b. 1.2 – 1.45 energy
c. 1.0 – 1.3 68. The ability of a metal to be deformed considerably
d. 1.35 – 1.45 without rupture is called:
59. Nominal diameter of bolts is the: a. Plasticity
a. Major diameter b. All of these
b. Minor diameter c. Ductility
c. Mean diameter d. Malleability
d. Average diameter 69. Permanent deformation or strain may occur without
60. A lathe with multiple cutting stations: fracture:
a. Turret lathe a. Malleability
b. Lathe machine b. Elasticity
c. Milling machine c. Ductility
d. Grinding machine d. Plasticity
61. Major and minor diameter are commonly used in: 70. It is the science of motion that can be solved in terms of
a. Screw threads scalar or vector algebra.
b. Bolts a. Kinematics
c. Gear b. Curvilinear translation
d. All of these c. Projectiles
62. The distance a helical gear or worm would thread along d. Acceleration
its axis in one revolution if it were free to move axially is 71. A system of forces in space is in equilibrium. If two equal
called: and opposite collinear forces are added, which of the
a. Length of action following if any is true?
b. Line of action a. Equilibrium is destroyed
c. Land b. Equilibrium is maintained
d. Lead c. None of these is true
63. Length of contact between two mating parts in a screw d. An unbalance of moment exit
and nut threads measured axially is called: 72. Metal that assists lubrication or lubricant itself:
a. Arc of contact a. Zinc
b. Depth of engagement b. Antimony
c. Length of engagement c. Babbitt
d. Axis of contact d. Lead
64. If the velocity of a mass is the same all the time during 73. A mechanism which is usually do the indexing in a
which motion takes place is called: machine tool:
a. Deceleration a. Universal chuck
b. Uniform motion b. Slotter
c. Acceleration c. Dividing head
d. None of these d. Indexing
65. Device used to measure accurately speed: 74. It equalizes the energy exerted and the work done thus
a. Speedometer preventing excessive or sudden changes of speed.
b. Dial indicator a. Flywheel
c. Tachometer b. Balance wheel
d. Dial gauge c. All o these
66. When the hole is smaller than the shaft, it will take d. Flywheel pulley
pressure to put the parts together. The allowance is said 75. The smallest area at the point of rupture of a tensile
to be negative and is termed as: specimen divided by the original area is called:
a. Negative tolerance a. Percentage elongation
b. Negative allowance b. Isod test
c. Negative fits c. Charpy test
d. Interference of metal d. Percentage reduction of area

Downloaded by Secrett hahahhaa (lract080@gmail.com)

 lOMoARcPSD|30187372

76. The product of the resultant of all forces acting on a body 86. In shear pin or breaking pin design, we may use the data
and the time that the resultant acts: experienced by link-belt for 1/8 inch to 1 pin and the
a. Angular impulse breaking stress is ____ ksi.
b. Angular momentum a. 40
c. Linear impulse b. 55
d. Linear momentum c. 50
77. Which of the following is not a structural class of steel? d. 48
a. Low carbon steel 87. Deals only with the motion of bodies without reference
b. Tool and die steel to the forces that causes them:
c. High chrome alloy steel a. Dynamics
d. High strength low alloy steel b. Kinetics
78. Poisson’s ratio is the ratio of: c. Statics
a. Shear strain to compressive strain d. Kinematics
b. Elastic limit to compressive strain 88. The property that characterizes a material ability to be
c. Lateral strain to longitudinal limit drawn into a wire.
d. Elastic limit to proportional limit a. Ductility
79. All are associated with the grade of steel, EXCEPT: b. Thermal conductivity
a. SAE 43XX c. Tensile strength
b. SAE 13XX d. Endurance limit
c. SAE 10XX 89. The three-moment equation may be used to analyze:
d. SAE 74XX a. Tapered column
80. The property of material which relates the lateral strain b. Continuous beam
to the longitudinal strain: c. Composite beam
a. Stress d. Axially end loaded beam
b. Strain 90. What is the common shop practice to prevent solder
c. Poisson’s ratio from running away from its surface to be joined?
d. Strength a. All of these
81. The maximum stress to which a material may be b. Surround the work with clay
subjected before failure occurs: c. Introduce around the work rolled with cloth
a. Ultimate strength d. Put asbestos sheeting around the work
b. Ultimate stress 91. Non-ferrous filler metal is melted into grooves or as fillet
c. Endurance limit on the mother metal; the base metal is not melted. This
d. Tensile stress commonly used for joining iron based machine parts or
82. Hypoid gear is a special type of gear llike: in repair works of some materials. It is called:
a. Worm gear a. Spot welding
b. Spur gear b. Braze welding
c. Herringbone gear c. Brazing
d. Bevel gear d. Gas Welding
83. Considered a maximum safe center distance of sprockets 92. It is advised that in rubber belts application/mounting, it
should be _____ pitches. Vey long center distance cause should have an initial tension of ________ inch/ply.
catenary tension in the chain. a. 18 to 24
a. 70 b. 15 to 20
b. 80 c. 12 to 15
c. 60 d. 10
d. 50 93. Normal stress relieving temperature for cast steel:
84. Cold working of steel plates makes the metal: a. 200 to 350 F
a. Tougher b. 400 to 500 F
b. More ductile c. 300 to 400 F
c. Harder d. 450 to 550 F
d. More malleable 94. Most effective alloying element for reducing brittleness
85. Recommended best cutting angle of drill for work on of steel at very low temperature:
steel or cast iron is ______ degrees. a. Manganese
a. 48 b. Molybdenum
b. 63 c. Silicon
c. 59 d. Nickel
d. 50

Downloaded by Secrett hahahhaa (lract080@gmail.com)

 lOMoARcPSD|30187372

95. Statement that a given body is in static equilibrium

means that the body cannot:
a. Have any type of motion
b. Be acted upon by more than one force
c. Undergo any displacement
d. Have any acceleration
96. Ordinary steel begins to lose strength and elasticity
significantly at about _________ F.
a. 900 – 1000
b. 800 – 900
c. 750 – 850
d. 600 – 700
97. Clearance to a new boiler installation to the existing or
old plant building should follow a minimum clearance of
__________ between top of the boiler proper and the
ceiling as stated in the PSME Code.
a. 2000 mm (max)
b. 1000 mm (max)
c. 2130 mm (max)
d. 2150 mm (max)
98. For a high corrosion resistant stainless steel, what
minimum chromium content is required?
a. 8%
b. 4.3%
c. 1.1%
d. 5.8%
99. V-belts operate efficiently at speed of about:
a. 4500
b. 4400
c. 4200
d. 3600
100. What type of gear is used for high speed operation?
a. Helical
b. Spur
c. Bevel
d. Worm
- End -

Downloaded by Secrett hahahhaa (lract080@gmail.com)